Document:

<PAGE>   1
                                                                   EXHIBIT 10.13

                                [ILLUMINET LOGO]

                            MASTER SERVICE AGREEMENT

<PAGE>   2

                            MASTER SERVICE AGREEMENT

                                TABLE OF CONTENTS

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
SECTION        TITLE                                  PAGE
-------        -----                                  ----
<S>            <C>                                    <C>
I              Scope and Structure                      2
II             Compensation                             3
III            Proprietary Information                  3
IV             Resolution of Disputes                   4
V              Successors and Assigns                   5
VI             Independent Contractors                  6
VII            Indemnification                          6
VIII           Limitation of Liability                  7
IX             Year 2000 Compliance                     7
X              Compliance With Laws                     7
XI             Force Majeure                            8
XII            Amendments and Waivers                   8
XIII           Notices                                  9
XIV            Governing Law                            9
XV             Severability                             9
XVI            No Third Party Beneficiaries             9
XVII           Integration                              9
XVIII          Survival                                 9
XIX            Attorneys' Fees and Costs               10
XX             Headings                                10
XXI            Term                                    10
XXII           Execution In Counterparts               10
XXIII          Incorporation by Reference              11
Signatures                                             11
Attachment A   Participating Companies
</TABLE>

                                                                    Page 1 of 11
<PAGE>   3

      THIS MASTER SERVICE AGREEMENT, made and executed to be effective the day
and year set forth on the signature page of this Agreement, by and between
ILLUMINET, INC., a Delaware corporation ("ILLUMINET"), and the entities
identified on Attachment A annexed hereto, (individually referred to as
"Company" and collectively as "Companies").

W I T N E S S E T H:

        WHEREAS, ILLUMINET is a corporation which was formed by
telecommunications companies situated throughout the United States of America
and for several years has been providing database management, billing services,
general administrative services, revenue administration services, and other
services beneficial to the telecommunications industry; and

        WHEREAS, ILLUMINET operates a signaling network based on Signaling
System 7 ("SS7") protocol to effect the transport of data from and to the
switches of local exchange carriers and other services ("SIGNET 7(R)
Services"); and

        WHEREAS, the Company provides a variety of telecommunications services
to its subscribers and wishes to provide new and improved services utilizing
SIGNET 7(R) Services; and

        WHEREAS, in connection with the offering of SIGNET 7(R) Services,
ILLUMINET shall maintain an Independent Line Information Database ("Independent
LIDB") which will serve as the mechanism for the storage of database information
of all participants; and

        WHEREAS, the Company may participate in SIGNET 7(R) Services without
first upgrading its switch center to SS7 protocol, by providing line information
data to the Independent LIDB.

        NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the covenants and undertakings
herein contained and the mutual benefits to be derived herefrom, the adequacy of
which consideration is hereby acknowledged, ILLUMINET and the Company agree as
follows:

                         SECTION I: SCOPE AND STRUCTURE

        A. This Master Service Agreement specifies the general terms and
conditions pursuant to which ILLUMINET will perform certain services for the
Company. Additional terms and conditions pursuant to which the parties may
perform specific services or types of services will be set forth in "Modules"
that will be made and entered into by and between the parties, and upon the
execution of each such Module, shall be attached to and incorporated herein to
this Master Service Agreement and be subject to the terms and conditions of this
Master Service Agreement. Unless otherwise specified herein or implicit in the
context hereof, the term "Master Service Agreement" used herein shall include
any and all Modules hereto in effect from time to time.

                                                                    Page 2 of 11
<PAGE>   4

      B. Each Module incorporated in this Master Service Agreement shall contain
its own expiration and termination provisions and shall expire or terminate
individually in accordance with such provisions. This Master Service Agreement
shall remain in full force and effect in accordance with its terms from its
effective date until it expires or is terminated in accordance with the
provisions hereof, even if no Modules are in effect at any given time.

      C. In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions of
this Master Service Agreement (excluding Modules) and any individual Module of
this Master Service Agreement, the provisions of the Module shall control.

      D. ILLUMINET warrants that all services provided pursuant to this Master
Services Agreement, including all Modules hereunder, shall operate in
substantial accordance with ILLUMINET's corresponding User Guides, provided that
Company uses such services in substantial accordance with such User Guides.

                      SECTION II:   COMPENSATION

      The parties agree that the compensation to be paid by either party to the
other for services performed pursuant to this Master Service Agreement shall be
as specified in the applicable Module of this Master Service Agreement. Each
party agrees to pay the other party the compensation stated in each executed
Module, in accordance with all of the terms and conditions of such Module and
this Master Service Agreement. All payments made under this Master Service
Agreement shall be made in U.S. currency.

                SECTION III:   PROPRIETARY INFORMATION

      A. All information or other data relating to either party's business
activities which is disclosed by said party to the other party in connection
with this Master Service Agreement and/or any Module hereto, and designated as
proprietary or confidential information (hereinafter referred to as "Proprietary
Information") will be safeguarded and kept confidential by the other party to
the same extent that the other party protects its own proprietary and
confidential information, and shall be deemed the property of the disclosing
party. Such Proprietary Information in tangible form, and all reproductions
thereof, shall be returned to the disclosing party upon its request. The
receiving party shall not disclose or release any such Proprietary Information
without written authority from the disclosing party, to anyone other than an
employee, contractor, agent, attorney or affiliated company having a need for
such Proprietary Information in furtherance of the performance of services. The
receiving party shall require any

                                                                    Page 3 of 11
<PAGE>   5

person not its employee to whom it discloses or releases any such Proprietary
Information of the other party to sign an agreement to protect the
confidentiality of such Proprietary Information as provided in this Agreement,
prior to such disclosure or release.

        B. Upon the expiration or termination of this Master Service Agreement,
each party, at the request of the other party, shall promptly, but in any event
within thirty (30) days following the date of such request, return any and all
copies of Proprietary Information in tangible form, that such party received
from the other party and is still in its possession, custody, or control. In
addition, each party shall delete or erase all Proprietary Information from its
computer systems within the same time period and certify such compliance to the
other party in writing, signed by an officer of the certifying party. In the
event of the expiration or termination of a Module hereto, each party shall
return or eliminate any and all Proprietary Information in its possession,
custody, or control which pertains solely to such Module or the contract of
services covered by such Module, in the same manner and within the same time
period as provided above in this paragraph.

        C. The provisions of this Section III shall survive the termination or
expiration of this Master Service Agreement and any Module hereto for a period
of three (3) years unless otherwise agreed in writing by both parties.

        D. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Section III, neither
party hereto shall be required to return or to delete or erase from its computer
systems, any Proprietary Information or portion thereof which such party has
received pursuant to this Agreement and is required to retain among its records
by law or applicable regulations. In the event either party hereto is required
by law or regulation to retain Proprietary Information disclosed to it which the
other party has requested to be returned, the party so retaining the Proprietary
Information shall advise the disclosing party of that fact and of the law or
regulation requiring such retention, and all such retained Proprietary
Information shall continue to be maintained confidential as provided in this
Agreement and in the applicable provisions hereof which shall survive the
termination or expiration of this Agreement.

                       SECTION IV: RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES

        A. INFORMAL RESOLUTION. The parties agree that they shall attempt to
resolve any dispute regarding any right, obligation, duty, or liability arising
out of the provisions of this Master Service Agreement or any Module through
informal discussions or negotiations prior to resorting to formal dispute
resolution procedures contained in Subsection B below. If, at any

                                                                    Page 4 of 11
<PAGE>   6

time following the commencement of any such discussions or negotiations, either
party determines such discussions or negotiations are not likely to result in a
reasonable resolution of the dispute, it may send to the other party a written
statement of the issues or problems being discussed or negotiated. If the
dispute has not been resolved within sixty (60) days after the mailing of the
said statement of issues, either party shall have the right to serve a written
demand for arbitration upon the other and thereby commence binding arbitration
in accordance with the provisions set forth below. The mailing of the statement
of issues and the passage of sixty (60) days from the date of the mailing of
such statement of issues shall be conditions precedent to the commencement of
any arbitration proceedings hereunder.

        B. BINDING ARBITRATION. Within five (5) working days of delivery of a
demand, each party shall designate an arbitrator. The two designated arbitrators
shall then select a third arbitrator to complete the full arbitration panel
within twenty (20) working days, or as otherwise agreed.

              The arbitration panel shall commence hearing within sixty (60)
days of the selection of the panel. The scope of document production and the
enforcement of document requests may be ordered by the arbitrators to the extent
economical and reasonable. All discovery requests shall be subject to the
proprietary rights of the parties, and the arbitrators shall adopt procedures to
protect such rights. Except where contrary to the provisions set forth in this
Master Service Agreement, the rules of the American Arbitration Association
("AAA") shall be applied, provided, however, that the arbitration need not be
conducted under the auspices of the AAA, in which event the fee schedule of the
AAA shall not apply.

              All costs of arbitration and any award of attorney's fees shall be
awarded pursuant to the provisions of Section XIX of this Master Service
Agreement.

              Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the parties shall continue to
provide service under any Module, honor all commitments under this Master
Service Agreement, and continue to make payments in accordance with this Master
Service Agreement during the course of dispute resolution pursuant to the
provisions of this Section.

                        SECTION V: SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

        This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the
parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns; provided, however,
this Agreement shall not be assigned by either party hereto without the prior
written consent of the other party hereto, which consent shall not be
unreasonably withheld, except as provided in the next succeeding sentence. If
another corporation

                                                                    Page 5 of 11
<PAGE>   7

which is a parent, a wholly-owned or controlled subsidiary of a parent ("Sister
Company") or a wholly-owned or controlled subsidiary of one of the parties
hereto shall succeed to some or all of the business of the corporation which is
a party hereto, such party hereto may assign this Agreement to such parent,
subsidiary or Sister Company, without the consent of the other party, if such
parent, subsidiary or Sister Company shall expressly undertake in writing the
performance of the obligation and duties of the party hereto which it is
succeeding pursuant to such assignment. Notwithstanding any other provision in
this Agreement, Company may assign this Agreement, in whole or in part, to any
entity acquiring substantially all of the stock or assets of Company.

                       SECTION VI: INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS

        Each party agrees that it shall perform its duties, obligations, and
services hereunder as an independent contractor and not as the employee or
servant of the other party. Except as expressly provided in any Module, neither
party nor any personnel employed or furnished by such party shall be deemed the
agent, employee, or servant of the other party or be entitled to any benefits
available under any plans for such other party's employees. Each party has and
hereby retains the right to exercise full control and supervision over the
performance of its obligations under this Master Service Agreement and retains
full control over the employment, supervision, direction, compensation, and
termination of all of its employees assisting in the performance of such
obligations. Each party shall be solely responsible for all matters relating to
the compensation of its respective employees, including payment of all
employment taxes and withholdings due in respect of its employees. Each party
shall be responsible for its acts and those of its employees during the
performance of such party's duties and obligations hereunder.

                          SECTION VII: INDEMNIFICATION

        The indemnification provisions of this Section shall apply to all
matters arising under this Master Service Agreement except that indemnification
or limitation of liability or related provisions contained in any Module to this
Master Service Agreement shall be controlling and take precedence over this
Section.

        To the extent not prohibited by law, each party shall indemnify the
other and hold it harmless against any loss, cost, claim, injury, or liability
relating to or arising out of negligence or willful misconduct by the
indemnifying party or its agents or contractors in connection with any services
or duties under this Master Service Agreement.

                                                                    Page 6 of 11
<PAGE>   8

        The indemnifying party under this Section agrees to defend any suit
brought against the other party for any such loss, cost, claim, injury, or
liability. Each party agrees to notify the other party promptly, in writing, of
any written claims, lawsuits, or demands for which the other party is
responsible under this Section and to cooperate in every reasonable way to
facilitate defense or settlement of claims. The indemnifying party shall not be
liable under this Section for settlement by the indemnified party of any claim,
lawsuit, or demand if the indemnifying party has not approved the settlement in
advance unless the indemnifying party has had the defense of the claim, lawsuit,
or demand tendered to it in writing and has failed to assume such defense.

        No claims under this Section, or claims with respect to charges under
this Master Service Agreement or adjustments to such charges, or any other
claims with respect to this Master Service Agreement, may be made more than two
(2) years (or such greater time as may be set by law) after the date of the
event that gave rise to the claim; provided, however, that claims for indemnity
under this Section may be made within two (2) years (or such greater time as may
be set by law) of the accrual of the cause of action for indemnity. The mailing
of a statement of issues as provided in Section IV.A hereinabove shall
constitute a claim with respect to this Master Service Agreement for the
purposes of satisfying the claims limitation period requirements of this Section
VII.

                      SECTION VIII: LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

        In no event shall either party be liable to the other party for
incidental, special, or consequential damages including but not limited to lost
profits.

                        SECTION IX: YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE

        ILLUMINET represents and warrants that the software, hardware and
equipment that it uses to provide services under this Master Service Agreement
will record, store, process, and present calendar dates falling on or after
January 1, 2000, in the same manner, and with the same functionality, as
performed on or before December 31, 1999.

                         SECTION X: COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS

      Each party shall perform all of its obligations and undertakings set forth
in this Master Service Agreement in compliance with all applicable laws, orders,
and regulations specifically including, without limitation, all applicable laws,
orders, and regulations prohibiting

                                                                    Page 7 of 11
<PAGE>   9

discrimination against any employee or applicant for employment by
reason of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age, or disability.

        In the event of any conflict between any provision of this Master
Service Agreement and any applicable law, order or regulation (including,
without limitation, any order, rule or regulation of any regulatory agency
having jurisdiction over the Company which may effect the matters covered by
this Master Service Agreement), the parties agree to negotiate in good faith,
such reasonable modification(s) as may be required to resolve such conflict.

                            SECTION XI: FORCE MAJEURE

        Neither party shall be held liable for any delay or failure of
performance of any part of this Master Service Agreement arising out of or
resulting from any cause beyond its control and without its fault or negligence,
including, without limitation, acts of God, acts or omissions of civil or
military authority, government regulations, embargoes, epidemics, war, terrorist
acts, riots, civil commotion or civil uprisings, insurrections, fires,
explosions, nuclear accidents, strikes, lockouts, power blackouts, earthquakes,
floods, hurricanes, tornados, volcanic actions, or other similar causes beyond
its control. If such delay or failure occurs, the non-delaying party may elect
to (a) terminate this Master Service Agreement or any Module thereof for
services not already received, if such Force Majeure condition results in a
delay or failure to perform which continues for more than thirty (30) days; or
(b) suspend such services for the duration of the delaying cause, obtain
elsewhere the services to be bought or sold hereunder, and resume performance
under this Master Service Agreement once the delaying cause ceases. Unless
written notice is given within thirty (30) days after such non-delaying party is
apprised of the delay or failure, (b) shall be deemed selected.

                       SECTION XII: AMENDMENTS AND WAIVERS

        This Master Service Agreement may be amended only by a written agreement
signed by both parties. No course of dealing or failure of either party to
enforce any provision of this Master Service Agreement shall be construed as a
waiver of such provision or of any other provision of this Master Service
Agreement. The amendment of any provision of this Master Service Agreement shall
not constitute an amendment or modification of any other part of this Master
Service Agreement unless expressly stated in such written agreement.

                                                                    Page 8 of 11
<PAGE>   10

                              SECTION XIII: NOTICES

        All written notices required under this Master Service Agreement shall
be given by telephonic facsimile transmission (FAX) or certified mail, return
receipt requested, addressed to such designated representative and address as
either party may from time to time provide by written notice to the other party,
and unless and until any further designation is made, such representative and
address for each party shall be as set forth on the signature page hereof.

                           SECTION XIV: GOVERNING LAW

        This Master Service Agreement shall be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of Washington.

                            SECTION XV: SEVERABILITY

        In the event any provision of this Master Service Agreement shall be
held invalid or unenforceable by any Court of competent jurisdiction and if such
invalidity or unenforceability shall materially impair achieving the purpose and
intent of this Master Service Agreement, then this entire Master Service
Agreement shall be invalid and unenforceable. Otherwise, this Master Service
Agreement shall be construed as if not containing the particular provision or
provisions hereof held to be invalid or unenforceable, and the rights and
obligations of the parties shall be construed and enforced accordingly.

                    SECTION XVI: NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES

        This Master Service Agreement shall not be construed to provide any
third party with any remedy, claim, right of action, or other right.

                            SECTION XVII: INTEGRATION

        This Master Service Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between
the parties concerning the subject matter hereof. All representations,
statements, negotiations, understandings, proposals, and undertakings, whether
oral or in writing, with respect to the subject matter hereof are superseded and
replaced by this Master Service Agreement.

                             SECTION XVIII: SURVIVAL

        Any liability or obligation of either party to the other for acts or
omissions prior to the expiration or termination of this Master Service
Agreement or any part hereof, including, without

                                                                    Page 9 of 11
<PAGE>   11

limitation, either party's obligation to make payment for services rendered
prior to the effective date of such expiration or termination, and the
obligations of each party regarding the protection of Proprietary Information
shall survive the expiration or termination of this Master Service Agreement or
any part hereof.

                     SECTION XIX: ATTORNEYS' FEES AND COSTS

        In the event binding arbitration is commenced by either party to enforce
any covenant or undertaking of this Master Service Agreement, the prevailing
party in such arbitration shall be entitled to recover all reasonable costs and
expenses incurred in connection with such arbitration, including, without
limitation, costs of arbitration and a reasonable attorney's fee, and all such
sums shall be included in any ruling entered in said arbitration.

                              SECTION XX: HEADINGS

        The headings in this Master Service Agreement have been inserted for
convenience only and are not to be considered a part hereof and shall in no way
be construed to define or limit any of the terms herein or affect the meaning or
interpretation of any of the provisions of this Master Service Agreement.

                                SECTION XXI: TERM

        This Master Service Agreement shall continue in full force and effect
from the Effective Date until terminated by either party pursuant to written
notice delivered by the terminating party to the other party, not less than
ninety (90) days prior to the intended termination date. Notwithstanding the
foregoing sentence, this Master Service Agreement shall continue in full force
and effect for so long as any Module hereto is in effect, and this Master
Service Agreement may not be terminated pursuant to the foregoing sentence
unless any Module in effect at a given time, may, by its terms, also be
terminated at such time.

                     SECTION XXII: EXECUTION IN COUNTERPARTS

        This Master Service Agreement or any part hereof may be executed in any
number of counterparts, each of which shall be an original, but such
counterparts shall together constitute but one and the same instrument.

                                                                   Page 10 of 11
<PAGE>   12

                    SECTION XXIII: INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

        Attachment A annexed hereto is, respectively by each and every reference
thereto incorporated herein as though fully set forth herein.

                                      # # #

        IN WITNESS WHEREOF, each of the parties hereto has made and caused this
Master Service Agreement, to be duly executed for it and on its behalf by its
authorized representative, to be effective the date of the last signature below
(the "Effective Date").

        Note: The signatories to this Agreement hereby warrant and represent
that they have the authority to execute this Agreement on behalf of the entity
or entities for which they sign.

                                       ILLUMINET, INC.

March 29,1999                          By: /s/ RICHARD R. WOLF
-----------------------------------       ------------------------------------
Date Signed                            Richard R. Wolf
                                       Director, Legal and Regulatory Affairs

                                       ILLUMINET ADDRESS:
                                       Illuminet, Inc.
                                       4501 Intelco Loop SE
                                       Lacey, WA  98503

                                                                     "ILLUMINET"

                                       EACH COMPANY IDENTIFIED ON
                                       ATTACHMENT "A" ATTACHED HERETO

3/25/99                                By: /s/ MICHAEL BLACK
-----------------------------------       ------------------------------------
Date Signed                            Its Authorized Representative

                                       Michael Black
                                       ---------------------------------------
                                       Printed Name of Signatory

                                       Senior VP
                                       ---------------------------------------
                                       Title of Signatory

                                                                       "COMPANY"

                                                                   Page 11 of 11
<PAGE>   13

                                  ATTACHMENT A
                                       TO
                            MASTER SERVICE AGREEMENT

                             PARTICIPATING COMPANIES

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                        (ILLUMINET
                                         COMPLETES)
COMPLETE LEGAL NAME AND                  EFFECTIVE        STATE OF         LOCATED IN
ADDRESS OF PARTICIPATING COMPANY           DATE         INCORPORATION       (STATE)              OCN
--------------------------------           ----         -------------       -------              ---
<S>                                     <C>             <C>                <C>                  <C>
Advanced Tel Com Group, Inc.                              Delaware         California           4268
100 Stony Point Rd. Suite 130                                              applies to
Santa Rosa, CA 95401                                                       all States

Advanced Tel Com Group, Inc.                              Delaware         California           4296
100 Stony Point Rd. Suite 130                                                (only)
Santa Rosa, CA 95401

Advanced Tel Com Group, Inc.                              Delaware           Oregon             4271
100 Stony Point Rd. Suite 130                                                (only)
Santa Rosa, CA 95401

Advanced Tel Com Group, Inc.                              Delaware         Washington           4272
100 Stony Point Rd. Suite 130                                                (only)
Santa Rosa, CA 95401
</TABLE>

                                                                     Page 1 of 1<PAGE>   1
                                                                   EXHIBIT 10.14

                                 EXECUTION COPY

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT

                                     BETWEEN

                           ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP INC.

                                       AND

                            LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                         CONTRACT NUMBER LNM99NMYK09ATG

The mailing, delivery or negotiation of this Agreement by either party or its
agent or attorney shall not be deemed an offer by such party to enter into any
transaction or to enter into any other relationship, whether on the terms
contained herein or on any other terms. This Agreement shall not be binding upon
either party, nor shall such party have any obligations or liabilities or the
other party any rights with respect thereto, or with respect to the transactions
contemplated by the Agreement, unless and until the Agreement has been approved
by the executive officers and/or Board of Directors of such party and such party
has executed and delivered this Agreement. Until such execution and delivery of
this Agreement by a party, such party may terminate all negotiation and
discussion of the subject matter hereof, without cause and for any reason,
without recourse or liability.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   2

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
EXHIBITS
--------
<S>            <C>
     A         Octel Products

     B         Octel Services

     C         SAS Products, Pricing, & Support

     D         CS Support Schedule - Billdats

     E         Planning & Program Management

     F         Checkmate Direct & Indirect

     G         SOW - NRC

     H         Kenan (To Be Provided)

     I         Cabernet (To Be Provided)

     J         Co-Marketing Program

     K         BOA

     L         PMO

     M         IMO

     N         FMO (To Be Provided)
</TABLE>

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -i-
<PAGE>   3

                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT

This General Supply Agreement (Contract Number LNM99NMYK09ATG and referred to as
"Agreement") is made and entered into on July 28, 1999 (the "Effective Date"),by
and between Lucent Technologies Inc. ("Seller"), a Delaware corporation
operating through its Global Services Provider group, with offices located at
600 Mountain Avenue, Murray Hill, New Jersey 07974, and Advanced TelCom Group
Inc., a Delaware corporation with offices located at 100 Stony Point Road, Suite
130, Santa Rosa, California 95401 (hereinafter "Customer").

WHEREAS, Seller has expertise and experience in designing, recommending,
configuring, building, supplying, installing, and servicing telecommunications
network systems;

WHEREAS, Customer desires to provide facilities-based commercial
telecommunications services;

WHEREAS, Seller desires to provide to Customer, and Customer desires to procure
from Seller, products, licensed materials and services for the purposes of
building and maintaining a telecommunications Network (as defined below) based
on the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement and the terms,
conditions, and Specifications set forth in the Attachments to this Agreement.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual promises herein contained and
other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which is
hereby acknowledged, the parties intending to be lawfully bound agree as
follows:

                              ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS

DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this Agreement, the following definitions will apply:

a)  "Acceptance Test" means the testing which may be performed jointly by Seller
    and Customer during the Acceptance Test Period to determine that the
    Deliverables or Network Elements or other portion of the Network has been
    installed in accordance with the mutually agreed upon Acceptance Test plan
    in the applicable Attachment or, if none is specified, in accordance with
    Seller's standard acceptance testing procedures.

b)  "Acceptance Test Period" means the applicable period set forth in days as
    specified in Attachments to this Agreement. Where not specified, the
    Acceptance Test Period shall be thirty (30) days after issuance of the
    Notice of Completion if Deliverables or Network Elements are installed by
    Seller, or, if not installed or implemented by Seller, within thirty (30)
    days after delivery.

c)  "Affiliate" means any United States entity, which controls, is controlled
    by, or is under common control with Customer. "Control" means (i) in the
    case of corporate entities, direct or indirect beneficial ownership of more
    than fifty percent (50%) of the stock or shares entitled to vote for the
    election of the board of directors or other governing body of the entity;
    and (ii) in the case of non-corporate entities, a direct or indirect
    beneficial equity interest of more than fifty percent (50%) of the entity;
    or, in either case, otherwise having the right to direct and control the
    operations of such entity.

d)  "Agreement" means this General Supply Agreement and all Attachments
    incorporated by reference and attachment.

e)  "Application Software" means those general purpose Licensed Materials used
    for provisioning, Integration, Implementation and continuing support
    maintenance of the Network, as part of Seller licensed Software but not
    Firmware. Application Software does not include either host switch Software
    or host switch Software features.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -2-
<PAGE>   4

f)  "Architecture" means documented set of rules and standards, functional
    requirements and functional specifications related to the network and
    application design and process models, application and network architecture
    methodologies, and the application and network frameworks that will deliver
    voice and data services meeting the requirements of the Agreement.
    Architecture provides the foundation and boundaries when building,
    modifying, or selecting Products, Deliverables, and Services.

g)  "Attachment" means any Exhibits, Statements of Work, Schedules, or any other
    documents that are attached to this Agreement.

h)  "Backwards Compatible" means (i) with respect to Licensed Materials, the
    ability of newer or more advanced versions to function seamlessly with the
    most recent older or less advanced major release of such Software or other
    Licensed Materials and with all existing in-service Seller Provided Products
    only, already installed or already ordered from Seller to be installed in
    the Network, and (ii) with respect to Seller Provided Products, the
    interoperability and compatibility of such Seller Provided Products with
    existing infrastructure resulting in no reduction in the existing level of
    Functionality of the existing infrastructure. For the purposes of this
    definition, any particular version of Licensed Materials shall mean only a
    software upgrade or software enhancement.

i)  "Business Support System" means all interconnected and interworking software
    and/or manual applications and their associated processes that are related
    to customer service, operations, telemarketing, telesales, sales and
    marketing to achieve revenue projections; or any other system used internal
    to ATG and Lucent to maintain or improve operational effectiveness. Examples
    include reporting, cost control, revenue assurance, and ordering systems.

j)  "Change Order" means changes by Customer to an order which has been
    previously accepted by Seller as further described in Section 3.4 hereof.

k)  "City Specific Plan" means a plan that addresses the facilities, timing,
    Network design, functional specifications and scope of Installation,
    Integration, and Implementation for that portion of the Network Architecture
    and Network Technology to be implemented in a particular city.

l)  "Commercial Service" means, with respect to any Products or Licensed
    Materials the use of such Products or Licensed Materials to bring non-trial,
    billable services to any customer of Customer.

m)  "Customer" means Advanced TelCom Group Inc. and those United States
    Affiliates who may purchase under this Agreement as "Customer" pursuant to
    Section 2.2 hereof.

n)  "Customer Price List" means a list of prices, fees, or charges for the
    Deliverables and Services procured under this Agreement. Each Customer Price
    List shall be included in an Attachment to this Agreement.

o)  "Cutover" means the date upon which the Deliverables at each Customer switch
    site are commissioned for service into the public switch network.

p)  "Deliverable" means any tangible materials, Product(s), Licensed
    Material(s), or an end product of a Service delivered by Seller pursuant to
    this Agreement, Exhibits, or other applicable Attachments.

q)  "Delivery Date" means the respective date by which a Deliverable specified
    in this Agreement arrives at the destination specified in the order.

r)  "Designated Processor" means the Product on which licenses to Use Licensed
    Materials are granted.

s)  "Enterprise Connectivity" means the physical and logical connection of
    employees, customers, trading partners, Products, Deliverables, Services and
    software systems required to access one or multiple operating systems,
    Operational Support Systems, Business Support Systems, and other

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -3-
<PAGE>   5

    required Third Party interfaces and systems in a secure and timely fashion
    from any location using authorized computers.

t)  "Firmware" means a combination of (1) hardware and (2) Software represented
    by a pattern of bits contained in such hardware.

u)  "Fit" means physical size or mounting arrangement (e.g., electrical or
    mechanical connections).

v)  "Form" means physical shape.

w)  "Function" means the operations, features and functions that the Product
    performs, the behavior that the Product exhibits, and the performance of
    such Product.

x)  "Implementation" means all program management and work effort required to
    plan and verify that the communications Network interfaces to and
    interconnects with all required third party products and mediated, services,
    Operational Support Systems and Business Support System required to order,
    provision and provide complete and accurate service fulfillment to end
    customers.

y)  "Implementation Acceptance" has the meaning set forth in Section 3.10

z)  "Initial Term" means the period beginning on the Effective Date of this
    Agreement and ending four (4) years thereafter.

aa) "Installation" means all program management and work effort required to
    plan, verify facilitates and all required gray iron, verify communications
    equipment, the physical install of all identified gray iron and
    communications equipment, physical interconnection via wiring
    scheme/harnesses, loading and/or initiation of first software install,
    verification of full interconnection and operability testing of the network,
    and written acceptance and hand-off to the Integration Phase.

bb) "Installation Acceptance" has the meaning set forth in Section 3.8.

cc) "Integration" means all program management and work effort required to plan
    and verify the ability to access, connect, disconnect, configure, manage,
    monitor, and test via local and remote terminal connection, whether using
    in-band or out-of-band methods all elements of the Network with written
    acceptance and hand-off to the Implementation Phase.

dd) "Integration Acceptance" has the meaning set forth in Section 3.9.

ee) "Licensed Materials" means the Software and Related Documentation for which
    Seller grants licenses under this Agreement, which may include any Software
    described in any Attachment hereto or any Customer Price List. Unless
    specifically set forth in this Agreement or otherwise agreed by the parties,
    no Source Code versions of Software are included in Licensed Materials,
    except for Customer's rights under the Escrow Agreement.

ff) "Market Development Funds" means the suite of Seller's marketing tools and
    Services described in Exhibit F that are available to Customer as Market
    Development Funds and will be calculated as [*] of the total purchase
    amounts paid to Seller for Switching and Access Products.

gg) "Minimum Purchase Amount" has the meaning set forth in Section 2.5.

hh) "Network" means the physical hardware and software Products related to the
    transport, transmission, access, and application Network communications
    infrastructure used by Customer to its customers via centralized and
    distributed business offices in a variety of combinations. The demarcation
    points of the Network shall be coincident with the Customer demarcation
    points. It is anticipated that the Network will include domestic intra-city
    networks, inter-city networks, international networks and international
    intra-city networks.

ii) "Network Architecture" means the overall design and architecture
    specification for the Network, including sizing and engineering
    requirements, from which the Network Technology, as part of the overall
    Solution, is developed.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -4-

<PAGE>   6

jj) "Network Element" means any transport, transmission, and access Products or
    set of interrelated Products used in the delivery of services necessary for
    the proper operation of the Network, which will be set forth in the Network
    Technology, and result in the specified Solution.

kk) "Network Technology" means the Deliverable developed from the Network
    Architecture by Seller for review and approval by Customer, all as set forth
    in Schedule A, that identifies the Product and transport specifications for
    implementation as part of the City-Specific Plans.

ll) "Notice of Completion" has the meaning set forth in Section 3.8.

mm) "Operating Support Systems" means all interconnected and interworking
    software and/or manual applications and related methods, processes and
    procedures required to support the overall operations of the Network,
    Network Technology, Network Elements, and the broadest definition of the
    service activation, service fulfillment and service assurance with regards
    to the ordering, provisioning, billing, and customer service disciplines.

nn) "Outage" has the meaning set forth in Section 6.5.

oo) "Product" means equipment, hardware, and parts and components thereof
    provided by Seller under this Agreement, which may include, at Customer's
    election, any Product described in any Attachment hereto, any firm price
    quotation or any Customer Price List, or any other Product made available by
    Seller to other parties during the Term, provided, however, that a Product
    will become subject to this Agreement only when included in an Attachment
    hereto.

pp) "Program Management" has the meaning set forth in Section 3.1.

qq) "Related Documentation" means materials useful in connection with Software
    such as, but not limited to, flowcharts, logic diagrams and listings,
    program descriptions and Specifications.

ss) "Services" mean activities provided by Seller to Customer under this
    Agreement, which may include, at Customer's election, any Service described
    in Section 5 hereto, any Attachment hereto, any firm price quotation or any
    Customer Price List, any other Service made available by Seller to other
    parties during the Term, or any other Service necessary or useful for
    designing, building and maintaining the Network, including but not limited
    to, design, engineering, configuration, installation, provisioning,
    integration testing, maintenance, repair and monitoring.

tt) "Software" means a computer program in object code or run-time form
    consisting of a set of logical instructions and tables of information that
    guide the functioning of a processor. Such program may be contained in any
    medium whatsoever, including Firmware. However, the term "Software" does not
    mean or include such medium.

uu) "Solution" means all Products, Licensed Materials and Services designed and
    architected to meet an agreed Specification or set of Specifications
    allowing Customer to deliver voice and data by Seller services to its
    customers.

vv) "Source Code" means any version of Software incorporating high-level or
    assembly language in human perceivable form that generally is not directly
    executable by a processor.

ww) "Specifications" means Seller's or its vendor's technical specifications for
    particular Products or Software furnished hereunder, which, if not included
    in the Attachments, Seller shall provide to Customer as soon as practicable
    after Customer's request, and which, if not earlier provided, Seller shall
    automatically provide with Customer's first order of the corresponding
    Product or Software item.(Can we do this?)

xx) "Statement of Work" (SOW) means a detailed description of Services to be
    performed which includes the expected completion dates of such Services. A
    Statement of Work may be updated from time to time upon mutual written
    consent of the parties.

yy) "Term" means the Initial Term and any extension or extensions agreed by the
    parties as set forth in Section 2.1.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -5-
<PAGE>   7

zz) "Third-Party Products" means equipment, hardware, Software or components
    thereof which are procured by Customer (or by Seller on behalf of Customer)
    from a third party and which are recommended or approved in writing by
    Lucent for use in the Network.

aaa)"Use," with respect to Software, means installing the Software onto a
    computer, loading the Software, or any portion thereof into a computer,
    executing the instructions and tables contained in such Software, whether
    alone or in conjunction with other software, providing input to and
    obtaining output from such Software, using any such output, modifying user
    controlled modules of such Software, reproducing the Software for backup and
    archival purposes, and otherwise using the Software as described in the
    Related Documentation.

bbb) "Work" means Product, Licensed Materials and/or Services provided to
    Customer pursuant to this Agreement.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -6-
<PAGE>   8

                          ARTICLE 2 SCOPE AND STRUCTURE

2.1   TERM OF AGREEMENT

      The Initial Term of this Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date
      and shall continue in effect thereafter for the Initial Term. Upon written
      notice from Customer, no less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration
      of the Initial Term, or any extension thereof, Customer may, at its sole
      discretion extend this Agreement for successive one (1) year terms
      provided that Customer has subsequently met its payment obligation as set
      forth in this Agreement and is not in material breach of this Agreement.
      The parties agree on the applicable terms, conditions, specifications and
      pricing. Upon execution and delivery of this Agreement, the Letter of
      Intent for Proposed Definitive Agreement(s) Between Advanced Telecom
      Group, Inc. and Lucent Technologies Inc. dated November 19, 1998 (as
      amended) is hereby superseded and effectively terminated, and the rights
      and obligations of the parties with respect to the Proposal No.
      GS-98-1H7532A1 dated September 4, 1998 and supplemented October 15, 1998
      shall retroactively and hereafter be governed by this Agreement.

2.2   SCOPE

      This Agreement sets forth the general terms and conditions under which
      Customer may purchase and receive Products, Deliverables and Services from
      Seller for Customer's own use within North America. It is Customer's
      objective to engage Seller to provide program and project management
      services, network and system design and architecture services,
      installation, integration, and implementation services, hardware and
      software products, and to generally supply Customer with requested Lucent
      and potentially third party products and services as required, due to the
      business and industry dynamics as may be dictated by change and more over,
      provision, monitor, and maintain the service fulfillment of the Customer's
      nationwide multi-service delivery communications Network. By entering into
      this Agreement, Customer and Seller desire to leverage Seller's core
      competencies in both products in designing, implementing, supplying and
      maintaining the Network. As more fully described in the schedules hereto,
      Seller and Customer will cooperatively define all program management,
      scheduling, product, and service requirements and specifications that
      describe the specific Products, Deliverables, and Services the Seller will
      be responsible for. Following is a high-level list of such
      responsibilities:

      i.    Develop and document the end-to-end design and architecture of the
            Network;

      ii.   Develop and document the design and architecture of the end-to-end
            Network Technology;

      iii.  Develop and document required plans including which products,
            deliverables, services, schedules and resources are required to
            execute the Installation, Integration, and Implementation of the
            Network and Network Technology;

      iv.   Develop and document required plans including which products,
            deliverables, services, schedules, and resources required to execute
            the Enterprise Connectivity of the Network and Network Technology to
            the operating systems, Operational Support Systems, Business Support
            Systems, and other required Third Party interfaces and systems.

      v.    Consistent with the terms of this Agreement, acquire (on Customer's
            behalf) the required Network Elements and related Services for the
            installation, integration, and implementation of the Network and
            Network Technology;

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -7-
<PAGE>   9

      vi.   Program manage, project manage, and provide the physical and logical
            Installation, Configuration, Integration, Implementation, and
            testing of the Network Elements individually, with each other, and
            as part of Network and Network Technology overall Acceptance
            certification; and

      vii.  Program manage, project manage, and provide the physical and logical
            Installation, Configuration, Integration, Implementation, and
            testing of the Network, Network Technology, Network Elements
            individually, with each other, and as part of the Customer's
            end-to-end Solution that includes Operating Systems, Operational
            Support Systems, Business Support Systems, and required Third Party
            interfaces and systems; and

      viii. Provide continued Product, Deliverable and Service planning, design,
            architecture, engineering, installation, integration, and
            implementation, and maintenance support for the Network, Network
            Technology, Network Elements, Operating Systems, Operational Support
            Systems, Business Support Systems, and other Third Party interfaces
            and systems as it may evolve and expand.

      Customer will designate Seller as Customer's preferred provider of
      Products, Deliverables and Services for the Network, Network Technology,
      Network Elements for the term of this Agreement; provided Seller's
      Products, Deliverables and Services meet Customer's needs and preferences
      with regard to Form, Fit, Function and price. Notwithstanding Seller's
      preferred provider status, nothing in this Section 2.2 shall be
      interpreted to limit Customer's rights to make purchases of any
      Products and software from other vendors.

2.3   AFFILIATES

      Customer and its North America Affiliates may place orders under this
      Agreement. By virtue of placing orders with Seller, Customer hereby
      guarantees the performance of such Affiliates to comply with the terms and
      conditions of the Agreement and payment of all invoices for such
      Affiliates. Customer shall promptly notify Seller in writing of any change
      in the Affiliate status and upon losing Affiliate status, such Affiliate
      shall immediately be disqualified from purchasing under this Agreement.
      Any such notices shall automatically append to this Agreement and require
      no further amendments between the parties. Customer shall provide Seller a
      list of approved Affiliates, updated from time to time, attached as
      Exhibit J to this Agreement.

2.4   CONFLICTING TERMS

      Any firm price quotes, proposals, or other offers ("Offers") made by
      Seller to Customer during the Term shall incorporate the terms and
      conditions of this Agreement. Any conflicting terms and conditions of an
      Offer signed by an authorized representative of Seller and Customer and
      dated after the Effective Date will supersede the comparable terms of this
      Agreement.

      In the event of any conflict between the Agreement and an Attachment, the
      terms and conditions of the Agreement shall prevail unless a term of an
      Attachment expressly states that it supersedes a specific provision of the
      Agreement.

2.5   MINIMUM PURCHASE AMOUNT

      Under the terms and conditions and prices set forth herein and set forth
      in any Attachments to this Agreement and subject to Seller's performance
      of its obligations under this Agreement, Customer will purchase from
      Seller [*] ("Minimum Purchase Amount") of no less than Deliverables and
      Services during the Initial Term of this Agreement which shall include no
      less than [*] [and no less than [*] according to the following schedule:

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -8-

<PAGE>   10
'
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
               Purchase Period                                   Cumulative Purchase Amount
<S>                                                              <C>
               End of First 12 Months of the Initial Term        [*]

               End of Second 12 Months of the Initial Term       [*]

               End of Third 12 Months of the Initial Term        [*]

               End of Fourth 12 Months of the Initial Term       [*]
</TABLE>

      All Deliverables ordered prior to the Effective Date shall be considered
      as part of the First 12 Months orders. No more than thirty (30) days after
      the end of each 12 months of the Initial Term, Seller and Customer will
      review Customer's orders for the previous period to determine if Customer
      has met the cumulative purchase amount. As Seller's sole remedy for
      Customer's failure to meet its purchase obligations under this Section,
      Seller reserves the right to review Customer's pricing discounts for
      future orders to determine if the decrease warrants revision of the
      pricing discounts. If Customer exceeds the cumulative purchase amount for
      a reviewed year, Seller shall also review its pricing discounts to
      determine if the increased cumulative purchase amount warrants further
      discounts. The above determinators shall utilize the aggregate amount of
      purchase orders submitted by Customer during each 12 month period,
      adjusting said amount by eliminating those Purchase Orders which are
      canceled or not paid for.

2.6   CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITY

      Customer shall, at no charge to Seller, provide Seller with such technical
      information, data, or assistance as may reasonably be required by Seller
      to fulfill its obligations under this Agreement or order. If Customer
      fails to provide the technical information, data and assistance necessary
      for Seller to fulfill an obligation hereunder Seller shall be discharged
      from any such obligation until Customer provides such technical
      information, data or assistance. Seller shall provide Customer with such
      technical information, data, or assistance as may reasonably be required
      by Customer to fulfill its obligations under this Agreement or order. If
      Seller fails to provide the technical information, data and assistance
      necessary for Customer to fulfill an obligation hereunder Customer shall
      be discharged from any such obligation until Seller provides such
      technical information, data or assistance.

2.7   FORECASTS

      Customer hereby agrees that Customer shall provide Seller an initial
      forecast of the portions of the Network Elements and Services to be
      implemented during the first year of this Agreement within thirty (30)
      business days after receiving all necessary firm price quotations,
      recommendations and other necessary information and advice from Seller.
      Customer shall, every six (6) months thereafter, provide Seller a six (6)
      month forecast that reflects its best estimate of the quantity or volume
      of Network Elements and Services actually implemented. Customer will
      provide its best estimate of a rolling twelve (12) month forecast of
      Network Elements and Services to be implemented. Seller acknowledges that
      the last 6 months of any 12-month forecast may not be as accurate as the
      first 6 months.

2.8   PERMITS AND APPROVALS

      Seller represents that its Products furnished hereunder shall comply, to
      the extent required, with applicable FCC rules and regulations pertaining
      to said Products. Seller shall be responsible for obtaining necessary
      governmental permits required to perform its work under this Agreement.
      Except for the forgoing, Customer shall be responsible for obtaining
      necessary governmental permits required for Customer to implement and
      operate the Network.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -9-

<PAGE>   11

                      ARTICLE 3 GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

3.1   PLANNING SERVICES AND PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.

      Seller will be responsible for the overall program management of the
      functions performed by Seller and Customer where such program management
      is required and involves Network, Network Technology, and Network Elements
      whereby the Seller has been selected to perform such planning, design,
      architecture, engineering, installation, integration, implementation, and
      testing of Products, Deliverables and Services. Also included are such
      on-going program management of plans, design, architecture, engineering,
      installation, integration, implementation, and testing of Network
      operations (e.g., Lucent NRC operations, ATG INOC operations, third party
      interfaces, third party product, Network Element monitoring, maintenance
      and support). Seller, in cooperation with Customer program management
      personnel, will manage master schedules, project schedules, and task
      schedules for functions performed by Seller, Seller subcontractors,
      Customer and Customer's third-party contractors in accordance with the
      Attachments. Seller's performance of the overall program management
      function does not imply responsibility for budget, cost or performance of
      work functions not directly controlled by Seller or its subcontractors.
      The Seller's program management role, as that of a single point of
      reference and contact for the overall plan, design, architecture,
      engineering, installation, integration, implementation, and testing of
      Products, Deliverables and Services and at a high-level will include:

      (a)   Typical activities such as program/project schedule development and
            maintenance, roles and responsibility matrix development and
            maintenance, action register administration, high-level document
            control, change control, critical item/jeopardy escalation process
            management and program progress reporting;

      (b)   Managing and communicating with the various responsible parties
            (i.e., Seller and its subcontractors, Customer and Customer-directed
            third party resources) as appropriate so that the Implementation
            meets established objectives of time, cost, functionality and
            service quality, as defined in the relevant City-Specific Plan.
            Customer will provide a single point of contact to monitor status,
            resolve issues and make commitments to Seller with regard to each
            Customer-performed function or required input; and

      (c)   Attending regularly scheduled progress reviews with appropriate
            Customer personnel to communicate project status and resolve issues
            in cooperation with Customer.

3.2   ORDERS

      Customer shall submit orders to the designated Lucent Account Executive
      for the Deliverables and Services specified by Seller. Each order shall
      incorporate and be subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement
      and shall contain information required by Seller to process orders.

      Unless Customer requests expedited delivery as provided below, the
      requested delivery date of any order must be in accordance with the
      delivery intervals set forth in the Attachments to this Agreement, or, if
      not specified therein, with Seller's standard order intervals in effect on
      the date of receipt of order by Seller. Seller reserves the right to
      change such standard order intervals upon thirty (30) business days notice
      to Customer but only with respect to future orders. Such

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -10-
<PAGE>   12

      change shall not affect orders accepted by Seller prior to the change to
      the standard order intervals.

      Customer may request that delivery of Deliverables be expedited by giving
      Seller as much notice as possible in advance of the requested delivery
      date and the reasons for the expedited delivery. Customer shall pay any
      and all costs and expenses that result directly from the expedited
      delivery.

      Electronic orders submitted by Customer shall be binding on Customer
      notwithstanding the absence of a signature. All orders are subject to
      acceptance by Seller, provided that Seller shall accept all orders that
      comply with the terms of this Section 3.1 and Customer is not in breach of
      this Agreement. Pre-printed terms and conditions on Customer's purchase
      order or on Seller's acceptance or invoice shall be ineffective, void and
      of no force and effect. Orders shall be sent by Seller's designated
      Account Executive to the following address:

             Lucent Technologies Inc.
             Customer Service
             6701 Roswell Road
             Building D - 3rd Floor
             Atlanta, GA 30328-2501

3.3   CHANGES IN CUSTOMER'S ORDERS

      Changes made by Customer to a purchase order which has been previously
      accepted by Seller (a "Change Order") are subject to acceptance by Seller.
      Change Orders shall be treated as a separate purchase order and shall
      follow the mutually agreed Change Order process. In the event Seller
      accepts a Change Order and such change affects Seller's ability to meet
      its obligations under the original purchase order any price (discount, if
      applicable), shipment date or Services completion date quoted by Seller
      with respect to such original purchase order is subject to change. Seller
      will provide to Customer written quotations and expected completion dates
      for any requested Change Orders and Seller will have ten (10) business
      days to accept or reject the new quotation and new completion dates.

      Seller agrees to use reasonable efforts to minimize any delayed shipment
      or completion date occasioned by such changes.

3.4   LATE DELIVERIES

      3.4.1 For delivery delays that are the sole fault of Seller, and provided
      that Customer is not in breach of this Agreement and has made invoice
      payments in accordance with this Agreement, Seller will use its best
      efforts to provide the delayed Deliverables to Customer expediently and at
      no additional cost to Customer.

      3.4.2 The parties agree that Seller's failure to meet the mutually agreed
      upon Installation Acceptance Date for the host switch and associated gray
      iron and power ("Host Switch Installation") will cause damages to Customer
      which are difficult if not impossible to ascertain and prove. The parties
      agree that subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, Seller
      shall pay and Customer shall accept as liquidated damages, and not as a
      penalty, the amounts set forth in this paragraph. If due to Seller's
      action or inactions, Seller fails to meet such Installation Acceptance
      Date for the Host Switch Installation, Seller shall pay to Customer as
      liquidated damages for any loss or damage sustained by Customer an initial
      payment of [*] after a seven (7) day cure period and thereafter [*] per
      day, for a maximum of thirty (30) days (resulting in a maximum liability
      of [*]) for each host switch Installation Acceptance Date. With respect to
      any host switch installation for which the maximum liquidated damages
      become due to

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -11-

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   13

      Customer hereunder, Customer shall have the right to cancel the Purchase
      Order with respect to such Host Switch Installation, receive a refund of
      all monies and Customer shall have no further liability or obligation with
      respect to such Purchase Order. Also, Seller shall not be liable or
      responsible for liquidated damages for any delay caused by (1) Customer
      changes, revisions, or modifications, or special requirements of Customer
      not communicated and agreed to by Seller in writing as specified in the
      Change Order process set forth in Section 3.3; (2) Customer's failure to
      meet intervals specified in Schedule of Milestones contained in Schedule
      ____ of Exhibit C; or (3) Customer's failure to have the Host Switch Site
      ready as defined by the Site Ready Checklist contained in Schedule _____
      of Exhibit C. Any damages for which Seller is liable pursuant as to this
      clause shall be credited against an invoice(s) for future Purchase Orders
      during the term as the partied may agree. To the extent Seller does not
      place Purchase Orders sufficient to credit all Late Delivery damages
      accrued within six (6) months of the thirty (30) day period, Seller shall
      refund to Customer that portion of the credit not previously credited.
      This provision for liquidated damages (and cancellation of the applicable
      Purchase Order) is intended to be and shall be in lieu of any other remedy
      and any other claims for damages to which Customer might otherwise be
      entitled for Seller's failure to timely meet the host switch Installation
      Acceptance Date.

3.5   CHANGES IN PRODUCTS

      Prior to shipment, Seller may, from time to time, make changes in Products
      with respect to future orders. Seller may modify the Product(s) drawings
      and Specifications or substitute Products of later design. Seller agrees
      that such modifications or substitutions will not impact upon Form, Fit,
      or Function under normal and proper use of the ordered Product as provided
      in Seller's Specifications. For changes that do impact the Form, Fit, or
      Function of the ordered Product, Seller shall notify Customer in writing
      one hundred eighty (180) days prior to the date that changes become
      effective. If Customer objects to the change, Customer shall notify Seller
      within thirty (30) days from the date of notice. Upon receipt of notice,
      Seller and Customer shall jointly determine acceptable Product
      alternatives.

3.6   PRICES

      Prices, fees, and charges ("Prices") for Deliverables and Services are set
      forth in Customer's Price Lists and based upon Seller's standard ordering
      and shipping intervals. If Customer desires to procure Deliverables or
      Services that are not listed in any of Customer's Price Lists, Customer
      may request that Seller provide an additional Customer Price List.

3.7   COMPETITIVE PRICE

      Provided that Customer is not in material breach of this Agreement after
      being notified by Seller in writing and given a reasonable opportunity to
      cure such breach Seller will, [*]. If Customer fails to cure a material
      breach of this Agreement within a reasonable time after being given
      written notice by Seller, the obligations of Seller under this section
      shall be suspended until such time as Customer cures the breach at which
      time Seller's obligations shall be reinstated with respect to purchases on
      and after the date of cure. If customer purchases Deliverables and
      Services for deployment in Canada, this Section shall apply to such
      purchases but the analysis shall be limited to Seller's other customers in
      Canada.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -12-

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   14

3.8   ACCEPTANCE OF INSTALLATION

      Following Installation of Products and Deliverables, or at such other
      reasonable time during the Implementation plan, Seller shall issue to
      Customer a written notice of completion ("Notice of Completion")
      certifying that the Products or Deliverables are in working order and
      ready for the Acceptance Test. Promptly after issuance of the Notice of
      Completion and no later than thirty (30) days thereafter, Seller and
      Customer shall conduct the Acceptance Test (or, at Customer's option,
      Seller alone may conduct the Acceptance Test) to confirm that the Network
      Elements or Deliverables have been installed in accordance with the
      mutually agreed acceptance standards and procedures. "Installation
      Acceptance" shall occur on the earlier of (i) the date Seller has
      corrected all material defects identified during testing; (ii) thirty (30)
      days after Notice of Completion if Customer fails to notify Seller of any
      material defects during such 30-day period; (iii) the date Customer
      advises Seller of acceptance; and (iv) the date Customer places the
      Network Elements or Deliverables into Commercial Service.

3.9   ACCEPTANCE OF INTEGRATION

      Following Integration of Products and Deliverables, or at such other
      reasonable time during the Integration plan, Seller shall issue to
      Customer a written notice of completion ("Notice of Completion")
      certifying that the Products or Deliverables are in working order and
      ready for the Integration Acceptance Test. Promptly after issuance of the
      Notice of Completion and no later than thirty (30) days thereafter, Seller
      and Customer shall conduct the Integration Acceptance Test (or, at
      Customer's option, Seller alone may conduct the Integration Acceptance
      Test) to confirm that the Network Elements or Deliverables have been
      integrated in accordance with the mutually agreed acceptance standards and
      procedures. "Integration Acceptance" shall occur on the earlier of (i) the
      date Seller has corrected all material defects identified during testing;
      (ii) thirty (30) days after Notice of Completion if Customer fails to
      notify Seller of any material defects during such 30-day period; (iii) the
      date Customer advises Seller of acceptance; and (iv) the date Customer
      places the Network Elements or Deliverables into Commercial Service.

3.10  ACCEPTANCE OF IMPLEMENTATION

      Following Implementation of Products, Deliverables or Services or at such
      other reasonable time during the Implementation plan, Seller shall issue
      to Customer a written notice of completion ("Notice of Completion")
      certifying that the Products or Deliverables are in working order and
      ready for the Implementation Acceptance Test. Promptly after issuance of
      the Notice of Completion and no later than thirty (30) days thereafter,
      Seller and Customer shall conduct the Implementation Acceptance Test (or,
      at Customer's option, Seller alone may conduct the Implementation
      Acceptance Test) to confirm that the Network Elements or Deliverables have
      been implemented in accordance with the mutually agreed acceptance
      standards and procedures. "Implementation Acceptance" shall occur on the
      earlier of (i) the date Seller has corrected all material defects
      identified during testing; (ii) thirty (30) days after Notice of
      Completion if Customer fails to notify Seller of any material defects
      during such 30-day period; (iii) the date Customer advises Seller of
      acceptance; and (iv) the date Customer places the Network Elements or
      Deliverables into Commercial Service.

3.11  INVOICES AND TERMS OF PAYMENT

      3.11.1 Customer shall pay all undisputed, invoiced amounts and applicable
      transportation charges and taxes for receipt by Seller within thirty (30)
      days of invoice date as follows:

      (a)   Products and Licensed Materials (including transportation charges
            and taxes, if applicable) will be invoiced by Seller when shipped,
            or as soon thereafter as practicable.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -13-
<PAGE>   15

      (b)   Engineering services will be invoiced upon main shipment of
            Products.

      (c)   Installation will be invoiced as performed, on a monthly basis, or
            as soon thereafter as practical.

      (d)   For all other Services, invoicing will be on a monthly basis, at the
            end of the month in which the Service is performed, unless otherwise
            set forth in an applicable Exhibit.

      3.11.2 Customer shall pay all undisputed amounts when due Seller hereunder
      using Electronic Funds Transfer ("EFT"). EFT payments by Customer shall be
      made to the following account of Seller or such other account as is
      subsequently designated by Seller in writing and, concurrent with the EFT
      payment, Customer shall fax a copy of the remittal to Seller's Manager of
      Cash Operations at 770-750-4288.

             Chase Manhattan Bank
             New York, New York
             Account Name:  Lucent Technologies Inc.
             ACCT. 910144-9099
             ABA 021000021

      3.11.3 If Customer fails to pay any invoiced amount when due, the invoiced
      amount will be subject to a late payment charge at the rate of [*] per
      month, or portion thereof, of the amount due (but not to exceed the
      maximum lawful rate). Amounts disputed in good faith shall not be subject
      to a late payment charge, provided Customer has notified Seller of the
      dispute as provided below. If Customer is in breach of its obligations to
      make payments, Seller shall have the right to reject, cancel or delay
      orders, until such time as Customer has cured its breach, and Seller shall
      not be liable for loss, delay or failure to perform its obligations as a
      result of such action.

      3.11.4 Customer agrees to review all invoices furnished by Seller
      hereunder upon receipt and notify Seller of any billing discrepancies or
      disputed amounts within ten (10) business days of receipt of the
      applicable invoice. Such inquiries can be directed to Seller in writing or
      by telephone. Inquiries shall be made to the telephone number or, if in
      writing, to the address identified on the invoice.

3.12  PURCHASE MONEY SECURITY INTEREST

      Seller reserves and Customer agrees that Seller shall have a purchase
      money security interest in each Product and Licensed Material hereafter
      supplied to Customer by Seller under this Agreement until any and all
      payments and charges due Seller for such Product or Licensed Material are
      paid in full under this Agreement including, without limitation, shipping
      and installation charges. Seller shall have the right, at any time and
      without notice to Customer, to file in any state or local jurisdiction
      such financing statements (e.g., UCC-1 financing statements) as Seller
      deems necessary to perfect its purchase money security interest hereunder.
      Upon request by Seller and at Seller's expense, Customer hereby agrees to
      execute all documents necessary to secure Seller's purchase money security
      interest including without limitation, UCC-1 or such other documents
      Seller deems reasonably necessary. Notwithstanding the foregoing
      obligation of Customer to execute, Customer hereby irrevocably appoints
      Seller as its attorney-in-fact for purposes of executing and filing such
      financing statements and such other documents prepared by Seller or its
      designated agent for purposes of perfecting Seller's security interest
      hereunder. Customer also agrees that Seller may file this Agreement in any
      state or local jurisdiction as a financing statement (or as other evidence
      of the Seller's purchase money security interest).

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -14-

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   16

3.13    TAXES

        Customer shall be liable for and shall reimburse Seller for all taxes
        and related charges, however designated, imposed upon or based upon the
        provision of Services and the sale, license or Use of Deliverables,
        excluding taxes on Seller's net income, unless Customer provides Seller
        with a valid tax exempt certificate. Seller's failure to collect taxes
        in accordance herewith shall not be deemed to be an authorization to
        resell Products or Services or sublicense Licensed Materials. Whenever
        Seller is able to do so, Seller shall deliver Software electronically to
        minimize the amount of sales tax payable.

3.14  TRANSPORTATION AND PACKING

      Seller, in accordance with its normal practices, shall arrange for prepaid
      transportation to destinations in the contiguous United States and shall
      invoice transportation charges to Customer. Premium transportation will be
      used only at Customer's request. Seller shall pack Products for delivery
      in the contiguous United States, in accordance with its standard practices
      for domestic shipments. Where, in order to meet Customer's requests,
      Seller packs Products in other than its normal manner or for destinations
      outside the contiguous United States, Customer shall pay the additional
      charges for such packing and transportation.

3.15  TITLE AND RISK OF LOSS

      Title to Products only and risk of loss to Products and Licensed Materials
      shall pass to Customer upon shipment. Title to all Licensed Materials
      (whether or not part of Firmware) furnished by Seller, and all copies
      thereof made by Customer, including translations, compilations and partial
      copies are, and shall remain, the property of Seller or its licensor.
      Customer shall notify Seller promptly of any claim with respect to loss,
      which occurs while Seller has the risk of loss and shall cooperate in
      every reasonable way to facilitate the settlement of any claim. Seller
      shall notify Customer promptly of any claim with respect to loss, which
      occurs while Customer has the risk of loss and shall cooperate in every
      reasonable way to facilitate the settlement of any claim.

3.16  INFRINGEMENT

      In the event of any claim, action, proceeding or suit brought in North
      America, the European Union, or Japan, by a third party against Customer
      alleging an infringement of any patent, copyright, or trademark in North
      America, the European Union, or Japan, or a violation of any trade secret
      or proprietary rights in North America, the European Union, or Japan, by
      reason of the use in accordance with Seller's Specifications or Related
      Documentation of any Product or Licensed Materials furnished by Seller to
      Customer under this Agreement, or the provision of Services by Seller
      under this Agreement, Seller, at its expense, will defend, indemnify and
      hold Customer harmless, subject to the conditions and exceptions stated
      below. Seller will reimburse Customer for any cost, expense or attorneys'
      fees, incurred at Seller's written request or authorization, or otherwise
      reasonably incurred by Customer in good faith and in compliance with this
      Section , and will indemnify Customer against any liability assessed
      against Customer on account of such infringement or violation arising out
      of such use and against any settlement agreed to by Seller.

      If Customer's use shall be enjoined or in Seller's opinion is likely to be
      enjoined, Seller will, at its expense and at its option, either (1)
      replace the enjoined Product or Licensed Materials furnished pursuant to
      this Agreement with a suitable substitute free of any infringement without
      materially affecting Form, Fit or Function; (2) modify it so that it will
      be free of the infringement without materially affecting Form, Fit or
      Function; or (3) procure for Customer a license or other right to use it.
      If none of the foregoing options can be implemented , Seller will remove
      the enjoined Product or Licensed Materials and any related Products or
      Licensed Materials elected by Customer and refund to Customer any amounts
      paid to Seller therefor.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -15-
<PAGE>   17

      Customer shall give Seller prompt written notice of all such claims,
      actions, proceedings or suits alleging infringement or violation and
      Seller shall have full and complete authority to assume the sole defense
      thereof, including appeals, and to settle same. Customer shall, upon
      Seller's request and at Seller's expense, furnish all information and
      assistance available to Customer and cooperate in every reasonable way to
      facilitate the defense and/or settlement of any such claim, action,
      proceeding or suit.

      No undertaking of Seller under this section shall extend to any such
      alleged infringement or violation to the extent that it: (1) arises from
      adherence to design modifications, specifications, drawings, or written
      instructions which Seller is directed by Customer to follow, and which
      were not prepared, specified, or recommended by Seller, but only if such
      alleged infringement or violation does not reside in corresponding
      commercial Product or Licensed Materials of Seller's design or selection;
      or (2) arises from adherence to instructions by Customer to apply
      Customer's trademark, trade name or other company identification; or (3)
      resides solely in a product or licensed materials which are not of
      Seller's origin and which are furnished by Customer to Seller for use
      under this Agreement, except to the extent such product or licensed
      materials were installed, recommended or otherwise approved by Seller; or
      (4) relates to uses of Product or Licensed Materials provided by Seller in
      combination with other products or licensed materials not furnished by
      Seller, unless the combination was installed, recommended or otherwise
      approved by Seller, or is otherwise required or necessary to use the
      Product or Licensed Materials. In the foregoing cases numbered (1) through
      (4), Customer will defend and save Seller harmless, subject to the same
      terms and conditions and exceptions stated above, with respect to the
      Seller's rights and obligations under this Section.

      The liability of Seller and Customer with respect to any and all such
      claims, actions, proceedings or suits by third parties described in this
      Section shall be limited to the specific undertakings contained in this
      Section.

3.17  REMEDIES

      3.17.1 Customer's exclusive remedies and the entire liability of Seller,
      its Affiliates and their respective employees, agents and suppliers for
      any claim, loss, damage or expense of Customer or any other entity arising
      out of this Agreement, or the use, performance, or nonperformance of any
      Product, Licensed Materials, or Services, whether in an action for or
      arising out of breach of contract, tort, including negligence, indemnity,
      or strict liability, shall be as follows:

      1.    For infringement, the remedy set forth in the "Infringement"
            Section;

      2.    For the nonperformance of Products, Software and the Network and for
            the performance or nonperformance of Services during the Warranty
            Period - the remedy set forth in the applicable "Warranty" Section;

      3.    For tangible property damage to Customer's property and personal
            injury caused by Seller - the amount of direct damages; and

      4.    For the late delivery, the remedy set forth in Section 3.4; and

      5.    For everything other than as set forth above - [*].

      3.17.2 Seller's exclusive remedies and the entire liability of Customer,
      its Affiliates and their respective employees, agents and suppliers for
      any claim, loss, damage or expense of Seller or any other entity arising
      out of this Agreement, or the use, performance, or nonperformance of any
      Product, Licensed Materials, or Services, whether in an action for or
      arising out of breach of contract, tort, including negligence, indemnity,
      or strict liability, shall be as follows:

      1.    For infringement, the remedy set forth in the "Infringement"
            Section;

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -16-
<PAGE>   18

      2.    For tangible property damage to Seller's property and personal
            injury caused by Customer - the amount of direct damages; and

      3.    For everything other than as set forth above - [*].

      3.17.3 EXCEPT FOR CLAIMS, LOSS, OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM BREACH OF
      SECTION 3.17 OR MISAPPROPRIATION OF A PARTY'S INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY,
      NEITHER PARTY NOR ITS AFFILIATES NOR THEIR RESPECTIVE EMPLOYEES, AGENTS
      AND SUPPLIERS, SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR
      CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS, REVENUES OR SAVINGS OR LOSS OF DATA
      ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, OR THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF ANY PRODUCT,
      LICENSED MATERIALS, DELIVERABLES, OR THE PROVISION OF SERVICES, REGARDLESS
      OF THE FORM OF ACTION AND REGARDLESS WHETHER SUCH DAMAGES WERE
      FORESEEABLE. THIS SECTION SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE OR LIMITED
      REMEDY.

3.18  USE OF INFORMATION

      All technical and business information in whatever form recorded which
      bears a legend or notice stating its proprietary or confidential nature or
      otherwise restricting its use, copying, or dissemination or, if not in
      tangible form, is described as being proprietary or confidential at the
      time of disclosure and is subsequently summarized in a writing so marked
      and delivered to the receiving party within thirty (30) days of disclosure
      to the receiving party (all hereinafter designated "Information") shall be
      deemed confidential. The furnishing party grants the receiving party the
      right to use such Information only for purposes expressly permitted in
      this section. Such Information (1) shall not be reproduced or copied, in
      whole or part, except for use as authorized in this Agreement; and (2)
      shall, together with any full or partial copies thereof, be returned or
      destroyed upon request of the furnishing party when no longer needed or
      useful. Moreover, when Seller is the receiving party, Seller shall use
      such Information only for the purpose of performing under this Agreement,
      and when Customer is the receiving party, Customer shall use such
      Information only (1) to order; (2) to evaluate Seller's Products, Licensed
      Materials and Services; or (3) to install, operate and maintain the
      particular Products and Licensed Materials for which the Information was
      originally furnished. Unless the furnishing party consents in writing,
      such Information, except for that part, if any, which is known to the
      receiving party free of any confidential obligation, which is
      independently developed by the receiving party without reference to the
      Information, or which becomes generally known to the public through acts
      not attributable to the receiving party, shall be held in confidence by
      the receiving party. The receiving party may disclose such Information to
      other persons (such as financial advisors, legal advisors, consultants,
      investors, customers, and suppliers), upon the furnishing party's prior
      written authorization, but solely to perform acts which this section
      expressly authorizes the receiving party to perform itself and further
      provided such other person agrees in writing (a copy of which writing will
      be provided to the furnishing party at its request) to the same conditions
      respecting use of Information contained in this section and to any other
      reasonable conditions requested by the furnishing party. Notwithstanding
      the foregoing, the receiving party may disclose information to the extent
      disclosure may be required by applicable laws or regulations, in which
      latter case, the party required to make such disclosure shall promptly
      inform the other prior to such disclosure in sufficient time to enable
      such other party to make known any objections it may have to such
      disclosure. The party required to make such disclosure shall take all
      reasonable steps and exercise all reasonable efforts directed by the other
      party to secure a protective order, seek confidential treatment, or
      otherwise assure that this Agreement and/or any order will be withheld
      from the public record.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -17-
<PAGE>   19

3.19  DOCUMENTATION

      Seller shall furnish to Customer, at no additional charge, three (3)
      electronic copies on CD-Rom of the documentation for Products and/or three
      electronic copies on CD-Rom of the Related Documentation for Software
      licensed to Customer. Electronic copies shall be in CD-Rom format or in an
      alternative Web accessible format, if available, and if not available,
      Seller shall furnish three (3) hard copies. Such documentation shall be
      that which is customarily provided by Seller to its Customers at no
      additional charge. Such documentation shall be sufficient to enable
      Customer to operate and maintain such Products and Software in accordance
      with Seller's Specifications. Such documentation shall be provided either
      prior to, included with, or shortly after shipment of Products and/or
      Software from Seller to Customer. Additional copies of such documentation
      are available at prices set forth in Seller's Customer Price Lists. Seller
      hereby grants Customer a nonexclusive, nontransferable license to print a
      reasonable number of hard copies of the documentation for Customer's sole
      use in operating its business.

3.20  NOTICES

      Any notice, demand or other communication (other than an order) required,
      or which may be given, under this Agreement shall, unless specifically
      otherwise provided in this Agreement, be in writing and shall be given or
      made by nationally recognized overnight courier service, confirmed
      facsimile, or certified mail, return receipt requested and shall be
      addressed to the respective parties as follows:

      If to Seller:

                            Attn: Contract Manager

                            Lucent Technologies Inc.
                            Global Commercial Markets
                            8400 East Prentice Ave., Ninth Floor
                            Englewood, CO 80111-2912

                            Facsimile: 303-773-2455

      If to Customer:       Advanced Telecom Group, Inc.

                            Attn: Mr. Eric Russell, Controller

                            100 Stony Point Road

                            Suite 130

                            Santa Rosa, CA 9540

      Any such notice shall be effective upon receipt. Each party may change its
      designated representative or address for receipt of communications and
      notices by giving written notice to the furnishing party.

3.21  FORCE MAJEURE

      Neither party shall be liable to the other party for any delay or failure
      in performance to the extent the delay or failure results from a Force
      Majeure. A Force Majeure is any cause which is beyond a party's reasonable
      control, including but not limited to fires, strikes, embargoes,
      explosions, earthquakes, floods, wars, water, the elements, labor
      disputes, government requirements, civil or military authorities, acts of
      God or by the public enemy, inability to secure raw materials or
      transportation facilities, acts or omissions of carriers or suppliers, or
      other causes , whether or not similar to the foregoing, in each case to
      the extent beyond such party's control. A party shall promptly notify the
      other party of the occurrence of Force Majeure, and the notifying party
      shall be excused from any further performance of the obligations affected
      by Force Majeure for as long as the Force Majeure continues, provided such

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -18-
<PAGE>   20

      party uses and continues to use its best efforts to recommence
      performance. If such delay or failure to perform extends for more than
      ninety (90) days, the other party may terminate the order or orders
      affected by Force Majeure upon written notice without liability for such
      termination.

3.22  ASSIGNMENT

      Except as provided in this section, neither party shall assign this
      Agreement or any right or interest under this Agreement, nor delegate any
      work or obligation to be performed under this Agreement (an "assignment")
      without the other party's prior written consent. Any attempted assignment
      in contravention of this shall be void and ineffective. Nothing shall
      preclude a party from employing a subcontractor in carrying out its
      obligations under this Agreement, subject to the other party's approval,
      which shall not be unreasonably withheld. A party's use of such
      subcontractor shall not release the party from its obligations under this
      Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, either party has the right to
      assign this Agreement and to assign its rights and delegate its duties
      under this Agreement, in whole or in part, at any time and without the
      other party's consent, to any present or future subsidiary or Affiliate of
      such party or to any combination of the foregoing. Such assignment or
      delegation shall not release such party from any further obligation or
      liability thereon. In addition, each party shall have the right to assign
      this Agreement to an entity which acquires all or substantially all of the
      business, stock or assets of such party, whether by operation of law or
      otherwise, provided that the party acquiring Customer's business, stock or
      assets is not a direct competitor of Seller in providing Network Products,
      Software or Services. In such cases, the assigning party shall give the
      other party prompt written notice of the assignment. For the purposes of
      this section, the term "Agreement" includes this Agreement, all
      Attachments, any subordinate agreement placed under this Agreement and any
      order placed under this Agreement or subordinate agreement.

3.23  TERMINATION

      In the event either party is in material breach or default of the terms of
      this Agreement and such breach or default continues for a period of thirty
      (30) days after the receipt of written notice from the other party,
      excluding matters which are the subject of a good faith dispute under
      negotiation, then the party not in breach or default shall have the right
      to terminate this Agreement without any charge, obligation or liability
      except for Products or Licensed Materials already delivered and Services
      already performed.

3.24  INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR

      All work performed by either party under this Agreement shall be performed
      as an independent contractor and not as an agent of the other, and no
      persons furnished by the performing party shall be considered the
      employees or agents of the other.

3.25  RELEASES VOID

      Neither party shall require releases or waivers of any personal rights
      from representatives or employees of the other in connection with visits
      to its premises, nor shall such parties plead such releases or waivers in
      any action or proceeding.

3.26  PUBLICITY

      For publication at a mutually agreed time, the parties will jointly and
      promptly create a press release to announce the execution of this
      Agreement and the formation of a relationship between Customer and Seller
      within thirty (30) days of the Effective Date. The press release will be
      subject to prior written consent of each party. Neither party shall issue
      or release for publication any articles, advertising, or publicity
      material relating to Products, Licensed Materials, or Services under this
      Agreement or mentioning or implying the name, trademarks,

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -19-
<PAGE>   21

      logos, trade name, service mark or other company identification of the
      other party or any of its Affiliates or any of its personnel without the
      prior written consent of the other party, which, if applicable, shall be
      provided as soon as practicable thereafter. Customer may use Seller's
      trade name, logo, trademarks, service marks and other company
      identification as provided in Exhibit F.

3.27  CONFIDENTIALITY OF AGREEMENT

      Notwithstanding the obligations contained in Section "Use of Information"
      of this Agreement the parties shall keep all provisions of this Agreement
      and any order submitted hereunder (including, without limitation, prices
      and pricing related information) confidential except as reasonably
      necessary for performance by the parties hereunder and except to the
      extent disclosure may be required by applicable laws or regulations, in
      which latter case, the party required to make such disclosure shall
      promptly inform the other prior to such disclosure in sufficient time to
      enable such other party to make known any objections it may have to such
      disclosure. The disclosing party shall take all reasonable steps and
      exercise all reasonable efforts directed by the other party to secure a
      protective order, seek confidential treatment, or otherwise assure that
      this Agreement and/or any order will be withheld from the public record.

3.28  EXPORT CONTROL

      The parties acknowledge that all Deliverables, related documentation, and
      technical information (including, but not limited to, service and
      training) provided under this Agreement are subject to U.S. export laws
      and regulations and any use or transfer of such Products, Software,
      related documentation, or technical information must be authorized under
      those regulations. Each party agrees that it will not use, distribute,
      transfer, or transmit the Products, Software, related documentation, or
      technical information (even if incorporated into other products) except in
      compliance with U.S. regulations. If requested by Seller, Customer also
      agrees to sign written assurances and other export-related documents as
      may be required for Seller to comply with U.S. export regulations.

3.29  AMENDMENTS

      Any supplement, modification or waiver of any provision of this Agreement
      must be in writing and signed by authorized representatives of both
      parties.

3.30  SEVERABILITY

      If any portion of this Agreement is found to be invalid or unenforceable,
      the parties agree that the remaining portions shall remain in effect. The
      parties further agree that in the event such invalid or unenforceable
      portion is an essential part of this Agreement, they will immediately
      begin negotiations for a replacement.

3.31  WAIVER

      If either party fails to enforce any right or remedy available under this
      Agreement, that failure shall not be construed as a waiver of any right or
      remedy with respect to any other breach or failure by the other party.

3.32  SURVIVAL

      The rights and obligations of the parties, which by their nature would
      continue beyond the termination cancellation, or expiration of this
      Agreement, shall survive such termination, cancellation or expiration.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -20-
<PAGE>   22

3.33  SECTION HEADINGS

      The section headings in this Agreement are inserted for convenience only
      and are not intended to affect the meaning or interpretation of this
      Agreement.

3.34  CHOICE OF LAW

      The construction and interpretation of, and the rights and obligations of
      the parties pursuant to this Agreement, shall be governed by the laws of
      the State of California without regard to its conflict of laws provision
      and excluding the United Nations Convention on the Sale of Goods. All
      disputes arising out of this Agreement shall be subject to the exclusive
      jurisdiction and venue of the United States District Court for the
      Northern District of California, or if there is no federal jurisdiction,
      the California state courts of San Francisco, California, and the parties
      consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of these courts.

3.35  DISPUTE RESOLUTION

      3.36.1 Senior management of either party may, upon notice and within five
      (5) business days of receipt of a notice from the other party, elect to
      utilize a non-binding resolution procedure whereby each party presents its
      case before a panel consisting of two senior executives of each of the
      parties and, if such executives can agree upon such an individual, a
      mutually acceptable neutral advisor. If a party elects to use the
      procedure set forth in this clause, the other party shall participate. The
      hearing shall occur no more than ten (10) business days after a party
      serves notice to use the procedure set forth in this clause. If the matter
      cannot be resolved by such senior executives, the neutral advisor, if one
      has been agreed upon, may be asked to assist such senior executives in
      evaluating the strengths and weaknesses of each party's position on the
      merits of their dispute. The parties shall each bear their respective
      costs incurred in connection with the procedure set forth in this clause,
      except that they shall share equally the fees and expenses of the neutral
      advisor, if any, and the cost of the facility for the hearing.

      If the parties are unable, in good faith, to reach a settlement of the
      matter submitted to mediation, upon notice to the other party, either
      party may elect to file a lawsuit in a court of competent jurisdiction.
      Similarly, if one party refuses or fails to comply with the procedure
      described above, upon notice to the non-compliant party, the other party
      may elect to file a lawsuit in a court of competent jurisdiction.

3.36  AMBIGUITIES

      The parties represent that they are sophisticated businesses with access
      to their own legal, financial and business advisors and that each party
      has had the opportunity to consult with advisors of their own choosing
      before entering into this Agreement. The parties therefore acknowledge and
      agree that the rule of law that ambiguities are construed against the
      drafter shall not apply to the interpretation of this Agreement.

3.37  INSURANCE

      Each party shall maintain during the term of this Agreement, at its own
      cost and expense, carry and maintain at a minimum, the insurance coverage
      listed below. If either party is not self-insured, that party shall
      maintain such coverages having a "Best's" rating of at least B+XIII.
      Seller shall not commence any work hereunder until each party has
      fulfilled all insurance requirements herein. Each party shall require its
      subcontractors and agents to maintain the same insurance coverage listed
      below.

      -     Workers' Compensation insurance with statutory limits as required in
            the state(s) of operation; and providing coverage for either party's
            employee entering onto Customer premises, even if not required by
            statute. Employers' Liability or "Stop Gap" insurance with limits of
            not less than $500,000 for each occurrence.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -21-
<PAGE>   23

      -     Commercial General Liability Insurance covering claims for bodily
            injury, death, personal injury or property damage occurring or
            arising out of the performance of this Agreement, including coverage
            for independent contractor's protection (required if any work will
            be subcontracted), premises-operations, products/completed
            operations and contractual liability with respect to the liability
            assumed by either party hereunder.

      -     The limits of insurance shall not be less than:

            -     Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury/Property Damage) $1,000,000.00

            -     General Aggregate Limit (Annual Aggregate) $2,000,000.00

            -     Products-Completed Operations Limit (Annual Aggregate)
                  $1,000,000.00

            -     Personal Advertising Injury Limit (Each Occurrence)
                  $1,000,000.00

      -     Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance covering ownership,
            operation and maintenance of all owned, non-owned and hired motor
            vehicles used in connection with the performance of this Agreement,
            with limits of at least $1,000,000 combined single limit for bodily
            injury and property damage.

      The insurance limits required herein may be obtained through any
      combination of self-insurance, primary and excess or umbrella liability
      insurance. Each party shall furnish the other prior to the start of the
      work, if requested by the other, certificates or adequate proof of the
      insurance required by this clause. Each party shall notify the other in
      writing at least thirty (30) days prior to cancellation of or any material
      change in the policy. Notwithstanding the above, each party shall have the
      option where permitted by law to self-insure any or all of the foregoing
      risks.

3.38  FACILITIES ACCESS

      Each party shall provide the other with reasonable access to its
      facilities required in connection with the performance of their respective
      obligations under this Agreement. No charge shall be made for such access.
      Reasonable prior notification will be given when access is required.
      Neither party shall require releases of any personal rights in connections
      with visits to its premises.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -22-
<PAGE>   24

              ARTICLE 4 PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO LICENSED MATERIALS

4.1   LICENSE FOR LICENSED MATERIALS

      Upon delivery of Licensed Materials and payment of the applicable license
      fee(s) to Seller, Seller grants to Customer a perpetual, irrevocable,
      non-terminable and nonexclusive license to Use Licensed Materials in North
      America for its own business operations. No license is granted to Customer
      to Use the Licensed Materials outside North America or to sublicense such
      Licensed Materials furnished by Seller. Customer shall not reverse
      engineer, decompile or disassemble Software furnished as object code to
      generate corresponding Source Code, except as authorized by applicable
      law. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by Seller, Customer shall not
      modify Software furnished by Seller under this Agreement, except as
      authorized in Section 4.8 or otherwise authorized herein or in the
      Documentation. Further, Seller shall offer maintenance and support
      services for such Licensed Materials in accordance with mutually agreed
      terms and conditions.

      Customer shall not copy Software embodied in Firmware, except as necessary
      for its Use. Customer shall not make any copies of any other Licensed
      Materials except for backup and archival copies and as otherwise necessary
      in connection with the rights granted hereunder. Customer shall reproduce
      and include any Seller copyright and proprietary notice on all such
      necessary copies of the Licensed Materials. Customer shall also mark all
      media containing such copies with a warning that the Licensed Materials
      are subject to restrictions contained in an agreement between Seller and
      Customer and that such Licensed Materials are the property of Seller.
      Customer shall maintain records of the number and location of all copies
      of the Licensed Materials. Customer shall take appropriate action, by
      instruction, agreement, or otherwise, with the persons permitted access to
      the Licensed Materials so as to enable Customer to satisfy its obligations
      under this Agreement. If the Licensed Materials are no longer needed by,
      or useful to Customer, Customer shall return all copies of such Licensed
      Materials to Seller or follow written disposition instructions provided by
      Seller.

      Seller shall provide, at no extra cost to Customer, up to three (3) copies
      of the Application Software for use in Customer testing facility ("Testing
      Software"). Customer shall not make additional copies so the "Testing
      Software" and expressly agrees that it will not use the Testing Software
      for commercial service or for any purpose other than testing, and
      migration planning for entities to be acquired by Customer, provided that
      the period of use for migration planning shall not exceed 120 days. In
      addition, the testing Software may be used for disaster recovery at a fee
      to be mutually agreed.

4.2   CHANGES IN LICENSED MATERIALS

      Prior to shipment, Seller at its option may at any time modify the
      Licensed Materials, provided the modifications, under normal and proper
      Use, do not materially adversely affect the Use, function, or performance
      of the ordered Licensed Materials and such Licensed Materials continue to
      conform to the Specifications, and provided that Customer receives thirty
      (30) days notice of such modifications and an opportunity to cancel such
      order without charge. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, such
      substitution shall not result in any additional charges to Customer with
      respect to licenses for which Seller has quoted fees to Customer.

4.3   NON-CANCELLATION OF LICENSE

      The parties acknowledge that licenses to Use the Licensed Materials,
      together with the Products and Services, are critical to Customer's
      business operations, and as such, Seller may not under

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -23-
<PAGE>   25

      any circumstances terminate or cancel Customer's licenses hereunder or
      otherwise prevent Customer from Using the Licensed Materials (except as
      provided below), and such licenses shall survive any expiration or
      termination of this Agreement. If Customer fails to comply with any of the
      material terms and conditions of this Agreement with respect to the Use of
      Licensed Materials and such failure is not corrected within sixty (60)
      days of receipt of written notice thereof by Customer, then Seller shall
      be entitled to recover damages including direct and consequential damages
      for Customer's breach of license(s), not to exceed [*]. If Customer's
      failure to comply with such terms and conditions involves the disclosure
      of proprietary or confidential Information or impairs the protection of
      Seller's intellectual property, Customer acknowledges that Seller will
      suffer irreparable harm and damages will be insufficient to compensate
      Seller. Accordingly, in such event Seller shall be entitled to injunctive
      and other equitable relief to insure ongoing compliance with the
      applicable terms and conditions of the license, but not to prevent
      Customer's use of the Licensed Materials in accordance with the license
      terms and conditions. In addition, until such time as Customer cures its
      failure to comply with such terms and conditions, Seller shall have no
      obligation to grant any additional licenses or deliver any additional
      Software hereunder.

4.4   OPTIONAL SOFTWARE FEATURES

      Software provided to Customer under this Agreement may contain optional
      features that are separately licensed and priced. Seller shall notify
      Customer regarding all such features prior to or concurrent with delivery
      of the Software. Customer understands and agrees that such optional
      features will not be activated without written authorization from Seller
      and Customer's payment of the appropriate license fees. Seller will
      identify all locked-out features of Seller- developed Software. If, in
      spite of Customer's best efforts to comply with this restriction, such
      features are activated, Customer agrees to so notify Seller within five
      (5) business days from the date of Customer's knowledge that such features
      were activated and to either pay Seller the current license fees charged
      by Seller for the activated features or allow Seller to promptly
      deactivate such features.

4.5   ADDITIONAL RIGHTS IN LICENSED MATERIALS

      Customer may relocate the Software from time to time, as long as Customer
      remains in compliance with the license restrictions set forth herein. Upon
      Seller's reasonable request from time to time, Customer shall provide
      Seller a report regarding the current locations of the Software. Seller
      will not unreasonably withhold its consent to Use outside the United
      States provided that the proprietary information associated with the Use
      can be adequately protected and any other reasonable concerns of Seller
      are adequately addressed

      Customer may retain an archival copy of the Software for as long as such
      Software is relevant to Customer's operations.

4.6   INSTALLATION OF SOFTWARE

      If an order specifies that Customer is responsible for Software
      installation, Seller shall deliver the Software to Customer on or before
      the scheduled Delivery Date specified in the order. However, if the order
      specifies that Seller is responsible for such installation, Seller shall
      deliver and install the Software on Customer's computer(s)on or before the
      scheduled installation date specified in such order.

      Where Customer has assumed responsibility for the installation of newly
      licensed Software and in the event that Customer encounters installation
      difficulties, at Customer's request, Seller will, at the standard rate in
      effect at the time of the request, provide technical assistance, provided
      that if such installation difficulties are due to problems with the
      Software, Seller shall provide such assistance at no charge.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -24-
<PAGE>   26

4.7   MODIFICATIONS BY CUSTOMER TO USER CONTROLLED MODULES

      Customer may add to, delete from, or modify user controlled Software
      modules or menus as contemplated in the Seller's Related Documentation.
      Such changes or modifications, however extensive, shall not affect
      Seller's title to the licensed Software. Seller shall have no liability
      for Customer's errors in making such changes or modifications.

4.8   ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE RIGHTS

      Customer may transfer Software embedded in hardware without the payment of
      an additional right-to-use fee or transfer fee provided the license to
      such Software may only be transferred together with the Product with which
      Customer has a right to use such Software, and such right to use the
      Software shall continue to be limited to Use with such Product.
      Application Software for general purpose operating system(s) may be
      transferred under this Section in connection with Customer's sale of a
      business or subject to mutually agreed transfer fee(s) or other
      right-to-use fee(s), if any. Any transfer can be made to an end user for
      its own internal use and only under the following conditions:

      (a)   Such Software shall be Used only within North America; however,
            Seller will not unreasonably withhold its consent to Use outside
            North America provided that the proprietary information associated
            with the Use can be adequately protected and any other reasonable
            concerns of Seller are adequately addressed;

      (b)   Before any such Software shall be transferred, Customer shall notify
            Seller of such transfer and the transferee shall have agreed in
            writing (a copy of which will be provided to Seller at its request)
            to keep such Software in confidence and to comply with corresponding
            conditions respecting Use of Licensed Materials as those imposed on
            Customer; and,

      (c)   Within North America, the transferee shall have the same right to
            Software warranty or Software maintenance for such Software as the
            transferor, provided the transferee continues to pay the fees, if
            any, associated with such Software or Software maintenance.

      (d)   In no event shall such transfer be made to any competitor of Seller
            who is in the business of developing or manufacturing comparable
            systems.

4.9   SOURCE CODE ESCROW

      At Customer's request and expense and subject to the terms of a mutually
      negotiated escrow agreement with an independent escrow agent reasonably
      acceptable to both parties, Seller will deposit into an escrow account a
      copy of the human-readable source code and available documentation
      therefor (collectively, "Source Code") for certain Seller-developed
      Application Software licensed under this Agreement. The Source Code shall
      be for Application Software and not apply to host switch Software or to
      host switch optional Software features.

      The Source Code escrow agreement shall provide for release of the Source
      Code to Customer if and when one of the following events occurs:

      (a)   Seller becomes insolvent or makes an assignment for the benefit of
            creditors;

      (b)   A petition is filed by or against Seller under any state or federal
            bankruptcy or insolvency law alleging that Seller is insolvent or
            unable to pay debts as they mature, which petition is not withdraw
            or stayed within sixty (60) days;

      (c)   Seller announces it is will discontinue manufacture of the
            Application Software and will no longer maintain the Application
            Software;

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -25-
<PAGE>   27

      (d)   Seller ceases to maintain a standard, supported version of
            Application Software furnished pursuant to this Agreement, and
            support services are not available from another entity (either
            working with or independently from Seller);

      (e)   Seller's enhancements and development of the Application Software
            require migration to a different operating environment and Seller no
            longer provides standard support services for the version of the
            Application Software that runs on the operating system used by
            Customer;

      (f)   A court determines that Seller has continuously and repeatedly
            breached its obligations under this Article 4 and has failed to cure
            its breach.

      If the Source Code is released to Customer as provided above, Seller
      grants Customer a nonexclusive, nontransferable, limited right to use and
      modify the Source Code only to the extent necessary to maintain and
      enhance the corresponding Application Software.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -26-
<PAGE>   28

                      ARTICLE 5 GENERAL SERVICES PROVISION

5.1   SCOPE OF SERVICES

      To the extent required to design, engineer, install, integrate, implement,
      test, monitor, order, activate and delivery voice and data services, and
      document the Network, Network Architecture, Network Technology, Network
      Elements, Enterprise Connectivity, Operational Support Systems, and
      Business Support Systems, Seller will provide ongoing Services to
      accomplish the Solution as outlined in Section 2.2, in all attached
      Exhibits to this Agreement and any successors thereto.

      Subject to the provisions of Section 3.16, and in recognition of the fact
      that Seller provides similar Services for other customers, this Agreement
      will not prevent Seller from providing such similar Services or restrict
      Seller's use of any personnel who may be provided to Customer under this
      Agreement.

5.2   PERSONNEL & SUBCONTRACTORS

      a)    Seller reserves the right to re-assign and substitute its personnel
            with personnel having comparable qualifications at any time during
            the term of this Agreement, with no interruption of Customer's
            services.

      b)    Seller reserves the right to subcontract, with Customer's prior
            written approval, such approval to not be unreasonably withheld,
            specific Services to third parties and to use independent
            consultants provided that the use of subcontractors and/or
            consultants will not cause any interruption of Services to Customer.
            Services supplied by such third parties shall be subject to the
            terms and conditions of this Agreement as if supplied directly by
            Seller and Seller shall be responsible for the Services performed.

      c)    Customer's site representative shall exercise no direct supervision
            over any personnel furnished by Seller or any subcontractor, but
            Customer's site representative (or such representative's designee)
            shall be available to Seller for consultation and advice upon
            Seller's reasonable request and advance written notice.
            Notwithstanding the foregoing, Customer may establish reasonable
            rules and procedures with which personnel furnished by Seller or any
            subcontractor shall be obligated to comply, provided that such rules
            and procedures do not interfere with the performance of Seller's
            obligations under this Agreement.

5.3   WORK OR SERVICES PERFORMED BY OTHERS

      Seller is expected to provide Services whereby Seller oversees the work of
      Customer's vendors or contractors pursuant to an Exhibit. In such cases,
      Seller shall be responsible for the third party vendor performing the
      Services in accordance with the applicable Exhibit. If Customer oversees
      the work of vendors or contractors, Customer shall use all reasonable
      efforts to ensure that work or services performed at the site by Customer
      or its other vendors or contractors shall not interfere with Seller's
      performance of Services. Seller shall have no responsibility or liability
      with respect to such work or services performed by those vendors or
      contractors for which Customer has oversight responsibility. If Customer
      or its other vendors or contractors fail to timely complete the site
      readiness or if Customer's or its other vendors' or contractors' work
      unreasonably interferes with Seller's performance, the scheduled
      completion date of Seller's Services under this Agreement shall be
      extended as necessary to compensate for such delay or

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -27-
<PAGE>   29

      interference. Each party shall use all reasonable efforts to avoid
      interfering with work or services performed by the other party and its
      other vendors or contractors.

5.4   CHANGES TO SERVICES

      Changes to Services requested by Customer shall be handled in accordance
      with the Change Order process described in Section 3.3. Customer's request
      for changes shall be provided in writing to Seller's designated
      representative for Services.

5.5   SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SERVICES

      From time to time, both Seller and Customer will be required to provide
      certain items or perform certain tasks prior to, or in order to, implement
      the Services that may be required under this Agreement. Seller and
      Customer will review Seller's standard requirements for the Services, SOW,
      Methods of Procedure where applicable, and mutually determine the tasks
      that each party must perform and or the items to be furnished by each
      party.

5.6   STATEMENTS OF WORK

      Certain Services are set forth in the initial Statement of Work, which is
      attached to and incorporated herein as Exhibit G. Seller and Customer may
      enter into additional written Statements of Work, and, if so, each will be
      automatically incorporated into this Agreement upon signature by an
      authorized representative of each party without further amendment.

5.7   DOCUMENTATION

      Upon payment by Customer of the applicable price, Customer shall own all
      rights in the documents and plans created by Seller as set forth in
      Section 2.2, to the extent developed specifically for Customer's Network
      or Network Technology. Customer shall not acquire any rights to other
      intellectual property utilized by Seller in creating the aforementioned
      documents and plans.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -28-
<PAGE>   30

                               ARTICLE 6 WARRANTY

6.1   PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE

      Seller warrants to Customer only, that during the applicable warranty
      period (I) Products (exclusive of Software) will be free from defects in
      material and workmanship and will conform to the Specifications for such
      Products; (ii) Software will be free from those defects which materially
      affect performance in accordance with the Specifications.

      The warranty period for switching, transmission and optical hardware
      Products and the associated Software (acquired with the Product that
      enables it to function) is [*] and for all other Software is for a period
      of [*], in each case commencing on acceptance by Customer as set forth in
      this Agreement. The warranty period for any Product (or part thereof)
      repaired or replaced under this section is the unexpired portion of the
      new Product warranty period or [*], whichever is longer.

      If, under normal and proper use, a defect or non-conformity appears in
      Products or Software during the applicable warranty period and Customer
      notifies Seller in writing of such defect or non-conformance during such
      period or promptly thereafter and follows Seller's instructions regarding
      return of defective or non-conforming Product or Software, Seller, at its
      option, will either repair, replace or correct the same without charge or,
      if Seller is unable after using its best efforts to repair, replace or
      correct within a reasonable time period, provide a refund of the original
      purchase price or license fee. Seller may offset any refund amounts owed
      by Seller to Customer against amounts due from Customer to Seller. No
      Product or Software will be accepted for repair or replacement without the
      written authorization of and in accordance with instructions of Seller.
      Removal and reinstallation expenses as well as transportation expenses
      associated with returning such Product or Software to Seller shall be
      borne by Seller, unless it is ultimately determined that such Product or
      Software is not defective, in which case it shall be borne by Customer.
      Seller shall pay the costs of transportation of the repaired or replacing
      Product or Software to any United States destination designated by
      Customer. If the returned Product or Software is not defective, Customer
      shall pay Seller's reasonable costs of handling, inspecting, testing and
      transportation and, if applicable, travel and related expenses. In
      repairing or replacing any Product, part of Product, or Software medium
      under this warranty, Seller may use either new, remanufactured,
      reconditioned, refurbished or functionally equivalent Products or parts.
      Replaced Products or parts shall become Seller's property. Response and
      restoral times during the warranty period will be the same as the
      response/restoral times specified in the maintenance and support services
      agreement to be negotiated between the parties.

      With respect to Products, which are not readily returnable for repair,
      Seller shall repair or replace the Products at Customer's site. Customer,
      at its expense, shall make the Products accessible for repair or
      replacement.

6.2   YEAR 2000

      Seller agrees that all Software licensed to Customer pursuant to this
      Agreement shall be Year 2000 Capable Software. Seller agrees that,
      notwithstanding any other warranty provided to Customer pursuant to this
      Section during the Year 2000 Warranty Period, the period beginning on the
      warranty start date and ending on the later of three (3) months after
      Acceptance or March 31, 2001, that Year 2000 Capable Software will (a)
      process calendar dates falling on or after January 1, 2000, with
      substantially the same functionality as such Software processes calendar
      dates falling on or before December 31, 1999, (b)provide substantially the
      same functionality with respect to the introduction of records containing
      dates falling on or after January 1, 2000, as it provides with respect to
      the introduction of records containing dates

-----------------------
[*]  Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
     throughout this exhibit.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -29-
<PAGE>   31

      falling on or before December 31, 1999, and (c) correctly calculate and
      compare date data between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries without
      impairment of the functioning of the Software, including recognition of
      the year 2000 as a leap year. All of the foregoing functionality shall be
      known as "Year 2000 Capability". In the event Customer has or licenses
      more than one version of "Year 2000 Capable" Software, such versions of
      Software, if they are intended by Seller to interoperate, will be
      compatible and interoperate in such manner as to process between them, as
      applicable, date related data correctly as described herein. All of the
      foregoing functionality shall be known as "Year 2000 Interoperability".
      The foregoing sets forth an additional warranted specification for
      Software developed by Seller that Seller has identified as having "Year
      2000 Capability". The failure of such Software to meet such specification
      during the Year 2000 Warranty Period shall, to the extent the Software
      remains then subject to warranty protection, entitle Customer to the
      remedies set out in this Section 6.1. Moreover, nothing in the foregoing
      shall be deemed to make Seller responsible for the "Year 2000 Capability"
      or "Year 2000 Interoperability" of any third party software interoperating
      or intended to interoperate with Software developed by Seller. Customer
      and/ or the manufacturer or other supplier of such third party software
      shall be responsible for such compliance and assuring the ability of such
      software to successfully operate while interoperating with Software
      developed by Seller.

6.3   SERVICES

      Seller agrees to perform Services in a professional and workmanlike
      manner, in accordance with the Statement of Work and Specification for
      such Services, and in accordance with good usage and accepted practices in
      the community in which Services are performed using material free from
      defects except where such material is provided by Customer. If Services
      performed by Seller are not so performed, and if Customer notifies Seller
      to that effect within a thirty (30) business day period commencing on the
      date of completion of the service, Seller will correct any defects and
      deficiencies or, if after using its best efforts, Seller is unable to
      correct such defects and deficiencies, Seller shall render a full refund
      of the original charge for the defective or deficient Service. Seller may
      offset any refund amounts by Seller to Customer against amounts due from
      Customer to Seller.

      If engineering or installation Services only are not performed as
      warranted, and Customer so notifies Seller within a three (3) month period
      commencing on the date of completion of the Services, Seller will correct
      the defect or non-conforming Services or, if after using its best efforts,
      Seller is unable to correct such defects and deficiencies, Seller shall
      render a full refund of the original charges for the defective or
      deficient Services. Seller may offset any refund amounts by Seller to
      Customer against amounts due from Customer to Seller.

6.4   NETWORK AND INTEGRATION

      Seller represents, warrants and covenants that Seller is familiar with the
      intended use by Customer of the Network as described in this Agreement and
      in the applicable Operations Plan and that the Network and its associated
      Deliverables are suitable for and will satisfy such use and the terms of
      this Agreement in all respects, including the Network Architecture and
      design and Product recommendations.

      Seller represents and covenants that the Network, if implemented in
      accordance with the Network Architecture, is designed to and will
      interface and interoperate in accordance with the Network Architecture,
      the Solutions Specifications and other corresponding Specifications in
      this Agreement as a fully integrated system. If the Network fails to so
      interface and interoperate during the Term of this Agreement, Seller shall
      initiate corrective actions after receipt of notice of the defect or
      failure and shall promptly cure such defect at Seller's sole cost and
      expense. This warranty shall not apply to the extent that a failure
      results from (i) the Network being installed at Customer's direction by a
      party other than Seller and said Installation is not in accordance

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -30-
<PAGE>   32

      with the Network Architecture or (ii) a failure or defect or Third-Party
      Products to operate in accordance with their specifications. This warranty
      shall not be deemed to extend, limit or substitute for any warranty for
      any individual Product provided by Seller

6.5   NETWORK PERFORMANCE

      6.5.1 Seller recognizes that Customer may suffer injury which will be
      difficult to determine with certainty as a result of Outages resulting
      from causes which are a breach of Seller's warranty obligations as set
      forth in Sections 6.1, 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4 hereof.

      6.5.2 A "Business Hour Outage" is an Outage with occurs on Monday through
      Friday between the hours of 8 am and 5 pm. As used herein, "Business Hour
      Outage" means an unscheduled loss of functionality of a host switch
      Network from the causes set forth in Section 6.5.1 above which results in
      the loss of the capability to originate or terminate five percent (5%) or
      more of the active voice channels then in service with the host switch
      Network for a period of time exceeding five (5) minutes, or the loss of
      capability of a multi-line 15 or more lines end-user customer to originate
      or terminate any calls on all of its lines for a period of time exceeding
      five (5) minutes.

      6.5.3 During the warranty period, Business Hour Outage damages will be
      calculates as follows: [*] of the Business Hour Outage, plus [*] for each
      minute the duration of the Business Hour Outage exceeds [*].

      6.5.4 "Other Outages" is an Outage which occurs during a time other than a
      Business Hour Outage. As used herein, "Other Outage" means an unscheduled
      loss of functionality of a host switch Network for the reason set forth in
      Section 6.5.1 above which results in the capability to originate or
      terminate [*] or more of the active voice channels than in service within
      the host switch network for a period of time exceeding ten (10) minutes,
      or the loss of capability of a multi-line [15 or more lines] end-user
      customer to originate or terminate any calls on all of its lines for a
      period of time exceeding ten (10) minutes.

      6.5.5 During the warranty period, Other Outage damages will be calculated
      as follows: [*] for the first thirty (30) minutes of the Other Outage,
      plus [*] per minute for each minute the duration of the outage exceeds
      30 minutes.

      6.5.6 In the event a Second Outage occurs within thirty (30) days of a
      prior Outage (the "First Outage"), the Outage damages specified in
      Sections 6.5.3 and 6.5.4 will be [*]. In the event a Third Outage occurs
      within thirty (30) days of the First Outage, the Outage damages set forth
      in Sections 6.5.3 and 6.5.4 will be [*].

      6.5.7 In no event will Seller's liability for Outage damages pursuant to
      either Section 6.5.3 or Section 6.5.4 exceed [*] with respect to each
      Outage in any given host switch Network, provided however, that said cap
      will be [*] in the event of a Second Outage occurring

-----------------------
[*]  Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
     throughout this exhibit.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -31-
<PAGE>   33
      within thirty (30) days of a First Outage and [*] in the event of a Third
      Outage occurring within thirty (30) days of a Second Outage.

      In addition, the Seller's total liability for all Outage damages for the
      Network will not exceed [*] per calendar year until Customer deploys more
      than [*] host switches. For each additional host switch deployed by
      Customer, the damage total liability cap will increase by [*]. These
      Outage damages will be Customer's sole remedy for any failure in Network
      performance as set forth in this Agreement.

      6.5.8 Any damages for which Seller is liable pursuant to this Section
      shall be credited against an invoice for future Purchase Orders during the
      term as the parties may agree. To the extent, Seller does not place
      Purchase Orders sufficient for Customer to utilize the entire Outage
      Credit in the six months after the Outage Credit accrues, Seller shall
      refund the unused portion of the Outage Credit to Customer.

      6.5.9 Notwithstanding the foregoing, Seller will have no liability for:

      (i) Outages caused by a Force Majeure;

      (ii) Outages resulting from a mutually agreed scheduled activity such as
      Network maintenance or loading of Software that does not exceed the
      scheduled Outage interval

      (iii) Outages resulting from Customer's, its subcontractor's or any third
      party's (employed by the Customer) failure to follow the Documentation;

      (iv) Outages resulting the failure of Customer to have (a) competent
      technicians available to respond to notification from Seller, or (b)
      adequate spares as recommended by Seller on site to repair the problem or
      (c) from Customer's failure to perform an assigned responsibility under
      this Agreement or the Exhibits.

      (v) Outages resulting from an end user customer to which this Section
      applies failing to properly maintain its Network or otherwise follow
      operating procedures, based on standard industry processes applicable to
      networks of similar size and scope.

      6.5.10 Customer acknowledges that the provisions of this network
      performance warranty are based on Customer's continuing to purchase the
      full range of Deliverables and Service set forth in Section 2.2. If
      Customer chooses to reduce the scope of Seller's responsibilities, the
      parties will need to renegotiate the provisions of this Network
      Performance Warranty.

6.6   DISCLAIMER

      The foregoing warranties will not extend to defective conditions or
      non-conformities resulting from Customer's modifications, misuse, neglect,
      accident or abuse; improper wiring, repairing, splicing, alteration,
      installation, storage, maintenance; or use, in each case, in a manner not
      in accordance with Seller's or its vendor's Specifications or operating
      instructions or failure of Customer to apply previously applicable
      Seller's modifications or corrections. In addition, Seller makes no
      warranty with respect to Products which have had their serial numbers or
      month and year of manufacture removed, altered and with respect to
      expendable items, including, without limitation, fuses, light bulbs, motor
      brushes and the like. No warranty is made that Software will run
      uninterrupted or error free, and in addition Seller makes no warranty with
      respect to defects related to Customer's data base errors.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                                      -32-
<PAGE>   34

      THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
      EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED
      WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -33-
<PAGE>   35

                              ARTICLE 7 ATTACHMENTS

      All Attachments to this Agreement are incorporated herein by reference.
      Any additional Attachments agreed upon by the parties subsequent to the
      Effective Date, and any Amendments to this Agreement which are subject to
      Section 3.29, shall also be incorporated herein by reference to this
      Agreement.

             [THE REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -34-
<PAGE>   36

                           ARTICLE 8 ENTIRE AGREEMENT

      The terms and conditions contained in this Agreement supersede all prior
      oral or written understandings between the parties with respect to the
      subject matter thereof and constitute the entire agreement between the
      parties with respect to such subject matter. This Agreement may be
      executed in several counterparts, all of which taken together shall
      constitute one single agreement between the parties hereto.

      IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed
      by their duly authorized representatives on the date(s) indicated.

-------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
   ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP INC.             LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.
-------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
BY: /s/ CLIFFORD G. RUDOLPH            BY: /s/ S. TIM GROPP
-------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
SIGNATURE: CLIFFORD G. RUDOLPH         SIGNATURE: S. TIM GROPP
-------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
NAME: Clifford G. Rudolph              NAME: S. Tim Gropp
-------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
TITLE: Chief Executive Officer         TITLE: Vice President, Sales
-------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------
DATE: July 30, 1999                    DATE: July 30, 1999
-------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------

                     LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. - PROPRIETARY
                                      -35-

<PAGE>   37

                                   EXHIBIT A
                                     TO THE
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

             PURCHASE AND SERVICE OF IMA-CA VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEMS

1.      RELATIONSHIP OF DOCUMENTS; AGREEMENT TO SELL IMA-CA PRODUCTS

This Exhibit A to the Agreement, together with its Schedules attached hereto
(collectively, the "Exhibit"), contains the terms and conditions under which
Seller, acting through its wholly owned subsidiary Octel Communications
Corporation ("OCC") shall sell and service IMA-CA voice processing systems.

OCC shall sell (or license) to and service for Customer such IMA-CA Products and
IMA-CA Software licenses described in this Exhibit as Customer may elect to
obtain by executing one or more Order Schedules and/or Customer purchase orders.
Customer's purchases and OCC's service of IMA-CA Products and IMA-CA Software
offered by OCC shall be and are subject to the terms and conditions of this
Exhibit A. The terms and conditions of Customer's standard purchase order which
conflict with or in any way purport to amend any of the terms and conditions of
this Exhibit A shall be of no force or effect.

2.      EFFECT

The Parties to this Exhibit agree that the following sections of the Agreement
shall be excluded and/or amended solely in connection with the purchase
contemplated hereunder of OCC's voice processing systems, as indicated herein:

3.      ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS FOR OCC PRODUCTS

Solely for purposes of this Exhibit A, Article I Section 1.1 Definitions is
hereby amended to include the following capitalized terms which shall have the
meanings ascribed to them herein:

a. "CAPACITY ON DEMAND PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE" Capacity On Demand ("COD")
Products consist of IMA-CA Equipment and/or IMA-CA Software with COD. "IMA-CA
SOFTWARE WITH COD" is software that determines the capacity of OCC's IMA-CA
Product to, among other things, store messages, create mailboxes and add
functionality to mailboxes. IMA-CA Software with COD may be enabled at the time
of manufacture or remotely after installation, in incremental units of capacity.

b. "ENHANCEMENT" shall mean any improvements, additions and revisions to the
IMA-CA Software which contain substantially new functionality, which at times
may also be referred to as an "Engineering Upgrade".

c. "IMA-CA SYSTEM" means the entirety of the IMA-CA Products and IMA-CA Software
described in an Order Schedule which are to be installed at a particular site.

d. "INSTALLATION DATE" means the date an IMA-CA System is connected to
Customer's access lines and Customer's power source. For IMA-CA Products other
than an IMA-CA System, Installation Date means the date the IMA-CA Product is
installed in an existing IMA-CA System.

e. "ORDER SCHEDULE" shall mean the document used to purchase OCC IMA-CA Systems
and license IMA-CA Software under this Exhibit and which is substantially in the
form attached as SCHEDULE A.

f. "SYSTEM UPDATES" shall mean those improvements, additions, and revisions to
the IMA-CA Software which do not contain substantially new functionality and are
part of OCC's normal IMA-CA Software release process.

4.      OCC ADDITIONAL PURCHASE PRICE TERMS

Solely for the purposes of this Exhibit A, Article III Section 3.6 Prices is
hereby amended as follows:

The Prices shall be specified in the Order Schedule and do not include freight
charges or applicable taxes. The Price for all IMA-CA Products, IMA-CA Software
licenses and Services will be the then-current price on OCC's official price
list ("Price List") less a [*] discount on all discountable IMA-CA Products and
IMA-CA Software as indicated in the Price List.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                                          Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 1

<PAGE>   38

5.     CONDITIONS FOR INSTALLATION AND ACCESS

Solely for the purposes of this Exhibit A, Article III Section 3.38 Facilities
Access is expressly amended by the following and Article 5 is amended to include
the following Section 5.9 Installation:

Prior to the delivery of each IMA-CA System, Customer, at its own expense, shall
make available a room on the Premises for installation of the IMA-CA System that
meets the environmental and other site requirements as specified in Exhibit C of
the Agreement, Customer shall also provide reasonable access to the Premises and
the IMA-CA System for OCC's installation and maintenance personnel or other
authorized OCC representatives.

6.     TRAINING AND DOCUMENTATION

Solely for the purposes of this Exhibit A, Article III Section 3.19
Documentation is expressly superseded by the following:

Unless otherwise noted in the applicable Order Schedule, OCC will provide to
Customer for each IMA-CA System, the training, consultation and documentation
specified in Schedule B. Transportation and other expenses to and from training
facilities are Customer's responsibility. Additional training and documentation
will be available to Customer at OCC's standard prices in effect at the time
such training and/or consultation is performed or such documentation is
purchased. All documentation provided hereunder shall be in a format and of a
quality commonly accepted in the industry with respect to content, size,
legibility and reproducibility.

7.     OCC WARRANTIES

Solely for the purposes of this Exhibit A, Article VI Warranty is expressly
amended by the following:

      7.a  IMA-CA PRODUCT WARRANTY WITH COD

      The applicable Warranty Period for IMA-CA Products, IMA-CA Software with
COD, Upgrades, and IMA-CA Systems shall be as follows:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        IMA-CA PRODUCT:                                      WARRANTY PERIOD:
        ---------------                                      ----------------
        <S>    <C>                                           <C>
        1.     New IMA-CA System (IMA-CA Software and        [*] from Installation Date
               IMA-CA Products) with COD

        2.     COD upgrades and expansions (IMA-CA           [*] Installation Date
               Products only)

        3.     IMA-CA Software Upgrades (including           [*] from Installation Date in the case of new
               new releases of IMA-CA system Software        releases and [*] from date of ennoblement by
               and new IMA-CA Software features whose        OCC or its authorized agent in the case of new
               capacity is not variable)                     features

        4.     IMA-CA Software with COD (e.g.,               [*] from the date of ennablement by OCC or its
               incremental units of message storage          authorized agent
               hours, number of mailboxes, etc.)
</TABLE>

      7.b REMOTE ACCESS:

      Customer is aware and agrees that OCC through its remote access to each
      IMA-CA System has the ability to audit Customer's use of each IMA-CA
      System. As a result of any such audit, should OCC reasonably conclude that
      COD features or incremental units of capacity, ports or mailboxes have
      been enabled for which Customer has not paid the specified price or
      license fee, OCC will notify Customer and request that Customer pay the
      specified price or license fee within thirty (30) days. If Customer fails
      to (1) pay the specified price or license fee, (2) turn off the
      unauthorized COD features, incremental units of capacity, ports or
      mailboxes, or (3) reasonably demonstrate that Customer has paid for such
      COD features capacity ports or mailboxes, then at the conclusion of said
      thirty (30) days (without resolution), OCC shall have the right to shut
      down only the COD features or incremental units of capacity, ports or
      mailboxes that have been enabled for which Customer has not paid the
      specified price or license fee.

      7.c DISCLAIMER OF OTHER WARRANTIES; LIMITATION OF REMEDIES:

      Solely for the purposes of this Exhibit A, Article VI Warranty Section 6.6
Disclaimer is amended to include the following:

      Except as otherwise expressly set forth in this Agreement, OCC makes no
      express or implied warranty that the IMA-CA Product is immune from or
      prevents fraudulent intrusion, unauthorized use or disclosure or loss of
      proprietary information. Customer acknowledges that certain features, such
      as Conference Mailbox, Skip Password, Password Reset and Monitor

                                          Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 2

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   39

      Mailbox, could be improperly used in violation of privacy laws. Customer
      assumes all responsibility for its improper use of the IMA-CA, or any
      portions or features thereof, in violation of any applicable privacy laws.

8.         POST WARRANTY PRODUCT  AND SOFTWARE SUPPORT

Solely for the purposes of this Exhibit A, Article VI Warranty is expressly
amended to include the following:

Customer agrees to have personnel trained and duly certified in OCC's
Installation and Maintenance Training Course in sufficient numbers to provide
coverage at the locations of Customer's IMA-CA System Sites as deemed adequate
by Customer , but no less than one OCC certified Customer technician per IMA-CA
System site.

      8.a POST WARRANTY: After the expiration of a IMA-CA Product or IMA-CA
      Software warranty, Customer may order Technical Assistance and Parts
      Replacement Agreement Program ("TAPRA") in accordance with Schedule C
      attached hereto. If Customer chooses not to order TAPRA, OCC will provide
      maintenance service to Customer on a time and materials basis at OCC's
      then-current rates. OCC will make parts and materials available at its
      then-current prices; provided, however, Customer shall receive a [*]
      credit toward any such parts if the replaced part is returned to OCC
      within ten (10) days after receipt of its replacement. For a period of
      five (5) years from Acceptance of each IMA-CA Product and item of IMA-CA
      Software, OCC will make available maintenance and support and spare parts
      as described in this Section and in Schedule C.

      8.b SOFTWARE SUPPORT: OCC will periodically provide performance related
      engineering modifications and changes ("Engineering Updates") at no charge
      during warranty, while under TAPRA, or for Services provided by Seller
      under Exhibit B in conformance of the Agreement. Additionally, OCC will
      provide safety related changes, and modifications at no charge. Customer
      agrees to install such Engineering Updates promptly once provided by OCC
      on Customer's IMA-CA System. Engineering Updates will be defined by OCC,
      exclusively. For IMA-CA Systems for which IMA-CA Software Updates that
      have been provided to Customer but have not been installed on the IMA-CA
      System within thirty (30) days from the date the IMA-CA Software Update
      was provided, OCC will thereafter provide software maintenance support on
      a time and material basis at OCC's then-current rates. From time to time
      OCC will introduce software and/or hardware features that enhance the
      functionality of IMA-CA Products or IMA-CA Software ("Upgrades"). Upgrades
      will be made available to Customer at OCC's Price Schedule in effect at
      the time of purchase of such Upgrades.

9.     SYSTEM INTEGRATION

During the term of this Agreement, IMA-CA Systems purchased from OCC will
interface with the Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) enabled Lucent Host
Switch. In addition, OCC will make commercially reasonable efforts to Integrate
IMA-CA Systems with Lucent Host Switches purchased by Customer during the term
of this Agreement. For purposes of this section, "Integrate" shall mean that an
IMA-CA System interoperates with a Lucent Host Switch to in a manner that is
functionally equivalent to how IMA-CA Systems interoperate with 5ESS host
switches.

In the event the Customer chooses to buy a Lucent Host Switch which does not
Integrate with the IMA-CA System at the time of purchase, Customer's IMA-CA
purchase commitment as set forth in Section 2.5 of the master Agreement will be
suspended, only until such time as the IMA-CA is able to integrate with the
Lucent Host Switch (the "Suspension Period"). Customer's purchase commitment of
[*] IMA-CA Systems and related Voice Messaging Services shall be reduced by the
number of Lucent Host Switches purchased during the Suspension Period, and
Customer shall have no obligation to purchase IMA-CA Systems or related Voice
Messaging Services for any Lucent Host Switches which are purchased during the
Suspension Period.

10.    OCC IMA-CA SOFTWARE LICENSE AND IMA-CA PRODUCTS RESTRICTION

Solely for the purposes of this Exhibit A, Article IV Provisions Applicable to
Licensed Materials is expressly amended as follows:

      10.a.1         Section 4.3 is expressly amended as follows:

      If the irrevocable nature of the license grant in Section 4.1 or the
      rights or restrictions set forth in this Section 4.3 are in violation of
      any agreement in effect as of the Effective Date between OCC and any third
      party from whom OCC has licensed any portion of the IMA-CA Software, then
      the license grant in Section 4.1 and/or Section 4.3 shall be deemed
      amended, solely with respect to the IMA-CA Software and solely to the
      extent necessary to comply with such agreement, to provide OCC a limited
      right to terminate Customer's software license upon Customer's material
      breach which remains uncured for a reasonable period of time after written
      notice thereof. In addition, solely with respect to IMA-CA Software,
      replace "not to exceed [*] with [*]."

      10.a.2         Section 4.8 is expressly amended to add the following:

                                          Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 3

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   40

      Before Customer may transfer any Software license rights to the IMA-CA
      software to any reseller of voice messaging equipment, Customer shall
      obtain OCC's written approval, which shall not be unreasonably withheld.

      10.b IMA-CA SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS WITH COD:

      10.b.1. INCREMENTAL CAPACITY LICENSED AS SEPARATE IMA-CA SOFTWARE
      PRODUCTS. - Each incremental unit of capacity for all IMA-CA Software with
      COD will be considered a separate IMA-CA Software product that is licensed
      in object code form to Customer pursuant to the terms of this Section.
      Only that IMA-CA Software that has been properly ordered from OCC, paid
      for by Customer, and whose enablement has been authorized and directed by
      OCC, will be licensed to Customer. Customer specifically acknowledges that
      only OCC is entitled to authorize the enablement of any IMA-CA Software
      (or features thereof) and that Customer will not enable (remotely or
      otherwise) or attempt to enable any IMA-CA Software (or features thereof),
      nor will it authorize or assist any third party to do so. Customer will
      promptly notify OCC if it has knowledge of any third party attempt to
      enable IMA-CA Software (or features thereof).

      10.b.2. CONDITIONS FOR ENABLEMENT OF IMA-CA SOFTWARE FEATURE PRODUCTS. To
      facilitate OCC's enablement of IMA-CA Software features and capabilities,
      Customer will make available remote system-level access to Customer's OCC
      IMA-CA Systems at a time mutually agreeable to both Customer and OCC.

      10.b.3. OCC AUDIT RIGHTS. Customer agrees that OCC or its authorized agent
      may, at its discretion, electronically inspect and audit the configuration
      of Customer' OCC IMA-CA System(s) for compliance with the terms of this
      IMA-CA Software License at the following times: (i) at the time of
      enablement of any separately licensed IMA-CA Software feature or
      capability, such as incremental capacity for OCC's IMA-CA Products, and
      (ii) once each calendar year upon three (3) business days' notice to
      Customer from OCC. Customer agrees to cooperate with OCC or its authorized
      agent in conducting such audits including making available remote system
      level access to Customer's IMA-CA Systems for such purpose.

11.    MARKETING PROGRAM

Solely for the purposes of this Exhibit A, Lucent's marketing program
(CheckMate) is expressly superseded by the following:

Customer may participate in OCC's marketing program, known as the "ADvantage
Fund Participation Program" under the terms and conditions specified in Schedule
D attached hereto.

                                          Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 4
<PAGE>   41

                             SCHEDULE A TO EXHIBIT A
                               OCC ORDER SCHEDULE

Exhibit A to the Purchase Agreement No. LNM99NMYK09ATG ("Agreement") between the
Customer identified below and OCC is hereby incorporated by reference as though
set forth in full herein.

<TABLE>
<S>                                                         <C>
CUSTOMER:                                                   PREMISES (IF DIFFERENT THAN INVOICE ADDRESS):
INVOICE ADDRESS
________________________________________________________    Various, to be specified on Customer Purchase Order(s)
________________________________________________________    ____________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________    ____________________________________________________________
ATTN: __________________________________________________    ATTN: ______________________________________________________
                                                            TELEPHONE NO: _________________  FACSIMILE NO: _____________

IMA-CA PRODUCT CONFIGURATION:
"IMA-CA Product" as used in Exhibit A shall include:        IMA-CA SOFTWARE OPTIONS:
                                                             1     CLEC offer package (See Exhibit A.1 attached)
                                                            ----
System Type:  IMA-CA   Serial No.  TBD                      ____   ______________________________________________________
Ports: 24   Drive Type: RAID 1   Drive Quantity: 4          ____   ______________________________________________________
      ----                                      ---         ____   ______________________________________________________
                                                            ____   ______________________________________________________
                                                            ____   ______________________________________________________
HARDWARE:
System
 1     CLEC Offer with Message Redundancy (RAID) package
----       (see SCHEDULE A.1 attached)                      AUTHORIZED CAPACITY:
____   _________________________________________________    ____________________
____   _________________________________________________    ____________________
____   _________________________________________________    ____________________
____   _________________________________________________    ____________________

                                                            Literature:
Other equipment                                             ____   Standard
____   _________________________________________________    ____   Other
____   _________________________________________________     x     To be ATG branded using OCC Marketing Assistance
                                                            ----   and tools in the Octel ADvantage Program
____   _________________________________________________
[SEE SCHEDULE A.1 ATTACHED]                                 ____   ________________________________________________
(ADD ADDITIONAL SHEETS AS NECESSARY)

PURCHASE PRICE:  For each 5ESS host installation,           IMPLEMENTATION CHARGES:
[*] (exclusive of freight, related charges and              [*] for Customer's selection of
  ----------                                                 --------------------------------
 taxes, if applicable).                                     Full  Implementation as more fully described in Schedule C (for
                                                            --------------------
                                                            billing purposes only, will be included in the purchase price upon
                                                            invoice).
Scheduled Shipment Date:  February, 1999 .
                          --------------
Scheduled Installation Date:  March, 1999 .
                              -----------
Please reference Purchase Order #  _____________________
for payment purposes only.
</TABLE>

                                          Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 5

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   42

                             SCHEDULE A TO EXHIBIT A
                               OCC ORDER SCHEDULE

                                      TAPRA

     MODULES COVERED    Voice   [x]       Data and [ ]               Custom [ ]
                                      Applications             Applications

Applications included under customer application support:
__________________________________________________________________.

List price of included applications:
_______________________________________________________________________________.

POST-WARRANTY SERVICE PLAN:

Customer selects the: two (2) year TAPRA as more fully described in Schedule C
(service program checked above)

Purchase price for the service plan is $ 0 , payable quarterly, annually or paid
                                        ---
in full (circle) for  2  year(s).
-------              ---

Service shall begin at expiration of warranty
                       ----------------------
Please reference Purchase Order # _______________________ for payment purposes
only.

CUSTOM APPLICATIONS:

The purchase price for _______________________________ described in the attached
Scope of Work (exclusive of freight charges and taxes) shall be
$_________________________________________.

The purchase price for ______________________________ Services described in the
attached Scope of Work shall be $_____________________________________________.

The scheduled implementation date for the _______________________________ is
_______________________________.

Please reference Purchase Order # __________________ for payment purposes only.

By their signature on this Schedule A and A.1, the parties named below have
reviewed and agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of the Exhibit A
between Customer and OCC.

CUSTOMER                                    LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.

Signature:_____________________________     Signature:__________________________
Name Printed:__________________________     Name Printed:_______________________
Title:_________________________________     Title:______________________________
Date:__________________________________     Date:_______________________________

                                          Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 6
<PAGE>   43

                     SCHEDULE A.1 TO EXHIBIT A - CLEC OFFER

In accordance with OCC's CLEC Offer ("The Offer") the Customer as an Integrated
Communications Provider ("ICP") shall qualify to receive the following standard
package:

A complete 24-port IMA-CA Voice Processing System which includes:

~       A 24-port IMA-CA Voice Processing IMA-CA System with 150 hours of
        message storage and 2,500 mailboxes
~       A 24-port T1-TIC
~       SMDI Integration (with cables)
~       Inband Integration
~       VIS 2.0 system software
~       Non-standby Redundancy Kit
~       Cabinet with floor mount

Business Messaging Features:

~       Enhanced Features Package which includes the Enhanced Call Package (ECP)
        and Information Center Mailboxes (ICMBs)
~       Fax Store and Forward which includes Fax Overflow
~       Voice Forms

Team CLEC ADvantage Program: The objective of the Team CLEC ADvantage program is
to prepare you for success through an interactive consulting process. With the
Team CLEC ADvantage Program, an OCC Market Resource Consultant trained in the
CLEC market will be assigned to your account to deliver the following programs:

~       SmartStart for CLECs - The objective of the Smart Start program is to
        help you design a successful messaging launch strategy. It consists of
        two days of consulting via the telephone or face to face plus one day of
        consultant preparation time. The two days will be tailored to meet the
        specific needs of your market and can include modules such as service
        offer definition, pricing strategy, channel strategy, communications
        strategy, assistance with end user collateral development, etc.

~       VoiceMail Academy for CLECs - The objective of the VoiceMail Academy
        program is to develop the training and education necessary for your
        channels to sell effectively prior to launch. It consists of two days of
        consulting via the telephone or face to face plus one day of consultant
        preparation time. The two days will be tailored to meet the specific
        needs of your market and can include modules such as developing a
        training package, training the trainer and assistance with sales tools
        and incentives. Actual channel training is not included with VoiceMail
        Academy but is available from OCC for an additional fee.

~       MarketPlus for CLECs- The objective of the MarketPlus program is to tune
        up your market offering 3-6 months after launch. It consists of one day
        of consulting via the telephone or face to face plus one day of
        consultant preparation time. The day consists of performing a situation
        analysis including a launch assessment and results in recommendations
        for service evolution.

~       CLEC Launch Tool Kit - Lucent OCC has developed a CLEC Launch Tool Kit
        for use in conjunction with the above programs. This kit includes
        templates and tools to assist a CLEC to launch in a new market and are
        included in order to expedite the launch.

This set of marketing programs provided for every five systems purchased through
the CLEC Offer out of a centralized location. Additional programs or consulting
is available for additional fees. In addition to the Marketing Resource
Consultant and the Marketing Programs, CLECs purchasing the CLEC Offer are
eligible to participate in the Octel ADvantage Fund. This fund provides
marketing funds based on your purchases to be used to pay for marketing expenses
associated with your messaging service. Octel ADvantage funds are available the
quarter after you enroll. See your MRC for more details.

A Services Package to meet ongoing CLEC service needs:

~       Full IMA-CA Implementation
~       Following the first year warranty, a 2-year Technical Assistance and
        Parts Replacement Agreement (TAPRA) contract
~       IMA-CA CLEC Spares Kit ((1) CPU32, (1) RAID File Card, (1) 4GB drive for
        IMA-CA, (1) Voice/Fax line card, (1) Monitor Card, (1) T1-TIC, 24
        channel)
~       IMA-CA implementation and Maintenance training course (one seat)
~       IMA-CA System Management training course (one CD ROM)
~       IMA-CA Advanced System Management training course (one seat)
~       IMA-CA System manager's terminal assembly (with cables)
~       Epson FX870 Printer (with cables)
~       IMA-CA System Manager Literature Kit

                                          Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 7
<PAGE>   44

                             SCHEDULE B TO EXHIBIT A
                         IMPLEMENTATION PACKAGES SUMMARY

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                      IMA-CA
                                                      FULL IMPLEMENTATION
<S>                                                   <C>
ACTIVITY)

PRE-INSTALLATION CONSULTATION
Consultation on application development                   12 hours
Software configuration assistance                         16 hours

TELEPHONE CONSULTATION
Consultation on MTSO/CO requirements                       4 hours

INSTALLATION
Hardware installation                                     Provided
MTSO/CO interface/integration testing                     Provided

TRAINING
System Management Training for one (1)
employee at Premises                                       6 hours
One (1) seat in System Manager Course and one seat
in Installation and Maintenance Training Course           Provided
at OCC Facilities*

POST-INSTALLATION SUPPORT
Load of initial Customer database
and IMA-CA System parameters**                            2-6 hours
</TABLE>

DOCUMENTATION - ALL PACKAGES
PER IMA-CA SYSTEM

1 System Managers Manual
1 System Manager Addendum
1 Training Kit
1 Service Manual (to be delivered to Attendee of OCC's Installation
  and Maintenance Training)

ART WORK FOR

User Guide
Quick Reference Guide

 *      Expires ninety (90) days after Installation Date
**      Number of hours depends on IMA-CA System size
        Additional training slots may be ordered at the then-current prices.

                                          Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 8
<PAGE>   45

                             SCHEDULE C TO EXHIBIT A
         TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE AND PARTS REPLACEMENT AGREEMENT ("TAPRA")
                              TERMS AND CONDITIONS

1.     TAPRA PROGRAM SUMMARY

Following the Warranty Period, OCC will provide to Customer the support Services
described herein for those IMA-CA Products and IMA-CA Software for which
Customer has ordered TAPRA. This TAPRA Program, which is designed for those
Customers with OCC-certified technical personnel who desire to perform their own
maintenance, consists of the following:

~       Replacement parts ordered at any time from local inventory and airport
        locations with non-urgent delivery during normal business hours.
~       Emergency replacement plan in the event of a natural disaster.
~       Twenty-four hour technical assistance through the OCC Technical
        Assistance Center.
~       On-site response time within 24 hours of problem identification, if
        required, at OCC's Preferred Customer Rate.
~       IMA-CA Software Updates provided by OCC, for installation by Customer.
~       Preferred Customer Rate for any on-site service performed by OCC.

2.     GENERAL INFORMATION

2.1        ELIGIBILITY/CERTIFICATION

Any Customer IMA-CA System is eligible to participate in this TAPRA Program.
However, OCC may require Customer to upgrade IMA-CA System, at Customer expense,
to supportable hardware and software levels, as specified by OCC, prior to
entering into or renewing this TAPRA Program.

2.2        REPLACEMENT PARTS

Replacement parts are provided from OCC factory depots and airport locations at
no charge if the replaced part is returned undamaged to OCC within thirty (30)
days of receipt of replacement part. Otherwise, Customer will be charged the
then-current rate in the Price List for the replacement part.

Replacement parts can be ordered 24 hours/day, 7 days/week with non-urgent
delivery during normal coverage hours. OCC is responsible for the costs of
surface shipment of a replacement part to Customer. Customer is responsible for
shipping costs of replaced part to OCC and any costs for expedited shipment
requested by Customer.

OCC can recommend approved packaging procedures, if so requested by Customer, to
prevent additional physical damage to a returned part. If improperly packaged or
shipped, Customer may not receive credit for the returned part and may be
charged the Agreement Rate for the replacement part.

2.3        EMERGENCY REPLACEMENT PLAN

In the event of an emergency out-of-service condition because of a natural
disaster such as a flood, earthquake, unusually severe weather conditions, or
fire, OCC will, upon Customer's request, use all reasonable efforts to ship
replacement IMA-CA Products in an expedited time frame (within 24 hours of
request) and to waive delivery schedule priorities to the extent permitted by
prior contract obligations and commitments, laws and regulations. The price for
the replacement IMA-CA Products and IMA-CA Software will be those in OCC's
then-current Price List. Customer shall bear all shipping costs.

2.4        TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER

The Technical Assistance Center, staffed by OCC-certified technicians, provides
Customer with twenty-four (24) hour telephone access for problem resolution and
technical assistance.

In order to identify or resolve IMA-CA System problems in a timely manner, OCC
may, with Customer authorization, remotely poll the IMA-CA System, provided
Customer supplies OCC with a direct line to the IMA-CA System, separate from
voice messaging lines, and all necessary access information to perform the
polling. OCC analysis may result in recommending the replacement of defective
hardware components and/or the installation of IMA-CA Software patches or
Engineering Updates.

                                          Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 9
<PAGE>   46

2.5        ESCALATION PLAN

Customer and OCC will use reasonable efforts to resolve problems in accordance
with the following escalation plan:

        1.      Customer's local OCC-certified technician attempts to isolate
                the problem and contacts the Technical Assistance Center via
                telephone which will be deemed Customer's initial request for
                maintenance Services.

        2.      OCC's Technical Assistance Center provides telephone support to
                Customer's local technician.

        3.      If the problem is not resolved within two (2) hours after
                Customer's initial request for maintenance Services, OCC's
                technician at the Technical Assistance Center shall escalate the
                problem to OCC's IMA-CA Product Technical Support group, which
                will assist with telephone support.

        4.      If the problem is a major maintenance occurrence and is not
                resolved within six (6) hours following Customer's initial
                request for maintenance Services, at Customer's OCC shall
                dispatch a technician to the IMA-CA System Site.

2.6        ON-SITE RESPONSE TIME

When it is determined that OCC service is required on-site, response time will
not exceed twenty-four (24) hours after such determination is made.

2.7        IMA-CA SOFTWARE UPDATES AND UPGRADES

OCC will periodically provide, and Customer will promptly install,
performance-related or safety-related engineering modifications, and changes
("Engineering Updates"). Customer may also request installation by OCC at
Customer expense. Software Updates are defined exclusively by OCC.

From time to time OCC will introduce Software and/or hardware features which
enhance the functionality of IMA-CA Products ("Upgrades"). Upgrades will be made
available to Customer at the Agreement Rate.

2.8        PREFERRED CUSTOMER RATE

While Customer System is covered by this TAPRA Program, any on-site service
performed by OCC shall be invoiced at OCC's prime-shift hourly rate ("Preferred
Customer Rate") unless otherwise stated in the terms of the Exhibit A between
OCC and Customer. The Preferred Customer Rate (2-hour minimum, portal to portal)
is subject to change at any time.

3.     CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES

3.1        PROBLEM REPORTING

Customer agrees to work with the Technical Assistance Center by phone so that
OCC support personnel can diagnose problems and determine the best method of
repair. In the event that Customer determines that a IMA-CA Product or IMA-CA
Software does not operate properly, Customer will, if requested by OCC:

A.      Attempt to duplicate the malfunction, but only at times and under
        circumstances when doing so will not reasonably interrupt service to
        Customer's user base.

B.      Supply OCC with problem analysis routines, such as error logs and
        diagnostic data, and any reasonable assistance necessary to demonstrate
        and diagnose the malfunction.

C.      Promptly implement or assist in implementing each patch, bypass, Update
        or other solution provided by OCC.

Customer is also responsible for performing designated service actions per
written notification periodically provided by OCC.

3.2        PERSONNEL TRAINING

Customer will ensure that personnel authorized to service the IMA-CA System and
report any problems to OCC will have been trained and duly certified in OCC
technical training courses.

3.3        REQUIRED SPARES

Customer is required to maintain the appropriate spares kits, as defined in the
OCC Official Price List.

                                         Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 10
<PAGE>   47

3.4   PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Customer is responsible for performing the preventive maintenance recommended by
OCC.

4.     PROGRAM TERMS

4.1        PROGRAM RENEWAL

This TAPRA Program will be automatically renewed, subject to price changes, on
the anniversary of the Program Start Date for a period equal to the original
Coverage Period. Customer should submit a purchase order verifying the renewal
to OCC within 30 days of the anniversary date. OCC will provide Customer with
any price changes no less than sixty (60) days prior to each such anniversary or
other automatic renewal date, and OCC may require re-certification in accordance
with Section 2.1.

This Program will terminate if either party receives written notice from the
other of its intention to cancel thirty (30) days from receipt of such notice.

If Customer terminates a multi-year TAPRA Program commitment prior to its
expiration date, OCC shall invoice, and Customer shall pay OCC, a termination
fee equal to [*] If Customer has prepaid for service which it will not receive
due to termination, OCC will credit Customer for amounts paid for such service
to the extent the amount exceeds Customer's termination fee.

Any hardware Upgrade or expansion to a IMA-CA System covered by this Schedule
will require a price adjustment that will be prorated based on the term of this
Schedule, less the applicable warranty period. An addendum will be generated and
the appropriate charges will be added.

4.2        AGREEMENT RATE

Any charges for IMA-CA System products, parts, services and training classes are
at the then-current prices and are pursuant to Exhibit A to the Purchase
Agreement between OCC and Customer ("Agreement Rate"). The Agreement Rate is
applied at the time of order of such items and is exclusive of local, state and
federal taxes.

5.     BILLABLE SERVICES

Items described below are not covered by this TAPRA Program but will be
provided, where possible, at the Preferred Customer Rate for on-site services
and the Agreement Rate for IMA-CA System Products and parts.

a.      Any on-site service.

b.      Any parts for an IMA-CA System that are damaged by or as a result of any
        of the following:

        ~       Failure to comply with Customer site requirements as defined by
                OCC.

        ~       Other than normal use and wear.

        ~       Acts of nature or disaster such as, but not limited to, floods,
                fire, winds, lightning and earthquakes.

        ~       Accidents, vandalism, burglary, neglect, misuse, repair and
                unauthorized changes.

        ~       Moving of the IMA-CA System by other than authorized personnel.

        ~       Improper interface with or operation of associated equipment
                such as telephone systems or services.

                                         Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 11

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   48

                             SCHEDULE D TO EXHIBIT A
              OCC ADVANTAGE FUND PARTICIPATION TERMS AND CONDITIONS

[OCC ADVANTAGE FUND LOGO]

OCC and the undersigned Customer ("You") are entering into this OCC ADvantage
Fund Participation Agreement ("Agreement") to confirm the terms and conditions
of your participation in the OCC ADvantage Fund (the "Fund") for the current
Fund Year, which extends from July 1 through June 30. With regard to the current
Fund Year, OCC and You hereby agree as follows:

1.      The rights and duties of OCC and You under the Fund are specified in
        detail in the "Guidelines", Schedule D.1 attached hereto. OCC reserves
        the right to revise these Guidelines from time to time during the Fund
        Year. OCC will provide You with any revisions. Also, OCC reserves the
        right to cancel the Fund at any time by written notice. If the Fund is
        canceled, any dollars accrued in your account will still be available
        for use by You under the terms of the Fund before it was canceled.
        However, no new dollars will accrue in your account after any notice of
        cancellation has been given.

2.      You will earn dollars in your account based on purchases by You from OCC
        during the Fund Year. Details of how purchases count toward dollars, and
        how the dollars will be calculated for the first quarter of the Fund
        Year, will be communicated to You by letter after you have signed this
        Agreement.

3.      All expenditures for which You claim reimbursement from the Fund must be
        in accordance with the Guidelines. Expenditures by You not in accordance
        with the Guidelines are not reimbursable. You must submit a Prior
        Approval Form and obtain the approval of OCC, in accordance with the
        Guidelines, prior to incurring any expense for which a reimbursement is
        claimed from the Fund.

4.      As a condition of participation in the Fund, You must state an
        incremental growth goal such as increased mailboxes, increased
        activation of mailboxes and /or increased messaging for the Fund Year,
        and will be expected to report to OCC within sixty (60) days after the
        close of the Fund Year (June 30) how your actual growth corresponded to
        the goal.

5.      You must complete a Marketing Results Form, a copy of which is attached
        to the Guidelines, for each approved marketing project within 60 days
        after the end date of the program. OCC will keep this information
        confidential on an individual customer basis, and will only share it in
        a consolidated report form.

6.      Within the first three months after you execute this Agreement, you
        shall review your marketing plans for the remaining months of the
        current Fund Year and discuss with your OCC Account Manager how to best
        leverage the Fund as part of your overall marketing plan.

7.      You may terminate participation in the Fund at any time upon written
        notice to OCC. OCC may terminate your participation in the Fund if you
        are in breach of any material obligation under this Agreement and the
        breach remains uncured for thirty (30) days following written notice
        from OCC.

8.      You shall be entirely responsible for the contents of any advertising or
        promotional materials for which You are reimbursed by OCC under the
        Fund.

9.      The parties acknowledge that nothing in this Agreement or the Guidelines
        shall be interpreted to give OCC the right to control the price under
        which You may resell OCC products to end users, and You acknowledge that
        You are free to set the resale price at your sole discretion.

10.     The parties acknowledge that the Fund consists only of a bookkeeping
        entry, and no funds shall be set aside in trust or otherwise for your
        benefit, and that under no circumstances will interest or other earnings
        be paid or credited on dollars accumulated in your favor under the Fund.

11.     To the extent that taxes are payable with respect to any transaction
        contemplated by this Agreement, any amounts reimbursed to You by OCC
        shall include any applicable municipal, provincial, state, county or
        federal taxes for which OCC is liable, including, but not limited to,
        all sales, use, consumption excise, value-added, or other taxes.

                                         Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 12
<PAGE>   49

12.     This Agreement is subject to acceptance by OCC in Milpitas, California.

13.     This Agreement, including its attachments, constitutes the entire
        agreement between OCC and You, and supersedes all prior and
        contemporaneous proposals, negotiations, and communications, oral or
        written, between OCC and You, with respect to the subject matter of the
        Agreement.

14.     This Agreement will be automatically renewed at the end of the then
        current Fund Year, but subject always to the termination and
        cancellation rights of the parties set forth in Sections 1 and 7 above.
        The three-month period referred to in Section 6 will commence on the
        first day of the new Fund Year (July 1).

                                         Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 13
<PAGE>   50

                            SCHEDULE D.1 TO EXHIBIT A
                          OCC ADVANTAGE FUND GUIDELINES

Welcome to OCC ADvantage! This flexible program demonstrates our commitment to
making sure our valued business partners have the tools and resources to
effectively market OCC voice messaging and enhanced services.

OCC ADvantage is being administered by MEDIANET, located in Austin, Texas. Any
questions you have about the program, should be directed to MEDIANET at (512)
343-2002 ext. 222.

These guidelines contain the following information to help you best utilize the
OCC ADvantage Fund:

~       How OCC ADvantage works
~       Guidelines Matrix
~       How to enroll
~       How to obtain prior approval
~       How to file a claim
~       How to report results

HOW THE OCC ADVANTAGE FUND WORKS

HOW DO I QUALIFY FOR THE ADVANTAGE FUND? Any OCC VIS service provider selling
OCC voice messaging and other enhanced services is eligible to participate as
long as you are not participating in another OCC sponsored program where you
receive marketing credits.

ENROLLMENT To enroll in the OCC ADvantage Fund, you must fill out the "Getting
Started with OCC ADvantage" form, sign the OCC ADvantage Fund Participation
Agreement and submit them to your OCC Account Manager.

ACCRUAL OCC ADvantage funds accrue quarterly. Funds will accrue during each
quarter based on your company's purchase of OCC products. The funds accrued are
available for use the month after the quarter ends.

ALLOWANCE PERIOD For any quarter that you accrue funds, you will have four
quarters in which to spend those OCC ADvantage Fund dollars. Any money accrued
and not spent within the twelve-month window will be forfeited. As you
participate in the OCC ADvantage Fund, a summary statement of your accruals and
claims will be sent to you monthly. This statement will include your available
funds, funds about to expire, and your previous accrual and claim activity.

PRIOR APPROVAL REQUIREMENT All marketing projects must receive prior approval.
Prior Approval Forms (contained in this package) must be filled out completely
and faxed or mailed to your OCC Account Manager. MEDIANET will return a copy of
the form to you once the project is approved. You will not be approved for funds
exceeding the amount currently available in your OCC ADvantage account.

CHANGES TO PRIOR Approvals If you make any changes to your prior approval
including delaying the start and end dates of your marketing program, please
notify MEDIANET and submit a new Prior Approval Form.

REIMBURSEMENT AMOUNT You will be reimbursed with OCC ADvantage Funds for 100% of
any preapproved expenses for the promotion of qualifying OCC products and
services. In the event that the marketing project contains information on
products or services in addition to Octel's products and services, you will be
reimbursed for the percentage devoted to Octel, as determined by MEDIANET
("Octel's Share," see Guidelines Matrix). The amount paid will be based on
actual invoices for the marketing project, not the amount estimated on your
Prior Approval Form. The amount will be paid as long as funds are available.
Taxes will not be reimbursed.

MARKETING RESULTS REQUIREMENT Octel requires that the Marketing Results Form be
filled out completely for each marketing project within 60 days after the end
date of the program. This information will be kept confidential on an individual
customer basis. Information will be shared in consolidated report form by region
and type of business. These forms will automatically be sent to you from
MEDIANET. Future prior approvals will not be granted until all outstanding
Marketing Results Forms have been received. Additional forms are available from
MEDIANET.

CLAIM REJECTION If you do not send MEDIANET all of the required documentation
and proof of performance, your claim will be rejected. MEDIANET will ask you to
forward the missing information and upon receipt, your claim will be paid.

                                         Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 14
<PAGE>   51

LACK OF FUNDS If you submit a claim for prior approval and do not have
sufficient funds, you may only be approved up to the amount available in your
Octel ADvantage account.

PROGRAM CANCELLATIONS Failure to adhere to any of the Guidelines may result in
rejection of your claim for reimbursement. Repeated violations can result in
loss of eligibility.

GUIDELINES MATRIX The following matrix was created to give you an overview of
marketing activities and their eligibility requirements for reimbursement.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
QUALIFIED ACTIVITY            EXPENSES COVERED               REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION AND PROOF OF PERFORMANCE  EXPENSES NOT COVERED
------------------            ----------------               -----------------------------------------------  --------------------
<S>                           <C>                            <C>                                              <C>
DIRECT MAIL                   ~ Mail list /Postage           ~ Sample of piece                                ~ Applicable taxes
                              ~ Layout/Design                ~ Copy of paid invoices
                              ~ Printing                     ~ Copy of postage receipt

PRINT ADVERTISING (INCLUDING  ~ Layout/Design                ~ Original, actual-sized tearsheet or            ~ Applicable taxes
NEWSPAPER)                    ~ Photography/Illustration       photocopy showing publication name, date
                              ~ Space cost                     and location
                                                             ~ Copy of publisher invoice
                                                             ~ Copy of layout/design, photography invoices

INDOOR, OUTDOOR AND VEHICLE   ~ Layout/Design                ~ Copy of paid invoice indicating where          ~ Applicable taxes
SIGNAGE                       ~ Space                          advertising was posted
                                                             ~ Photo of ad
                                                             ~ Copy of paid invoice for layout/design

RADIO AND TV                  ~ Air time                     ~ Copy of paid invoice showing length of         ~ Applicable taxes
                              ~ Production costs               commercial, dates and times of spots, where
                                                               aired, cost per spot, and total cost
                                                             ~ Station affidavit and a copy of the
                                                               video/audio tape
                                                             ~ Copy of paid invoice for production work

SERVICE PROVIDER CREATED      ~ Printing                     ~ Original sample of piece                       ~ Applicable taxes
SALES LITERATURE              ~ Production costs             ~ Copy of paid invoices
</TABLE>

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
QUALIFIED ACTIVITY            EXPENSES COVERED               REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION AND PROOF OF PERFORMANCE  EXPENSES NOT COVERED
------------------            ----------------               -----------------------------------------------  --------------------
<S>                           <C>                            <C>                                              <C>
TRADE SHOWS AND SEMINARS      ~ Rental of facilities/booth   ~ Photo of display                               ~ Travel
                              ~ Collateral materials         ~ All supporting invoices                        ~ Applicable taxes
                              ~ Equipment rental
                              ~ Banners/Display materials

IN-HOUSE INCENTIVE            ~ All costs associated with    ~ All supporting invoices                        ~ Applicable taxes
PROGRAMS                        program support              ~ Copy of promotional piece
                              ~ Travel                       ~ Copy of incentive plan

MARKETING AND                 ~ Tuition of OCC training      ~ All supporting invoices                        ~ Travel
SALES TRAINING                ~ Printed materials            ~ Copy of materials if not OCC                   ~ Applicable taxes
                              ~ Refreshments/Food
                              ~ Promotional materials
                              ~ Display/Banner
</TABLE>

                                         Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 15
<PAGE>   52
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
QUALIFIED ACTIVITY            EXPENSES COVERED               REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION AND PROOF OF PERFORMANCE  EXPENSES NOT COVERED
------------------            ----------------               -----------------------------------------------  --------------------
<S>                           <C>                            <C>                                              <C>
MARKET RESEARCH               ~ Outside market research      ~ All supporting invoices                        ~ Applicable taxes
                                firm
                              ~ Focus groups                 ~ Copy of final report
                              ~ Quantitative study
                                materials

POINT OF PURCHASE MATERIALS   ~ Cost of materials            ~ All supporting invoices                        ~ Applicable taxes
                              ~ Layout/Design                ~ Copy of supporting materials

TELEMARKETING                 ~ Script development           ~ All supporting invoices                        ~ Phone usage bill
                              ~ Telemarketers                ~ Copy of scripts                                ~ Applicable taxes

PURCHASE OF MARKETING         ~ Cost of program              ~ None required                                  ~ Applicable taxes
PROGRAM FROM OCC

INFORMATION ABOUT VOICE       ~ Writer                       ~ All supporting invoices                        ~ Development of web
MESSAGING ONYOUR WEB SITE     ~ Graphic design               ~ Hard copy of how it appears on your web site     site
                                                             ~ Must appear on web site for at least six       ~ Postings on web site
                                                               months in a row                                  of less than six
                                                                                                                months in a row
                                                                                                              ~ Applicable taxes

OTHER APPROVED PROMOTIONAL    ~ All costs associated with    ~ All supporting invoices                        ~ Applicable taxes
ACTIVITY                        approved promotion           ~ Copy of all materials                          ~ Travel
</TABLE>

Remember: all claims require the following:

~       Prior Approval Form
~       Claim Form
~       Marketing Results Form

HOW TO ENROLL

1.      Fill out the Getting Started with OCC ADvantage form.
2.      Read and sign the OCC ADvantage Fund Participation Agreement.
3.      Have your Octel Account Manager submit these forms to MEDIANET.
4.      You are now enrolled in the Octel ADvantage Fund.

HOW TO OBTAIN PRIOR APPROVAL

1.      You and your Octel Account Manager plan a marketing project.
2.      You complete the Prior Approval Form and forward it to your Octel
        Account Manager.
3.      Your Octel Account Manager approves this project.
4.      Octel Corporate approves this project.
5.      MEDIANET verifies that you have funds available.
6.      MEDIANET verifies that results from previous projects have been
        submitted (if there has been a previous project).
7.      The appropriate funds are held until you submit your claim for
        reimbursement.
8.      MEDIANET faxes you and your Octel Account Manager a prior approval
        confirmation.

                                         Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 16
<PAGE>   53

HOW TO FILE A CLAIM

1.      Claims may not be submitted until the marketing project has been
        completed.
2.      You must fill out the Claim Form within 60 days of the end of the
        marketing project.
3.      If the claim is not received within 60 days of the end of the marketing
        project, the prior approval will be canceled and the allocated Octel
        ADvantage funds will be released back into your available balance for
        future use.
4.      Submit the completed claim form with supporting documentation to
        MEDIANET (see Guidelines Matrix.)
5.      Be sure to mail, not fax, your claim.
6.      Claims are checked against Prior Approval Forms.
7.      MEDIANET verifies cost documentation and your proof of performance.
8.      Checks or wire transfers are issued by MEDIANET.
9.      Under no circumstances may you deduct the amount of your claim from a
        merchandise or service invoice due to Octel.
10.     As you use the Octel ADvantage Fund, a monthly summary statement showing
        your accruals and claim activity will be sent to you.
11.     Octel will not reimburse a publication, broadcasting station or any
        other supplier directly for advertising costs incurred by a service
        provider.

Submit claims to:   OCC ADvantage  c/o MEDIANET, Inc.
                    PO Box 203218  Austin, Texas 78720-3218

Please do not send your final claims directly to OCC as this will only delay
processing and reimbursement.

HOW TO REPORT RESULTS

1.      At the same time you fill out the Claim Form, fill out the Marketing
        Results Form.
2.      Make sure you state your objectives and results.
3.      Submit your completed Marketing Results Form to MEDIANET.
4.      A Marketing Results Form must be filled out for each marketing project
        within 60 days of the end date of the project. Marketing Results Forms
        may be faxed to (512) 343-1717.
5.      Once you have submitted your Marketing Results Forms, you may be
        approved for your next project.

SUMMARY

Working closely with your OCC Account Representative, we hope you will quickly
see the benefits of the OCC ADvantage program. Our goal is to help you
successfully market messaging services -- to take some risks, to try new things.

We encourage you to try this program. Put the OCC ADvantage on your side.

(C) Copyright 1996
Octel Communications Corporation
All Rights Reserved.

All trademarks identified by the (R) and (TM) symbols are registered trademarks
of Octel Communications Corporation. All other trademarks are the properties of
their respective owners. Printed in USA.

The above information is provided by Octel Communications Corporation based on
the information available at the time of publication and is subject to change
without notice.

5/96
PN 001-10625-00

                                         Lucent Technologies Inc. Proprietary 17
<PAGE>   54

                                   EXHIBIT B
                                     TO THE
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT

                            VOICE MESSAGING SERVICES

        This Exhibit B to the Agreement, together with its Schedules attached
hereto (collectively, the "Exhibit"), contains the terms and conditions under
which Seller shall provide certain voice/data information storage and retrieval
services. In case of any conflict between the provisions of this Exhibit and the
Agreement with respect to the Services described in this Exhibit, the provisions
of this Exhibit shall control.

1.      DEFINITIONS.

Capitalized terms used in this Exhibit shall have the meanings set forth in the
Agreement. Additional capitalized terms or capitalized terms with meanings
specifically related to this Exhibit are also set forth below:

Administrative Change means any request from Customer to move, add, delete, or
modify a Mailbox or Enhanced Mailbox.

Billable Mailbox means a block of computer disk memory resident on a Voice Mail
Platform associated with a Mailbox or an ECP Application.

Call Answering means the Service whereby the Voice Mail System will, subject to
the operation of the telecommunication equipment, facilities and services of
Customer and the applicable Subscriber, receive telephone calls directed to
Seller from Customer. Upon accessing the Voice Mail System, callers directed to
the Voice Mail System will hear a customized greeting and will then be provided
with instructions regarding use of the Voice Mail System. The Voice Mail System
will store verbal/data message(s) (subject to storage limitations) which the
caller chooses to leave. Additionally, telephone calls received by the Voice
Mail System may be directed to a specific Mailbox which will provide the caller
with the User's personal greeting if Customer's equipment provides compatible
in-band or out-of-band integration with the Voice Mail System.

Central Office Switching System Integration/Call Answering means the combined
Service whereby the Voice Mail System will, subject to the operation of the
telecommunication equipment located at the premises of Customer and the
applicable Subscriber and the CENTREX systems, facilities and services of the
applicable LEC, receive unanswered telephone calls, provide the caller with
instructions regarding use of the Voice Mail System, dispatch message waiting
indication information packets to Customer's PBX/CO in accordance with Seller's
Specifications, and store verbal/data message(s) (subject to storage
limitations) which the caller chooses to leave. As used herein, unanswered
telephone calls include those not answered because the intended recipient's
telephone station either is in use at the time of the telephone call or is not
answered within a predetermined number of rings.

Customer Site means one of the locations set forth in SCHEDULE C at which a
Voice Mail Platform will be deployed. Additional locations may be added to
SCHEDULE C in the future with the written consent of Seller.

Enhanced Call Processing (ECP) Application means the application which creates
one or more Enhanced Mailboxes and links such Enhanced Mailboxes together to
perform the functions requested by Customer (subject to the capabilities of the
Voice Mail System). The series of choices in an ECP Application is called a menu
and one or more menus linked together comprise an ECP Application. Development
of an ECP Application requires that a graphical representation of the menu(s)
accompany the order to Seller to create the requested linkages between the
requested Enhanced Mailboxes.

Enhanced Mailboxes means the following types of Mailboxes that deliver specific
information or routing instructions to calling parties as described in Seller's
Specifications: "Enhanced Call Processing Mailbox" (Types 30, 31, 32, 33);
"Information Center Mailbox" (Types 1, 2, and 3); "Bulletin Mailbox"; "Transfer
Mailbox"; "Conditional Transfer Mailbox"; and "Voice Forms Mailbox" (Types 10
and 11).

Confidential                           1
<PAGE>   55

Error Dispatcher means a monitoring system which allows any/all alarm conditions
to be captured by the Seller Network Operations Center. Each device being
monitored is displayed on color monitors in the Network Operations Center with
specific alarm conditions and thresholds. As events (alarms) occur an audible
and/or visual signal is generated that requests immediate attention. In this
fashion alarm conditions are acknowledged and acted upon by initiating trouble
tickets and notifying Seller Network Services Operations Personnel to contact
Customer for resolution, if required.

HelpDesk means a Service whereby Users may place a call to Seller via Customer
provided 800/888 circuits for support relative to the functionality of their
Mailbox and/or the Voice Mail System.

LEC means a local exchange carrier.

Local Access is a means of accessing the Voice Mail System via DID circuits
provided by the LEC pursuant to the request of Customer, whereby a User can
access his/her Mailbox by calling a local telephone number terminating in one of
the service centers listed in SECTION 4.1.

Mailbox means a block of computer disc memory locations assigned to a User,
residing on a Voice Mail Platform and used to provide User Services.

Mailbox Activation means the download to the proper Voice Mail Platform of the
information necessary to activate the requested Mailbox on that specific Voice
Mail Platform.

Mailbox Model means a standardized set of features. Each Mailbox Model will have
a five digit order code for purposes of Mailbox Activation.

Remedial Maintenance means Services required to restore the Voice Mail System to
good operating condition and cause it to be capable of performing in accordance
with Seller's Specifications following a malfunction of the Voice Mail System.

Management Reports mean a series of reports generated and delivered each month
by Seller to Customer consisting of (a) Customer care reports (including trouble
ticket statistics and HelpDesk tickets), Mailbox access reports (including count
by features, count by bill group, access minutes by call types, usage minutes by
call types, and fax usage detail), and System operation reports (including
capacity planning, services availability, System downtime, mean time to correct
statistics, and monthly service performance metrics); and (b) the billing
statistics in the mutually agreed medium and format as provided in SECTION 3.4.

Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) - (Integrated Services to Customer Premise
Equipment Telephone Systems ONLY) is a means to visually notify a User of the
arrival of a message in the User's Mailbox. The notification consists of
illuminating a light on the User's telephone instrument. Upon retrieval of any
messages contained in the Mailbox, the Voice Mail System will subsequently
extinguish the light.

Message Networking means the class of service assigned to a specific Mailbox
allowing the applicable User to transmit a message(s) to the Mailbox(s) of other
User(s) established on one or more different Voice Mail Platforms.

NOC means Seller's Network Operations Center.

PBX/CO Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Central Office (CO) means Customer's
telephone switching system and/or a privately owned telephone system located at
Customer's or a Subscriber's place of business.

PBX Integration means the service whereby the Voice Mail System will, subject to
the operation of the PBX(s) and other telecommunication equipment located at a
Subscriber's premises, receive, via dedicated facilities, unanswered telephone
calls, provide the caller with instructions regarding use of the Voice Mail
System, provide for "on/off" control of a User's message waiting indicator and
store any message (subject to storage limitations) which the caller chooses to
leave. As used herein, unanswered telephone calls include those not answered
because the intended recipient's telephone station either is in use at the time
of the telephone call or is not answered within a predetermined number of rings.

Confidential                           2
<PAGE>   56

Port means any or all of the following: a port located on a Voice Mail Platform
that is in a state of receiving traffic from the network of Customer or a LEC; a
port located on the digital access cross-connect system (DACS) that when in use
is physically connected to either the network of Customer or equipment inside of
an Seller Service Center; and a port located on Seller's administrative system
(Sun Microsystems SPARC 6000).

Seller Sites means one of the locations set forth in SECTION 4.1 where Seller
has deployed one or more Voice Mail Platforms.

Services means any or all of the information storage and retrieval services
provided by Seller under this Exhibit.

Service Activation Date means the month in which a Voice Mail Platform is
deployed and is enabled to deliver Services.

Services Enabling Equipment means the PBX/CO(s) provided by Customer and the
hardware and software required on the Voice Mail Platform(s) to provide
Services, including, but not limited to, Seller Command Language, Command
Language Port, Centralized System Management, DMID(s) and associated PBX/CO
connections.

Subscriber means an individual, corporation, partnership or other legal entity
which has purchased User Services from Customer.

User means any individual authorized (directly or indirectly) by Customer to
have a Mailbox resident on the Voice Mail System.

User Documentation Kits mean the documentation provided to Subscribers to
describe the features of the Voice Mail System and the User Services.

User Services mean those Services used directly by Users.

Voice Mail Platform means the hardware and software programs (excluding related
telecommunications facilities) necessary to provide a User with User Services.

Voice Mail System means all Voice Mail Platforms and Service Enabling Equipment
necessary to provide a User with User Services.

2.      SERVICES.

2.1 For the fees and Prices stated in SCHEDULE B, Seller shall deliver to
Customer one or more of the information storage and retrieval Services described
in this Exhibit as Customer may request. From time to time, Seller may amend
this Exhibit to add additional Services which will be made available to Customer
or to delete Services previously made available to Customer. Prior to deleting
any Service from this Exhibit, Seller will provide Customer at least sixty (60)
days advance notice of deletion. Upon deletion from this Exhibit, a Service will
cease to be included within the definition of "Services" and Customer will stop
marketing those services to Subscribers and potential Subscribers. Seller will
not delete a Service from this Exhibit, unless such Service is being generally
discontinued.

2.2 Customer shall request delivery of Services in writing and specify the date
at least thirty (30) days in advance of the date on which such Services are to
be delivered. Customer shall purchase Services from Seller in at least the
amounts and on or before the dates set forth in SCHEDULE C.

3.      SELLER'S DUTIES AND OBLIGATIONS.

3.1 Seller will provide the Services in accordance with the service performance
standards set forth in SCHEDULE B and will use commercially reasonable efforts
to complete all requested events subject to the timelines indicated therein.
Seller will provide Services in the various markets described in SCHEDULE C on
or before the dates listed therein.

Confidential                           3
<PAGE>   57

3.2 Seller will use its commercially reasonable efforts to fulfill all accepted
Administrative Change orders pursuant to SCHEDULE B, SECTION 1.

3.3 Seller will provide HelpDesk Service with a mutually agreed upon custom
greeting to be played to calling parties. At Customer's request, Seller will
provide User Mailbox address directories on a mutually agreed upon basis.

3.4 Seller will provide available detailed billing content and reports per
Subscriber to Customer in a mutually agreed format to be determined jointly by
Customer and Seller. Such billing information will be rendered monthly to
Customer representing a period of 30 days as mutually agreed.

3.5 At Customer's request, Seller will prepare and mail User Documentation Kits
to the Customer sales office specified in the order entry documents (postage
incurred will be billed separately). Seller's marketing communications group
will, as requested, reasonably assist Customer to develop, publish and
distribute customized promotional, informational and educational materials and
documentation.

3.6 Seller will use its commercially reasonable best efforts to provide written
quotes for Services not covered by this Exhibit within 5 business days of
receipt through normal channels of all necessary information required to render
a proper quotation.

3.7 Seller will be reasonably available (via telephone or teleconference) for
rendering marketing and sales support and will use commercially reasonable
efforts to provide answers within 3 days of request with the procedure subject
to agreement by both parties.

3.8 Seller will use its commercially reasonable efforts to upgrade Voice Mail
Platforms (when provided by Seller) with the latest Seller software that can be
successfully deployed and supported by Seller.

3.9 Seller will notify Customer, not less than ninety (90) days in advance, of
upcoming Software releases that will cause a change in fulfillment or the user
interface materials.

3.10 As Customer requests and Seller technically is able to deliver, special
custom-type Mailboxes may be created using "classes of service" meeting various
feature/functionality requests made by potential Subscribers of Customer. Such
Mailboxes will be developed and provided upon mutually agreeable terms and
conditions.

3.11 Promptly following the written request of Customer and receipt of all
required graphical representations, Seller will create and activate ECP
Applications per the scheduled delivery times as indicated in SCHEDULE B.

3.12 Seller will respond promptly to all Remedial Maintenance problems and will
notify the designated Customer representative of any outage as soon as Seller is
aware of such outage. Seller and Customer will mutually agree on the
notification process required for outages. Seller will respond to outages within
time periods as specified in SCHEDULE B. Seller will provide technical
escalation support to expedite resolution of outages and to coordinate fault
isolation with Customer and with other of Customer's suppliers. Seller will
provide required travel and labor as part of providing the Services. As
necessary, Seller will initiate corrective action upon receipt of an alarm or
trouble report and will ensure impairments and outages are resolved in
descending order of severity. Seller will begin the repair process once a
trouble ticket has been created. Remote Remedial Maintenance will begin
initially and generally resolves troubles reported. Should on-site Remedial
Maintenance procedures be required, Seller targets on-site response of six (6)
hours during business days and twenty four (24) hours during non-business days.

Confidential                           4
<PAGE>   58

4.      CUSTOMER'S DUTIES AND OBLIGATIONS.

4.1 In the event that Customer does not use frame relay circuits that connect
with the Lucent NRC, Customer will connect at its sole expense to 3410 Midcourt,
Suite 115, Carrolton, Texas 75006, via a dedicated frame relay circuit so that
Lucent may provide the Services described in Schedule A to Exhibit B.

4.2 Customer will utilize the User Services under Customer's service mark or
name to prospective business or consumer markets. Customer will ensure that
Customer's sales organization and support personnel are trained with respect to
the basic features/functionality of the User Services and/or the Voice Mail
System.

4.3 Customer will use its commercially reasonable efforts to provide support and
training to all Users. Customer will provide and cause to be delivered to Seller
collateral materials (requested by Subscribers) for assembly into end-user kits
("User Documentation Kits"). Such User Documentation Kits will be "private
labeled" and appear uniquely different from any then current Seller fulfillment
materials. Customer will provide Seller, upon Seller's request, with sufficient
initial and replacement inventory of Customer developed User Documentation Kits
for use by Seller when executing the end-user collateral fulfillment process
(postage will be paid by Customer).

4.4 Customer and/or Lucent NRC will designate and staff a Customer Voice Mail
Product Manager to act as the first line of support for all Customer
representatives, and act as the single point of contact for Seller with respect
to all matters regarding the Services.

4.5 Customer will be responsible for invoicing each Subscriber or User, as
appropriate.

4.6 Customer and/or Lucent NRC will work with Seller to establish and document,
within thirty (30) days of execution of the Agreement, mutually agreed upon
escalation/trouble handling procedures and clearing times between the Network
Operations Center and Customer. Customer further agrees to escalate to
Customer's senior management for resolution in the event that procedures are not
agreed upon by Seller and Customer's PBX/CO vendor for resolving uncleared
trouble ticket(s).

4.7 Customer will provide and maintain all circuit connections to the Voice Mail
Platforms from Customer's PBX/CO or other devices, including but not limited,
Services Enabling Equipment at Customer's sole expense.

4.8 Customer will work with Seller to establish and document, within thirty (30)
days of execution of this Agreement, mutually agreed upon Mailbox Models.

4.9 Customer will use the secure facilities provided in Exhibit __ to house the
Voice Mail Platform(s) and Services Enabling Equipment. Such facilities will
include sufficient power sources to operate all switching and voice mail
equipment co-located at those facilities.

4.10 Customer will complete the Administrative Change process (to be mutually
agreed upon by both parties) including, but not limited to codes for designating
Mailbox Models, prior to transmission of the order entry documents to Seller
(via facsimile equipment or pursuant to some other mutually agreed method) for
processing.

4.11 Customer will use its reasonable efforts to cause its other vendors to
cooperate with Seller in connection with the installation, testing, modification
and problem evaluation of Voice Mail System components as necessary for Seller
to provide the Services, provided that Seller will not commit Customer to any
charges from such suppliers without Customer's advance written approval.
Customer acknowledges that the failure of such vendors to cooperate with Seller
will excuse Seller from any resulting breach of this Exhibit or any failure to
meet its performance obligations hereunder.

4.12 Customer will provide access by Seller employees/agents to the sites for
purposes of installation, testing, maintenance and inspection of the Voice Mail
System.

4.13 Customer will be responsible for obtaining at its sole cost and expense all
necessary local, long distance switched or dedicated transport access.

Confidential                           5
<PAGE>   59

4.14 Neither Customer nor its Affiliates will move any Voice Mail Platform
deployed at a Customer Site without the written consent of Seller.

4.15 Customer acknowledges and agrees that Customer will be solely liable for
ensuring that access requested by its officers, directors, agents, employees
and/or Affiliates to messages contained in Mailboxes is obtained in accordance
with the requirements of applicable law. Customer will indemnify Seller and its
officers, directors, employees, agents and Affiliates against and hold each of
them harmless from any and all liabilities, costs, damages, judgements and
expenses (including reasonable attorney's fees and costs) arising out of or
attributable to Seller providing Customer and/or Customer's officers, directors,
employees, agents and/or Affiliates with access to or assisting Customer and/or
Customer's officers, directors, employees, agents and/or Affiliates in obtaining
access to the content of messages contained in Mailboxes, provided that such
access was requested by Customer.

5.      PRICING, INVOICING TO CUSTOMER AND PAYMENT TERMS.

5.1 The fees and Prices for the Services are those set forth in SCHEDULE A.

6.      LIMITATION ON LIABILITY.

Solely with respect to the Services provided pursuant to this Exhibit B:

Seller shall have no liability to Customer or to anyone else for any damages,
losses, liabilities, injuries, claims, demands or expenses arising out of or
directly or indirectly connected with the disclosure or loss of information
deposited in the Voice Mail System by Users or others, except to the extent such
damages, losses, liabilities, injuries, claims, demands or expenses arise out of
or result from the negligence or willful misconduct of Seller. Seller will
provide individual identification numbers for each User of the Services and will
use its commercially reasonable best efforts to ensure that the identification
numbers are not disclosed except to Customer and personnel of Seller who require
such information to administer the Services. Users may further protect such
identification numbers by the addition of a password as explained in the User
Documentation Kits, and are encouraged to do so. The Parties acknowledge that
Seller is providing the Services to Customer in lieu of Customer providing such
Services on its own behalf. The intent of this Exhibit is not to shift to Seller
any potential liability resulting from unauthorized access to the Voice Mail
System or to make Seller a surety with respect to such liabilities. Accordingly,
Customer agrees to remain fully liable for damages resulting from unauthorized
access as if, with respect to such damages, Customer were providing the Services
on its own behalf. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Seller will be fully liable
for any damages arising from unauthorized access to the Voice Mail System, if
such access is due to Seller's failure to use its commercially reasonable best
efforts to safeguard identification numbers issued to Users or if such damages
are otherwise due to the willful misconduct or negligence of Seller.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this Section 6 is intended to limit
any warranties or remedies set forth in the Agreement or Exhibit A with respect
to the Voice Mail System or the other services provided under this Agreement.

7.      REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF SELLER.

7.1 Seller warrants that the Services will meet the Performance Standards as
stated in SCHEDULE B. THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY FOR THE
SERVICES PROVIDED UNDER THIS EXHIBIT AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING (WITHOUT LIMITATION) THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

7.2 This Section 7.2 is intended to supercede the provisions of Section 6.5
(Network Performance) of the General Supply Agreement except as herein provided.
In addition, this Section 7.2 supercedes any remedy that might otherwise be
available under Section 6.3 of the General Supply Agreement for failure to
achieve the System Availability standard set forth in Section 7 of Schedule B
hereto. Seller shall issue the following service credits if the Voice Mail
Systems for which Seller is providing Services experience an Outage. For
purposes of this Section 7.2, an "Outage" is defined as the inability of a Voice
Mail Platform to accept calls, record messages, store messages, and allow users
to retrieve their respective messages. "Outage" is further defined as any of the
events

Confidential                           6
<PAGE>   60
stated in the immediately preceding sentence occurring to a minimum of 25% of
the ports on a Voice Mail Platform, or the lesser of (a) 25% of the mailboxes on
a System or (b) 50 of the mailboxes on a System. In the event that Seller is
unable to satisfy its performance obligations within fifteen (153) minutes of
notification of an Outage, Seller will issue a service credit of [*] per Outage
per Platform. If the same Outage (e.g., failure of the same TIC card or
processor) occurs more than one time in the same month, the amount of the credit
Seller shall issue will increase by [*] for each subsequent occurrence. For
example, for the second occurrence of the same Outage, the credit shall be [*];
for the third occurrence of the same Outage, the credit shall be [*]. The total
Outage credits that Seller will issue for Outages in a particular in any month
shall not exceed the monthly billable fee paid for services. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, Seller will have no liability for: (i) Outages caused by a Force
Majeure; (ii) Outages resulting from a mutually agreed scheduled activity such
as Network maintenance or loading of Software that does not exceed the scheduled
Outage interval (iii) Outages resulting from Customer's, its subcontractor's or
any third party's (employed by the Customer) failure to follow the
Documentation; (iv) Outages resulting the failure of Customer to have (a)
competent technicians available to respond to notification from Seller, or (b)
adequate spares as recommended by Seller on site to repair the problem or (c)
from Customer's failure to perform an assigned responsibility under this
Agreement, the Attachments of the Operations Plan. (v) Outages resulting from an
end user customer to which this Section applies failure to properly operate its
Network or otherwise follow applicable Maintenance procedures.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, Seller will not be liable for any breach arising
out of any modification or attempted modification by Customer of the hardware or
software products used by Seller to provide the Services, unless Customer has
obtained prior authorization from Seller permitting such modification.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

Confidential                           7

<PAGE>   61

                                   SCHEDULE A
                                  TO EXHIBIT B

                                PRICING SCHEDULE

The Prices described in this Schedule are for Services performed in the
contiguous 48 States of the U.S.A.

CUTOVER SERVICES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Cutover services include the setup, end user kit development and program
establishment for all markets.

<TABLE>
<S>                                         <C>
Program Establishment Fee                   $    [*] One (1) Time

PBX or Central Office Integration Fee       $    [*] per Integration

User Kit Creation/Development               $    [*] One (1) Time Fee
</TABLE>

[QUESTION CONCERNING USER KIT CREATION/DEVELOPMENT AT [*] VERSUS INITIAL
MONTHLY BUNDLE FEE PER SITE AT [*] PRICED IN LETTER. ARE THEY THE SAME
THING AND WHAT THE PRICE PREVAILS?]

PACKAGED SURVEILLANCE AND BACK OFFICE   SERVICES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The following PACKAGED SURVEILLANCE SERVICES will be provided hereunder for
IMA-CA Voice Mail Platforms installed at a Customer Site: Systems Watchdog
Monitoring, Remote Database Maintenance and Remote Database Repair, Disk
Utilization Monitoring and Notification, Port Utilization Monitoring and
Notification, Message Networking Monitoring and Notification, End-to-End Access
Testing (2X daily) and Notification, Capacity Planning Reports by P.0X GOS,
Electronic Billing Data, Monitoring/Repair/Notification and Monthly Reporting on
SURVEILLANCE SERVICES.

The following Customer SERVICES are provided hereunder for IMA-CA Voice Mail
Platforms installed at a Customer Site: Program Management, Mailbox
Administration, Order Entry via Manual and/or Batch Processing, Automatic
Mailbox Provisioning, Networking Node Table Management, System Distribution
Lists Management, Broadcast Mailbox Management, ECP Documentation and Archival,
24x7 HelpDesk, System Database Archival and Restoration, and Management Reports.

For Services not specified in the forgoing table and for Services in excess of
the amounts specified in the foregoing table, the pricing set forth in the
remainder of this Schedule will be applicable.

<TABLE>
<S>                                                     <C>
Surveillance and Back Offices Services Establishment    $  [*]

Surveillance and Back Offices Services Deployment       $  [*]

Surveillance and Back Offices Services Recurring Fees:
</TABLE>

All Ports are added and deleted in 24-Port increments. No proration for periods
less than one month.

For Services not specified in the forgoing table and for Services in excess of
the amounts specified in the forgoing table, the pricing set forth in the
remainder of this Exhibit D will be applicable.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                  NEW
                 TYPE-0     MOVES                DATABASE    BUNDLE
                 MAILBOX     AND      HELPDESK   FEES PER    FEE PER
  PACKAGED        ADDS     CHANGES     MINUTES   MAILBOX     MONTH BY
 PORT TOTALS    INCLUDED   INCLUDED   INCLUDED   INCLUDED      SITE
 -----------    --------   --------   --------   --------      ----
<S>             <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>         <C>
     24           100        70         150        [*]       [*]

     48           150        150        300        [*]       [*]

     72           250        250        500        [*]       [*]
</TABLE>

If a market exceeds the parameters in the corresponding tables during a given
month, the following Prices will apply for the Services delivered for the amount
that exceeds the parameters defined in the table above. Package sizes are
dictated by Port utilization of each market. If the total number of Ports used
on a platform exceeds the amounts in a

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

Confidential                           8
<PAGE>   62

package in any given month, the next larger package and corresponding parameters
will dictate the package size to be purchased in that month.

<TABLE>
<S>                                    <C>
Growth beyond 72 Port packages         $ [*] per Port per month
</TABLE>

The above pricing is for Ports used in excess of the packaged amounts. (Example:
If Customer required 96 Ports, Customer would pay their monthly rate for Package
72 and add the additional amount as set forth above:  [*]

BACK OFFICE  AND CUSTOMER SERVICES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The following BACK OFFICE SERVICES will be provided at the Prices indicated for
both Customer or Seller-owned Voice Mail Platforms (IMA-CA) installed at a
Customer Site:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Customer Service Fees
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Order Entry and Mailbox Provisioning
<S>                                                       <C>
        Manual Order Entry

           STANDARD Turnaround Time Per SCHEDULE B        $  [*] One-Time Per Mbx Type-0 Only

           Administrative Change fee                      $  [*] One-Time Per Mbx Type-0 Only

           EXPEDITE Turnaround Time per SCHEDULE B        $  [*] One-Time Per Mbx Type-0 Only

        Batch Electronic Mailbox activation
           (only available when performed
           using the electronic order entry
           specification provided by
           Seller).  Turnaround Time Per SCHEDULE B       $  [*] One-Time Per Mbx Type 0 Only

           Order Entry of Exception Orders
                                                          $  [*] One-Time Per Mbx type 0 Only

        Direct Data Link Electronic Mailbox
           activation (requires engineering
           development for both Customer and
           Seller. Intended for high volume
           order entry/provisioning)                      $  [*] One-Time Per Mbx Type 0 Only

           Order Entry of Exception Orders                $  [*] One-Time Per Mbx type 0 Only

End User Fulfillment Kit Assembly                         $  [*] per each Kit/One-Time Type-0

                                                          $  [*] per each Application: Non Type-0

Fulfillment Shipping                                      Shipped at Customer's sole expense

ECP Applications   [Note: Prices are in addition to Mailbox activation.]

        STANDARD Turnaround Time Per SCHEDULE B

           All ECP Applications                           $  [*] per application/One-Time*

        EXPEDITE Turnaround Time Per SCHEDULE B

           All ECP Applications                           $  [*] per application/One-Time
</TABLE>

        *In the event that ATG product management standardizes an ECP
        Application (e.g., a Type 31 mailbox plus five Type 0 mailboxes), the
        parties will mutually agree to a [*].

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Miscellaneous Service Fees
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                                      <C>
Area Code Split                                           $   [*] per system

                                                         +$   [*] per mailbox
</TABLE>

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

Confidential                           9
<PAGE>   63

<TABLE>
<S>                                                      <C>
Addition of new 800# for HelpDesk                        $    [*]   set-up per 800#

                                                         +$   [*]/minute for HelpDesk

Bill Cycle Change
                                                         $    [*] set-up

                                                         +$   [*] per mailbox

Build New Mailbox Community                              $    [*] per community

Change Billing Hierarchy                                 $    [*] set-up

                                                         +$   [*] per mailbox

Circuit Installation (analog line - POTS)                $    [*] per POTS line

Circuit Installation (DS-0)                              $    [*] per DS-0

Circuit Installation (DS-1)                              $    [*] per DS-1

Circuit Removal (analog line - POTS)                     $    [*] per POTS line

Circuit Removal (DS-0)                                   $    [*] per DS-0

Circuit Removal (DS-1)                                   $    [*] per DS-1

Note:  circuit installation and removal
    are waived at the installation of
    IMA-CA platforms.

Custom Voice Recordings                                  $    [*] set-up

                                                         +$   [*] per recording

Engineering and Software Development                     $    [*] per hour

Manual Invoice Changes                                   $    [*] per event

Mailbox Model number creation                            $    [*] per model

Mailbox Move / System Split                              $    [*] per system

                                                         +$   [*] per mailbox

Networking Set-Up - Initial Systems (N=Systems)          [*] one time

Networking  - Updates or add/delete system               [*] one time

Seven to Ten Digit Mailbox Address Conversion            $    [*] per system

                                                         +$   [*] per mailbox

Software Upgrade requiring database change               $    [*] per system

                                                         +$   [*] per mailbox

Telephone Interface Card (TIC) Installation              $    [*] per event

Training Development and Delivery                        $    [*] per hour

Trunk Group Reconfiguration                              $    [*] per event

Voice Mail System Cluster                                $    [*] per cluster

    +system installation/services
    activation fees as defined in
    customer's contract

Voice Mail System Relocation                             $    [*] per platform

                                                         + moving expenses

Voice Mail System Removal                                $    [*] per platform
</TABLE>

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

Confidential                           10
<PAGE>   64

Systems Database Maintenance
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The System Database Fee is based upon each Mailbox contained within the
Centralized Administration Database during a billing cycle period.

<TABLE>
<S>                                                      <C>
All Mailboxes                                            $    [*] per mailbox, Per month
</TABLE>

HelpDesk and Order Management Fees
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Costs are based upon total Call Minutes (total minutes from connect to
disconnect plus all minutes in after work state, if any), NOTE THAT ALL INBOUND
CALLS ROUTE TO THE SAME ACD QUEUE FOR BOTH HELPLINE AND ORDER MANAGEMENT.

<TABLE>
<S>                                                      <C>
HelpDesk Calls (all calls)                               $    [*] Per Call Minute

HelpDesk or Order Management Training Fees

Training is purchased in blocks of hours, and travel expenses are in addition.
Seller requires a 30-day advance notice for any training requests.

        25 hours On Premises                             $    [*] per 25 hour block

        50 Hours On Premises                             $    [*] per 50 hour block
</TABLE>

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

Confidential                           11
<PAGE>   65

                                   SCHEDULE B
                                  TO EXHIBIT B

                                    PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

SECTION 1. ORDER PROCESSING

A.      New Mailbox Installations and Administrative MANUAL Changes STANDARD
        Response Times

Seller will perform MANUAL Administrative Changes to Type 0 Mailboxes in
accordance with the following schedule (unless otherwise agreed to by the
parties):

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        NUMBER ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGES
        RECEIVED AT SELLER PER BUSINESS DAY     CYCLE TIME FROM RECEIPT OF WRITTEN
        PER SITE                                ORDER*
        -----------------------------------     ----------------------------------
<S>                                             <C>
        < 25 Administrative Changes             24 hours

        25-50 Administrative Changes            2 business days

        51-100 Administrative Changes           3 business days

        101-250 Administrative Changes          4 business days

        251-400 Administrative Changes          5 business days

        > 400 Administrative Changes            Must be individually scheduled
</TABLE>

        * Includes quality control and shipping of User Documentation
        Kits, if required. Rejected order time frames will re-start upon
        receipt of the corrected order.

B.      New Mailbox Installations and Administrative MANUAL Changes EXPEDITED
        Response Times

Seller will perform MANUAL Administrative Changes to Type 0 Mailboxes in
accordance with the following expedited schedule (unless otherwise agreed to by
the parties):

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        NUMBER ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGES
        RECEIVED AT SELLER PER BUSINESS DAY     EXPEDITED CYCLE TIME FROM RECEIPT
        PER SITE                                OF WRITTEN ORDER* IN BUSINESS HOURS
        -----------------------------------     ----------------------------------
<S>                                             <C>
        < 10   Administrative Changes           4 hours

        10-20 Administrative Changes            8 hours
</TABLE>

        * Includes quality control and shipping of User Documentation Kits, if
        required. Rejected order time frames will re-start upon receipt of the
        corrected order.

C.      Enhanced Mailbox Installations and Administrative MANUAL Changes
        STANDARD Response Times

Seller will perform MANUAL Administrative Changes to Enhanced Mailboxes in
accordance with the following STANDARD schedule (unless otherwise agreed to by
the parties):

Confidential                           12
<PAGE>   66

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        NUMBER OF ENHANCED MAILBOXES SUBJECT
        TO ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGES ORDERS        STANDARD CYCLE TIME FROM RECEIPT
        RECEIVED IN A SINGLE DAY PER SITE       OF WRITTEN ORDER*
        ---------------------------------       -----------------
<S>                                             <C>
        1 - 10 Enhanced Mailboxes               3 business days

        11 - 25 Enhanced Mailboxes              5 business days

        26 - 50 Enhanced Mailboxes              7 business days

        51+ Enhanced Mailboxes                  Must be individually scheduled
</TABLE>

        * Includes quality control and shipping of User Documentation
        Kits, if required. Rejected order time frames will re-start upon
        receipt of the corrected order.

D.      Enhanced Mailbox Installations and Administrative MANUAL Changes
        EXPEDITED Response Times

Seller will perform MANUAL Administrative Changes to Enhanced Mailboxes in
accordance with the following EXPEDITED schedule (unless otherwise agreed to by
the parties):

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        NUMBER OF ENHANCED MAILBOXES SUBJECT
        TO ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGES ORDERS        EXPEDITED CYCLE TIME FROM RECEIPT
        RECEIVED IN A SINGLE DAY PER SITE       OF WRITTEN ORDER*
        ---------------------------------       -----------------
<S>                                             <C>
        1-4 Enhanced Mailboxes                  1 business days

        5- 15 Enhanced Mailboxes                2 business days

        16 - 25 Enhanced Mailboxes              4 business days

        25+ Enhanced Mailboxes                  Must be individually scheduled
</TABLE>

        * Includes quality control and shipping of User Documentation
        Kits, if required. Rejected order time frames will re-start upon
        receipt of the corrected order.

Any Administrative Transaction which requires the deployment of a Voice Mail
Platform or the addition of Ports or disk drives on an existing Voice Mail
Platform will be deployed within mutually agreeable time frames. Confirmation of
receipt of new orders and completion of orders back to Customer will be
accomplished at the end of each business day on which orders are placed.

E.      New Mailbox Installations and Administrative BATCH Changes Response
        Times

Seller will perform BATCH Administrative Changes to Type 0 Mailboxes in
accordance with the following schedule (unless otherwise agreed to by the
parties). NOTE: ENHANCED MAILBOXES ARE NOT AVAILABLE VIA BATCH PROCESSING.

Customer will be responsible for any development to facilitate the accurate
submission of Seller's electronic specification to Seller. All transport is
borne by Customer.

Confidential                           13
<PAGE>   67

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        NUMBER OF BATCH ADMINISTRATIVE
        Changes RECEIVED AT SELLER PER          BATCH CYCLE TIME FROM THE
        BUSINESS DAY                            RECEIPT OF FILE
        ------------------------------          -------------------------
<S>                                             <C>
        < 50 Administrative Changes             2 hours

        < 100 Administrative Changes            4 hours

        < 500  Administrative Changes           8 hours

        < 1,000 Administrative Changes          12 hours

        < 2,000 Administrative Changes          24 hours

        < 4,000 Administrative Changes          48 hours

        > 4,000 and < 10,000 Administrative     72 hours
        Changes

        > 10,000 Administrative Changes         96 hours
</TABLE>

        * Includes quality control and shipping of User Documentation
        Kits, if required. Batch processing usually requires a third
        party fulfillment center on behalf of Customer. Rejected order
        time frames will re-start upon receipt of the corrected file.

F.      Order Flow

All Administrative Change requests will be made on a mutually agreed upon form
by an authorized, designated Customer contact. Said request will be made, via a
mutually agreed upon media, to Seller's designated employee or agent.

SECTION 2. HELPDESK

Seller will provide a toll free number to the HelpDesk for call handling. The
HelpDesk provides a point of contact for Subscribers and Users to report
problems and obtain assistance with the Voice Mail System.

Seller's goals in answering HelpDesk calls are to ensure (i) at least 70% of
HelpDesk calls will be answered within 20 seconds or less directly by an
employee/agent as calculated over a calendar month (ii) calls that enter the
automatic call distributor queue will remain in queue for a targeted average of
1.5 minutes or less as calculated over a calendar month and (iii) Seller will
resolve all informational or User assistance HelpDesk tickets within forty-five
(45) minutes of the time reported to the HelpDesk. Failure to achieve these
goals will not constitute breach of this Exhibit.

SECTION 3. MONITORING

A.      Error Dispatcher

Seller will monitor Customer's Voice Mail System twenty-four (24) hours per day,
seven (7) days per week. Monitoring is defined as conducting polling events
utilizing polling computer technology which electronically retrieves error and
status logs. Such polling is typically performed in sixty (60) minute intervals.
Upon extraction of the error logs (i.e. polling action) Seller processes and
analyzes the error log for possible system problems/errors. If an error is
detected, the NOC will begin immediate resolution procedures. An Seller
employee/agent is present at the NOC twenty-four (24) hours a day, seven (7)
days a week for trouble resolution and corrective action. All error and status
log extractions are stored for fourteen (14) days following collection.

B.      Access Manager

Seller will dial each system access number utilized by Customer's Voice Mail
System, detect the system greeting, gain access to a test Mailbox, detect a
pre-recorded tone and disconnect. Each system access number is tested at least
twice between the hours of 10:00 PM and 6:00 AM CST. If a problem is detected,
the NOC will begin

Confidential                           14
<PAGE>   68

immediate resolution procedures. An Seller employee/agent is present at the NOC
twenty-four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week for trouble resolution and
corrective action.

SECTION 4. TROUBLE TICKET RESOLUTION

On behalf of Customer, Seller will manage the escalation and resolution of
trouble tickets, which is a record of Major and/or Minor Outages identified by
monitoring or reported to the HelpDesk. Seller's employee or agent will
diagnose, investigate and where possible, remotely correct the reported outage.
If any outage can not be corrected from the NOC, the trouble ticket associated
with such outage will be escalated to the appropriate Seller employee/agent and
continually documented and tracked until resolution.

SECTION 5. REPAIR RESPONSE

Seller will respond promptly to all outages identified by monitoring or reported
to the HelpDesk. Seller will classify each outage as a Minor Outage or Major
Outage. If a Major Outage is identified, Seller will immediately begin remote
diagnostics and corrective actions as mutually defined by Customer AND Seller.

All outages not classified as Major Outages are considered Minor Outages and
will be responded to within twenty-four (24) hours.

Seller will provide required travel, labor and parts as part of the cost of
providing Services. Replacement spare parts will be furnished on an exchange
basis and may, at the discretion of Seller, be new, re-manufactured, or
refurbished; provided any such re-manufactured or refurbished replacements are
equivalent in functionality to new parts and are in good working condition.

SECTION 6. TROUBLE TICKET ESCALATION

Customer may escalate any trouble ticket at any time by calling the HelpDesk and
asking to speak to a HelpDesk supervisor. Major Outages will be escalated every
two (2) hours until resolution.

SECTION 7. SYSTEM AVAILABILITY

Seller will maintain each Voice Mail Platform with 99.9% system availability
based on twenty-four (24) hour system availability. The system availability will
be calculated monthly, as a percent as follows:

        System Availability =   A-B
                                ---
                                 A

        Where:       A =    Total minutes in a calendar month less total minutes
                            of scheduled downtime in such month

                     B =    Total minutes of Major Outage in such month less
                            on-site response time, if required.

SECTION 8. SCHEDULED DOWNTIME

Seller will perform preventive maintenance procedures designed to keep the Voice
Mail System in operating condition and capable of performing in accordance with
the manufacturers' specifications. Seller and Customer will mutually agree on
the scheduling of preventive maintenance procedures with a view toward
minimizing interruptions of normal business activities. Seller will identify,
prior to performance, any preventive maintenance procedures which may result in
any disruption of User Services to Customer.

Seller will provide Customer with a request for scheduled downtime at least one
week in advance (normally between 11:00 PM and 6:00 AM local time) for any
scheduled maintenance procedures, system hardware and software enhancements,
disk expansions, system splits, user moves or special projects. Seller will
obtain Customer approval prior to the performance of any such procedures. If
Customer restricts Seller from performing required preventive maintenance
procedures, Seller will be relieved from any liability for resultant failures
and the downtime, if any, associated with that failure.

Confidential                           15
<PAGE>   69

SECTION 9. EQUIPMENT UPGRADES

Seller will, at mutually agreed upon times, perform installation of software,
hardware and/or safety engineering changes required or recommended by the
manufacturer. Seller will first notify and obtain advance written authorization
from Customer to perform such installations. At its discretion, Customer may
refuse to allow installation of engineering changes not required for safety
reasons; however, such a refusal will relieve Seller from any liability for
resultant failures and the downtime, if any, associated therewith.

SECTION 10. CAPACITY MANAGEMENT

A.      Grade of Service  (GOS)

Seller agrees to electronically monitor Voice Mail Platform line group traffic
statistics from each Voice Mail Platform to proactively identify capacity
issues. Upon identification of a capacity issue, Seller will notify Customer and
recommend a course of action for resolution. Customer will provide the final
approval before any action is taken.

Seller collects capacity statistics as part of monitoring services. The
statistics are compiled, processed and analyzed in seven-day periods. Capacity
reports are generally available within ten (10) days following the close of the
seven-day monitoring period. These statistics provide a set of data that is used
to compute the daily busy hour Erlangs and the corresponding statistical Erlang
B GOS. Busy hours are determined by dividing each business day into twenty-four
(24) one (1) hour periods and identifying the hour which carried the most
traffic Unless otherwise specified, the capacity metrics used to initiate a
proactive capacity issue notification to Customer are as follows:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                     NUMBER OF SAMPLES PER
                                                    MONTH EXCEEDING THE GOS
        LINE GROUP TYPE             GOS METRIC             METRIC
        ---------------             ----------      -----------------------
<S>                                 <C>             <C>
        In-bound to Voice Mail      P.02 (2%                 3
        Platform                    blocking)

        Outbound from Voice Mail    P.30 (30%                3
        Platform                    blocking)
</TABLE>

        Inbound Voice Mail Platform line groups are typically used for
        voicemail access and Call Answering functions. Outbound Voice
        Mail Platform line groups are typically used for paging,
        networking and FAX delivery functions.

B.      Disk Storage

Seller collects and reviews Voice Mail Platform disk storage statistics as part
of monitoring services. The statistics are compiled, processed and analyzed in
seven-day periods. Capacity reports are generally available within ten (10) days
following the close of the seven-day monitoring period. These statistics
identify the available disk storage as a percent of total storage by Voice Mail
Platform. Upon identification of a storage availability issue, Seller will
notify Customer and include a recommended course of action for resolution.
Customer will provide the final approval before any action is taken.

Unless otherwise specified, the metric used to initiate a disk storage
availability issue notification to Customer is as follows:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        NUMBER OF SAMPLES IN A MONTH EXCEEDING            MINIMUM UNUSED STORAGE
        THE STORAGE AVAILABILITY METRIC                       CAPACITY METRIC
        --------------------------------------            ----------------------
<S>                                                       <C>
                     3                                              20%
</TABLE>

        Note:   Customer has the responsibility of identifying any future events
                that might influence the recommend course of action, as it
                relates to capacity planning.

Confidential                           16
<PAGE>   70

SECTION 11. PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Seller Project Management will develop project plans and assign Seller resources
to complete Customer projects in accordance with the following schedule (unless
otherwise agreed to by the parties):

Confidential                           17
<PAGE>   71

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                       PROJECT TYPE                     TIME FRAME TO COMPLETE*
                       ------------                     -----------------------
<S>                                                     <C>
         New Voice Mail Platform installations             90 calendar days

         Remote integration to existing Voice              60 calendar days
         Mail Platform

         Blank cluster to existing Voice Mail              60 calendar days
         Platform

         Trunk group expansion                             45 calendar days

         Area code split                                   30 calendar days

         Mailbox Model development                         15 business days
</TABLE>

        * These time frames are dependent upon Customer providing information
        and any required power, circuits, switch programming, etc. on or before
        the date defined in the project plan.

SECTION 13. QUARTERLY BUSINESS REVIEW MEETINGS

Seller will hold quarterly business review meetings with Customer to review
information such as, but not limited to, the status of performance, disclosures
of new features and technologies and organizational direction for both parties.
The parties will use their commercially reasonable efforts to alternate
locations for hosting the quarterly review meetings.

Confidential                           18
<PAGE>   72

                                   SCHEDULE C
                                  TO EXHIBIT B

                              CUSTOMER COMMITMENTS

        Customer agrees that it will purchase Services from Seller in at least
the amounts and on or before the following dates.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        Date          Amount                Market
        ----          ------                ------
<S>                   <C>                   <C>
        2/15/99       Package 24            Santa Rosa, CA
        3/15/99       Package 24            Salem, OR
        4/15/99       Package 24            Tacoma, WA
        7/17/99       Package 24            Reno, NV
        9/15/99       Package 24            Washington, D.C.
        TBD           Package 24            To Be Determined  (TBD) by Customer
        TBD           Package 24            TDB
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
        TBD           Package 24            TBD
</TABLE>

        In the event that Customer fails to purchase Services in the amounts and
on or before such dates, Customer agrees that the pricing for the Services
Purchased during the applicable periods will be retroactively adjusted to
satisfy the commitments set forth in the immediate preceding sentence and
Customer agrees to pay the additional amounts due on or before the date ninety
(90) days subsequent to the end of such period.

Confidential                           19
<PAGE>   73

                                   EXHIBIT C

                     SWITCH AND TRANSMISSION SYSTEM PRODUCTS

1       SCOPE

        1.1     This Switch and Transmission System Products Discount Exhibit
                establishes terms and conditions under which Customer may
                purchase the 5ESS(R)-2000 Products, additional related Software,
                and Transmission System Products ("TSP") set forth herein from
                Seller.

        1.2     In consideration for Customer's Purchase Commitment, Seller
                shall provide the pricing, allowances and incentives for
                5ESS(R)-2000 Products, additional related Software, and TSP set
                forth herein. Seller reserves the right to discontinue or adjust
                accordingly all discounts, pricing, allowances and/or incentives
                set forth herein for all orders if Customer does not meet its
                Purchase Commitment and or Customer is in breach of the
                Agreement.

2       DEFINITIONS

        2.1     The following terms shall have the meanings indicated below for
                the 5ESS-2000 Products and related Software described herein:

                2.1.1   "5ESS-2000 Switch" means any initial 5ESS-2000 Switch
                        system. A 5ESS-2000 Switch contains at a minimum, an
                        Administrative Module ("AM"), Communications Module
                        ("CM"), and at least one (1) Switch Module, and any such
                        Switch can act as a host for Optically Remote Modules
                        ("ORMs"), Remote Switch Modules ("RSMs"), and/or the
                        Extended Switch Modules ("EXMs").

                2.1.2   "Base Software" means the operating system and related
                        Software, and operations, administration and maintenance
                        features and functions, for all Seller's 5ESS-2000
                        Switch based platforms.

                2.1.3   "Expanded Access Interface Unit (`EAIU')" means an
                        extended line unit.

                2.1.4   "Growth" means any hardware or Software not purchased
                        with the associated 5ESS-2000 Switch required to expand
                        the capacity of such 5ESS-2000 Switch, which may include
                        without limitation Switch or Switch Module.

                2.1.5   "Peripherals" means hardware and/or optional Software
                        features added subsequent to the installation of the
                        initial Switch or Switch Module.

3       PRICING PLAN FOR 5ESS-2000 PRODUCTS AND SWITCH SOFTWARE RELEASES

        3.1     Purchase Price and Configurations

                Seller shall provide to Customer the Product(s) described in the
                following Schedules which are incorporated herein by reference
                and attachment:

                3.1.1   Schedule 1, "5ESS/RSM Price Fact Table,"

                3.1.2   Schedule 2, "5ESS/RSM Product Configurations"

                        Schedule 1 pricing is fixed for the Agreement term,
                        subject to Seller's evaluation of Customer's Purchase
                        Commitment. Schedule 2 describes Customer's customized
                        configurations for 5ESS-2000 Switches in its networks.
                        Any 5ESS-2000 Products discounts shall be applied
                        towards Seller's published list price in effect upon the
                        Effective Date of this Agreement.

        3.2     Pricing Plan for 5ESS-2000 Product Discounts

                3.2.1   Any purchase orders placed pursuant to this Exhibit
                        shall reference Contract Number LNM99NMYK09ATG to
                        qualify for the discounts incorporated herein. During
                        the term, these discounts are applicable to Seller's
                        5ESS-2000 Products and related Software licenses listed
                        herein only. Purchases orders shall be discounted
                        against Seller's list price in effect at the time of
                        order receipt and be

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY                1 OF 11
<PAGE>   74

                        processed using then-current standard delivery
                        intervals. Ancillary items, pre-conditioning,
                        engineering and installation services are excluded from
                        the discount schedule. Discounts shall be determined by
                        Seller's merchandise class code.

                3.2.2   In consideration for its Purchase Commitment, Customer
                        shall receive the following discounts as provided below:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                  DISCOUNT SCHEDULE FOR 5ESS-2000 SWITCH PRODUCTS(1)
                                  --------------------------------------------------
                                                              INITIAL SWITCH     SM / LARGE
                                  PRODUCT TYPE                   DISCOUNT      GROWTH DISCOUNT
                                  ------------                   --------      ---------------
<S>                                                           <C>              <C>
                         5ESS- 2000 Host Switch                     [*]               [*]

                         5ESS-2000 Peripheral Hardware              [*]               [*]

                         EXM- & ORM-2000 Remote Switch              [*]               [*]

                         EAIU                                       [*]               [*]
</TABLE>

                        1       Discounts do not apply to engineering and
                                installation Services.

                        2       This discount shall apply when [*] or more
                                STSX packs are included on Customer's purchase
                                order for a single 5ESS-2000 Switch site.

        3.3     Pricing Plan For 5ESS-2000 Switch Software Releases

                3.3.1   For the purposes of this Section, the fees for Base
                        Software releases shall mean the Software RTU and Office
                        Data Administration ("ODA") fees. The purchase by
                        Customer of a 5ESS-2000 Switch during the term will
                        include, at no additional charge to Customer, a license
                        (subject to the licensing provisions of the Agreement)
                        to use the then-current Base Software on the Switch.
                        Subsequent Base Software releases will be licensed by
                        Customer for [*] per RTU Base Software release per
                        5ESS-2000 host Switch. These license fees do not include
                        any other licenses for Software features, firmware,
                        hardware, engineering and installation in Customer's
                        network.

        3.4     Discount Schedule for Transmission Systems Products

                Seller will provide the following TSP discounts for Seller's
                SLC-2000, Anymedia Fast and SLC Connect Reach products pursuant
                to the discount table below:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                         TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS PRODUCTS              DISCOUNT
                ------------------------------------------------- --------------
<S>                                                               <C>
                SLC-2000 CARRIER SYSTEM:                               [*]

                ANYMEDIA FAST 303/08

                        ANYMEDIA SHELF/COMMONS                         [*]

                        POTS ONLY APPLICATION PACK                     [*]

                        PROGRAMMABLE APPLICATION PACK                  [*]

                        ISDN APPLICATION PACK                          [*]

                        ADSL APPLICATION PACK                          [*]

                SLC CONNECT REACH

                        HARDWARE                                       [*]

                        POTS CHANNEL UNITS                             [*]

                        DATA CHANNEL UNITS                             [*]
</TABLE>

        3.5    The above TSP does not include the cables or power used with the
               equipment. Unless otherwise specified, the discounts shown above
               apply to TSP hardware only. The discount

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY                2 OF 11
<PAGE>   75

                for the power and cables used in the systems set forth above
                shall be [*] off the list price in effect at the time of order
                receipt.

                3.5.1   During the term, these discounts are applicable to
                        Seller's TSP listed herein only. Purchases orders shall
                        be discounted against Seller's list price in effect at
                        the time of order receipt and be processed using
                        then-current standard delivery intervals. Ancillary
                        items, pre-conditioning, engineering and installation
                        services are excluded from the discount schedule.
                        Discounts shall be determined by Seller's merchandise
                        class code.

        3.6     RTU Audit and Payment Plan for Optional 5ESS-2000 Software
                Features

                3.6.1   Each calendar quarter, Seller will audit Customer's
                        activated optional Software features by 5ESS(R)-2000
                        Switch for the preceding quarter. Optional Software
                        features are those features which can be installed on
                        the 5ESS(R)-2000 Switch dependent upon the generic
                        Software release platform. Optional Software features
                        not installed at the time of initial 5ESS(R)-2000 Switch
                        purchase and installation are discounted [*]. Seller
                        shall invoice and Customer shall remit payment within
                        thirty (30) days of the invoice date for any increase in
                        the number of activated features for the audited
                        quarter. Seller shall use the Feature Activation
                        Accounting and Reconciliation (FACR) software program to
                        accurately audit activated features. In addition to
                        Seller's audit, Customer shall promptly submit written
                        notification to Seller of the total number of activated
                        features by 5ESS-2000 Switch for the prior calendar
                        quarter. Seller shall notify Customer five (5) business
                        days prior to such audit. Customer shall support Seller
                        in its auditing activities to ensure the accuracy of
                        such audit.

4       TRAINING

        4.1     Seller will provide [*] for the first 5ESS-2000 Host/Standalone
                Switch purchased after the effective date of this Schedule. This
                training may be used any time during the first twelve (12)
                months after the Host/Standalone Switch installation. Seller
                will provide an additional [*] for each 5ESS-2000
                Host/Standalone Switch purchased subsequent to the first
                Host/Standalone Switch, [*] for each additional Remote Switch,
                and [*] for the first SM-2000 growth per 5ESS-2000
                Host/Standalone Switch. Customer is responsible for all travel
                and living expenses for Customer's personnel. While Seller
                recommends core courses from Customer Training Catalog, any
                5ESS-2000 Switch-related courses may be taken at Customer's
                discretion.

        4.2     In consideration for Customer's first purchase of each SLC-2000
                Access system, SLC-Connect Reach system, and Anymedia-Fast
                system, Seller will provide [*] for each system. The use of
                training days as used herein shall mean one student day per
                training class. Training days earned by Customer for TSP must be
                used before the expiration date of this Agreement. Customer is
                responsible for all associated travel and living expense for
                Customer personnel. Seller, at its option, shall offer training
                regionally at Seller's Training Centers. While Seller recommends
                core courses from its Customer Training Catalog, Customer may
                choose from any of the Seller's TSP related courses.

5       DOCUMENTATION

        5.1     Seller will provide, at no charge, three (3) copies of the
                5ESS-2000 Switch System and Software Site Documentation on
                CD-ROM for each Host Switch site. Updates will be provided for
                two (2) years from Host Switch Site Notice of Installation
                Complete. When a Host Switch is converted to the subsequent
                Software generic, Seller will provide another copy of Switch
                System and Software Site documentation on CD-ROM to the Host
                Site along with updates for one (1) year after issuance.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY                3 OF 11
<PAGE>   76

        5.2     Seller will provide at no charge one (1) Application Planning
                and Ordering Guide in paper form with the initial order of each
                TSP type. Seller will also provide in CD-ROM three (3) copies of
                the latest version of Seller's TSP Documentation.

6       MARKETING DEVELOPMENT FUND

        6.1     Seller will allocate to a Marketing Development Fund (MDF) [*]
                of TSP revenues by Customer during the term. Any amounts
                allocated to the MDF herein may be utilized by Customer only in
                accordance with the MDF Guidelines set forth at the time of
                utilization.

7       TECHNICAL SUPPORT

        7.1     During the term, warranty assistance shall be available to
                Customer by calling Seller's Regional Technical Assistance
                Center (RTACs) on 1-800-CAL-RTAC (1-800-225-7822). Seller shall
                monitor this number on a twenty-four (24) hour a day, seven day
                a week basis. During regular business hours (8:00 a.m. to 5:00
                p.m. central time), calls will be answered by the closest
                geographically located RTAC. Outside of regular business hours,
                all calls will be answered at a centralized assistance center.
                Service-affecting problems will be expedited to the local RTAC.

        7.2     Seller shall make available for purchase by Customer
                post-warranty technical support. Such post-warranty technical
                support shall be provided under a separate post-warranty service
                contract entered into by the parties or on a per-problem basis
                during the term at Seller's prevailing rates.

        7.3     Seller shall make available additional services designed to
                enhance the operating capabilities of Customer's network or
                system on a billable basis. Seller shall also make available
                additional technical support for Customer's network or system.
                Such additional technical support shall be provided at Seller's
                then prevailing rates and terms.

8       SITE REQUIREMENTS

        8.1     Customer is solely responsible for ensuring that the
                installation site is compliant with any site requirements
                identified by Seller for the installation and/or operation of
                any Products, Licensed Materials, or Services furnished by
                Seller under this Agreement. Such site requirements shall
                include, without limitation, those site requirements set forth
                herein below. Seller agrees to cooperate with Customer to ensure
                compliance with all site requirements, provided that such
                cooperation shall not require Seller to incur any out-of-pocket
                costs unless the parties expressly agree otherwise in writing.

        8.2     Customer shall be solely responsible for ensuring that the
                installation site complies with all applicable laws, orders, and
                regulations of federal, state and local governmental entities
                including, without limitation, those relating to environmental
                conditions.

        8.3     Notwithstanding anything contained in this Agreement to the
                contrary, Seller shall have no liability to Customer, its
                employees, agents, and customers for any delay by Seller in
                completion of any installation or other Service to be provided
                by Seller under this Agreement if such delay is attributable to
                the failure by Customer to comply with any site requirements or
                to provide any other items which are the responsibility of
                Customer under this section.

                The site requirements which are solely the Customer's
                responsibility shall include but are not limited to the
                following:

                (a)     Participate in a joint site survey with Seller

                (b)     Interior Space -Clears ten feet (10') from floor to
                        bottom of lowest obstruction

                (c)     Floor Loading(minimum requirements) Structural Analysis
                        always required

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY                4 OF 11
<PAGE>   77

                (d)     Power Room 150 lb. per sq. ft

                (e)     Switch Room 100 lb. per sq. ft.

                (f)     Floor Thickness: In accordance with local seismic
                        requirements for the equipment

                (g)     Conduit access to all floors in building

                (h)     Local exchange carrier cable available

                (i)     Commercial electrical current

                (j)     Existing building grounding is 5 ohm or less metered

                (k)     Battery room ventilation in accordance with local
                        requirements

                (l)     Fire suppression system

                (m)     Freight access for a 48' trailer off loading equipment.

                8.3.1   ADDITIONAL ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER

        Customer will also be responsible for furnishing the items described in
        this section as required by the conditions of the particular
        installation or other on-site Service at no cost to Seller and such
        items are not included in Seller's price for the Services. Seller shall
        have the right to invoice Customer for any costs or expenses incurred by
        Seller as a result of Customer's failure to provide any of these items
        described in this section and all such invoices shall be paid by
        Customer in accordance with this Agreement.

                (a)     Access to Building and Work Site Customer shall provide
                        employees of Seller and its subcontractors free access
                        to premises and facilities at all hours during the
                        scheduled Service or at such other times as are
                        requested by Seller. Customer shall obtain for Seller's
                        employees and its subcontractors' employees any
                        identification and clearance credentials, which are
                        necessary to enable Seller and its subcontractors to
                        have access to the work site.

                (b)     Site Coordination At Seller's request Customer shall
                        coordinate with Customer's sub contractors, property
                        managers, Regional Bell Operating Company, Local
                        Exchange Carrier and any other parties and tenants
                        having rights to the work site or whose participation is
                        necessary in order for Seller to perform the applicable
                        Services.

                (c)     Environmental Conditions Prior to the Services start
                        date, Customer shall insure that the premises will be
                        dry and free from dust and Hazardous Materials,
                        including but not limited to asbestos, and that the
                        premises are in such condition as not to be injurious to
                        Seller's or its subcontractors' employees or to the
                        Products and Licensed Materials to be installed. Prior
                        to Services start date and during the performance of the
                        Services, Customer shall, if requested by Seller,
                        provide Seller with sufficient data to assist Seller and
                        its subcontractors in evaluating the environmental
                        conditions at the work site (including without
                        limitation, the presence of Hazardous Materials). The
                        price quoted by Seller for Services does not include the
                        cost of removal or disposal of the Hazardous Materials
                        from the work site. Customer is responsible for the
                        removal and disposal in accordance with applicable laws,
                        rules and regulation of the Hazardous Materials,
                        including but not limited to asbestos, prior to
                        commencement of Services.

                (d)     Sensitive Equipment Prior to the Services start date,
                        Customer shall inform Seller of the presence of any
                        sensitive equipment at the work site (e.g., equipment
                        sensitive to static electricity or light).

                (e)     Repairs to Buildings Prior to the Services start date,
                        Customer shall make such alterations and repairs to the
                        work site as are necessary for proper installation of
                        Products and Licensed Materials.

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY                5 OF 11
<PAGE>   78

                (f)     Building Readiness Prior to the Services start date,
                        Customer shall provide extraordinary hauling and
                        hoisting services such as, rigging or crane services, if
                        applicable, and shall arrange for traffic control, if
                        necessary for the delivery of Products.

                (g)     Openings in Buildings Customer shall furnish suitable
                        openings in buildings, including, without limitation,
                        elevators and windows as needed to allow Products to be
                        placed in position, and shall provide necessary openings
                        and ducts for cable and conductors in floors and walls
                        as designated on engineering drawings furnished by
                        Seller. Customer shall fireproof (with steel covers and
                        as otherwise required by applicable laws, rules,
                        regulations, and codes) all unopened paths throughout
                        such buildings.

                (h)     Surveys Prior to the Services start date, Customer shall
                        provide to Seller (and, if requested by Seller, to
                        Seller's subcontractors) surveys (describing the
                        physical characteristics, legal limitations, and utility
                        locations for the work site) and a legal description of
                        the site.

                (i)     Electrical Current, Heat, Light, and Water Customer
                        shall, in amounts no less than that ordinarily furnished
                        for similar purposes in a working office, provide
                        electric power, run all leads to Seller's power board;
                        provide temperature control and general illumination
                        (regular and emergency) in rooms in which services are
                        to be performed or Products stored, provide exit lights;
                        and provide water and other necessary utilities for the
                        proper execution of Services.

                (j)     Building Evacuation Prior to the Services start date,
                        Customer shall provide building evacuation plans in case
                        of a fire or other emergency.

                (k)     Ceiling Inserts Provide ceiling inserts as required
                        using Seller's standard spacing arrangement for ceiling
                        support equipment.

                (l)     Material Furnished by Customer Unless expressly stated
                        in the Firm Price quote, Seller's prices do not include
                        costs for any Customer furnished material nor do they
                        include any Seller charges for engineering,
                        installation, modification, or repair Services to
                        Customer furnished material. New or used material
                        furnished by Customer requiring installation shall be in
                        such condition that it requires no repair and no
                        adjustment or test effort in excess of that normal for
                        new equipment. Refurbish of Customer provided equipment
                        will be billed on an individual basis and can not be
                        Firm Price quoted. Customer assumes all responsibility
                        for the proper functioning of such material. Customer
                        shall also provide the necessary technical assistance
                        and information for Seller to properly install such
                        material. Cost for installation and engineering services
                        must be identified prior to installation start and a
                        signed Purchase Order must be provided.

                (m)     Floor Space and Storage Facilities Customer shall
                        provide, for the duration of Services, suitable and
                        easily accessible floor space and storage facilities to
                        permit storing of Products and other material, tools and
                        other property of Seller and its subcontractors in close
                        proximity to where they will be used. Where the Services
                        are to be performed outside of a building or in a
                        building under construction, Customer shall, in addition
                        to the above requirements, permit or secure any
                        necessary permission for Seller and its subcontractors
                        to maintain at the work site, storage facilities for
                        Products, material, tools, and equipment needed to
                        complete the Services. As appropriate Customer shall
                        provide Seller's and its subcontractors' personnel
                        access to toilet facilities.

                (n)     Easements, Permits, and Rights of Way Customer shall
                        secure prior to the Services start date and shall
                        maintain for the duration of the Services all
                        rights-of-way, easements, licenses, and permits and such
                        other rights and approvals as are necessary to enable
                        Seller to perform the Services including, without
                        limitation, all construction and building permits for
                        work to be performed at

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY                6 OF 11
<PAGE>   79

                        the work site and other areas ancillary to the work site
                        such as sidewalks, streets, alleys, and highways.

                (o)     Security Service Customer shall provide such levels of
                        security as are necessary to prevent admission of
                        unauthorized persons to building and other areas where
                        installation Services are performed and to prevent
                        unauthorized removal of the Products and other
                        materials. Seller will inform Customer as to which
                        storage facilities at the work site Seller will keep
                        locked. Such storage facilities will remain closed to
                        Customer's building surveillance.

                (p)     Access to Existing Equipment Customer shall permit
                        Seller reasonable use of such portions of the existing
                        equipment as are necessary for the proper completion of
                        such tests as require coordination with existing
                        equipment. Such use shall not interfere with the
                        Customer's normal maintenance of equipment.

                (q)     Grounds Customer shall provide access to suitable and
                        isolated building ground as required for Seller's
                        standard grounding of equipment. Where installation is
                        performed outside or in a building under construction,
                        Customer shall also furnish lightning protection ground.

                (r)     Requirements for Customer Designed Circuits Customer
                        shall furnish information covering the proper test and
                        readjust requirements for apparatus and shall furnish
                        requirements for circuit performance associated with
                        circuits designed by Customer or standard circuits
                        modified by Customer's drawings such as alarm and
                        environmental circuits.

                (s)     Cross-Connecting Main Distributing Frames and Installing
                        Heat Coils Customer shall install such cross-connections
                        and heat coils as are necessary in connection with the
                        Services.

                (t)     Clearing Equipment for Modifications Customer shall
                        remove cross-connections, transfer service on trunks and
                        sundry working equipment, and make other arrangements
                        required to permit Seller to modify existing equipment.

In the event the joint site survey conducted by the parties pursuant to this
Section determines that the necessary requirements are not met at the
commencement of the installation of the Products and the Customer needs to
arrange for alterations and/or repairs, the order will be placed on hold until
such time as requirements are met. During such interval, Seller reserves the
right to determine any schedule and price impacts, to treat such product as Bill
and Hold, or to cancel such order. Customer shall be responsible for and agrees
to pay the applicable cancellation fee if Seller cancels such order.

                8.3.2   IMA-CA SITE REQUIREMENTS

        (a)     Purpose: This Schedule defines the power, physical and
                environmental requirements for the equipment room to be
                furnished by the CUSTOMER for the IMA-CA, the form of which may
                be revised by Octel from time to time. It is the responsibility
                of the CUSTOMER to ensure that these requirements are met.
                Conformance to site requirements will ensure maximum reliability
                of the system. CUSTOMER assumes responsibility for equipment
                room compliance to applicable building and electrical codes.

        (b)     Power Source: OCTEL systems require a dedicated power circuit
                from the facility's primary power source. The power panel
                provided for the systems will have an isolated ground connected
                to the service entry ground using a continuous insulated
                conductor the same size as the current carrying conductors. The
                service entry ground will be connected to a single point ground,
                such as a ground rod, building structural steel, or other
                approved ground source defined by the National Electrical Code.
                Water pipes are not an acceptable ground for this technology.

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY                7 OF 11
<PAGE>   80

        (c)     Power Requirements: A system administrator terminal requires one
                outlet at 117 VAC, 60 Hz, 10 amps, 3-wires with a dedicated
                ground. An optional printer connecting to the terminal requires
                the same power.

        (d)     Power Conditioning: The Systems are extremely resistant to
                transient voltages in comparison to most computing devices.
                However, in areas where electrical storms pose a danger,
                consider installing transient protection device in the power
                lines. This is particularly important where power is provided by
                outside overhead lines. Installing the Systems onto the same AC
                line with copy machines, elevators, air conditioning units or
                other motor-driven devices is not recommended, unless proper
                power conditioning is installed to isolate the system from AC
                power surges and fluctuations.

        (e)     Equipment Room Space: The CUSTOMER will provide approximately 36
                inches in front, sides and rear of the equipment which will
                allow sufficient space for access to the equipment for service
                personnel. Space provided by the CUSTOMER will also accommodate
                a desk top or suitable rack for installation of the system
                administrator's terminal and printer.

        (f)     Equipment Room Environment: CUSTOMER will provide adequate
                temperature and humidity equipment and controls to maintain
                optimum operation range of 40 to 100 degrees F, and 20-80%
                relative humidity. Space provided will be relatively dust-free
                and moisture-proof. The space should meet NEBS requirements for
                airborne contaminants and not contain X-ray equipment, radar or
                TV transmitters.

9       PREREQUISITES FOR DEPLOYMENT OF INTEGRATION TEAM

        9.1     Requirement

                9.1.1   Building Site Readiness

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       Owner           C/L    Comp                              Requirement
       -----           ---    ----                              -----------
<S>                    <C>    <C>       <C>
                        L               5ESS installation complete and FULLS loaded in the switch.

                       C/L              Transport equipment installation complete. If not Lucent
                                        Manufactured Equipment, Customer responsible for Test and
                                        Turn-up.

                       C/L              Cross connect equipment installation complete.

                       C/L              Office clock installed, wired to equipment, and synchronization
                                        active.
</TABLE>

               9.1.2  Facility orders (DS-3's, DS-1's and DS-0's)

-       Facility orders, for facilities required for cut over, are placed and
        delivered to coincide with the start of the integration process
        interval. Office records (CLRs, DLRs) availability at the site.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       Owner           C/L    Comp                              Requirement
       -----           ---    ----                              -----------
<S>                    <C>    <C>       <C>
                       C                DS3's: Facility will appear within the location, and be
                                        terminated on the appropriate frames. Due dates for facilities
                                        should coincide with the start of the integration interval.
                                        Facility assignment records (i.e., DLR's, CLR's) need to be
                                        available. T-Bird 310 and
</TABLE>

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY                8 OF 11
<PAGE>   81

<TABLE>
<S>                    <C>    <C>       <C>
                                        224 test equipment available.

                       C                DS1's - DS0's: Orders placed with due dates on or before the
                                        start of Integration interval. Trunk layout records which
                                        associate the trunks with the facilities they ride, need to be
                                        available. Any changes to facility or trunk assignments must
                                        be accompanied by updated records.
</TABLE>

                9.1.3   SS7 Links ordered and Installed

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       Owner           C/L    Comp                              Requirement
       -----           ---    ----                              -----------
<S>                    <C>    <C>       <C>
                       C                Due dates for SS7 links should be on or before the start of the
                                        integration interval. Level one testing complete.

                       C                Diversity of the SS7 links should be planned for and provided.
</TABLE>

                9.1.4   Integration Team Work Area and Telecommunications

-       Work area and telecommunications readiness to support all Lucent and
        Customer personnel scheduled for the office.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>

       Owner           C/L    Comp                              Requirement
       -----           ---    ----                              -----------
<S>                    <C>    <C>       <C>
                       C                Several tables or desks need to be provided for the Integration
                                        Team.  This is in addition to the maintenance center

                       C                Telecommunications needs to be adequate to support the expected
                                        population of the site during the interval. The Integration
                                        Team needs a minimum of two lines (hunting), which appear in
                                        the maintenance center area and near the transport equipment,
                                        and two lines (hunting) which only appear in the maintenance
                                        center. These lines are for the use of the integration Team in
                                        completing the integration process.

                       C                If other people will be at the location during the integration
                                        process, separate lines need to be provided for their use

                       C                Telephone lines required for remote access (e.g., SCANS, NRC
                                        and remote TLWS) must be installed to the site prior to the
                                        start of integration.
</TABLE>

                9.1.5   Contact information for other service providers

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       Owner           C/L    Comp                              Requirement
       -----           ---    ----                              -----------
<S>                    <C>    <C>       <C>
                       C                Telephone numbers for vendor contacts should be obtained when
                                        facilities or circuits are order. This should include contacts
                                        for initial testing of circuits, ongoing maintenance, and
                                        escalation information.

                       C                Contact information for the SS7 provider is required.
</TABLE>

                        9.1.6 Alarm Assignments

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY                9 OF 11
<PAGE>   82

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       Owner           C/L    Comp                              Requirement
       -----           ---    ----                              -----------
<S>                    <C>    <C>       <C>
                       C                A list of miscellaneous alarms (i.e., building, environmental)
                                        must be provided at the beginning of the integration interval

                       C                If a specific layout on the alarm page is desired, that
                                        information must be provided at the start of the integration
                                        interval.

                       C/L              Alarm leads from miscellaneous equipment must appear on the
                                        main distributing frame or other cross-connect bays to allow
                                        connection to the 5ESS.

                       C                Arrangements must be made with vendors of miscellaneous
                                        equipment (i.e., air conditioning, fire detection) to perform
                                        alarm tests from their equipment.
</TABLE>

                9.1.7   Call flow Diagrams

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       Owner           C/L    Comp                              Requirement
       -----           ---    ----                              -----------
<S>                    <C>    <C>       <C>
                       C                The call through test plan is based upon the CALL FLOW DIAGRAMS
                                        provided by the customer

                       C                Call Flow Diagrams must be provided two weeks prior to the
                                        start of the integration interval to allow time to develop a
                                        site specific plan
</TABLE>

                9.1.8   Recorded Announcement assignments and required inputs

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       Owner           C/L    Comp                              Requirement
       -----           ---    ----                              -----------
<S>                    <C>    <C>       <C>
                       C                RA Tapes must be provided on or about the start of the
                                        integration interval.
</TABLE>

10      DELIVERABLES OF INTEGRATION PROCESS

        10.1    All Equipment is Up and Running

-       Switch and transport equipment are free of alarms.
-       All switching equipment passes machine diagnostic tests.
-       All assigned trunks are ready for service.
-       All assigned recorded announcements have the appropriate announcements.
-       All working facilities are in a "green" condition.

11      SITE HANDLES CALLS AS SPECIFIED IN CALL DIAGRAMS

-       An approved test plan which verifies the ability of the switch to
        process calls as defined in the call flow diagrams will be successfully
        completed.

                        LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES - PROPRIETARY               10 OF 11
<PAGE>   83

        ATG/LUCENT "NEW SITE" SWITCHROOM AND MAINTENANCE CONTROL CENTER
                               "READY" CHECKLIST

DATE______________________              OFFICE LOCATION________________________

BUILDING/ROOM READY DATE______________  ADDRESS:_______________________________

INSTALLATION START DATE_______________  _______________________________________

                                        _______________________________________

          SWITCH ROOM READY CHECK LIST
   The following items must have a "YES" or
"NA" response prior to the start of installation

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                 RENEGOTIATED
            ITEM CHECK LIST                     YES   NO   N/A   DUE DATE    ISSUES    YES  NO       DATE       IMPACT ON COMMITMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>  <C>                                        <C>   <C>  <C>   <C>         <C>       <C>  <C>  <C>            <C>
1    ACCESS/EQUIPMENT DELIVERY TO SWITCHROOM
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2    WALLS OR PARTITIONS CONSTRUCTION COMPLETE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3    WALLS PAINTED
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4    HOLES CUT IN WALLS/FLOORS FOR CABLE RACK
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5    HOLES CUT IN WALLS/FLOORS FOR CONDUIT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6    D/C POWER TO FUSE PANEL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7    A/C POWER OUTLETS INSTALLED/WORKING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8    FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM/INSTALLED/WORKING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9    DUST FREE ENVIRONMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10   INSTALLATION/WORK AREA TRAFFIC FREE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11   FLOOR TILES-INPLACE-SWEPT-WAXED
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12   FLOOR-SWEPT-CLEANED (IF CONCRETE)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13   "IF" RAISED FLOORING-INSTALLED & COMPLETE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14   OVERHEAD CONSTRUCTION COMPLETE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15   AIR CONDITIONING/HEATING INSTALLED/WORKING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16   HEATING/COOLING DUCTS INSTALLED
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17   LIGHTING INSTALLED/WORKING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18   "IF" FALSE CEILING INSTALLED
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19   CEILING TILES INPLACE/CEILING CLOSED
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20   CABLE RACK IS INSTALLED TO D/C-MDF-DSX
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21   GROUND POINT/GROUNDING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22   LOCKED/SECURE SWITCHROOM FOR EQUIPMENT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23   CLOCK/GPS INSTALLED
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

     Lucent Representative_______________________      DATE________________

     ATG Representative__________________________      DATE________________

                                                                          PAGE 1

     THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETE PRIOR TO DELIVERY OR START OF INSTALLATION.
<PAGE>   84
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MILESTONE                                            OWNER       REQUIRE PRIOR TO                          TASK             EXAMPLE
                                                                 SERVICE READINESS                       INTERVAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                                  <C>         <C>                                     <C>                <C>
Host PO's Received (Note 2)                           ATG        25 weeks prior to Service Readiness                        6/4/99
Host Power Manufacturing Complete                    Lucent      16 weeks prior to Service Readiness      9 Weeks           8/6/99
Host Power Equipment Ship to Designated Warehouse    Lucent      15 weeks prior to Service Readiness      1 Week            8/13/99
Host 5ESS Manufacturing Complete                     Lucent      14 weeks prior to Service Readiness      11 Weeks          8/20/99
Host 5ESS Equipment Ship to Designated Warehouse     Lucent      13 weeks prior to Service Readiness      1 Week            8/27/99
Host Site Ready (Note 3)                              ATG        13 weeks prior to Service Readiness                        8/27/99
ODA Questionnaire Complete                            ATG        12 weeks prior to Service Readiness                        9/3/99
5ESS Software Loaded (ODA)                           Lucent      5 weeks prior to Service Readiness                         11/5/99
Host Equipment Installation Complete
  (TURNOVER Acceptance Test)                         Lucent      3 weeks prior to Service Readiness       12 Weeks          11/19/99
All Integration Pre-requisite Deliverables
  Complete (Note 4)                                   ATG        4 weeks prior to Service Readiness                         11/12/99
Commence Host Integration Testing
  (TURNOVER to CUTOVER Acceptance Test)              Lucent      4 weeks prior to Service Readiness       4 Weeks (starts   11/12/99
                                                                                                          1 week prior to
                                                                                                            Installation
                                                                                                             Completion
SERVICE READINESS                                    Lucent/ATG                                                             12/10/99
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

DEFINITIONS:
1. The Schedule of Milestones may be customized for each location
dependant on Configuration
2. Host PO's: All PO's for Host, including pre-conditioning ironwork, 5ESS,
power, Transmission
3. Host Site Ready: Please refer to Site Ready Checklist for definition
4. Integration Pre-Requisite Deliverables: Please refer to Prerequisite for
Deployment of Integration Team for definition
5. Excludes all third party equipment - this will be addressed in a separate
exhibit.
6. Service Readiness: Host Integration is complete, Host is ready for
service
7. Network Build: Includes site survey, RFQ, PO process, Equipment
Engineering, Manufacturing, Shipment, Installation and Integration of
Network Elements.

<PAGE>   85

                                  EXHIBIT D-1
                                     TO THE
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT

                COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE SUPPORT AGREEMENT BETWEEN
                      LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC. AND CUSTOMER

This is an Agreement (hereinafter "Agreement") between LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES,
INC., (hereinafter SELLER) a Delaware corporation with offices at 480 Red Hill
Road, Middletown, New Jersey 07748, and ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP, INC. having an
office at 100 Stony Point Road, Suite 130, Santa Rosa, California 95401
(hereinafter CUSTOMER).

WHEREAS, the parties have entered into an agreement; and,

WHEREAS, the Customer wishes to purchase certain Support services and Seller
wishes to provide Support services.

NOW, THEREFORE, the parties agree as follows:

1.      PURPOSE OF THE AGREEMENT
        This Agreement sets forth the terms and conditions under which Support
        is provided for Lucent Communications Software (LCS). Such LCS, for
        purposes of this Agreement, means Communications Software that is
        currently in Customer's embedded base and any New Communications
        Software. Such Communications Software(s) are listed in Attachment C
        which may be amended from time-to-time by mutual agreement of the
        Parties.

2.      TERM
        This Agreement shall have an initial term of one (1) years commencing on
        January 1, 1999, (hereinafter "Effective Date"), and continuing through
        December 31, 1999 (hereinafter "Initial Term") and shall be
        automatically renewable for the following years of support unless
        otherwise acknowledged by both Parties.

        An annual pricing sheet will be distributed to the customer according to
        the pricing structure in Attachment B, Clause 6 "Pricing for Support
        Levels of Coverage". The parties will be able to review the their
        pricing for software maintenance, however, in the event that the
        customer does not respond to the new pricing sheet, it will then be
        agreed to by default.

        Seller may terminate Support for any LCS covered by the Agreement by
        providing Customer with a one (1) year written notice before
        discontinuing Support on any LCS covered by this Agreement. If Seller
        elects to discontinue Support on any LCS covered

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 1 of 4
<PAGE>   86

        by this Agreement Customer shall receive a refund for any payments made
        and applicable after such termination.

        Customer may terminate Support for any LCS covered by this Agreement by
        providing Seller written notice one (1) year before the effective date
        of termination. In the event of such termination, Customer agrees to pay
        the balance of the Initial Term or any renewal term Support price for
        such LCS in accordance with the scheduled quarterly payments. Customer
        may change the Support Level of any LCS covered by this Agreement for
        any renewal term of this Agreement by giving Seller written notice at
        least ninety (90) days before such renewal term commences.

3.      POST WARRANTY SUPPORT CERTIFICATION
        New Communications Software generic/release/features furnished and
        installed by Seller or furnished by Seller and installed by Customer
        shall be eligible for Support without initial evaluation by Seller,
        provided that Support commences immediately upon conclusion of the
        warranty period.

        If New Communications Software generic/release/features Support does not
        commence immediately upon conclusion of the warranty period, the New
        Communications Software shall not be eligible for Support until Seller,
        at its option, has made an initial evaluation at Customer's expense, at
        Seller's then current standard rate, to determine whether modifications
        are required to make the New Communications Software conform to Seller's
        specifications and whether the New Communications Software can be
        maintained in such condition. If, in Seller's judgment, modifications
        are required for such purpose, Seller will provide a Firm Price Quote
        ("FPQ") to Customer for the price of making such modifications. Except
        as set forth in paragraph 1 of this Clause, the New Communications
        Software will not be eligible for Support unless Seller determines that
        the New Communications Software is in good working order according to
        its specifications and can be maintained in such condition.

4.      ORDERS
        Customer shall place an Order for Support indicating the Support Level
        to be provided for each LCS Application no later than November 30 of
        each applicable year. Seller shall invoice Customer, on a quarterly
        basis, in the first month of each quarter, in accordance with the
        Support Level chosen and the associated price contained in Attachment C.
        Attachment C will be updated annually, and if required, on a quarterly
        basis to reflect Support for new LCS products, generics/release/features
        at the conclusion of any warranty period.

        In addition, a running Purchase Order for Time and Material, if
        applicable, shall also be provided by the Customer for each LCS
        application no later than November 30 of each applicable year. Seller
        shall invoice Customer on a quarterly basis, no later than 45 days after
        the end of each quarter for any Time and Material charges. T&M disputes
        from Customer must be forwarded to Seller within 15 days of Customer
        receipt of invoice.

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 2 of 4
<PAGE>   87

5.      ASSIGNMENT
        The rights and obligations of Seller and Customer hereunder shall
        neither be assigned nor delegated without a sixty (60) day advance
        written notice. Such notification shall be directed to the parties
        listed in Clause 7, entitled "Notices".

6.      AUTHORIZED USERS, ADMINISTRATION, OR MANAGEMENT OUTSOURCING Customer
        shall not permit LCS to be used by any other person except for its
        employees, agents, consultants, contractors, and Outsourcers who need to
        use the Communications Software for the operation, administration,
        and/or management of their duties for Customer and who are authorized
        and enabled by Customer to access and utilize the LCS. Notwithstanding
        the foregoing, in accordance with the terms of the LCS licenses,
        Customer is not permitted to sub-license such LCS to any third party.

        If the Customer contracts with any party in accordance with paragraph 1
        of this Clause for its network or any site, in whole or in part, Seller
        agrees to grant such party access and use, but not a separate license to
        use such LCS, as is necessary for such party to perform its duties as
        set forth above; provided, that such party executes Seller's
        nondisclosure agreement. Customer shall give Seller ninety (90) days
        advance written notice prior to providing access and use of any LCS by
        such party and Seller agrees to reasonably cooperate with Customer to
        support Customer's desire to outsource certain of its functions. Any
        agent, consultant, contractor, or Outsourcer the Customer contracts with
        shall be bound to the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

        If Customer makes such a contract, and such contract is not transparent
        to Seller, Seller reserves the right to renegotiate the terms and
        conditions and prices stated herein.

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 3 of 4
<PAGE>   88

7.      SIGNATURES

        IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be
        executed by their duly authorized officers or representatives on the
        date written below.

       Lucent Technologies Inc.:                  Advanced TelCom Group, Inc.

       ----------------------------               ------------------------------
       (Authorized Signature)                     (Authorized Signature)

       ----------------------------               ------------------------------
       (Print or Type Name)                       (Print or Type Name)

       ----------------------------               ------------------------------
       (Title)                                    (Title)

       ----------------------------               ------------------------------
       (Date)                                     (Date)

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 4 of 4
<PAGE>   89

                                  ATTACHMENT A
                                   DEFINITIONS

ASSISTANCE REQUEST DATABASE means Seller's automated tool for Assistance
Requests (AR) for support.

DEFECT means an error condition that causes the Communications Software to fail
to operate in compliance with the documented specifications issued at the time
the Communications Software is licensed.

FEATURE means additional functionality to the Communications Software.

GENERIC/RELEASE means a new release of Communications Software containing new
Features.

LICENSED MATERIAL means the Communications Software and associated documentation
covered under this Agreement that Customer has been granted a license to use by
Seller.

LUCENT COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE OR COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE means Seller Licensed
Software and embedded Third Party Software identified in Attachment C that are
actively embedded at Customer sites at the time this Agreement is executed.

MATURE COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE (MATURE PRODUCT) means those products which have
reached that stage of their lifecycle where new features and generics are
developed only at the specific request of the customer, and fixes requiring
software changes are rarely needed therefore product updates are no longer
regularly scheduled. This lifecycle stage is defined by Seller. Communications
Software which is classified as Mature at the time of execution of this
agreement will be identified in the list of supported products in Attachment C.
This list will be updated as needed during the Term of the Agreement.

NEW COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE GENERICS/RELEASES/FEATURES means any Communications
Software which is licensed by Customer after the Effective Date of the Initial
Term of this Agreement or any renewal term thereof and was not included in the
Customer's embedded base of Communications Software at the commencement of the
Initial Term or any renewal thereof.

OBSERVED HOLIDAYS means the following observed holidays:
        New Years Day
        Memorial Day
        Independence Day
        Labor Day
        Thanksgiving Day
        Christmas Day

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 1 of 4
<PAGE>   90

OUTSOURCER means a third party under contract to Customer for purpose of
managing and implementing the Communications Software to process data for
Customer. Such Communications Software is licensed to Customer under the terms
of the GPA or Supplemental Agreements thereto and is licensed for use on
Designated Processors. Customer warrants that any outsourcing arrangement will
be transparent to Seller's Support provided for under this Agreement.

PARTIES means either the Seller or Customer as designated in Paragraph 1 of this
agreement.

PROBLEM MANAGEMENT means that Seller shall manage the resolution of a reported
condition in a manner that provides Customer a single interface. This service is
performed only for Communications Software covered under this Agreement, in
accordance with the terms set forth in Attachment C.

RESPOND means a Seller's engineer has contacted Customer regarding a particular
assistance request.

RESPONSE TIME means the time between Customer's initial call and response by
Seller's engineer to Customer. It is measured for all request types and
Severity's of problems reported through Seller's toll-free Call Receipt and
Routing Service. Response Time excludes problems directly entered by Customer
into the Assistance Request Database unless Customer notifies Seller through
Seller's toll-free Call Receipt and Routing Service that the problem was
entered.

RESTORE means that the Communications Software or major feature of the
Communications Software is temporarily operative, but a permanent resolution has
not yet been provided. Restore may mean that a software patch has been provided
to temporarily correct the problem, or a workaround has been implemented and
mutually agreed upon by the parties.

RESTORAL TIME means the time between the Customer's initial call being
identified as an out-of-service condition and the Restoral of the condition.

RESOLVE means that a permanent solution to the problem has been provided. For
Service Calls, Resolve means that the question has been answered to Customer's
satisfaction. For Defect calls, Resolve means either that a final correction to
the Defect has been released to Customer or that Seller has notified Customer
that the Defect will not be fixed, but that the workaround (or patch) will
become the permanent fix.

RESOLUTION TIME means the time between Customer's initial call and the final
resolution of the problem.

SERVICE CALL means a call for remote technical assistance or consultation.

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 2 of 4
<PAGE>   91

SERVICE PERFORMANCE REPORT (SPR) means a quarterly report that provides specific
performance results of Seller relative to objectives and commitments as
described in Attachment B, Section 7 of this Agreement.

SEVERITY LEVEL ONE problems are the conditions under which the Communications
Software is inoperative and Customer's inability to use the Communications
Software has a critical effect on Customer's operations. This condition is
generally characterized by complete system failure and requires immediate
resolution or correction. Some examples are:

-    problem affects system operation in the following ways:
    -   total system outage
    -   continuous system outages (reoccurrence of outages)
    -   system failure resulting in significant reduction in customer's
        operation

SEVERITY LEVEL TWO problems are conditions that exists when the Communications
Software is partially inoperative, but is still usable by Customer. The
inoperative portion of the Communications Software severely restricts Customer
operations but has a less critical effect than a Severity Level One condition.
Some examples are:

-    loss of system redundancy
-    significant degradation in resources or capacity handling (when system is
     being operated according to specifications at time of license of product)
    -   total loss of major system component or function
    -   loss of ability to apply software updates

SEVERITY LEVEL THREE means the condition that exists when the Communications
Software is usable by the Customer, but with limited functions. The condition is
not critical to overall Customer operations, and does not severely restrict such
operations. Some examples are:

-    loss of administrative functions, routine maintenance functions
-    any item, including documentation errors, that can generate procedural
     problems
-    failures that have minor system impact

SEVERITY LEVEL FOUR means the conditions under which the Communications Software
is usable and the condition does not materially affect Customer operations.
These problems are those resulting in a minor failure which involve individual
components of the system. Some examples are:

-    general documentation problems
-    technical consulting consisting of informational questions

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 3 of 4
<PAGE>   92

SOFTWARE PRODUCT UPDATES means changes required for the original Licensed
Material and Third Party Software to correct Defects. Software Product Updates
include both corrections requested by Customer as well as corrections requested
by other customers. Software Product Updates may be distributed through point
issue releases on magnetic media or Broadcast Warning Messages (BWMs) or other
on-line delivery mechanism. Upon receipt of Third Party Software fixes,
Communications Software will include these fixes with the next available
Communications Software Product Update.

STANDARD COVERAGE PERIOD means Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. through 5:00
p.m., Customer site specific local time within the contiguous United States with
the exclusion of Observed Holidays as listed in this attachment.

SUPPORT means Seller's assistance in analyzing a Communications Software
problem, remedying Defects, and handling Service Calls through Seller's
toll-free Call Receipt and Routing Service. Support may be purchased by Customer
pursuant to the provisions set forth in this Agreement.

SUPPORT LEVEL OR COVERAGE LEVEL means the level of Support or Coverage as
described in Attachment B, and as selected by Customer for each Communications
Software Product or Application in Attachment C covered by this Agreement.

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE means software not initially designed or developed by
Seller but included in Seller's Licensed Material.

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 4 of 4
<PAGE>   93

                                  ATTACHMENT B
                         COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE SUPPORT

1. GENERAL SUPPORT

The following general Support will be supplied to Customer in accordance with
the Support Level as described in Attachment C.

A.      CALL RECEIPT AND ROUTING SERVICE: Customer may access telephone support
        for all problems twenty-four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week by
        dialing 1-800-932-2273 (1-800-WE2-CARE). However, Seller will work
        problems outside the Standard Coverage Period only at Customer's
        request.

B.      ASSISTANCE REQUEST DATABASE ACCESS: Pursuant to this Agreement and
        subject to availability, Customer will be given access to Seller's
        current Assistance Request Database system at no additional charge.
        Access to any additional automated tools or databases requested by
        Customer must be purchased by Customer at Seller's prevailing rates.

C.      CONSULTATIVE SERVICES: Telephone remote assistance at Seller's location
        via Seller's toll-free Call Receipt and Routing Service.

D.      THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE SUPPORT: If a condition is caused by Third Party
        Software embedded in the product delivered by Communications Software.
        Seller shall be responsible for diagnosing and coordinating resolution
        of Third Party Software Defects Third Party Software is not subject to
        either performance objectives.

E.      LICENSED MATERIAL SOFTWARE PRODUCT UPDATE SERVICES

        Seller will correct Defects in the Communications Software and
        coordinate Third Party Software defects in accordance with the Support
        as follows:

        -     Seller may periodically provide a Software Product Update to the
              Communications Software to correct Defects. In such case, Seller
              shall provide documentation to enable Customer to train its
              personnel in the operation of the Communications Software modified
              by such Software Product Update.

        -     Fees paid under this Agreement cover only Software Product Updates
              made Generally Available (GA) during the term of this Agreement,
              and are included in the Gold Support Level, Gold Uplift Support
              Level and the Silver Support Level. After expiration of this
              Agreement, Customer is entitled to the next available Software
              Product Update, which may contain corrections for Defects reported
              during the term of this Agreement.

        -     Due to the nature of Communications Software, Software Product
              Updates require all previous Software Product Updates for the
              particular Generic as prerequisites. Thus, it is

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 1 of 11
<PAGE>   94

              not possible to install any Software Product Updates unless all
              previous Software Product Updates have been installed.

        -     If the error condition is isolated to the related documentation
              for the Communications Software, the fix will be given to Customer
              as part of the Defect correction or Software Product Update
              procedure.

        -     Seller agrees to notify Customer of the availability of a
              resolution or work-around to a Defect reported by Customer.

F. DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT: Seller shall support Customer in diagnosing Customer
observed Defects, including isolation of Defects to one of the following areas:

        -     Problems arising as a result of Communications Software; or
        -     Other problems related to Communications Software, such as
              Customer operations problems, data base problems, and interfaces
              to other systems.

G.      SEVERITY CONDITIONS AND PRIORITIZATION: Seller shall perform Problem
        Management in accordance with the severity level identified by Customer.
        The priority for problem resolution will be based on the severity level
        of outstanding reported conditions. Severity Level One conditions will
        receive top priority support. If Customer's notification of a Severity
        Level One causes Seller to redirect its efforts being expended on a
        lower severity level condition, Seller shall notify Customer that there
        will be a delay in correcting the lower severity level condition.

H.      PROBLEM MANAGEMENT SERVICE: Seller shall manage the resolution of a
        reported condition in a manner that provides Customer a single interface
        as defined below. Performance commitments do not apply to Assistance
        Requests falling into the Problem Management Service category.

        -     DATA BASE PROBLEMS: If the condition is determined to be the
              result of corruption of the Licensed Material data base, and such
              corruption is not the direct result of a Defect in the
              Communications Software, the condition will be referred back to
              Customer for resolution. At Customer's request, and at Seller's
              option, Seller may prepare a proposal for billable corrective
              action to correct Customer's data base. However, if corruption is
              the result of, or caused by, Seller's other Licensed Materials,
              Seller shall initiate Problem Management, at no additional charge,
              regardless of whether such Licensed Material is covered under this
              Agreement.

        -     HARDWARE/FIRMWARE PROBLEMS: When a condition has been isolated to
              a problem in hardware or firmware not covered under this
              Agreement, the condition will be referred back to Customer for
              disposition under whatever maintenance arrangements Customer may
              have for such hardware or firmware.

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 2 of 11
<PAGE>   95

        -     INTERFACING SYSTEMS PROBLEMS: If the condition is determined to be
              caused by systems other than the Communications Software covered
              under this Agreement, including, but not limited to, systems that
              interface with the Communications Software, the condition will be
              referred to Customer for corrective action unless such other
              system(s) has been furnished by Seller, in which case Seller shall
              initiate Problem Management, at no additional charge.

I.      ON SITE SUPPORT: At Customer's request and as agreed to by Seller, a
        support engineer may be dispatched by Seller to Customer's site for
        resolution of a problem. On-site Support will be billed at minimum of
        eight hours a day at Seller's then current Time and Material (T&M) rate.
        Reasonable travel and living expenses incurred by Seller, associated
        with such on-site support, will be billed.

J.      MANAGEMENT NOTIFICATION: Seller will observe the following escalation
        procedures:

        -     Severity Level One - If a Severity Level One condition has not
              been Restored four (4) hours after the condition is reported,
              Seller will notify Seller's supervisory management of the
              unrestored condition. If the condition has still not been Restored
              within eight (8) hours after the condition is reported, the next
              higher level of Seller supervisory management will be notified of
              the unresolved condition.

        -     Severity Level Two - If a Severity Level Two condition has not
              been Restored twelve (12) hours after the condition is reported,
              Seller will notify Seller's supervisory management of the
              unrestored condition.

K.      SERVICE PERFORMANCE REPORTS: Seller will provide quarterly Service
        Performance Reports to Customer that demonstrate specific performance
        relative to the performance objectives set forth in this Agreement.

2.      CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES

        Communications Software knowledgeable individual is responsible to
        provide the following information to Seller's call receipt and routing
        service:

A.      Identification of the condition and if possible, its isolation to a
        particular component of the Communications Software believed to be
        Seller's responsibility.

B.      Determination that there are no uninstalled Software Product Updates
        that correct the condition; and

C.      Customer identifying information, including:

        -     caller's name, location, and company;
        -     call-back telephone number;

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 3 of 11
<PAGE>   96

        -     remote dial access to customer system, if available;
        -     nature of the question or situation;
        -     the system name and location;
        -     processor location, type, and serial number;
        -     the calling party's alternate contact;
        -     description and history of problem and efforts to solve it by
              customer;
        -     contract number.

        Customer will be responsible for providing adequate diagnostic support
        material to enable the diagnosis of any Customer-reported condition.
        Such support materials may include, but are not limited to, a
        description of the circumstances, a dump of system logs or buffers, a
        listing of data base contents, and console printouts as required by
        Seller.

D.      Maintain the Licensed Material

        -     Make no modifications other than those approved by Seller. This
              includes updates from manufacturers of Third Party Software or
              hardware processors that have not been certified by Seller.

        -     Install all Software Product Updates provided under this Agreement
              within sixty (60) days, unless Customer has previously notified
              Seller of Defects uncovered in the Software Product Update that
              make installation unfeasible.

        -     Follow Seller's and relevant Third Party Software or hardware
              processor manufacturer's applicable installation, operation,
              administration, and maintenance instructions.

        -     Provide the proper environment and electrical and
              telecommunications connections as specified by Seller or the
              relevant hardware processor manufacturer.

        -     Maintain software and database backups external to the hardware
              processors sufficient to reconstruct lost or altered files, data,
              or programs.

        -     Provide remote (dial-up) access for Seller's Customer Technical
              Support diagnostics. If no remote access is provided delay of
              diagnosis could be possible.

E.      Capacity and Throughput

        -     Customer agrees to maintain capacity and throughput within
              specified guidelines of purchased product (either product
              specifications or system documentation) at time of license.

        -     Exceeding specified capacity and throughput guidelines as set
              forth in the specifications, or documentation, at the time of
              purchase or license of Communications Software will

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 4 of 11
<PAGE>   97

              VOID the obligation of Seller to support the Communications
              Software for which either the capacity or throughput has been
              exceeded. Seller may inform Customer that support for the software
              that is in an exceeded capacity or throughput situation will
              commence once Customer has corrected the capacity or throughput
              situation and software is again operating in a manner consistent
              with the specifications or documentation of the software.

        -     Should Customer exceed specified guidelines for either capacity or
              throughput, and require Seller's assistance in diagnosing or
              resolving a problem related to the exceeded guidelines, Seller
              will proceed only at Customers written agreement that problem
              diagnoses and correction will be treated as an Enhanced Service
              and billed as such.

3.      SUPPORT EXCLUSIONS

        Unless expressly agreed by Seller, Support to be provided under this
        Agreement does not include:

        -     Performing preventive maintenance for Communications Software;
        -     Making corrections to user - defined reports;
        -     Work External to the Software, whether or not on the Software's
              Designated Processor;
        -     Support which is impractical for Seller to render because of
              changes not specified by Seller in the Communications Software or
              certified in the environment in which the Communications Software
              operates;
        -     Modification or replacement of Communications Software, repair of
              damage, or increase in service time caused by:

        A.    Failure to continually provide a suitable operational environment
              with all facilities prescribed by the applicable document
              including, but not limited to, the failure to provide adequate
              electrical power, air conditioning, or humidity control;

        B.    The use of the Communications Software in a manner not in
              accordance with its specifications, operating instructions, or
              license-to-use;

        C.    Accident; disaster, which shall include but not be limited to
              fire, flood, earthquake, water, wind, or lightning;
              transportation; neglect; or misuse;

        D.    Modifications, maintenance, or repair performed by other than
              Seller;

        E.    The conversion from one Communications Software release to another
              if modification or replacement of such Communications Software is
              performed by other than Seller, or the failure of Customer to
              apply previously applicable Software Product Updates in sixty (60)
              days;

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 5 of 11
<PAGE>   98

        F.    Attachment of unspecified or non-approved products to the
              Communications Software, including updates from manufacturers of
              Third Party Software or hardware processors that have not been
              certified by Seller, or failure of a processor or other equipment
              or software not maintained by Seller, or failure of removable or
              rotating storage media;

        G.    This Agreement does not include SUPPORT SERVICES for any
              Generics/Release/Features delivered after the commencement date
              hereof.

        Additional services, including but not limited to custom feature
        development, training, planning sessions, Numbering Plan Area (NPA)
        splits, on-site Support, site visits to review operations,
        on-site/remote Software Product Update installation, custom
        documentation, feasibility studies, data base recovery, system
        administration, project management services, system backup, report
        development, script development, accommodations to interfacing systems,
        services associated with relocating products, service to non-conforming
        products, Communications Software trial support, annual software
        inventory, designated customer engineer, network troubleshooting, root
        cause analysis and other enhanced services, are not included in the fees
        paid under this Agreement. Such services may be available through a Firm
        Price Quote (FPQ).

4.      SUPPORT OF RELOCATED SOFTWARE Licensed Material covered by this
        Agreement that is moved to another certified hardware processor within
        the 48 contiguous United States or the District of Columbia, which is
        determined by the License for the specific Communications Software,
        shall continue to be covered under this Agreement provided that Seller
        has received thirty (30) days prior written notice of such relocation.

        Seller, reserves the right to supervise the unloading of the
        Communications Software from the original processor and to inspect,
        reinstall and recertify the Communications Software at the new
        installation location. Customer shall be charged for all work performed
        by Seller at Seller's then prevailing rates.

5.      COVERAGE LEVEL DESCRIPTIONS All levels of coverage provide the Customer
        the capability to request assistance seven (7) days a week, 24 hours a
        day through the toll-free Communications Software Call Receipt and
        Routing service. The specific descriptions of each level of service are
        provided below.

        Levels of coverage chosen for each Communications Software Product shall
        remain intact for the entire calendar year, unless Customer is upgrading
        to a higher level of coverage.

        Pricing for each level of coverage is provided in Clause 6 of Attachment
        B.

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 6 of 11
<PAGE>   99

        SILVER COVERAGE LEVEL -
        -     The Silver Coverage Level provides Remote Customer Technical
              Support, Performance Objectives for Response times for Severity
              Levels 1 - 4 Service and Defect Assistance Requests.

        -     As a customer of Communications Software Post-Warranty Support and
              Services, Silver Coverage customers are provided quarterly
              performance reports with product performance relative to their
              embedded Communications Software.

        -     Software Product Updates and Performance Objectives for Respond,
              Restore and Resolve as defined in Clause 7, Attachment B.

        -     Software Product Updates provide temporary fixes or workarounds
              and permanent fixes. Delivery of Software Product Updates vary.
              The update may be delivered via remote dial in to the customer's
              system, BWM, point releases, or paper documentation, or via
              electronic media to be loaded on customers system by customer.

    GOLD COVERAGE LEVEL -
        -     This level of coverage provides All the features of Silver as well
              as Remote Customer Technical Support from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM
              (customer local time), Monday through Friday excluding US national
              holidays.

    GOLD UPLIFT -
        -     Gold Coverage customers are eligible to purchase an Enhanced
              Service to provide coverage 24 hours per day, 7 days per week
              (including US national holidays) on a per software product basis.
              This offer is provided only to those customers purchasing the Gold
              level of coverage.

        -     The 24 X 7 level of coverage is referred to as Gold Uplift and
              provides all the features and services of Silver and Gold plus
              coverage 24 hours per day and 7 days per week.

        -     Gold Uplift is the broadest coverage available, and is the
              coverage Communications Software provides during the new product
              warranty period.

6.      PRICING FOR SUPPORT LEVELS OF COVERAGE

        Support Levels chosen by Customer and Support prices for the
        Communications Software covered by this Agreement are listed in
        Attachment C.

        If New Communications Software or Features are added during the term of
        this Agreement, the Customer shall choose the Support Level for the New
        Communications Software and the Seller at the rates shall provide the
        appropriate Support listed below. New Features are added to the embedded
        base at the prevailing level selected by the customer in the current
        contract. Seller's next quarterly invoice shall reflect the prorated

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 7 of 11
<PAGE>   100

        Support price based on the number of calendar days remaining in the year
        from the conclusion of the warranty period.

        -     The price for the Gold Uplift Level will be [*] of the
              Communications Software list price at the time of license by
              Customer.

        -     The price for the Gold Level will be [*] of the Communications
              Software list price at time of license by Customer. Time and
              material rates will be billed at [*] per hour, with a 2-hour
              minimum, for all out of hours calls.

        -     The price for the Silver Level will be [*] of the Communications
              Software list price at time of license by Customer. Time and
              material rates will be billed at [*] per hour in-hours, and
              [*] per hour out of hours with a 2-hour minimum.

        The following is applicable for all levels of support:

        Time and material, if applicable, shall be calculated on a fifteen (15)
        minute interval basis after the minimum time frame has been met. Also,
        time and material charges, if applicable, will be billed to Customer
        within forty-five (45) days after the conclusion of each quarter. A
        blanket purchase order must be submitted to Lucent prior to the
        execution date of this Agreement. Failure to submit such orders by this
        date shall result in suspension of all time and material services until
        orders are submitted. (This means that calls which fall into Time and
        Material categories will be denied support at the point of Call Receipt
        and referred to the Customer Contact listed in this agreement).

        Support Levels chosen for each Communications Software shall remain
        intact for the entire calendar year.

7.      PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE SUPPORT SERVICES

        The performance objectives described in this Clause shall apply to
        Communications Software covered under the Gold Uplift Support Level,
        Gold Support Level, and Silver Support Level. The Defect or Service
        problem must be reproducible at either Seller's location or on
        Customer's system by Customer and verifiable by Seller in order for
        terms of this Clause to apply. Problems that are deemed not reproducible
        will be initially classified as Service AR's. If the problem continues
        to occur the Service AR's will be reclassified as a Defect AR and
        performance objectives will apply retroactive to the original trouble
        initiation. The Severity Level of any Defect or Service call shall be
        determined by Customer; however, if during resolution Seller determines
        that the severity level of the problem claimed by Customer to be
        inaccurate, the Severity Level may be changed by mutual agreement
        between Seller and Customer.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 8 of 11
<PAGE>   101

        RESPONSE TIME - During the term of this Agreement, in accordance with
        the Support Level chosen and upon expiration of any Communications
        Software warranty, Seller agrees to Respond to Customer's request for
        Support called in through the Seller's Call Receipt and Routing Service
        within sixty (60) minutes in-hours and one hundred and twenty (120)
        minutes out-of-hours, twenty-four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a
        week, for all severity levels and problem types as recorded in Seller's
        Assistance Request Database. Response time will be validated quarterly
        with the SPR. Customer requests that are not initiated through Seller's
        Call Receipt and Routing Service will be excluded from the Response Time
        metric.

        RESTORAL TIME -
        Severity Level One: During the term of this Agreement, and upon
        expiration of the Communications Software warranty, Seller agrees to
        Restore service for Severity Level One problems within twenty-four (24)
        hours from trouble initiation, as recorded in Seller's Assistance
        Request Database. Restoral Time will be validated quarterly with the
        SPR.

        Severity Level Two: During the term of this Agreement, and upon
        expiration of the Communications Software warranty, Seller agrees to
        Restore service for Severity Level Two problems within seventy-two (72)
        hours from trouble initiation, as recorded in Seller's Assistance
        Request Database. Restoral Time will be validated quarterly with the
        SPR.

        RESOLUTION TIME - Service AR: During the term of this Agreement, and
        upon expiration of the Communications Software warranty, Seller agrees
        to Resolve Severity Level One through Severity Level Four Service AR's
        within forty-five (45) days from trouble initiation, as recorded in
        Seller's Assistance Request Database. Resolution Time will be validated
        quarterly with the SPR.

        Defect AR: During the term of this Agreement, and upon expiration of the
        Communications Software warranty, Seller agrees to Resolve Severity
        Level One and Severity Level Two Defects within one hundred eighty (180)
        days from trouble initiation, as recorded in Seller's Assistance Request
        Database. Resolution Time will be validated quarterly with the SPR.

        The performance objectives can be summarized as follows:

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 9 of 11
<PAGE>   102

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES           SEVERITY        REQUEST TYPE
------------------------------------- ------------- ---------------------
<S>                                   <C>           <C>
Respond within 60 Minutes               1,2,3,4             All
In-Hours and 120 Minutes
Out-Hours

Restore within 24 Hrs                    1 only       Service, Defect
Restore within 72 Hrs                    2 only       Service, Defect

Resolve within 45 Days                  1,2,3,4         Service Only
Resolve within 180 Days                   1,2           Defect Only
</TABLE>

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 10 of 11
<PAGE>   103

                                  ATTACHMENT C
                             COMMUNICATIONS SOFTWARE

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                         SELLING PRICE  LEVEL OF    % OF        ANNUAL SW/MT     NO. OF          TOTAL ANNUAL
         PRODUCT                   MC       RTU FEES       SVC       RTU      FEE (PER SYSTEM)   SYSTEMS           SW/MT FEE
         -------                --------    --------    --------   --------   ----------------  --------    ----------------------
<S>                             <C>      <C>            <C>        <C>        <C>               <C>         <C>
BILLDATS DM Core RTU               DL387    [*]             GOLD         [*]      [*]                  1    [*]           [*]

BILLDATS DM Direct-                DL387    [*]             GOLD         [*]      [*]                  1    [*]           [*]
Connect Output Interface
Type

BILLDATS DM Grid &                 DL387    [*]             GOLD         [*]      [*]                  1    [*]           [*]
Format Conversion Turn-
Key Solution Services

SPM Bundled Package                DL387    [*]             GOLD         [*]      [*]                  1    [*]           [*]
(Format Production,
Filter
Production, Search &
browser Modules)

Generic Tape Reader                DL387    [*]             GOLD         [*]      [*]                  1    [*]           [*]

Output File Merger -               DL387    [*]             GOLD         [*]      [*]                  1    [*]           [*]
Feature

Filter Test Tool - Feature         DL387    [*]             GOLD         [*]      [*]                  1    [*]           [*]

Direct-Connect Input               DL387    [*]             GOLD         [*]      [*]                  1    [*]           [*]
Interface Type - Feature
</TABLE>

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                     Total Support Value
                                                                                ----------------------------------------------------
<S>                                       <C>               <C>          <C>    <C>                         <C>           <C>
Total Support Fee thru 3/31/2000          [*]               GOLD         [*]      [*]                       [*]           [*]
</TABLE>

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                               LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                       USE PURSUANT TO COMPANY INSTRUCTION
                                  Page 11 of 11

<PAGE>   104
                                  EXHIBIT D-2
                                     TO THE
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT

                                                             LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                                                           Bell Labs Innovations

                                    PROPOSAL

                                       TO

                                      ATG

                                      FOR

                  LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES BILLDATS(R) DATA MANAGER

                         DATE OF ISSUE: AUGUST 24, 1998
                        REVISION DATE: FEBRUARY 10, 1999
                      FINAL REVISION DATE: MARCH 16, 1999

PREPARED BY:

VINCE L. SEARS
ACCOUNT MANAGER
<PAGE>   105
ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, Exhibit D-2                                               2
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0   INTRODUCTION

From new services and technology to business relationships, the world of
telecommunications becomes more expansive and comp?? every day. Successful
Service Providers and Network Operators will optimize network billing data in
near-real time to support customer care, competitive services, internal business
tools, Number Portability, wholesale/retail businesses, long distance service
and database marketing as well as other initiatives.

Telecommunications service providers must meet the regulatory and competitive
challenges of today with flexible, modular tools that enhance and build upon
existing infrastructures, processes, and diverse networks without sacrificing
future flexibility and functionality. Lucent Technologies understands that
Service Providers/Network Operators cannot afford to implement a data
collection and management solution today, that does not handle tomorrow's
services.

It is widely recognized that network data affords a rich set of customer
information that, in addition to providing billing input, offers significant
opportunities when processed by downstream applications - opportunities to
understand customers/markets better to improve service assurance processes, to
manage fraud, and to generate additional revenue.

Moving beyond the collection and transmission of billing data, the BILLDATS(R)
Data Manager capitalizes on network data for business and service management
needs. The combination of the Data Manager's highly reliable billing data
collection capabilities portfolio of standard interfaces, and Specialized
Processing Modules will allow ATG to collect call detail records and usage data
from almost any switch or network element, filter and deliver it, in
user-specified formats, to any downstream application - all in near-real time.

For example, ATG can utilize Basic Distribution (a BILLDATS(R) Data Manager
core feature) to send multiple 100% streams (10 copies on a Network Element
basis) of data to different destinations such as a second bill rendering
application, a data warehouse fraud application. Utilizing the Production
Filter Specialized Processing Module, users can filter on any field in the data
stream so as Carrier ID, Service, Calling Number, or Elapsed Time. These
files of filtered data are essentially customized "subsets" or application
specific streams of data that can be sent electronically (via Basic
Distribution) to ATG downstream applications other Service Providers, and
clearinghouses. The addition of the optional Format Conversion processing
module allows users to reform the data before it is distributed to downstream.

The BILLDATS(R) Data Manager is a highly scaleable, modular, UNIX based, open
architecture solution. Composed of "off-the-shelf" data collection, management
and distribution software application modules on one hardware platform, the
Data Manager can easily grow in functionality as ATG requirements change. The
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager application provides ATG with high speed collection
and distribution functionality. It fits into ATG's current environment without
modification, while providing the opportunity to add additional strategic
Specialized Processing Modules such as Production Filter, Production Search,
and Format Conversion either at time of purchase or at a later date. The
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager is designed to be the one flexible solution that meets
all of your needs.

Lucent Technologies welcomes the opportunity to present this proposal to ATG
for the purchase of a next generation data collect and management solution.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS -- MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   106
ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, EXHIBIT D-2                                               3
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.0  ATG ENVIRONMENT
The proposed ATG network environment includes:
-  Five Lucent Technologies 5ESS switches (1999).
-  Record volume information currently not available.
-  Kenan Arbor BP bill rendering application.
-  Ethernet FTP TCP/IP feed of BAF data to a single destination - Kenan billing
   entity.

Notes:
-  Lucent Technologies assumes that the proposed Data Manager(s) will be
   deployed in full compliance with all BILLDATS(R) Data Manager
   application/interface specification documents such as the "BILLDATS(R) Data
   Manager to Downstream Application FTP Interface Specification".

-  It is also assumed that the BILLDATS(R) Data Manager will transmit BAF data
   to the bill rendering application. If a record format other than BAF such as
   EMI is required by the biller, then the Format Specialized Processing Module
   must be purchase to map the BAF input records to a different output record
   format prior to transmission to the biller. The actual format mapping
   requirements and provisioning of the requirements in the Data Manager is
   ATG's responsibility unless BILLDATS Professional Services have been
   purchased for this work.

3.0  PROJECTED GROWTH
ATG plans to grow to 29 switches in four years (5 Lucent 5ESS switches in 1999
and 8 per year for the following three years). No volume estimates available.

The suggested Sun Ultra 2 hardware may, or may not, support all 29 IEs.
Hardware configurations are dependent on switch interfaces, selected data
management functionality, switch data volumes, and network facilities. The Sun
Ultra 2 platform can support 6 - X.25 ports or roughly 14 million records (100
byte records) polled per day, assuming switched 56K network facilities a 12
hour polling day.

4.0  BILLDATS(R) DATA MANAGER SOLUTION

4.1  SOFTWARE

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS -- MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   107
ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, EXHIBIT D-2                                               4
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

              [BILLDATS(R) DATA MANAGER END-TO-END SOLUTION CHART]

                  BILLDATS(R) DATA MANAGER END-TO-END SOLUTION

The BILLDATS(R) Data Manager collects usage data from Network Elements, stores
the data as files, performs specialized processing of the data, and forwards
the usage data to one or more destination systems for bill rendering, fraud
detection, service assurance, and other applications.

The Data Manager's primary mission is to provide reliable and efficient data
collection, speedy distribution of data, and minimize operations expenses
associated with the collection of large amounts of data.

To meet growing customer needs for faster and more efficient delivery of data,
and more effective control and management of the telecommunications services,
the Data Manager offers enhanced capabilities to protect current revenues,
generate new revenue, and improve customer service, while maintaining the
reliability and performance customers have grown to expect from Lucent
Technologies BILLDATS(R) Products. The BILLDATS(R) Data Manager provides:

o    Flexible Architecture: The Data Manager fits easily into many different
     environments; wireline, wireless, intelligent network; without requiring
     changes to the existing infrastructure.

o    Convergence: The Data Manager supports simultaneous collection from many
     types of switches. A single Data Manager can be configured to
     simultaneously collect data from Local Wireline, Long Distance, Wireless,
     IP, Intelligent Network and ATM network elements.

o    Multi-vendor Environment: The Data Manager supports the
     collection/transmission of data from/to platforms from different vendors
     using different protocols and data formats.

o    Data Integrity and Reliability: The Data Manager provides polling,
     re-polling, and retransmission of data from Network Elements at the
     individual file or block level.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   108
ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, EXHIBIT D-2                                               5
BILLDATA(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-       Near Real-Time Transport of Data: The Data Manager allows the user to
        schedule all collection and transmission frequency. The Data Manager can
        support continuous polling of the Network Elements. Distribution of data
        can be scheduled as frequently as once per minute.

-       Flexibility: The Data Manager allows the user to send data from any
        Network Element to a single destination or multiple downstream
        destinations on a demand or scheduled basis.

-       Activity Logging: The Data Manager provides an audit trail that logs,
        among other things, files polled, files sent, commands issued and files
        cleaned up.

-       Easy Operation: The Data Manager provides a simple, intuitive Graphical
        User Interface (GUI) for operation scheduling and control, system
        configuration, browsing reports and logs, and monitoring alarms.

-       Hardware Scalability: The Data Manager runs on a range of platforms,
        under the powerful UNIX(TM) SVR4 operating system. This offers a range
        of processing power, storage, and communications options to meet a wide
        range of customer application requirements.

The GENERIC RECORD IDENTIFICATION (GRID) MODULE is also included in the
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager core application. GRID allows customers to specify the
input structure of records being collected, down to an individual record field
level. A single Data Manager can simultaneously support multiple GRID
definitions for various vendor's switches. The GRID Module allows the Data
Manager to parse the contents of the collected files in order to support further
processing of the records collected. The GRID module supports the definition of
multiple data formats (e.g., AMA, Ericsson Toll Ticket, EMI and Motorola DAS),
and the assignment of a data format to a particular Network Element. The data
format includes a set of record formats as well as definitions of any file
headers or trailers, and any nested block headers and trailers. Data formats can
be defined and modified by administrator using a Graphical User Interface.  When
a new Network Element is added, the administrator can either assign an existing
data format to that Network Element, or create a new or modified data format. As
data formats change, the administrator simply uses the GUI to make the necessary
changes to the record format definitions.

The GRID Module is currently available (included as part of the core Data
Manager application), and serves as a base for many of the other Specialized
Processing Modules offered to provide enhanced data management functionality.

Lucent Technologies 5ESS(R) record structure is pre-populated in the Data
Manager's GRID module by BILLDATS engineers. The population of other
(non-Lucent) record structure information in GRID is the responsibility of ATG
or the work can be purchased from Lucent Technologies as a Professional
Service.

4.2 HARDWARE

The hardware platform estimated for ATG is the Sun Ultra 2. See Attachment A
for configuration details.

Assumptions used to configure the estimated Sun Ultra 2 platform suggested in
this document:

-       5 - Lucent Technologies 5ESS switches.

-       ATG specific record volume information not available; used 750,000
        records per day per switch (total per day: 3.7 million) for
        configuration.

-       100 byte average record size.

-       AMATPS input interface.

-       Direct Link output interface (FTP) per BILLDATS(R) Data Manager
        specifications.

-       BAF data transmitted to a single downstream destination.

-       Approximately 5 days of data storage.

-       Scheduled polling.

-       Switched 56K network facilities.

-       10 hour polling day.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS -- MARCH 16, 1999
<PAGE>   109

ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, EXHIBIT D-2                                               6
BILLDATS(R) DATA MANAGER PROPOSAL
AUGUST 24, 1998
FINAL REVISION MARCH 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-    The suggested hardware platform (Ultra 2) may or may not support the total
     projected ATG growth to 29 Lucent 5ESS switch over 4 years. Hardware
     platform sizing is dependent on switch interfaces, selected data management
     functionality, switch data volumes, record size, and network facilities.
     Depending on these variables, the full deployment of 29 switches may
     require a larger hardware platform.

The Sun Ultra 2 can have up to six (6) 56K X 25 ports configured (if a graphics
monitor is utilized). A fully loaded Ultra 2 platform can support approximately
14 million 100 byte records per 12 hour polling day. This figure assumes that
all ports are switched 5 and that the volume of records is fairly evenly
distributed across all switches.

Ethernet link capacity for distribution (BILLDATS(R) Direct Link) is dependent
upon bandwidth allowed to the downstream application.

A system console is provided with the base system for console access (the
suggested configuration has included a graphics terminal for this purpose).
Remote access is available through a dial up port, used for remote support.
Other access is via an x-terminal interface which can be used as an
administrative terminal to run the GUI. This terminal has no other requirements
and can be a PC equipped with an x-terminal software package.

A printer can be added to the configuration if desired; printer prices have not
been included in the suggested configuration. An optional tape drive has been
included in the configuration.

A modem for dial-in support is needed for Lucent support access (if requested
by ATG); modem prices are not included in this proposal.

Network facilities and data communication devices are not included in this
proposal and should be furnished by ATG.

5.0  ENHANCED DATA MANAGEMENT - BILLDATS(R) OPTIONAL FEATURES, INTERFACES, AND
SPECIALIZED PROCESSING MODULES

BILLDATS(R) Specialized Processing Modules (SPMs) are designed to expand upon
the billing data collection and distribution application, by adding one or more
Specialized Processing Modules to the Data Manager core application for greater
data management functionality.

Individual SPMs can be added to the proposed BILLDATS(R) Data Manager platform
as ATG's needs evolve, allowing ATG to architect or customize their own
solution effectively as budgets and business needs permit.

-    Utilizing the PRODUCTION FILTER MODULE, customized streams of AMA data can
     be sent to multiple destinations such as billing market analysis, service
     providers and fraud applications. The user configurable filter capability
     provides ATG with the flexibility to create application specific customized
     streams of AMA data easily. The filters are applied an output, thus
     eliminating the need for storage of additional copies of the input data.
     Combined with the core Basic Distribution feature, the streams of data can
     be transmitted to multiple destinations in one minute intervals. The
     capability to perform re-transmissions and the reporting/auditing
     mechanisms allow this feature to be used in a production environment where
     this data is just as important as the primary billing feed. Production
     Filter is available now.

-    The FILTER TEST TOOL provides the user with an interactive method for
     verifying filter criteria prior to transferring the filtered data to a
     downstream application. A customer can execute a filter application id
     against a file of records to see which records are selected by the filter.
     This allows the user to verify that the filter is working as intended prior
     to applying the filter to the output stream. Filter Test Tool is available
     now.

-    The DATA SEARCH MODULE will locate specific records on the database meeting
     ATG's specified criteria (if chosen) in both primary and tertiary data,
     allowing ATG to accommodate client services, such as verifying test calls,
     validating new services,

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   110
ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, EXHIBIT D-2
BILLDATS[R] DATA MANAGER PROPOSAL
AUGUST 24, 1998
FINAL REVISION MARCH 16, 1999

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     and error isolation. The search consists of identifying fields (such as
     type of service, calling number, called number, connect data, elapsed time)
     and selecting records that match the user specified values of these fields.
     The search output can be viewed at a terminal, routed to a line printer or
     sent to another application for processing. Search is available now.

 .    The BROWSER module allows the system operator to view detailed contents of
     data files using a full featured Graphical User Interface (GUI). The
     operator can select which files they wish to view, and all records and
     fields within the record can be viewed in detail. Browser is available now.

 .    The FORMAT MODULE allows the user to reformat records prior to delivering
     them to downstream applications. The Format Module allows the user to
     define multiple output record formats, define the mapping of input record
     format to output record format, and assign an output format to each
     application destination. Each destination may have a different record
     format. The mapping of input format to output format is done via a GUI.

     The Format Module allows you to convert from one record format to another
     (e.g. AMA to EMI), to normalize records (convert all records to a single,
     standardized format), to perform field extraction (e.g. include only select
     fields in a record, deleting all other fields), or convert field types
     within a record (e.g. change BCD fields to ASCII). The Format Module is
     available now.

The addition of strategic optional features would provide ATG with flexible,
competitive tools to control and manage the AMA process. These tools move
functionality such as filter, search, and format conversion closer to the
network element, decreasing dependency on the bill rendering application and
increasing ATG's ability to respond efficiently and economically to customer
requests and internal revenue processes.

 .    CONNECT: Direct input and/or output interface(s) to support the receipt of
     billing data from other service providers to the Data Manager for
     comprehensive data management - reformatting of records, filter etc. The
     CONNECT: Direct output interface supports the transmission of data to other
     providers or billing entities. CONNECT: Direct is available now.

 .    AMADNS DATA SERVER TO DPMS INTERFACE (DDI)

     Bellcore has defined a new standard for the movement of AMA data from
     generating systems to applications requiring this data. The transfer,
     processing, and management of AMA data is called AMA Data Networking and is
     provided by the AMA Data Networking System (AMADNS). The AMADNS DDI input
     interface supports billing data collection from AMADNS compliant network
     elements (Bellcore GR1343, Issue 2).

     The BILLDATS(R) Data Manager is Lucent Technologies' DPMS. As such, it
     supports an AMADNS compliant interface to a variety of Data Servers (Data
     Server functionality may be an adjunct to the switch or may be incorporated
     into the switch footprint). The AMADNS Data Server to DPMS Interface (DDI)
     is based in the TCP/IP File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and use the standard
     Ethernet LAN/WAN for connectivity.

 .    OUTPUT FILE MERGING: The Data Manager stores billing data in flat files.
     The size of each file is driven by user provisioning, near real time
     transmission is desired, then the size of each file stored on the Data
     Manager is driven by the smallest increment of data that can be collected
     from a switch and maintain data integrity. This results in a large number
     of small files. This works well for near real time transmission. However,
     for batch transmissions (such as a biller), fewer larger files is usually
     desired, output file merging feature concatenates many small files into a
     large file per network element. This allows large files to be transmitted
     to batch applications and small files to be transferred to near time
     applications.

 .    GENERIC TAPE READER to support the reading of tapes into the Data Manager
     for comprehensive billing data management. Generic Tape Reader allows a
     user to define the format of an input tape, and then read in a tape of the
     specified format. Records are read from tape, stored as files on disk, and
     can be processed and distributed in the same way as records that were
     Providers, ATG switches in the instance of a network outage etc.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999
<PAGE>   111
ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, Exhibit D-2                                            8
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     In emergency situations, a tape dump of billing data at a switch may be
     required. In this case, the data cannot be electronically collected by the
     Data Manager. If the Data Manager is being used for mediation, the tape of
     billing data must be read into the Data Manager. The generic tape reader
     feature allows a user to read tapes from any network element, thus solving
     this situation. The generic tape reader feature also provides a mechanism
     for reading tapes from network elements that do not have electronic
     transfer capabilities. Generic Tape Reader is available now.

-    DISASTER RECOVERY - the intent of the Data Manager's disaster recovery
     feature is to prevent a disaster, like a fire, from completely disabling a
     customer's billing data collection and distribution environment. If a
     disaster occurs, it is accepted and handled by the customer. Billing data
     that has not been sent to all of the associated downstream applications
     may be lost depending on the nature of the disaster. However, the disaster
     recovery feature allows collection and distribution of new bill data to
     continue without interruption. The disaster is not compounded by having
     ATG scramble to determine how to continue their billing operation.

     The Data Manager's disaster recovery feature is NOT intended to provide a
     100% high availability environment. This direction was driven by the
     software complexity and monetary cost of a 100% high availability
     solution. A 100% high availability automated solution can also cause false
     triggers, switching a Data Manager's load prematurely. Our strategy is
     based on customer feedback that indicated a high preference for human
     intervention making the decision on switching the load to a backup system.

     The disaster recovery feature on the Data Manager allows "clusters" of
     Data Managers to be configured as one virtual machine. The most common
     configuration is two Data Managers in geographically separate locations.
     Each Data Manager hardware platform would be engineered to support the
     complete load. In normal operation, each Data Manager would only support
     half the load (i.e., 50-50 load share). In a disaster mode, a single Data
     Manager would support the complete load.

     Administrative information such as network element definitions (e.g., 5ESS
     switches) and billing entity definitions (e.g., downstream applications
     that receive billing data from the Data Manager; Kenan Arbor BP is an
     example of a billing entity) is stored in a relational database. The
     disaster recovery feature automatically synchronizes the administrative
     information over all Data Managers in the cluster.

     The billing data is not replicated over all Data Manager clusters (i.e.,
     each Data Manager stores its own unique copy of the billing data). If an
     individual Data Manager in a cluster fails, transmission of the unsent
     data will be delayed or lost depending on the severity of the disaster
     (i.e., hardware failure vs. a disaster like fire) following the intent of
     the disaster recovery feature.

     A single command is used to start/stop an individual Data Manager from
     entering a disaster recovery mode. Each network element and/or billing
     entity definition is assigned a "home" (i.e., the name of the Data Manager
     that supports this element in normal operation). To start/stop the
     disaster recovery mode, a manual command with the "home name" is entered.
     The manual command will cause the Data Manager to automatically start/stop
     collection and distribution of the "named" elements.

     The optional "Disaster Recovery" feature automatically replicates
     administrative database updates across all Data Managers ATG's
     environment. This allows a user to administer multiple Data Managers as
     one. It also facilitates a timely start of "recovery" mode in the event of
     a disaster. The disaster recover feature also provides one command to
     start/stop recovery on particular Data Manager. Recovery feature is
     available now.

6.0  PRODUCT DIRECTION

The BILLDATS(R) Data Manager is rapidly evolving to provide additional
capabilities for our customers. Several of the optional features and
Specialized Processing Modules available in Generic 6.0 include:

-    THE DATA VALIDATION AND EDITING SPECIAL PROCESSING MODULES will provide the
     ability to perform a set of integrity checks based on user defined,
     pre-record, validation rules. Records which fail validation checks will
     be filtered out of the data stream. These erred records can then be edited
     by a user and reinserted into the distribution stream, deleted by a user or
     sent to a

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   112
ATG-LNM99NMY09ATG, Exhibit D-2
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     downstream application for further investigation. The optional Data
     Validation and Edit Modules will be available in Generic 6.0, available in
     July 1999.

o    The REPORT WRITER INTERFACE feature will provide extensive reporting
     against the usage records. The Data Manager will normalize the usage
     records, and then feed them to an adjunct Report Writer system. The
     normalized usage records will be placed in a standard database (e.g.
     Informix), where they can be queried against using standard relational
     On-Line Analytical Processing (OLAP) tools. The user will be able to
     execute ad hoc queries against the data, defining their own reports. The
     adjunct Report Writer system allows users to generate extensive reports
     without impacting the performance of the Data Manager and the feeds to
     other downstream applications. The optional Report Writer Interface feature
     will be available in Generic 6.0, available in July, 1999.

7.0  TRAINING

The BILLDATS(R) Data Manager training course consists of modules which can be
selected to meet the needs of the target audience. Lucent Technologies offers
the following modules for BILLDATS(R) Data Manager customers (Course OS7733):

     Module A: BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Operations (required in Base
               BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Package)

     Module C  BILLDATS(R) Generic Record Identification (GRID; required in
               Base BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Package)

     ModuleH-1 Production Filter, Browser, Search (Required if respective SPMs
               are purchased)

     Module G  Format (Required if respective SPM is purchased)

o    BILLDATS(R) DATA MANAGER OPERATIONS
This module is designed for the BILLDATS(R) Data Manager system operators and
administrators responsible for configuring and operating the Data Manager. This
course will teach the students to operate the BILLDATS(R) Data Manager in an
efficient manner. The students will learn how to use the Graphical User
Interface, how to access and use the application menus, forms, reports and
logs. Data collection and transmission procedures and scheduling will be
covered.

o    GENERIC RECORD IDENTIFICATION
This module is designed for Data Manager administrators responsible for
creating and maintaining the call record formats associated with GRID. This
module covers the use of the GRID menus and forms, the file components (such as
data records, file headers and trailers, block headers and trailers), and how
to add, change and delete file formats.

Training is conducted at ATG's location. It is ATG's responsibility to provide
training facilities such as classroom space, whiteboard or easel, and access to
the ATG Data Manager.

8.0  DOCUMENTATION

One set of BILLDATS(R) Data Manager documentation is supplied per Data Manager
purchased. The documentation set consists of:

o    BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Operations Guide (190-135-114)
o    BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Installation and Maintenance Guide for Sun
     Hardware Platform (190-135-112)
o    BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Application Guide (190-135-115)
o    BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Output Messages Guide (190-135-117)
o    BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Generic Record Identification (GRID) Guide
     (190-135-116)

                       PROPRIETARY -- LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS -- MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   113

ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, EXHIBIT D-2                                              10
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

9.0 BILLDATS PROFESSIONAL SERVICES

Lucent Technologies Billing Products technical support team offers a rich
portfolio of Professional Services with a wide range of pre-defined options or
selections that are customizable to ATG specifications. Our support staff
understands the complexity of near-real time teleprocessing and data
management, and is uniquely qualified to assist ATG in achieving both their
short term and long term objectives. ATG has the option to purchase
professional services from the Billing Technical Support Team to augment their
own staff expertise. For example:

-    GENERIC RECORD IDENTIFICATION (GRID) POPULATION

Lucent engineers will populate GRID with customer specified format information
for Specialized Processing Module administration. For the Lucent 5ESS Switch,
the GRID definitions required to support the collection and transmission of
5ESS B data is included in the core product.

-    PROVISIONING MEDIATION CRITERIA - FORMAT

     Provisioning of mediation criteria mostly involves defining input and
     output record definition templates and logic to convert an input record to
     a record format. This effort can be performed by the customer through the
     Data Manager application GUI or it can be contracted through Lucent. If the
     customer decides to undertake this effort, Lucent will provide hours of
     consultation. If the customer wants to contract the work through Lucent, a
     flat fee will be charged to provide this effort. Lucent's provisioning
     effort will be bounded by the following:

     -    Lucent will provide all record template definitions for all Lucent
          network elements.

     -    The customer must obtain record definitions from other vendors and
          provide those to Lucent. Lucent will then provision record template
          definitions for other vendors' network elements.

     -    Lucent will work with the customer to define requirements for output
          records and the criteria to map an input record an output record ???
          format. The customer must engage other vendors to participate in this
          task if necessary.

     -    Lucent will provision and test all format mapping criteria. It is the
          customer's responsibility to provide data to test record template
          definitions and format conversions. To completely test the format
          conversions, the output produced by the Data Manager must be
          processed by the respective downstream application.

     -    Lucent will be engaged in this activity until the customer accepts
          the Data Manager system or live data is passed through the Data
          Manager. After this time, additional engineering services can be
          contracted through Lucent at d??? rate.

     -    Lucent's effort in this area only includes engineering services to
          provision record template definitions, to consult ??? defining
          formatting requirements and to provision formatting criteria. This
          effort does not include any software development activity.

Note:
BILLDATS Professional Services timelines may, or may not, coincide with the
Data Manager deployment timeline; project schedules are determined by staff
availability and the complexity of ATG requirements.

10.0 CUSTOMER ACCEPTANCE PROCESS

The Lucent Technologies BILLDATS(R) Product Team adheres to a formal customer
acceptance process. This process serves to ensure ATG's satisfaction with the
deployment, and gates the warranty period. ATG, following a set of written
procedures, activates the Data Manager processes and purchased optional
features. A formal acceptance document is jointly signed after all purchased
functionality of the product has been successfully demonstrated. The customer
acceptance process is completed after the turn-up of one Lucent 5ESS Switch
Interface in the ATG network on the Data Manager platform. The closure of the
acceptance process initiates the Data Manager software warranty period.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   114
ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, Exhibit D-2                                              11
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

11.0 CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES

-    ATG is responsible for the activation and correct configuration of network
     elements/switches to support teleprocessing.

-    Record structure population in GRID is required to support data collection
     and data management functionality such as filter format. Record structure
     information for Lucent Technologies 5ESS switches is pre-populated in GRID;
     if any non-Lucent Technologies network elements are added to the ATG
     network, it is assumed that ATG will perform the initial GRID population
     work. It is also assumed that ATG will provide on-going support for GRID
     updates for any non-Lucent Technologies switches and network elements.

-    ATG will create and manage all Specialized Processing Module definitions as
     required - such as format mappings, filter criteria, etc.

-    ATG is responsible for the assignment of one knowledgeable ATG employee to
     the BILLDATS(R) Data Manager ??? implementation project, to serve as a
     single-point of contact and liaison to ATG management for the duration of
     the implementation.

-    ATG will provide for hardware staging and support via sales agreement with
     Sun Microsystems or the VAR of their choice. (Sun hardware staging and
     support costs have been included with the sample hardware platform
     configuration included with the quotation).

-    It is ATG's responsibility to maintain the integrity of the AMA data. ATG
     is responsible for understanding their AMA data collection/distribution,
     service environment, and revenue assurance procedures thoroughly, and
     identifying the appropriate time and intervals in the process for the
     BILLDATS(R) Technical Support Engineer to complete implementation
     activities.

    Lucent Technologies is not responsible for lost and/or damaged AMA data.

-    This BILLDATS(R) Data Manager proposal does not include network facilities
     or data communication devices. It is ATG's responsibility to provide these
     services and the associated data communications equipment. The BILLDATS(R)
     Technical Support team is available for data communications equipment
     recommendations.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999
<PAGE>   115
ATG-LNM99NMY09ATG, Exhibit D-2                                                12
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 14, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

12.0  WARRANTY

12.1 BILLDATS(R) DATA MANAGER APPLICATION SOFTWARE WARRANTY

Lucent Technologies stands behind its quality Communications Software products
by offering ATG a comprehensive ninety (90) day New Product Warranty. The
Warranty period is initiated by successful completion of the Data Manager
Acceptance Process or 30 days after completion of software load & test and
polling activation, whichever occurs firsts.

Terms of the BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Gold level software warranty are:

- Hotline support, for severity levels 1-4 from 8 AM to 5 PM EST, Monday through
  Friday, excluding holidays. All system problems are reported by the customer
  to the Lucent Technologies 1-800-WE2-CARE Hotline and tracked through
  resolution Experienced software engineers are available to provide technical
  and consultative services, and problem diagnosis.

- Optional on-site service support is also available (pending resource
  availability). On-site services are billed in 8 hour day increments at the
  established Time and Material rate. In addition, reasonable travel and living
  expenses incurred by the BILLDATS(R) Software Engineers will be billed to ATG.

- Established performance objectives for all calls for assistance (per Severity
  Level).

- Periodic BILLDATS(R) Product Updates (if released during warranty period).

12.2 INFORMIX(R) WARRANTY

The BILLDATS(R) Data Manager uses the Informix database product to store
administrative data required to track and manage the usage data files. The
Informix software is supplied as part of the Base BILLDATS Data Manager
package. Lucent Technologies handles the licensing and any warranty costs
associated with the INFORMIX(R) database product. The INFORMIX(R) restricted
license supports only BILLDATS(R) Data Manager use of the database. Any other
use of the database requires the purchase of a general INFORMIX(R) license. A
general INFORMIX(R) license is not included in this proposal.

12.3 HARDWARE PLATFORM WARRANTY

The warranty for the BILLDATS(R) Data Manager hardware platform is per
agreement between the hardware vendor and ATG.

12.4 ADAX WARRANTY (X.25 BOARDS)

ADAX boards are orderable through Lucent Technologies and initially installed
by Lucent Technologies during staging of the BILLDATS(R) Data Manager. ADAX
boards are covered by a one year parts-only warranty; the installation of cards
replaced unwarranty is not included in the warranty. (Installation of the cards
is not included in standard Sun warranty or Sun post-warranty support
agreements).

13.0 POST WARRANTY SUPPORT SERVICES

13.1 BILLDATS(R) DATA MANAGER APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Lucent Technologies offers the continuation of high quality software support
after warranty expiration through two Post Warranty Support Services Options -
Gold Uplift and Gold. Information on the Gold option is provided in this
proposal; Gold Uplift Support Services information is available upon request
from your Lucent Technologies Account Manager.

BILLSDATS(R) Data Manager maintenance point releases are released as necessary,
averaging two releases per year. BILLDATS(R) Data Manager customer under New
Product warranty or supported by a valid post-warranty software support
agreement receive point releases as part of the warranty or post warranty
agreement.

13.2 INFORMIX(R) POST WARRANTY SUPPORT SERVICES

Post warranty support for INFORMIX(R) (BILLDATS(R) Data Manager restricted
license) is included in BILLDATS(R) Data Manager application software post
warranty support services.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                           V.L.SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   116
ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, Exhibit D-2                                             13
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.3  HARDWARE PLATFORM POST WARRANTY SUPPORT SERVICES

Post-warranty hardware support services for the BILLDATS(R) Data Manager
hardware platform should be negotiated directly the selected hardware vendor
prior to the expiration of the hardware platform warranty.

14.0  TERMS AND CONDITIONS

This quotation and the associated Lucent Technologies BILLDATS(R) Data Manager
application software prices are valid for a period of sixty (60) days after
issuance date (March 16, 1999 through May 16, 1999) and will become void after
this time May 16, 1999) unless written Lucent acceptance of a
quotation extension of ATG is issued by Lucent Technologies.

The hardware prices in this quotation are planning estimates only and are not
necessarily reflective of the hardware platform price (Sun Microsystems Inc.)
that ATG will actually incur. It is expected that ATG will negotiate their own
firm price quotation for the Data Manager platform, including hardware staging
and support, with the hardware vendor of their choice.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                           V.L. SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   117

ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, Exhibit D-2                                              14
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ATTACHMENT A - ESTIMATED HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
PROPOSED APPLICATION:           BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Core
                                AMATPS input interface
                                Direct Link (standard FTP) output interface

SAMPLE HARDWARE PLATFORM:       Sun Ultra 2

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                   UNIT           EXTENDED
                PRODUCT                                                            LIST             LIST
ITEM            NUMBER                  DESCRIPTION                      QTY      PRICE            PRICE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>             <C>                     <C>                              <C>    <C>              <C>
1.0             A14-UEC2-9S-512CJ       Sun Ultra Enterprise 2            1     [*]              [*]
                                        Model 2300 with two 300
                                        MHz UltraSPARC processor,
                                        2Mbyte UltraCache, 512-
                                        Mbyte, 9.1-Gbyte 7200RPM 1-
                                        inch high internal UltraSCSI
                                        Disk, Internal SunCD 32
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.0             X55229A                 Internal 9.1-Gbyte 7200 RPM       1     [*]              [*]
                                        UltraSCSI disk drive, 1" high
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.0             X3655A                  TurboGXplus 8 bit color           1     [*]              [*]
                                        graphics card, cables &
                                        documentation
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.0             X7119A                  19 inch color monitor             1     [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.0             SG-XTAP4MM-011A         12-24GB 4 mm DDS-3 in a           1     [*]              [*]
                                        UniPack desktop enclosure
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.0             X3856A                  Fast-Wide 68-68pin SCSI           1     [*]              [*]
                                        cable and GEO specific power
                                        cord
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.0             SOLMS-26oW9999          Solaris 2.6 Standard              1     [*]              [*]
                                        English Server Media Kit
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.0             X3540A                  Type 5 Country Kits for U.S.      1     [*]              [*]
                                        and Canada Only UNIX
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.0             VMR9S-260-R999          Sun StorEdge Volume               1     [*]              [*]
                                        Manager for Solaris SPARC
                                        2.4/2.5/2.5.1/2.6 CD-ROM
                                        media and hardcopy doc
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0            OVMR9S-260-W999         Sun StorEdge Volume               1     [*]              [*]
                                        Manager 2.6 for Solaris
                                        SPARC, license for
                                        workstations and workgroup
                                        servers, RTU only
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.0            LT1-U1-U2-STAGING                                         1     [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.0            LT1-U1-U2-SUPPORT                                         1     [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.0                                    SUN U.S. LIST TOTAL                                       [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14.0            ADAX X.25 board         ADAX board plus licensing fees                            [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15.0            HARDWARE TOTAL          US LIST SUN + ADAX                                        [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   118
ATG - LNM99NMY09ATG, Exhibit D-2                                              15
BILLDATS(R) Data Manager Proposal
August 24, 1998
Final Revision March 16, 1999
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sun Hardware Configuration Notes:

-    Sun Ultra Enterprise 2 pricing shown here is U.S. List for planning
     purposes. No discount has been applied. ATG should negotiate the discount
     directly with the selected hardware vendor.

-    Approximately 5 days of data storage provided at 3.7 million records per
     day. Data retention period can be increased by adding more disk to the
     configuration. Retention period should be finalized prior to hardware
     order. Disk space can also be impacted by utilization of the "N to 1" File
     Merging optional (billable) feature available in BILLDATS(R) Data Manager
     Release 5.5.

-    ATG must provide hardware staging and support through Sun Microsystems
     (included with Sun suggested hardware configuration) or through the Value
     Added Re-Seller of their choice.

ADAX BOARDS - X.25 PORTS

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART          COMCODE      DESCRIPTION              QTY     UNIT      EXTENDED
NUMBER                                                      PRICE     PRICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>           <C>          <C>                     <C>     <C>        <C>
87-4045-28    407-802-263  V.35 ADAX board, X.25,   1      [*]        [*]
                           2 port o/w cables
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
09-516404-400 407861749    Base License             1      [*]        [*]
                           64 lcn
                           (One license per Data
                           Manager system)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
09-516404-500 407861764    Board License            1      [*]        [*]
                           64 lcn
                           (One per ADAX board)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                           EXTENDED TOTAL                             [*]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

ADAX NOTES:

-    One board provides 2 - X.25 ports; a second board could be added for
     redundancy.

-    One year parts-only warranty; installation of replacement boards not
     included in warranty.

-    56K (V.35) board is pricing is provided; low speed boards are also
     available.

-    Boards are ordered through Lucent Technologies.

-    ADAX X.25 boards are required in addition to the Sun Ultra 2 platform.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                       PROPRIETARY - LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
                          V.L. SEARS - MARCH 16, 1999

<PAGE>   119

ATTACHMENT B:

                                                   BILLDATS(R) Data Manager G6.X

                                    PRICING
                                      FOR
                                      ATG

                             Date of Issue: March 8, 1999/REVISED MARCH 16, 1999
                                Valid Until May 16, 1999 (good for 2 months)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
THE FOLLOWING TABLE IDENTIFIES THE REQUIRED PARAMETERS USED TO PROVIDE THE DATA
MANAGER RECOMMENDED PRICES.

THE BILLDATS DATA MANAGER SOFTWARE RTU PRICED FOR 20 INTERFACE ELEMENTS (INPUT
NETWORK ELEMENT STREAMS + OUTPUT FEEDS) AND INCLUDE THE COST OF UPCOMING
GENERIC 6.X RELEASES (GA DATE: 7/1999). GENERIC 6 RELEASES (I.E., 6.0, 6.1,
6.2) WILL BE PRICED TO ATG WITH NO COST (FREE OF CHARGE) AS PART OF EXTENDED
MAINTENANCE WARRANTY CONTRACT.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

BILLDATS DATA MANAGER SOLUTION PRICING PARAMETERS

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
          PARAMETERS                                              REQUIREMENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                                    <C>
                                            Total IEs: 20    Minimum configuration of 20IEs
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Switch/NE Types                                        5ESS
                                                       switches
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Downstream Applications                                Biller
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Input Interface Type                                   AMADNS/AMATPS input interface, and
                                                       Connect:Direct input
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Output Interface Type                                  Direct-Link (FTP Out), and Connect:Direct output
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Requested Specialized Processing Modules               Format, Filter, Search,
                                                       Browser
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Requested Features                                     Generic Tape reader
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Training                                               Data Manager Operation, Grid, format, search,
                                                       browser
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Customized Developments                                None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Create customized GRID database                        None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Consulting Services                                    None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Project Management Professional Services               None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Format Conversion Turn-Key solution services           None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Edit & Validation Turn-Key solution services           None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Format Record Definition (beyond 80 hrs)               None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Filter Record Definition (beyond 40 hrs)               None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disaster Recovery Feature                              None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disaster Recovery Data Base setup services             None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of Hardware Platforms/Systems                   1     Billdats Data Manager System
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

<PAGE>   120
                                                          BILLDATS
                                                          PRICING

BASE BILLDATS(R) DATA MANAGER SOFTWARE &
SERVICES

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       ITEM                           QUANTITY   EXTENDED   NOTES/ACTIONS
                                                                   PRICE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                                   <C>        <C>        <C>
BILLDATS Data Manager Core RTU                            1      [*]        - Core RTU for BILLDATS Data Manager Generic 6.X

                                                                            Generic Release 5.5 is currently available - These
                                                                            prices are relative to Generic 6.X. Generic Release 6.0
                                                                            planned for 6/99 will be provided upon availability.

                                                                            - Support for 20 interface elements

                                                                            - Year 2000 compliance

                                                                            - Generic Record Identification Definition - GRID

                                                                            - Format & Filter Access to External Tables (G 6.0)

                                                                            - Core RTU valid only for hardware platform specified
                                                                            as part of purchase agreement.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AMATPS Input Interface Type                               1      [*]        Included in Core RTU.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AMADNS Input Interface Type                               1      [*]        Included in Core RTU.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Direct-Connect Input Interface Type                       1      [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FTP Output Interface Type (Direct-Link-FTP Out)           1      [*]        Included in Core RTU.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Direct-Connect Output Interface Type                      1      [*]        The price does not include the required 3rd
                                                                            Party Sterling Software cost.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Output File Merger                                        1      [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Filter Test Tool                                          1      [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Grid & Format Conversion Turn-Key Solution Services       1      [*]        [*] (Billdats-Kenan Integration)
                                                                            Engineering services to provision record template
                                                                            definitions, to consult on defining formatting
                                                                            requirements and to provision formatting criteria as it
                                                                            is described in Note 1.
                                                                            (EXCLUDING SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tape Writer Module                                        1      [*]        Included in Core RTU.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.
<PAGE>   121
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>

<S>                                               <C>    <C>          <C>
Documentation                                     1      [*]          Included in core RTU. One set of
                                                                      Paper Documentation will be provided
                                                                      in English per Site.

Informix S/W Data Manager Restricted License      1      [*]          Included in Core RTU.

SPM Bundled Package (Format Production,           1      [*]          _ Production Format includes Format
Filter Production, Search and browser                                 definition services of 40 hours
Modules)                                                              (Mon-Fri 8am-5pm EST.) via phone
                                                                      during warranty period.
                                                                      _ Production Filter includes Filter
                                                                      definition services of 80 hours
                                                                      (Mon-Fri 8am-5pm EST.) via phone
                                                                      during warranty period.
                                                                      _ Production Search
                                                                      _ Production Browser

Generic Tape Reader                               1      [*]          Supports any tape drive that the
                                                                      vendors Operating System Interface/
                                                                      drivers officially recognizes at the
                                                                      Data Manager. Customer Configures
                                                                      hardware platform to include Correct
                                                                      tape device to meet sites requirements.

Warranty support (90 days) CORE RTU               1      [*]          Included in Core RTU. Warranty support
(Warranty support starts with 90 Days of                              assumes customer has been through
Installation Date or After Signing Accept-                            standard BILLDATS training and does
ance Test Plan Whichever comes First)                                 not include any on-site support or
                                                                      associated travel and living expenses.

Software Integration Engineering Services         1      [*]          Data Manager software installation and
(includes on-site software load and                                   turn-up services; does not include
start-up support, turn-up support for                                 hardware and operating system
first switch interface of each type,                                  installation services.
product support during customer acceptance                            Assumes that hardware is up and
testing). Maximum 1 staff week of deploy-                             running properly with operating system
ment resource per s                                                   installed prior to Data Manager
                                                                      installation

Training Services                                 1      [*]          _ Data Manager Operation Training
                                                                      (OS7733A) 2 days
                                                                      _ Generic Record Identification (GRID)
                                                                      Training (OS7733C) 1 day
                                                                      - Production Filter (OS7733D)
                                                                      Training - 1 day
                                                                      _ Production Browser Training
                                                                      (OS7733E) - 1/2 day
                                                                      _ Production Format Training
                                                                      (OS7733G) - 2 days
                                                                      _ Production Search Training
                                                                      (OS7733G) - 1 day
                                                                      _ Conducted weekdays between 8am-5pm
                                                                      _ Price covers 6 students. Each
                                                                      additional student is [*] per student
                                                                      per course per day. Maximum class size
                                                                      is 12.
                                                                      _ Training will be provided in Customer
                                                                      facilities.
                                                                      _ Excludes Lucent's travel and living
                                                                      expenses.

Nine (9) months additional Extended               1      [*]          Additional product team support costs
Warranty support - Gold                                               for 9 months extended warranty. This
                                                                      is the Gold extended warranty at [*]
                                                                      of software offered price, includes
                                                                      40-hour (5 Days by 8 Hours M-F)
                                                                      coverage.
</TABLE>

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.
<PAGE>   122
<TABLE>
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                     <C>       <C>
                         Sub-Total:     n/a       [*]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

NOTE 1:  GRID & FORMAT CONVERSION TURN-KEY SOLUTION SERVICES

PROVISIONING MEDIATION CRITERIA

Provisioning of mediation criteria mostly involves defining input and output
record definition templates and logic to convert an input record to a record
format. This effort can be performed by the customer through the Data Manager's
application GUI or it can be contracted through Lucent. If the customer decides
to undertake this effort, Lucent will provide 80 hours of consultation.

If the customer wants to contract the work through Lucent, a flat fee will be
charged to provide this effort. Lucent's provisioning effort will be bounded by
the following:

-  Lucent will provide all record template definitions for all Lucent network
   elements.

-  The customer must obtain record definitions from other vendors and provide
   those to Lucent. Lucent will then provision record template definitions for
   other vendors' network elements.

-  Lucent will work with the customer to define requirements for output records
   and the criteria to map an input record to an output record format. The
   customer must engage other vendors to participate in this task if necessary.

-  Lucent will provision and test all format mapping criteria. It is the
   customer's responsibility to provide data to test the record template
   definitions and format conversions. The completely test the format
   conversions, the output data produced by the Data Manager must be processed
   by the respective downstream application.

-  Lucent will be engaged in this activity until the customer accepts the Data
   Manager system or live data is passing thru the Data Manager. After this
   time, additional engineering services can be contracted through Lucent at
   daily rate [*]

-  Lucent's effort in this area only includes engineering services to provision
   record template definitions, to consult on defining formatting requirements
   and to provision formatting criteria. This effort does not include any
   software development activity.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   123
STATEMENT OF WORK FOR PHASE ONE OPERATIONS PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pricing and other critical elements of this Statement of Work ("SOW") are based
upon the binding, non-conflicting terms and conditions of the Letter of Intent
("LOI") between Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. ("ATG") and Lucent Technologies Inc.
("Lucent"). Amending the "Services" definition in Exhibit C, "General Terms and
Conditions" to include additional Services as stated herein and extending said
LOI until the earlier of written termination by either party in accordance with
Section 3.3 of the LOI or execution of the definitive agreement described
therein. Lucent, acting through its Global Services Provider Group, will perform
and ATG will procure the operations planning Services described in this SOW. By
ordering or using these Services from Lucent, including changes or additional
orders, ATG agrees to be bound to the terms of this SOW. Lucent reserves the
ability to amend its pricing or other conditions if changes to the attached SOW
make such amendment advisable. Please reference this SOW by title and number on
any order or correspondence to Lucent.

SCOPE OF WORK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In order to meet ATG's operational milestones and provide Services to ATG as
described in Section 3.6, "Network Operations services" of the LOI, Lucent's
Global Network Operations team, a division of the Network Reliability Center
("NRC"), will perform Phase One of the Operations Planning and Implementation
Services prior to execution of the definitive agreement. In consideration for
the pricing tendered herein, ATG agrees to procure and the NRC Global Network
Operations team agrees to provide such Services to ATG. If either party
terminates the LOI in accordance with Section 3.3, ATG agrees to pay Lucent,
immediately upon termination, for all unpaid Services performed prior to
termination, including all reasonable travel and living expenses incurred by
Lucent in providing these Services.

BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS (BOA) AND PRESENT METHOD OF OPERATIONS ANALYSIS
(PMO) OVERVIEW
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
During this phase, the NRC will work with ATG to establish a specific Network
Operations Plan addressing the "full spectrum" of operations components related
to the NRC's service offerings, including personnel, organizations, processes,
and telecommunications technology, to effectively perform activities related to
developing, deploying and managing ATG's telephone network on an outsourced
basis. These activities include network monitoring and surveillance, service
order entry, service order processing, service and inventory (facilities and
equipment) provisioning, service activation, trouble management (trouble
ticketing and customer care) and inventory management (end-to-end tracking of
equipment, facilities, and telephone numbers).

Lucent's Global Network Operations team will apply its proven Operations
Planning Methodology to produce a Business Objective Analysis (BOA) and Present
Method of Operations Analysis (PMO). At the conclusion of these steps, Lucent's
Global Network Operations will provide a written estimate of the work needed to
complete the Future Methods of Operation (FMO) phase of the project.

BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS

Lucent's Global Network Operations team will examine ATG's business strategy,
focusing on the following areas:

*Identification of business goals
*Identification of business objectives
*Determination of critical success factors

 Lucent Technologies and Advanced TelCom Group -- Confidential and Proprietary
                                     Page 1

<PAGE>   124
- Identification of business functions and processes

- Identification of major unaddressed critical business issues

- Identification of key organizational metrics

Lucent's Global Network Operations will use a number of techniques to gather
information for this project:

- Examining existing documents such as business cases and strategic plans (need
  to list documents used for this purpose)

- Interviewing key executives of ATG

- Interviewing key managers of ATG

- Interviewing key third party consultants of ATG

- Working with the Lucent customer team dedicated to ATG

- Working with the American Management Systems team dedicated to ATG

Lucent's Global Network Operations will analyze the information gathered,
produce models and document this analysis.

PRESENT METHOD OF OPERATIONS

Lucent's Global Network Operations team will document a number of processes to
implement during the operations of resale and initial ISP services of ATG's
business. These processes are:

- Service Order Entry, Processing, Confirmation, Activation, Tracking,
  Fulfillment

- Provisioning (includes "all" required ATG and third-party interfaces and
  systems)

- Customer Care (CSR viewpoint and NRC viewpoint)

- Trouble Management (trouble ticketing, trouble identification, trouble
  resolution)

- Billing Operations

- Inventory Management (ISP "packet switching" facilities, equipment and IP
  addressing), if applicable

- Enterprise Network Interconnection (ATG sites, NRC site, AMS site)

In addition, Lucent's Global Network Operations team will produce Methods and
Procedures for the following functions:

- Trouble Management

- Service Order Function (New Service, Moves, Changes, Disconnects)

Lucent's Global Network Operations team will also produce some recommendations
on how to improve the current processes.

PHASE ONE DELIVERABLES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Lucent's Global Network Operations will produce the following SOW deliverables:

1. A BUSINESS OBJECTIVES ANALYSIS DOCUMENT CONTAINING THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

   - Executive Summary

   - Value Chain Analysis

   - Business Factor Analysis

     - Goals and Objectives

     - Functions

 Lucent Technologies and Advanced TelCom Group -- Confidential and Proprietary
                                     Page 2

<PAGE>   125
     - Critical Success Factors (CSFs)

     - Problems

   - Competitive Environmental Analysis

     - Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats

     - Competitive Forces Analysis

   - Strategy Analysis

     - Major unaddressed critical business issues

     - Key organizational metrics

2. A PRESENT METHOD OF OPERATIONS DOCUMENT CONTAINING THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

   - Process Flows

   - Process Descriptions

3. METHODS AND PROCEDURES

   - Trouble Management

   - Service Order Function (New Service, Moves, Changes, and Disconnects).

4. RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROCESS IMPROVEMENT

   - Organizational structure in place versus required

   - Organizational roles and responsibilities in place versus required

SCHEDULE AND FEES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Lucent's Global Network Operations team plans to complete Phase One before
March 31, 1999. Upon completion of Phase One, ATG shall promptly remit payment
to Lucent in the amount of [*], after which Lucent shall begin the work effort
stated in Section 3.6, "Network Operations Services" of the LOI for Phase Two.
Changes to the SOW requested by ATG shall be considered change orders to be
billed as incurred.

Lucent's Global Network Operations team recognizes the criticality of this
endeavor to ATG and stands ready to help ensure the overall success of this
project. Please indicate ATG's acceptance of this SOW by sending an e-mail
message to Neil Gembrin at ngembrin@lucent.com stating your acceptance or by
signing below and faxing this SOW to (925) 468-3509. If you have any questions
regarding this SOW, please call Rick Cavazos at (303) 368-2575, the Operations
Planning Director for Lucent's Global Network Operations team.

Accepted and concurred by:

LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.                ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP, INC.

James P. Goodman                        Curt Wheeling
-----------------------------------     ----------------------------------------
PRINTED                                 PRINTED

/s/ JAMES P. GOODMAN                    /s/ CURT WHEELING
-----------------------------------     ----------------------------------------
SIGNED                                  SIGNED

Sales VP                                Sr. VP Marketing
-----------------------------------     ----------------------------------------
TITLE                                   TITLE

3/22/99                                 3/18/99
-----------------------------------     ----------------------------------------
DATE                                    DATE

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

 Lucent Technologies and Advanced TelCom Group -- Confidential and Proprietary
                                     Page 3

<PAGE>   126
                                EXHIBIT E TO THE
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STATEMENT OF WORK FOR PHASE ONE, "OPERATIONS PLANNING
& IMPLEMENTATION" NO. NRC-990210-ATG-A1

Pricing and other critical elements of this Statement of Work ("SOW") are based
upon the binding, non-conflicting terms and conditions of the Letter of Intent
("LOI") between Advanced Telcom group ("ATG") and Lucent Technologies Inc.
("Lucent"), amending the "Services" definition in Exhibit C, "General Terms and
Conditions" to include additional Services as stated herein and extending said
LOI until the earlier of written termination by either party in accordance with
Section 3.3 of the LOI or execution of the definitive agreement described
therein. Lucent, acting through its Global Services Provider Group, will
perform and ATG will procure the operations planning Services described in this
SOW. By ordering or using these Services from Lucent, including changes or
additional orders, ATG agrees to be bound to the terms of this SOW. Lucent
reserves the ability to amend its pricing or other conditions if changes to the
attached SOW make such amendment advisable. Please reference this SOW by title
and number on any order or correspondence to Lucent.

SCOPE OF WORK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.   Network Performance Services.
     Beginning immediately upon acceptance of this proposal, NRC will provide
     consulting services for the installed DMS 250 and its associated network.
     These services will analyze current traffic loads and trunk capacities to
     make recommendations for short- and long-term network routing and planning.
     This work would be provided on an hourly fee basis.

FEES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.   Price per hour [*] per hour.

Lucent's Global Network Operations team recognizes the criticality of this
endeavor to ATG and stands ready to help ensure the overall success of this
project. Please indicate ATG's acceptance of this SOW by sending an e-mail
message to Neil Gembrin at ngembrin@lucent.com stating your acceptance or by
signing below and faxing this SOW to 925 468 3509.

Accepted and concurred by:

LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.                          ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP

By: J.P. Goodman                                  By: Luis Aguilar
    --------------------------                        --------------------------
    PRINTED                                           PRINTED

    /s/ J.P. GOODMAN                                  /s/ LUIS AGUILAR
    --------------------------                        --------------------------
    SIGNED                                            SIGNED

    Sales VP                                          Executive Director
    --------------------------                        --------------------------
    TITLE                                             TITLE

    6/28/99                                           6-22-99
    --------------------------                        --------------------------
    DATE                                              DATE

            LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES / ATG - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
                                     PAGE 1

<PAGE>   127
                              LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES

                            GLOBAL SERVICE PROVIDER

                               NETWORK OPERATIONS

                               STATEMENT OF WORK
                                      FOR
                          ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP, INC.

                                   [GRAPHIC]
<PAGE>   128
                  GLOBAL SERVICE PROVIDERS NETWORK OPERATIONS

                               TABLE OF CONTENTS

<TABLE>
<S>  <C>                                                                       <C>
1    STATEMENT OF WORK........................................................ 1

2    PHASE TWO: OPERATIONS PLAN OVERVIEW...................................... 1

     2.1  INTERIM ORDER MANAGEMENT............................................ 2
     2.2  INTERMEDIATE METHOD OF OPERATIONS (IMO)............................. 2

3    CHANGE CONTROL PROCESS................................................... 2

4    OPERATIONS PLANNING APPROACH AND SCOPE................................... 3

5    PHASE TWO: OPERATIONS PLAN DELIVERABLES.................................. 4

     5.1  INTERIM ORDER MANAGEMENT............................................ 4
     5.2  INTERMEDIATE METHOD OF OPERATIONS................................... 4

6    SCHEDULE AND FEES........................................................ 5

     6.1  ATTACHMENT A: CHANGE CONTROL FORM................................... 6
</TABLE>
<PAGE>   129
                  STATEMENT OF WORK FOR PHASE TWO, "OPERATIONS

                                   PLANNING"

                           SOW NO. NRC-990517-ATG-A1

Pricing and other critical elements of Statements of Work provided by Lucent to
ATG are based upon the binding, non-conflicting terms and conditions of Letter
of Intent ("LOI") between Advanced Telecom Group, Inc. ("ATG") and Lucent
Technologies Inc. ("Lucent"). This LOI is incorporated herein by reference and
shall be extended until the earlier of written termination by either party in
accordance with Section 3.3 of the LOI or execution of the definitive agreement
described therein. If at the time such definitive agreement is executed
Services under Statements of work are ongoing, the definitive agreement shall
supersede any non-conflicting terms and conditions for such Services. Lucent,
acting through its Global Services Provider Group, will perform and ATG will
procure the Services described in this Statement of Work ("SOW"). By ordering
or using these Services from Lucent, including changes or additional orders,
ATG agrees to be bound to the terms of this SOW. Lucent reserves the ability to
make amendments prior to execution of this SOW, if changes in scope make such
amendments advisable and as agreed by ATG. During the SOW term, changes to this
SOW which are generally available to other Lucent customers will only be made
through the Change Control Process as stated in Section 3, unless otherwise
mutually agreed in writing. Please reference the applicable SOW by title and
number on any order or correspondence to Lucent.

1    Statement of Work
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

In order to meet ATG's operational milestones and provide Services to ATG as
described in Section 3.6, "Network Operations Services" of the LOI, Lucent will
perform Phase Two of the Operations Planning Services at its Network
Reliability Center located in Aurora, Colorado ("NRC"). In consideration for
the pricing set forth herein, ATG agrees to procure and Lucent agrees to provide
Phase Two of he Operations Planning Services to ATG. If either party terminates
the LOI in accordance with Section 3.3, ATG agree to pay Lucent, immediately
upon termination, for all unpaid Services performed prior to termination,
including all reasonable travel and living expenses incurred by Lucent in
providing these Services.

This SOW supersedes both the deliverables and remaining unspent dollars
identified in Exhibit G Section 3 "Operations Planning & Implementation"
Sub-Section 3.3 "PHASE TWO: FUTURE METHOD OF OPERATIONS." While this SOW has
attempted to capture all of the relevant deliverables for the IMO, there may
have been an unintentional oversight of required analysis that will not be
deemed a Change order. Such oversight shall be treated as a Change under the
Change Control Process described in Section 3 to determine whether this Change
is an oversight, a Change to an existing order, or an out-of-scope request to
be quoted prior to rendering the service.

2    Phase Two: Operations Plan Overview
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Lucent will provide Operations Plans for Interim Order Management and for an
Intermediate Method of Operations (IMO) analysis to ATG as described below.

                                                                          PAGE 1

<PAGE>   130
2.1  Interim Order Management
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Lucent will develop an Interim Order Management Function capable of completing
a service order and performing the work necessary to put an end-user customer
into service, subject to the completeness and validity of the customer order
data provided by ATG. Interim Order Management will include order management
functionality for the following services:

     - Ordering unbundled loops from the ILEC

     - Local Number Portability

     - 5ESS(R)-2000 switch and digital cross connect provisioning

     - Provisioning of Internet/xDSL services

     - E911 interface

     - LIDB interface

     - Providing order status back to the Order Entry system

     - Notification of order completion to initiate billing

Pending general availability of a mechanized order management system through
the NRC, Lucent will manage orders using a predominately manual process
described herein as Interim Order Management.

ATG plans to start full facilities-based service on July 1, 1999. Lucent will
develop an Operations Plan for Interim Order Management to meet ATG's business
needs for the introduction of its facilities-based service by July 1, 1999, or
as otherwise mutually agreed to in writing. Changes and enhancements to these
processes will be quoted separately from this SOW and are not included in the
price quoted herein.

2.2  Intermediate Method of Operations (IMO)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The IMO will document processes in the initial state of the facilities-based
model. Lucent will produce methods and procedures and a set of process flows
for the following model features designed to meet ATG's needs for the
introduction of its facilities-based service by July 1, 1999.

     - Service Order and Provisioning

       - Provisioning

       - Inventory Management

     - Customer Care and Trouble Management

       - Trouble Management

       - Dispatch Management

     - Network Operations / Performance

     - Interfaces to other processes

Changes and enhancements to the processes will be quoted separately from this
SOW and are not included in the price quoted herein.

3    Change Control Process
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Changes requested by either party shall be submitted to the receiving party on
Attachment A, "Change Control Form." Changes by Customer shall be processed
pursuant to Lucent's quotation. All changes shanges shall evaluated and
responded to on a date mutually agreed by the parties.

                                                                          PAGE 2

<PAGE>   131
"Change(s)" means any new process, modification, addition, and/or other change
to Services, Service-related documentation cited hereunder, and any associated
equipment on orders.

"Change Control Process" is the process used to effectively manage changes to
the technical scope (such as upscopes), schedule and cost of the Services
provided hereunder.

Changes to existing orders shall be treated as new orders and shall be
submitted to the following address:

     (Primary Contact)
     -----------------
     Neil Gembrin
     Offer Management Representative for the ATG Account
     Lucent Technologies, Inc.
     4637 Chabot Drive, Suite 213
     Pleasanton, CA 94588
     Facsimile: 925-468-3509

     (Secondary Contact)
     -------------------
     Shari Rogers
     Operations Planning Manager
     Lucent Technologies, Inc.
     11900 East Cornell Avenue
     Room MN02
     Aurora, Colorado 80014
     Facsimile: (303) 368-2388 or (303) 368-2464

Each of the parties shall be entitled to propose Changes to this SOW by
utilizing the Change Control Process. Proposed Changes shall be made in writing
and submitted to the other party. Such proposal shall document the
justifications for the Change. If the receiving party requires additional
information to consider the proposal, such information shall be requested
within (5) five business days of receiving the proposal. The party initiating
the proposed Changes shall respond to the request for additional information
within (5) five business days of receiving the request for additional
information. If the receiving party has sufficient information, the receiving
party shall respond in writing to the furnishing party within five (5) business
days of receiving such proposed Changes.

4    Operations Planning Approach and Scope
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Lucent will apply its Operations Planning Methodology to produce an Operations
Plan Phase Two. Lucent will use a number of techniques to gather information
for this project including:

     - Examining existing documents such as the BOA, PMO and M&Ps

     - Meeting with operational process owners at ATG

     - Interfacing with AMS, Quintessent and DCI

     - Interfacing with SCC Communications, Illuminet, Octel and others as
       required

     - Working with the Lucent Customer Team

     - Working closely with the NRC in Denver

     - Meeting with operational process owners at ATG

     - Working with the other Lucent teams engaged on this project

Lucent will analyze the information gathered, produce models and document their
analysis.

                                                                          PAGE 3
<PAGE>   132

5 Phase Two: Operations Plan Deliverables
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Lucent will provide Interim Order Management and IMO documentation as identified
in the below Sections 5.1, "Interim Order Management" and 5.2 "Intermediate
Method of Operations":

5.1 Interim Order Management
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The Operations Plan documenting Interim Order Management shall contain the
following information:

        o       Executive Summary

        o       Introduction

                -       References

                -       Assumptions

                -       Data Collection

                -       Services Offered

                -       Organizational Structure

                _       IT Infrastructure/Architecture -- physical and logical
                        elements

        o       High-Level Process Flows

                -       Description

                -       Performance Characteristics

                -       Assumptions

        o       Low-Level Process Flows

                -       Process Flows

                -       Descriptions

        o       Detailed description, function, and interaction of external
                interfaces to the Lucent NRC

        o       Analysis of external interface agreements

        o       Issues

        o       Operational model for ATG/Lucent NRC/AMS Enterprise

5.2 Intermediate Method of Operations
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1.      IMO documentation shall contain the following information

        o       Executive Summary

        o       Introduction

                -       References

                -       Assumptions

                -       Data Collection

                -       Services Offered

                -       Organizational Structure

                -       IT Infrastructure

        o       Process Flows (for the processes described below in item #2
                below)

                -       Process Flows

                -       Descriptions

        o       Interfaces to the Lucent NRC

        o       Other Interfaces

        o       Issues

                                                                          PAGE 4

<PAGE>   133

2.  Methods and Procedures for ATG for the following processes at the same level
    as have been produced for the Resale phase ATG's business:

       o  Service Order and Provisioning

          - Provisioning

          - Inventory Management

       o  Customer Care and Trouble Management

          - Trouble Management

          - Dispatch Management

       o  Network Operations / Performance

       o  Interfaces to other processes

3.  Lucent will provide support for the implementation of these processes until
    July 31, 1999.

6   Schedule and Fees
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lucent plans to complete Phase Two, "Operations Plan" before July 31, 1999,
assuming a March 22, 1999 start date. Upon completion of the Phase Two
Operations Plans, ATG shall promptly remit payment to Lucent as detailed below.
This price assumes that ATG will start the facilities-based phase of their
business on July 1, 1999. If this date is delayed, then the cost and schedule
described below may change. In addition, changes to the SOW requested by ATG
shall be considered change orders to be billed as incurred.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                 Service                     Price
                 -------                     -----
<S>                                         <C>
Interim Order Management Operations Plan      [*]
Intermediate Method of Operations Plan        [*]
</TABLE>

Please indicate ATG's acceptance of this SOW by sending an e-mail message to the
Lucent Offer Manager, Neil Gembrin, at ngembrin@lucent.com stating your
acceptance or by signing below and faxing this SOW to (925) 468-3509. If you
have any questions regarding this SOW, please call the Lucent Operations
Planning Manager, Shari Rogers, at (303) 368-2055.

Accepted and concurred by:

LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.              ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP, INC.

By: S. Tim Gropp                      By: Michael Black
-------------------------------       --------------------------------
PRINTED                               PRINTED

/s/ S. TIM GROPP                      /s/ MICHAEL BLACK
-------------------------------       --------------------------------
SIGNED                                SIGNED

CT VP -- ESP WEST                     SVP
-------------------------------       --------------------------------
TITLE                                 TITLE

7/29/99                               6/22/99
-------------------------------       --------------------------------
DATE                                  DATE

-----------------------
[*]  Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
     throughout this exhibit.

                                                                          PAGE 5
<PAGE>   134
                     6.1 ATTACHMENT A: CHANGE CONTROL FORM

CUSTOMER SECTION

Customer Name:   _______________________  Customer PO#:    _____________________
Requester Name:  _______________________  Date of Request: _____________________
Requester Title: _______________________

Description Of Change: _________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________

Reason for Change: _____________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________

Requested Implementation Date: ______________

Reference SOW Title and Number: _________________

LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES SECTION

Lucent Technologies Order #: _____________________     Date: ___________________

Change Impact:
Scope:    ______________________________________________________________________
          ______________________________________________________________________
          ______________________________________________________________________
Schedule: ______________________________________________________________________
          ______________________________________________________________________
          ______________________________________________________________________
Revised Price: ___________________________________

Lucent Representative: _______________________________________

APPROVAL SECTION

Customer:  _______________________    Lucent Technologies: ____________________

Name:      _______________________    Name:      __________________________
Signature: _______________________    Signature: __________________________
Date:      _______________________    Date:      __________________________

THE ABOVE PRICES ARE GOOD FOR _____ DAYS AFTER ___/___/_____.

<PAGE>   135
                                   EXHIBIT F
                                     TO THE
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT

                     CHECKMATE DIRECT AND INDIRECT ELEMENTS

CHECKMATE DIRECT ELEMENTS:

      CHECKMATE Direct - are elements owned by Lucent. The CHECKMATE Direct
elements to be covered by this MDF are listed below and are effective upon
execution of the General Agreement.

CODE:       CHECKMATE ELEMENT/DESCRIPTION       QTY   VALUE
-----       -----------------------------       ---   -----

         REFER TO THE CHECKMATE PROPOSAL MAY 29, 1998 ATTACHED HERETO.

TOTAL CHECKMATE DIRECT VALUE PROVIDED _______________________ $________.

      In the event Customer elects to obtain additional CHECKMATE Direct
elements as set forth in the aforementioned Exhibit C to the General Agreement,
the value of these additional elements shall also be debited against Customer's
MDF balance.

      Changes to the CHECKMATE DIRECT elements (e.g., quantities, items) shall
require the written approval of the Lucent Technologies Customer Team, the
CHECKMATE Marketing Team and the Customer.

      The CHECKMATE Marketing Team will provide the selected element(s) to the
customer upon receipt of an approved Purchase Order from the Customer.

      CHECKMATE INDIRECT ELEMENTS

      CHECKMATE Indirect - These are CHECKMATE elements that are supplied by a
CHECKMATE consortium of vendor partners. The CHECKMATE indirect elements are
covered by this MDF are listed below. The respective CHECKMATE vendor partner
upon their receipt of an approved purchase order will provide the selected
element(s) to the Customer. The respective CHECKMATE vendor partner will bill
the customer, and payment will be made directly by the Customer to the CHECKMATE
vendor partner. Upon pre-approval by Lucent the Customer shall apply to Lucent
for credit toward future billing. When the Customer's MDF has accrued sufficient
marketing credits to cover the paid invoice(s), the Lucent MDF administrator
shall issue a Credit Certificate Form to the Customer which shall be applied
toward future billing.

      Within the CHECKMATE MDF program, the following CHECKMATE Indirect
elements will be provided to Customer as set forth in the Addendum Section
entitled, "CHECKMATE Marketing and Business Solutions Program - Marketing
Development Fund Allowance"
<PAGE>   136
      The cost for the following CHECKMATE Indirect Elements shall be covered
from the available balance in Customer's MDF. Pre-approval is required as stated
herein.

Listed below is a list of the applicable CHECKMATE Indirect Elements:

CODE:                   Checkmate Element:
-----                   ------------------

                              No Indirect Elements Apply

Any CHECKMATE Indirect Elements must be purchased directly by Customer from the
respective CHECKMATE vendor partner.
<PAGE>   137
                        CHECKMATE PROPOSAL MAY 29, 1998

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
ITEM                                                                             VALUE           CLEC                    CLEC TOTAL
#       INDIVIDUAL CHECKMATE ELEMENTS                                         PROPOSITION       PRICING         QTY        PRICE
----    ------------------------------------                                  -----------    -------------   ---------   -----------
<S>     <C>                                                                   <C>            <C>             <C>         <C>
201     DUN & BRADSTREET & PNR CUSTOMER PROSPECT RECORDS                          [*]             [*]        650,000        [*]
        Includes the following PNR Models:
         1. Estimated Number of Access Lines by Building
         2. Estimated Number of Access Lines by Customer
         3. Estimated Total Toll Bill used by a Single Business
         4. Estimated Intralata Toll Minutes used by a Single Business
         5. Percent of Probability of PBX or CTX by Business
         MINIMUM ORDER OF $500.00 or 1666 RECORDS

202     PRECISION MAPPING PROGRAM
        Mapping Tool (without BLR Boundry Files) First seat                       [*]             [*]              1        [*]
        Mapping Tool (each additional seat)                                                       [*]             19        [*]
        **** Each additional MSA                                                                  [*]              0        [*]
        **** Each additional STATE                                                                [*]              0        [*]
        **** Six (6) States                                                                       [*]              0        [*]
        **** National                                                                             [*]            1.3        [*]

203     Options:
        Redistricting Module                                                                      [*]              1        [*]
        Training on site 2nd day plus (plus T&L)                                                  [*]              0        [*]
        Wire Center/Tandem Module                                                                 [*]             20        [*]
        GDT Wire Center Premium State                                                             [*]              0        [*]
                 Region Six States                                                                [*]              0        [*]
                 United States                                                                    [*]              0        [*]
        GDT Wire Center Basic State                                                               [*]              0        [*]
                 Region Six States                                                                [*]              0        [*]
                 United States                                                                    [*]            1.3        [*]

204     Run Time version of Map Info                                                              [*]             19        [*]
        Map Info Professional                                                                     [*]              1        [*]
        LOCAL EXCHANGE ROUTING GUIDE (LERG) - LICENSE FEE                                         [*]              1        [*]

        TELEMARKETING, LEAD QUALIFICATION & GENERATION                            [*]             [*]              0        [*]
        203A Leads faxed directly to AE or Sales Office (Per Location)                            [*]              0        [*]

301     MULTI-MEDIA CUSTOMER PRESENTATION PACKAGE (CORP LICENSE)                  [*]             [*]              0        [*]
        -Includes Tool-Kit, IAP Services Guide & Forms & 20 CD's
         Additional CD's                                                                          [*]              0        [*]

302     MULTI-MEDIA CUSTOMER PRESENTATION SYSTEM (CORP LICENSE)                   [*]             [*]              1        [*]
        -Corporate License includes 20 CD's
         Additional CD's                                                                          [*]             30        [*]

303     SALES TOOL-KIT (CORP LICENSE)                                             [*]             [*]              0        [*]
        -Includes Tool-Kit, (AP Services Guide & Forms & 20 CD's
         Additional CD's                                                                          [*]              0        [*]

304     SALES PROCESS SYSTEM GUIDES (CORP LICENSE)                                [*]             [*]              1        [*]
        -Includes AE, Sales Manager & Branch Manager Guides
          and 20 CD's
         Additional CD's                                                                          [*]             30        [*]

401     INTRODUCTION TO TELECOM FOR SALES PERSONNEL (CBI)                         [*]             [*]              1        [*]
        -Customer License (Includes 20 CD's)
        -each additional CD                                                                       [*]             30        [*]
        -Inclusion of course Item #402                                                            [*]              1        [*]

402     INTRODUCTION TO TELECOM FOR SALES PERSONNEL SELF-PACED                    [*]             [*]              0        [*]
        -Student Guide w/Power/Point Presentation
                 -Customer License (Includes 20 Guides and
                  and Diskettes
                 -each additional Guide                                                           [*]              0        [*]

</TABLE>

                                  Page 1 of 3

<PAGE>   138
                        CHECKMATE PROPOSAL MAY 29, 1998

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                                         CLEC
                                                                               VALUE            CLEC                     TOTAL
ITEM                                                                         PROPOSITION       PRICING      QTY          PRICE
----                                                                         -----------       -------      ---          -----
<S>                                                                          <C>             <C>            <C>       <C>
  E  INDIVIDUAL CHECKMATE ELEMENTS

        - each additional Diskette set                                                       [*]              0       [*]
        - inclusion of course item ? 401                                                     [*]              0       [*]

403  INTRODUCTION TO CENTREX FEATURES AND EQUIPMENT & TELEPHONE              [*]             [*]              0       [*]

     Systems & How They Work (self-paced student guide each topic)
        - Customer License (includes 20 sets of Guides)
        - each additional set of Guides                                                      [*]              0       [*]

404  CENTREX APPLICATIONS (INSTRUCTOR LED TRAINING)                          [*]             [*]              0       [*]
        - Includes Delivery Fee & 10 Student Guides                          [*]
          - Guide books (one per student) OVER 10                                            [*]              0       [*]

405  INTEGRATED ACCESS PLATFORM (CBT)                                        [*]             [*]              1       [*]
        - Customer License (includes 20 CD's)
        - each additional CD                                                                 [*]             30       [*]
     IAP Strategy to Market and Use of its US Patent                         [*]             [*]                      [*]

406  MARKETPLACE (CBT)                                                       [*]             [*]              1       [*]
        - Customer License (includes 20 CD's)
        - each additional CD                                                                 [*]             30       [*]

501  INTEGRATED ACCESS PLATFORM TRAINING                                     [*]             [*]             20       [*]
     (2 days - instructor led)
        - Per session
        (includes travel, lodging, & all materials)

502  INTEGRATED ACCESS PLATFORM - NEW CITY ROLLOUT                           [*]             [*]             20       [*]
     (3 days - instructor led)
        - Per session
        (includes travel, lodging, & all materials)

503  ISDN CONFIGURATOR                                                       [*]             [*]              1       [*]
        - Includes Customer License, 10 Disks & Job Aids
        - Additional Job Aids (each)                                                         [*]              0       [*]

504  LEXICAT (1-19 SEATS)                                                    [*]             [*]              0       [*]
     504A LAN Based                                                                          [*]              0       [*]
     504M Maintenance Updates                                                                [*]              0       [*]
        20 and over                                                          [*]             [*]            100       [*]

600  CHECKMATE MARKETING CONSULTING SERVICES
        - negotiated at the project level (per day)                          [*]             [*]              0       [*]

601  CHECKMATE MARKETING MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES                              [*]             [*]                      [*]
</TABLE>

                                  Page 2 of 3

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   139
                        CHECKMATE PROPOSAL MAY 29, 1998

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                                         CLEC
                                                                               VALUE            CLEC                     TOTAL
ITEM                                                                         PROPOSITION       PRICING      QTY          PRICE
----                                                                         -----------       -------      ---          -----
<S>                                                                          <C>             <C>            <C>       <C>
 #   INDIVIDUAL CHECKMATE ELEMENTS

        - negotiated at the project level (per day)

                        TOTALS                                              [*]                                       [*]
                                                                            =============                             ===========
701

702

703

</TABLE>

                                  Page 3 of 3

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   140
EXHIBIT G

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                              LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES

                            Global Service Provider
                               Network Operations

                               Statement of Work
                                      for
                          Advanced TelCom Group, Inc.

                                    [PHOTO]

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                   Exhibit G
<PAGE>   141
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

                             NRC SERVICE OFFERINGS

                               Table of Contents

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Section                                                                    Page
-------                                                                    ----
<S>    <C>                                                                 <C>
1      SCOPE OF WORK......................................................    1

2      NETWORK OPERATIONS SERVICES SUMMARY................................    2

3      OPERATIONS PLANNING & IMPLEMENTATION...............................    6

   3.1    SCOPE OF WORK...................................................    6
  *3.2    PHASE ONE: A BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS (ALSO "BOA") AND
   PRESENT METHOD OF OPERATIONS ANALYSIS (ALSO "PMO") OVERVIEW............    6
     3.2.1   Business Objective Analysis for Phase One....................    7
     3.2.2   Present Method of Operations for Phase One...................    7
     3.2.3   Phase One Deliverables.......................................    8
   3.3    PHASE TWO: FUTURE METHOD OF OPERATIONS..........................    9
   3.4    OPERATIONS PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION PRICING..................   10

4      NETWORK INTEGRATION AND CUTOVER....................................   11

   4.1    NETWORK INTEGRATION CUSTOMER PREREQUISITES......................   11
     4.1.1   Facility Orders..............................................   11
     4.1.2   SS7 Links Ordered And Installed..............................   11
     4.1.3   Office Records...............................................   12
     4.1.4   Work Area And Telecommunications.............................   12
     4.1.5   Contact Information For Other Service Providers..............   12
     4.1.6   Alarm Assignments............................................   12
     4.1.7   Call Flow Diagrams...........................................   13
     4.1.8   Transmission Test Equipment Provided by the Customer.........   13
   4.2    SERVICE DELIVERY MANAGEMENT.....................................   13
   4.3    NETWORK ACCEPTANCE TESTING / E&I................................   14
   4.4    SWITCH ACCEPTANCE TESTING IS....................................   14
   4.5    TRANSMISSION TESTS (DCS) IS.....................................   15
   4.6    SLC SERIES TEST.................................................   15
   4.7    POWER TESTS AND VERIFICATIONS...................................   15
   4.8    ALARM PROVISIONING..............................................   16
   4.9    EMERGENCY ENGINE/GENERATOR TESTING:.............................   16
   4.10   NETWORK ELEMENT AND SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY........................   16
   4.11   LEC / IXC / OTHER SERVICE PROVIDERS.............................   17
   4.12   OPERATIONAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS.....................................   17
   4.13   SIGNALING SYSTEM 7 TESTING......................................   17
   4.14   TRUNK TESTING...................................................   17
   4.15   AMA VERIFICATION................................................   18
   4.16   ROUTING TESTS...................................................   18
   4.17   FEATURE TESTING.................................................   18
   4.18   EMERGENCY RECOVERY TESTS........................................   19
   4.19   NETWORK INTEGRATION COMPLIANCE..................................   19
   4.20   NETWORK INTEGRATION COMPLIANCE - CO ADMINISTRATION..............   20
</TABLE>

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 Exhibit G - i
<PAGE>   142
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

<TABLE>
<S>       <C>                                                                <C>
   4.21   CUT-OVER PLAN TABLE OF CONTENTS.................................   20
   4.22   NETWORK INTEGRATION, CUTOVER SERVICES PRICE.....................   22

5      CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS / CONNECTIVITY - SERVICE ACTIVATION..........   23

   5.1    OBTAINING THE LATEST SITE CONFIGURATIONS / GROWTH...............   23
   5.2    ESTABLISHING CUSTOMER CONNECTIVITY..............................   24
   5.3    CONNECTIVITY PRICING............................................   27

6      NETWORK MONITORING & SURVEILLANCE..................................   28

   6.1    COMPONENT SERVICES..............................................   28
   6.2    NRC STANDARD ESCALATION GUIDELINES..............................   29
     6.2.1   5ESS(R)-2000 Problem Escalation and Notification
     Guidelines...........................................................   29
     6.2.2   Network Monitoring and Surveillance Pricing..................   30

7      NETWORK PERFORMANCE SERVICES.......................................   33

   7.1    TRAFFIC DATA COLLECTION.........................................   33
   7.2    CAPACITY MANAGEMENT.............................................   33
  *7.3    NETWORK MANAGEMENT..............................................   33
   7.4    SPECIAL STUDIES.................................................   34
   7.5    D&F SERVICES....................................................   34
   7.6    NETWORK RELIEF PLANNING.........................................   34
   7.7    NETWORK PERFORMANCE SERVICES PRICING............................   35

8      SERVICE PROVISIONING AND INVENTORY.................................   36

   8.1    SERVICE ORDER DESCRIPTION.......................................   36
   8.2    SERVICE ORDER HOURS OF OPERATION................................   36
   8.3    SERVICE ORDER VOLUMES PER HOURS OF OPERATION....................   36
   8.4    NEW SERVICE ORDER INITIATIVES...................................   36
   8.5    STANDARD SERVICE ORDERS.........................................   36
   8.6    SPECIAL SERVICE ORDERS..........................................   37
   8.7    TRUNK SERVICE PROVISIONING AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT.............   37
   8.8    LINE SERVICE PROVISIONING.......................................   38
   8.9    TEST AND TURN UP................................................   38
     8.9.1   Test and Turn Up Description.................................   39
     8.9.2   Test and Turn Up Prerequisites...............................   39
     8.9.3   Test and Turn Up Hours of Operations.........................   39
   8.10   SERVICE ORDER PROVISIONING PRICING..............................   39

9      TRANSLATIONS AND SWITCH INVENTORY..................................   40

   9.1    COMPLEX TRANSLATIONS............................................   41
   9.2    TRANSLATIONS PRICING............................................   42

10     TROUBLE MANAGEMENT SUPPORT.........................................   43

  10.1    CUSTOMER CARE SUPPORT...........................................   43
  10.2    TROUBLE MANAGEMENT PRICING......................................   44
</TABLE>

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 Exhibit G - ii
<PAGE>   143
EXHIBIT G

1    SCOPE OF WORK

     All Services and pricing associated with this proposal are subject to
     change based on Customer's requirements and/or specifications. "Services"
     for this Statement of Work includes the Professional Services as stated
     herein. The pricing in this Agreement is valid only for 1999, pending
     execution of the definitive Agreement(s) between Customer and Supplier.
     Lucent and ATG will meet in September/October 1999, to review the work
     performed under this agreement and at that time a true up or price
     adjustments, up or down, as necessary to reflect additional or deleted
     equipment or hours required to perform these services on a longer term
     basis. For Services performed at Customer's request, Supplier will invoice
     and Customer will promptly remit payment Services performed on a monthly,
     time and materials basis. Customer may request additional Services from
     Supplier not covered in this Statement of Work or beyond 1999. If Supplier
     agrees to furnish such additional Services, the charges thereof shall be
     at Supplier's prevailing time and material rates in effect when Services
     are rendered. If Supplier is providing Services and the definitive
     Agreement term expires, the Parties agree to automatically extend the
     non-conflicting terms and conditions of the definitive Agreement until
     such time as the Parties mutually agree upon similar terms and conditions
     for on-going or new Services. In this event, the Parties agree to promptly
     negotiate similar terms and conditions.

     SERVICES PRICING AS PROVIDED IN THIS STATEMENT OF WORK DOES NOT INCLUDE
     TRAVEL AND LIVING EXPENSES, WHICH WILL BE BILLED TO CUSTOMER AS INCURRED.

                              Exhibit G - 1 of 47
<PAGE>   144
EXHIBIT G

2    NETWORK OPERATIONS SERVICES SUMMARY

          Network Operations Services is a group of services designed to help
          ATG bring their network into service as fast as possible by
          outsourcing its Network Operations Center (NOC) functions. Lucent
          Technologies provides numerous choices. These options are designed to
          meet your evolving needs and help you activate services quickly. We
          understand that you need to put networks in service with quality and
          speed. In response, Lucent's services are available today offering ATG
          world class expertise, resources and facilities ready to support you.

          Service options that are not defined in this Statement of Work may be
          added based on ATG's written request. Any service not defined in this
          Statement of Work can be developed and priced separately from the
          scope and pricing within this document upon written request from ATG.

          Services offered in this proposal consist of providing Asymmetrical
          Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) services and traditional voice 5ESS
          services for ATG.

          ATG has chosen to provide their own On-Site Technicians who will be
          responsible for maintaining their 5ESS switch sites and ATG provided
          Customer Premises Equipment.

                              Exhibit G - 2 of 47

<PAGE>   145
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

                                   [DIAGRAM]

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                              Exhibit G - 3 of 47
<PAGE>   146
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

                                   [DIAGRAM]

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                              Exhibit G - 4 of 47
<PAGE>   147
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

                                   [DIAGRAM]

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                              Exhibit G - 5 of 47
<PAGE>   148
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

3 OPERATIONS PLANNING & IMPLEMENTATION

     Pricing and other critical elements of this Statement of Work ("SOW") are
     based upon the binding, non-conflicting terms and conditions of the Letter
     of Intent ("LOI") between Advanced Telcom Group, Inc. ("ATG") and Lucent
     Technologies Inc. ("Lucent"). Amending the "Services" definition in Exhibit
     C, "General Terms and Conditions" to include additional Services as stated
     herein and extending said LOI until the earlier of written termination by
     either party in accordance with Section 3.3 of the LOI or execution of the
     definitive agreement described therein. Lucent, acting through its Global
     Services Provider Group, will perform and ATG will procure the operations
     planning Services described in this SOW. By ordering or using these
     Services from Lucent, including changes or additional orders, ATG agrees to
     be bound to the terms of this SOW. Lucent reserves the ability to amend its
     pricing or other conditions if changes to the attached SOW make such
     amendment advisable. Please reference this SOW by title and number on any
     order or correspondence to Lucent.

3.1  SCOPE OF WORK
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     In order to meet ATG's operational milestones and provide Services to ATG
     as described in Section 3.6, "Network Operations Services" of the LOI,
     Lucent's Global Network Operations team, a division of the Network
     Reliability Center ("NRC"), will perform Phase One of the Operations
     Planning & Implementation Services prior to execution of the definitive
     agreement. In consideration for the pricing tendered herein, ATG agrees to
     procure and the NRC Global Network Operations team agrees to provide such
     Services to ATG. If either party terminates the LOI in accordance with
     Section 3.3, ATG agrees to pay Lucent, immediately upon termination, for
     all unpaid Services performed prior to termination, including all
     reasonable travel and living expenses incurred by Lucent in providing these
     Services.

3.2  PHASE ONE: A BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS (ALSO "BOA") AND PRESENT
     METHOD OF OPERATIONS ANALYSIS (ALSO "PMO") OVERVIEW
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     During this phase, the NRC will work with ATG to establish a specific
     Network Operations Plan addressing the "full spectrum" of operations
     components related to the NRC's service offerings, including personnel,
     organizations, processes, and telecommunications technology, to effectively
     perform activities related to developing, deploying and managing ATG's
     telephone network on an outsourced basis. These activities include network
     monitoring and surveillance, service order entry, service order processing,
     service and inventory (facilities and equipment) provisioning, service
     activation, trouble management (trouble ticketing and customer care) and
     inventory management (end-to-end tracking of equipment, facilities, and
     telephone numbers),

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 6 of 47

<PAGE>   149
EXHIBIT G

            Lucent's Global Network Operations team will apply its proven
            Operations Planning Methodology to produce a Business Objective
            Analysis (BOA) and Present Method of Operations Analysis (PMO). At
            the conclusion of these steps, Lucent's Global Network Operations
            will provide a written estimate of the work needed to complete the
            Future Methods of Operation (FMO) phase of the project.

     3.2.1  BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS FOR PHASE ONE

            Lucent's Global Network Operations team will examine ATG's business
            strategy, focusing on the following areas:

            - Identification of business goals
            - Identification of business objectives
            - Determination of critical success factors
            - Identification of business functions and processes
            - Identification of major unaddressed critical business issues
            - Identification of key organizational metrics

            Lucent's Global Network Operations will use a number of techniques
            to gather information for this project:

            - Examining existing documents such as business cases and
              strategic plans (need to list documents used for this purpose)
            - Interviewing key executives of ATG
            - Interviewing key managers of ATG
            - Interviewing key third party consultants of ATG
            - Working with the Lucent customer team dedicated to ATG
            - Working with the American Management Systems team dedicated to
              ATG

            Lucent's Global Networking Operations will analyze the information
            gathered, produce models and document this analysis.

     3.2.2  PRESENT METHOD OF OPERATIONS FOR PHASE ONE

            Lucent's Global Network Operations team will document a number of
            processes to implement during the operations of resale and initial
            ISP services of ATG's business. These processes are:

            - Service Order Entry, Processing, Confirmation, Activation,
              Tracking, Fulfillment
            - Provisioning (includes "all" required ATG and third-party
              interfaces and systems)
            - Customer Care (CSR viewpoint and NRC viewpoint)
            - Trouble Management (trouble ticketing, trouble identification,
              trouble resolution)
            - Billing Operations

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                              Exhibit G - 7 of 47
<PAGE>   150
EXHIBIT G

     - Inventory Management (ISP "packet switching" facilities, equipment and IP
       addressing), if applicable
     - Enterprise Network Interconnection (ATG sites, NRC site, AMS site)

     In addition, Lucent Global Network Operations team will produce Methods and
     Procedures for the following functions:

     - Trouble Management
     - Service Order Function (New Service, Moves, Changes, Disconnects)

     Lucent's Global Network Operations team will also produce some
     recommendations on how to improve the current processes.

3.2.3 PHASE ONE DELIVERABLES

Lucent's Global Network Operations will produce the following SOW deliverables:

1. A Business Objectives Analysis document containing the following information:

     - Executive Summary
     - Value Chain Analysis
     - Business Factor Analysis
       - Goals And Objectives
       - Functions
       - Critical Success Factors (CSFs)
       - Problems
     - Competitive Environment Analysis
       - Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats
       - Competitive Forces Analysis
     - Strategy Analysis
       - Major unaddressed critical business issues
       - Key organizational metrics

2. A Present Method of Operations Document containing the following information:
     - Process Flows
     - Process Descriptions

3. Methods and Procedures
     - Trouble Management
     - Service Order Function (New Service, Moves, Changes, Disconnects)

4. Recommendations for Process Improvement

     - Organizational structure in place versus required

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 8 of 47

<PAGE>   151
EXHIBIT G

   -  Organizational roles and responsibilities in place versus required.

3.3 PHASE TWO: FUTURE METHODS OF OPERATIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

      Lucent's Global Network Operations team will document a number of
      processes in the facilities-based-phase of ATG's business. These processes
      are:

      -  Order Management (Interim) - This includes the following areas:

        -  Service Order Processing, Confirmation, Activation and Fulfillment
        -  Provisioning (includes "all" required ATG and third-party interfaces
           and systems)
        -  Inventory Management (ISP "packet switching" facilities, equipment
           and IP addressing), if applicable

      -  Trouble Management - This includes the following areas:

        -  Trouble Identification Trouble Ticketing, Case Management, Dispatch,
           Trouble Resolution
        -  Network monitoring and surveillance
        -  Network performance services

This phase will be further defined in an additional Statement of Work to follow.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                               Exhibit G-9 of 47
<PAGE>   152
EXHIBIT G

3.4  OPERATIONS PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION PRICING

        Lucent's Global Network Operations Team plans to complete Phase One
        before March 31, 1999. Upon completion of Phase One, ATG shall promptly
        remit full payment to Lucent for this phase as detailed below.

        For Phase 2, [*] of the amount shall be payable on June 1, 1999. The
        remainder shall be payable at the conclusion of the project, estimated
        to be June 30, 1999.

                        Phase                     Price
                      ----------          --------------------
                       Phase 1            [*]
                       Phase 2            [*]

         *This scope of work will be refined by April 1, 1999 and the price
          adjusted accordingly.

         These prices assume that ATG will begin offering facilities-based
         services on July 1, 1999. If there is a delay, Lucent will occur
         additional costs which be passed on the ATG.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 10 of 47

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   153
EXHIBIT G

4      NETWORK INTEGRATION AND CUTOVER

       Lucent Technologies' Network Integration and Cutover Services group will
       provide the critical functions needed by Customer to integrate network
       node equipment into an operational node on an end-user customer's
       network. This Service will include a dedicated Integration Team, who
       remains on site with the network, and in direct contact with Customer's
       organization, from Turnover to Cutover. For each switch location, a
       Cut-Over Plan will be developed; progress and performance will be
       monitored with the Cut-Over Plan. During the final phases of
       installation, Professional Services will perform integration of Network
       elements specified in the Cut-Over Plan. The Cut-Over will be considered
       complete when the plan is signed as approved by Lucent Technologies and
       Customer.

4.1    NETWORK INTEGRATION CUSTOMER PREREQUISITES

          The following Prerequisites will be provided by customer for the
          Integration Process prior to the start of Cutover Services, 6.1.1
          through 6.1.8:

          - Site equipment installation complete.

          - 5ESS(R) -2000 switch installation complete and FULLS loaded.

          - Transport equipment installation complete.

          - Cross connect equipment installation complete.

          - Timing source tested, wired to equipment, and synchronization
            active.

          - All 3rd party supplied equipment installation complete and in a
            normal operating condition.

          - All 3rd party documentation for respective elements must be on hand,
            and a company contact or on-site representative available upon
            request.

4.1.1  FACILITY ORDERS

          (DS-3's, DS-1's and DS-0's) placed with due dates on or before the
          start of integration interval.

          - Facilities will appear within the locatio, and be terminated on the
            appropriate frames.

          - Due dates for facilities should coincide with the start of the
            integration interval.

          - Due dates from trunk orders should be during the integration
            interval, at least two weeks prior to Cutover.

4.1.2  SS7 LINKS ORDERED AND INSTALLED

        - Due dates for SS7 links should be on or before the start of the
          integration interval.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 11 of 47

<PAGE>   154
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

        -  Diversity of the SS7 links should be planned for and provided.

4.1.3   OFFICE RECORDS

           Need to be available at the start of the integration interval.

        -  Facility assignment records (e.g., DLRs, CLRs) need to be available
           at the site at the beginning of the integration interval.

        -  Trunk layout records, which associate the trunks with the facilities
           they will ride, need to be available.

        -  Any changes to facility or trunk assignments must be accompanied by
           updated records.

4.1.4   WORK AREA AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS

        -  Customer shall provide sufficient quantities of tables and desks for
           Supplier's integration crew. This is in addition to the maintenance
           center.

        -  Customer shall provide sufficient telecommunications resources to
           support the expected population of the site during the interval. The
           integration crew needs a minimum of two (2) lines (hunting), which
           appear in the maintenance center area and near the transport
           equipment, and two (2) lines (hunting) which only appear in the
           maintenance center. The integration crew shall use these lines in
           completing the integration process.

        -  If other people will be at the location during the integration
           process, Customer shall provide separate lines.

        -  Customer shall install telephone lines required for remote access
           (e.g., SCANS, AMA, NRC and remote TLWS) to the site prior to Supplier
           initiating the integration work effort.

4.1.5   CONTACT INFORMATION FOR OTHER SERVICE PROVIDERS

        -  Telephone numbers for vendor contacts should be obtained when
           facilities or circuits are ordered. This should include contacts for
           initial testing of circuits, ongoing maintenance, and escalation
           information.

        -  Contact information for the SS7 provider is required.

4.1.6   ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

        -  At the beginning of the integration effort, Customer shall provide a
           list of miscellaneous alarms, such as building and environmental
           alarms.

        -  If a specific layout on the alarm page is desired, Customer shall
           provide this information at the start of the integration interval.

        -  Customer shall place alarm leads from miscellaneous equipment on the
           main distributing frame or other cross connect bays for Supplier to
           connect to the 5ESS(R)-2000 switch(es).

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 12 of 47
<PAGE>   155
EXHIBIT G

             - Customer shall make appropriate arrangements with third-party
               vendors of miscellaneous equipment such as air conditioning and
               fire detection to perform alarm tests from the equipment.

     4.1.7   CALL FLOW DIAGRAMS

             - The call-through test plan is based upon the call flow diagrams
               provided by Customer.

             - Call flow diagrams must be provided two weeks prior to the start
               of the integration interval to allow time to develop a size
               specific plan.

             - If other equipment is to be tested (e.g., calls requiring
               interaction with a SCP), a detailed plan, complete with specific
               numbers to be called must be provided prior to the start of the
               integration interval.

     4.1.8   TRANSMISSION TEST EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY THE CUSTOMER

             (TTC310, 224, 500 and 650 or like) available on-site.

     4.2     SERVICE DELIVERY MANAGEMENT

             As Customer's single point of contact, the Service Delivery
             Manager will provide the total assurance and coordination of the
             Integration Process; Functions of the Service Delivery Manager
             are as follows:

             - Customer Single Point Of Contact

             - Leader Cut-Over team

             - Pre Cut-Over plan development

             - Coordinates all activities associated with Cut-Over

             - Manage all Multi-Vendor activities

             - Oversee acceptance testing

             - Publish Status Reports on Cut-Over Activities

             - Manage customer Acceptance / Cut-Over Plan Completion

             - Responsible for Turn-Over to customers a Ready For Service switch

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 13 of 47

<PAGE>   156
EXHIBIT G

4.3  NETWORK ACCEPTANCE TESTING / E&I
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Acceptance testing will be the observation and review of installation
     Services, switching, transmission and power equipment installed in the
     central office during switch installation. These items are as follows:

     -    Office Drawings
     -    Office Records
     -    Office Telephones
     -    DACS IV Cross Connect Printout
     -    DACS IV Mapping Printout
     -    Diagram of all Frame Blocks
     -    Permanent T-Berd Test Site equipment
     -    Central Office Repair Person Toolkit
     -    Copy of all Circuit CLRs
     -    Call Out Escalation List
     -    Line Assignment Log Class 5
     -    Office Equipment Assignments Log Class 5
     -    Trunk Group Inventory Records
     -    DACS IV Office Assignments for DS1/DS3 Packs
     -    Circuit Pack Inventory
     -    Spares Assessment & Inventory
     -    Trouble referral Process

4.4  SWITCH ACCEPTANCE TESTING IS...
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     -    Verifying summary status display
     -    Verifying recent change
     -    Verifying protection A/C
     -    Testing 16A announcement units
     -    Testing switch fan units
     -    Testing switch fuse alarms
     -    Testing office alarms
     -    Testing SN516 control and display circuit packs
     -    Performing trunk and line work station procedures
     -    Generating Local AMA tape
     -    Communication modules
     -    Dual link interfaces
     -    MCTSI
     -    Local digital service units
     -    Global digital service units
     -    Digital line and trunk units

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 14 of 47
<PAGE>   157
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

     - Metallic service units

     - Digital carrier line units

     - Directly connected test units

     - Packer switch units

     - Integrated digital carrier units

     - Digital network units - SONET

     - Common Network interface units.

4.5  TRANSMISSION TESTS (DCS) IS...
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     - Visual inspection

     - Link Operation Control Complexes

     - Frame alarm operation

     - Inter-bay cables: DS-1 interface module

     - Inter-bay cables: DS-3 interface module

     - External cables

     - Fan assemblies

     - Alarm and telemetry outputs

     - Protection switch function

     - Print out DS-1 cross connects

     - NRC access to DACS 14 days before Cut-Over

     - Site mapping complete, with copy on site and NRC.

4.6  SLC SERIES TEST
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     - Visual inspection and power

     - Looped back acceptance

4.7  POWER TESTS AND VERIFICATIONS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     - Verify plant capacity appropriate for office load

     - Verify correct float voltage

     - Test alarms

     - Test battery connections

     - Verify correct grounding for power bays and battery stands

     - Test load sharing on rectifiers

     - Test alarms on disconnect to batteries

     - Inspect cabling from batteries to rectifiers

     - Inspect load cabling connections

     - Verify cabling has 145c tags and accuracy of designations

     - Overall installation quality check.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 15 of 47
<PAGE>   158
EXHIBIT G

4.8  ALARM PROVISIONING
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     Local alarms will be monitored through the switching equipment. The
     customer will ensure alarms will be in place at start of work. Included
     are building, power, environmental and miscellaneous alarms. Activities
     undertaken by Supplier to establish connectivity between the alarms and
     the switch include:

     - Running jumpers from the alarm appearance on the CDF to the alarm
       point within the switch

     - Assigning the alarm within the switch's miscellaneous alarm tables

     - Simulating an alarm condition to verify the switch's ability to detect
       and report the alarm.

     The following list is not complete but provides various examples:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
     BUILDING & POWER ALARM                     TEXT
     ----------------------              ------------------
     <S>                                 <C>
     Fire                                       FIRE
     Fire Alarm Trouble                  FIRE ALARM TROUBLE
     Battery Discharge                       BAT DSCHG
     Power Monitor Battery Discharge            PMBD
     Battery Discharge Fuse Bay                 BDFB

     ENVIRONMENTAL ALARM                        TEXT
     -------------------                        ----
     Door                                       DOOR
     Low Temperature                            LOTP
     High Temperature                           HITP

     MISCELLANEOUS ALARM                        TEXT
     -------------------                        ----
     Digital Access Cross Connect               DACS
     Clock                                      CLK
     Service Control Point                      SCP
</TABLE>

     The above list is not complete. Supplier understands that the offices may
     have more, less, or different alarms.

4.9  EMERGENCY ENGINE/GENERATOR TESTING:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     - Start engine on manual, followed by auto start check

     - Observe proper load transfer to generator

     - Monitor switch performance during and after load transfer to generator
       power

     - Shut engine down and observe transfer back to commercial power

     - Monitor switch performance during and after transfer back to commercial
       power.

4.10 NETWORK ELEMENT AND SYSTEMS CONNECTIVITY
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     Supplier will make physical connections of the network elements and related
     systems to establish logical connectivity both within and external to the
     central office. End to

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 16 of 47

<PAGE>   159
EXHIBIT G

       end connectivity of the hardware and software elements within the
       central office will be established and verified:

       - Set options in the switching and transport equipment

       - Establish physical cross connects between switching and transport for
         test lines and trunks

       - Establish recorded announcements by:

              - Running analog trunk jumpers

              - Recording the actual recordings on each channel

              - Setting the transmission level on each channel.

              For non Lucent supplied equipment the provider will establish and
              test the functionality of each of the provided elements in
              conjunction with the testing performed by the Lucent integration
              team.

4.11 LEC / IXC / OTHER SERVICE PROVIDERS

       - Establish Cross Connects to Inter Office Facility

       - Establish Cross Connects in Office

       - Verify Trunk Group Software Assignments

       - Establish 800-900 Service Routing

4.12 OPERATIONAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS

       Establish and test connections to the Operational Support Systems (OSS)
       for NRC and AMA functions which interface with the central office
       associated network elements. The activities conducted by Supplier are:

       - Establishing the required cross connects in the office

       - Create the translations that define the OSS in the switch

       - Test with distance end to ensure the switch and OSS are communicating
         properly.

4.13  SIGNALING SYSTEM 7 TESTING

       Supplier shall perform SS7 integration testing with the SS7 provider.
       Supplier shall enable and support the SS7 provider's test program
       throughout the activity by trouble shooting any Supplier equipment
       and/or software related problems. SS7 testing must be accomplished
       before any trunks which use the SS7 signaling can be tested.

4.14 TRUNK TESTING

       Supplier will test all working trunks with the distant end at Cut-over.

       - Diagnostics will be run on all outgoing and two way trunks

       - Levels will be measured on all outgoing and two way trunks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 17 of 47

<PAGE>   160

                                                                       EXHIBIT G

o  Coordinate with distant end to ensure that they have tested their outgoing
   portion of the trunks

o  Correct problems discovered during the trunk testing process.

4.15 AMA VERIFICATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Supplier will test to ensure that data resulting from calls made from the switch
is accurate for billing. A quiet period on the switch is required, with the
exception of test calls. The testing will include:

o  Making sample calls outgoing and incoming to all rate areas translated on the
   switch and all Line Class Code over various trunk groups

o  Providing Customer reports so Customer can compare records between those test
   calls recorded and the records that are returned from the billing center

o  Making sure that each outgoing and incoming call gets logged on the AMA tape.

4.16 ROUTING TESTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Testing will be conducted by Supplier to verify the routing translations on the
switch. Test calls, as defined by customer and as agreed to by Supplier, are
placed to verify that traffic correctly routed from Customer central office
through LEC and IXC networks and from LECs and IXC carriers to customer
customers. This will include the following:

o  Place a call to valid NXX in the home NPA

o  Place a call to valid NPA (for six digit translations for multiple NPAs, each
   valid NXX in those NPAs must be called)

o  Place a call without a 10XXX or 101XXXX prefix (ensure that call goes to the
   PIC) for each PIC identified by customer for the central office location

o  Place a call with 101XXXX prefix

o  Place a 911 call to test 911 Service

o  Place calls to 0 and 011 to test operator Services.

4.17 FEATURE TESTING

Supplier will conduct feature testing of Services ordered by customer. Customer
will purchase the needed equipment (analog cards or RT, such as a SLC96) to have
lines available in each office for the testing. Supplier will conduct tests
from a switch site specific test plan jointly developed and agreed to by
customer and Supplier. Testing of features interaction will be limited to
recognition of the numerous combinations possible, to reduce impact on the
turnover interval.

o  Build a test CENTREX, using central office line, to test dialing plan and
   features

o  Equip a full feature ISDN terminal in the central office and test ISDN
   functionality on the switch

o  Equipment test line in the central office to test CLASS features as well as
   basic switch hook features on the switch

o  Test Caller ID

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 18 of 47

<PAGE>   161
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

     *  Other features to be identified by customer and approved by Supplier
        which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld

     *  Testing shall continue until all features are operational and up to the
        standards in the industry. The number of features to be tested should be
        done on a switch basis not to exceed a total of twenty work hours per
        switch site.

4.18 EMERGENCY RECOVERY TESTS

     This testing ensures the emergency recovery features of the switch are
     working properly. It is performed close to Cut-Over, after most of the
     translations and other testing work has been completed, to ensure that the
     testing interval activities did not disable any of the switch's emergency
     recovery capabilities. This testing cannot be performed after Cut-Over of
     Service as it is definitely Service affecting. Supplier recovery testing
     will perform the various levels of initialization to verify proper
     recovery.

4.19 NETWORK INTEGRATION COMPLIANCE

     Supplier will schedule the Network Integration activities to be completed
     based on the agreed schedule approved by Lucent Technologies and customer.
     If delays occur in activities to be performed by customer, (or other
     vendors providing services for customer other than Supplier employees,
     consultants, or agents) which impact Supplier's ability to perform the
     standard interval Network Integration activities, the process outlined
     below will be implemented provided that such delays are not attributable to
     anything done or not done (which should have been done) by Supplier:

     *  customer will provide 72 hour's notification of a delay that would
        materially impact integration testing

     *  Supplier will schedule the completion Network Integration turnover to
        Cut-Over activities based on the defined window as determined by switch
        size, and the agreed upon schedule approved by Supplier technologies and
        customer, of the targeted Cut-Over dates for each site. A pre-deployment
        conference call between the integration team leader, Customer
        representatives will be held twenty-four (24) hours before integration
        team's departure, to review the readiness of Customer site for
        undertaking the scheduled integration activities. See Prerequisites
        section 6.

     *  After Supplier's arrival at the site, should Supplier be delayed in
        performing the integration Services, customer may choose the following:
        (a) to send Supplier's personnel home and customer will pay for their
        transportation (limited to 4 people), or, (b) have Supplier personnel
        stand by during the delay in which case customer will pay [*] per
        day per person (limited to 4 people), plus such personnel's travel and
        living expenses.

     *  Supplier's Network Integration team is dedicated to performing the
        integration activities set forth in the Agreement; if customer requires
        the team to perform additional activities, customer will first inform
        Supplier and receive concurrence

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 19 of 47

<PAGE>   162
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

        on the impact to the integration schedule before proceeding and will
agree in writing on the amount of payment due.

4.20  NETWORK INTEGRATION COMPLIANCE - CO ADMINISTRATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

        The central office administration consists of putting in place all the
necessary documents, records, and test equipment to ensure the office is ready
for operation. It includes the activities listed below which will be performed
by Supplier:

        - Filing any paper trunk records and a complete copy of CLR records of
DACS cross-connections, or establishing electronic access to those records.

        - Inventory spare packs

        - Inventory test equipment
          Establishing switch room telecommunications as specified by Supplier

Following is a description of the Contents of the Cut-Over Plan; Only the
progress and performance portion of the Cut-Over Plan will remain on-site at
Customer's location.

4.21 CUT-OVER PLAN TABLE OF CONTENTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

        * INTRODUCTION

        * DELIVERABLES OF INTEGRATION PROCESS

        * PREREQUISITES FOR INTEGRATION PROCESS

        * SITE INFORMATION

        * INTEGRATION TURNOVER TO CUTOVER TEAM

        * SWITCH LOCATION ESCALATION LISTS

        * SWITCH DIAGRAM

        * MILESTONES

        * SITE ACCEPTANCE

        * CUSTOMER NAME / CONNECTIVITY

        * 5ESS ACCEPTANCE

        * TRANSPORT ACCEPTANCE

        * VERIFICATION OF 3RD PARTY EQUIPMENT TESTING

        * CHECK LIST OF ALL 3RD PARTY EQUIPMENT TEST RESULTS
          FROM ALL LOCATIONS

        * LOCAL ALARMS

        * INTEGRATION END-TO-END TRUNK TESTING

        * MISCELLANEOUS

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                              Exhibit G - 20 of 47
<PAGE>   163
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

        * NRC REQUIREMENTS

        * TEST NUMBER ASSIGNMENTS

        * RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT VERIFICATION

        * ASSIGNMENT DRAWINGS

        * NORMAL OFFICE CODE ASSIGNMENTS

        * SYNC/TIMING

        * STP INFORMATION

        * CALL THROUGH TEST

        * BRCS / LASS FEATURE TESTING

        * DIAL PLAN

        * E911 CALLING

        * OPERATOR SERVICES TEST PLAN

        * ODA VERIFICATION

        * CUTOVER TROUBLE TRACKING LOG

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                              Exhibit G - 21 of 47
<PAGE>   164
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

4.22 NETWORK INTEGRATION, CUTOVER SERVICES PRICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Billing for the 5ESS Integration occurs at the completion of each 5ESS Switch
Site.

The following pricing is a one-time charge for integration of the 5ESS switch
and associated equipment located at a host site.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                    Santa Rosa       Salem          Tacoma       Host Total
                   -----------    -----------    -----------     -----------
<S>                <C>            <C>            <C>             <C>
5ESS switch            [*]            [*]            [*]              [*]
Jetstream              [*]            [*]            [*]              [*]
Cerent                 [*]            [*]            [*]              [*]
Cisco ATM              [*]            [*]            [*]              [*]
                   -----------    -----------     ----------       --------
Total                  [*]            [*]            [*]              [*]
                   ===========    ===========     ==========       ========
</TABLE>

The following pricing is a one-time charge for each CoLo cage that is connected
back to the host 5ESS:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                      Cerent      Diamond Lane    Fast Shelf    CoLo Total
                    ----------    ------------    ----------    ----------
<S>                 <C>           <C>             <C>           <C>
Santa Rosa
  (Third Street)       [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Rohnert Park           [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Cotati                 [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Petaluma               [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Tacoma 62nd Ave        [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Tacoma Fawcett         [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Tacoma J St.           [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Olympia                [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Puyallup               [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Salem                  [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Eugene                 [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
Springfield            [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
                    ----------     ----------     ----------     --------
Total                  [*]            [*]            [*]           [*]
                    ==========     ==========     ==========     ========
</TABLE>

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 22 of 47

<PAGE>   165
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

5    CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS / CONNECTIVITY - SERVICE ACTIVATION

The NRC will start customer service activities upon establishing and certifying
connectivity between the required NRC operations support systems and customer
provided central office and transport equipment. Once the T1 Frame Relay
Network is in place, tested, and connected to the customer's host switch and
transport network elements (NE), the NRC operations team will begin providing
customer requested services. At this point in the process the monthly
connection charges to the customer begin. The following steps are involved in
providing a reliable network.

NOTE - CONNECTIVITY / SERVICE ACTIVATION IS A 60 DAY PROCESS. ALL REQUIREMENTS
FOR CUSTOMER INFORMATION MUST BE RECEIVED BY THE NRC prior to the placement of
the circuit order in order to meet the customer's time to market requirements.

STEP #1 Obtaining The Latest Site Configurations

STEP #2 Establishing Customer Connectivity

STEP #3 Responsibility Matrix

5.1  OBTAINING THE LATEST SITE CONFIGURATIONS/GROWTH
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

All work performed by the NRC will be based upon the latest site
configurations. Any configuration changes must be provided to the NRC in
writing and are subject to engineering and pricing reviews to ensure capacity
availability. If the NRC has an existing router capacity at the customer host
site and at the Denver NRC to support the addition of a new element, then only
the one time new element connectivity fee will be charged. If the NRC does not
have enough router capacity at the customer site or the Denver NRC location the
new element and element connectivity fees will be quoted separate from the final
statement of work. Please allow up to three weeks to connect a new network
element, if the NRC has existing capacity.

The customer will be responsible to provide the 5ESS switch packs and cables to
support their desired services as described in Table A.

o The NRC requires growing all ports below during the Engineering and Design
  phase.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 23 of 47
<PAGE>   166
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

                   NRC PORTS AND CABLES REQUIREMENTS FOR 5ESS
                                    Table A

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                               Switch
NRC Service                    Appearance    Circuit Pack   IOP/Comm/
Usage             NRC System   (Grow AS)     Loc.           Slot/Channel   Circuit Pack:    Cable ID:
----------------  ----------   ----------    ------------   ------------   -------------    ---------
<S>               <C>          <C>           <C>            <C>            <C>              <C>
5ESS Switch:                                                                                (5ESS Cable
                                                                                            ED5D500-21)
5ESS              NFM (TNM)    SCC0          19-094         0/0/0/1        UN583            G-38A(2)
Surveillance                   SCC1          45-094         1/0/0/1        UN583            plus one spare
Translations for  ConnectVu    TOPAS         28-110         0/2/2/3        UN582/X.25 SDL   G-43C
Trunk & Line      ATP &        ATPRC         45-118         1/0/3/2        UN582/X.25 SDL   G-43C
Provisioning      ANCM         Echo Back     28-102         0/2/1/3        UN582/TTY        G-39F

RSTLWS            Terminal     RSTLWS 0      28-102         0/2/1/1        UN582/TTY        G-39F
                  Server       RSTLWS 1      28-102         0/2/1/2                         G-39F
                               RSTLWS 2      53-094         1/2/0/1        UN582/TTY        G-39F
                               RSTLWS 3      53-094         1/2/0/2                         G-39F
Recent Change     Terminal     RCV           28-102         0/2/1/0        UN582/TTY
VFY               Server                     53-094         1/2/0/3        UN582/TTY
5ESS Loop         MLT4         MLT4          28-110         0/2/2/0        UN582/SDL        G-43C
Testing
Traffic Data      Traffic      TDMS/EDAS     28-110         0/2/2/2        UN582/SDL        G-43C
Information       Netminder
Spare Pack                                   45-118         1/0/3/3        UN582/SDL
</TABLE>

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
TRANSPORT EQP.      Application         Ports          Cable
--------------      -----------         -----          -----
<S>                 <C>                 <C>            <C>
DDM-2000            Async & X.25 ports                 Standard RS232M/RS232M
                                                       cable (2 cables)
</TABLE>

5.2  ESTABLISHING CUSTOMER CONNECTIVITY

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lucent will order, install, test, and maintain Frame Relay and ISDN backup
circuits along with their associated equipment for each customer location. The
NRC, will direct its network provider to have the local exchange company (LEC)
install the Frame Relay and ISDN circuits at the customer provided LEC
demarcation point. The circuit will be extended from the demarcation point to
the dataset cabinet by a Lucent Technician. Circuits will be ordered when: the
full site address location; phone number; and on-site customer contact
information is provided to the NRC, (see customer responsibilities below). Upon
placement of the circuits and after ensuring that the pre-installation and
certification criteria is met, the NRC will dispatch a connectivity
installation team. The connectivity installation team will install, test and
turn-up all required Frame Relay and ISDN equipment. Upon completing the work
at the customer site, additional work and testing will be completed at the
Denver NRC site. This work includes connecting the circuits to the required
Operations Support Systems and making the necessary database configuration
settings. The NRC will establish an ISDN backup circuit that will ensure NRC
visibility of the customer network elements if the primary link is not
operational. The connectivity drawing below outlines a typical NRC to customer
site circuit configuration. The actual equipment used and network elements
connected to the NRC

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 24 of 47

<PAGE>   167
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

are based upon customer provided configurations. The NRC will connect directly
to all major network elements, except for nodes on a SONET ring.

                                   [GRAPHIC]

NRC RESPONSIBILITIES INCLUDE:
-----------------------------

     1.   Cabling the Frame Relay & ISDN circuits from the LEC's demarcation
          point to the dataset cabinet that contains the NRC equipment.

     2.   Install the NRC Frame relay equipment, which include the Multi
          Protocol Router, Cisco Router and terminal server and Hub, Frame Relay
          DSU, ISDN, DSU, and any required modems.

     3.   Cable the NRC equipment to all the required Network elements. See
          table A below for details. The NRC will provide all cables, except
          5ESS cables noted in Table A.

     4.   Test circuits to ensure the functionality and reliability of the
          Frame Relay and ISDN backup circuits.

     5.   Configure the Denver NRC operations support systems to receive
          customer's network elements and environmental alarms.

     6.   Perform overall End-to-End testing of network connectivity and
          functionality.

ATG RESPONSIBILITIES INCLUDE:
-----------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 25 of 47

<PAGE>   168
EXHIBIT G

Connectivity/Service Activation requires 60 days from the time the NRC receives
the customer specific information for each site. See requirements below:

1.   Local Service Office - NPA-NXX (LSO). This is a local number provided by
the LEC.

2.   Local On - Site Contact names and numbers:

3.   Provide all Engineers, Furnish and Install (EF&I) 5ESS IOP circuits packs
and cables as described in table A.

4.   Provide 1 23" Dataset cabinet to install NRC equipment.

5.   Provide 50' of cables for all 5ESS IOP connections. Please cable 5ESS
circuit packs to the dataset cabinet tagged for NRC use.

6.   Provide four shelves in the dataset cabinet for NRC use.

7.   Provide 8 amps 110/120 AC (IKVA) protected power and backup inverter.
Provide 12 AC power outlets.

8.   Provide a site layout drawing and detail any special cable requirements.

9.   Cable all environmental alarms and scan points to the 5ESS switch.

10.  Provide all adapters or converters on Transport equipment that will allow
the NRC to connect to RS 232 DB25 sync connections.

11.  Provide four analog telephone lines and modems for NRC remote in dial
access. The NRC recommends adding additional 3811 modems to the existing 3000
carrier.

12.  Ensure Lucent installation team to connect the 5ESS cables to the 5ESS
switch IOP ports.

13.  Assign a customer onsite point of contact to assist in completion of the
site survey and help resolve installation issues.

14.  Terminal ID (TID) numbers for all transport equipment.

                              Exhibit G - 26 of 47
<PAGE>   169
EXHIBIT G

5.3 CONNECTIVITY PRICING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The following pricing is a one-time charge for establishing connectivity to the
5ESS switch and associated equipment located at a host site:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
-------------------------------------------------------
Santa Rosa     Salem          Tacoma         Host Total
-------------------------------------------------------
<S>            <C>            <C>            <C>
[*]            [*]            [*]            [*]
-------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

The following pricing is a one-time charge for establishing connectivity for
each CoLo cage that is connected back to the host 5ESS:

<TABLE>
<S>                    <C>
----------------------------------
Santa Rosa             [*]
(Third Street)
----------------------------------
Rohnert Park           [*]
----------------------------------
Cotati                 [*]
----------------------------------
Petaluma               [*]
----------------------------------
Tacoma 62nd Ave        [*]
----------------------------------
Tacoma Fawcett         [*]
----------------------------------
Tacoma J St.           [*]
----------------------------------
Olympia                [*]
----------------------------------
Puyallup               [*]
----------------------------------
Salem                  [*]
----------------------------------
Eugene                 [*]
----------------------------------
Springfield            [*]
----------------------------------
Total                 [*]
----------------------------------
</TABLE>

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                               Exhibit G - 27 of 47
<PAGE>   170
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

6    NETWORK MONITORING & SURVEILLANCE

Lucent Technologies' Remote Monitoring and Surveillance Services will be
provided based on the Service package chosen by Customer. Remote Surveillance
capabilities for monitoring Customer's network, including all associated
Supplier network elements (excluding any non-Supplier network elements, which
must be approved in writing by the Lucent Technologies NRC prior to initiating
Monitoring Services). Monitored conditions will include Service interruptions,
alarm reporting, system outages, call processing loss, initializations, and
duplex hardware failures. Problems may be addressed and resolved remotely or
on-site, or trouble notifications may be provided to Supplier and/or Customer-
specified personnel for resolution.

6.1  COMPONENT SERVICES

     o    Alarm Testing. Critical, major, minor and fuse alarm status
          indicators are tested on an agreed upon basis not to exceed one (1)
          time each Term year. Environmental alarm conditions are monitored on
          an on-going basis.

     o    Alarm Resolution. The NRC will initiate corrective action in response
          to critical, major, and minor alarm conditions identified during
          remote and/or on-site surveillance periods.

     o    Trunk Maintenance. The NRC will respond to switch, customer, and
          repair Service-reported trunk problems.

     o    Escalation and Resolution of Network Problems. The NRC will initiate
          corrective action in response to any alarm condition. In line with
          Customer-specific escalation plans, unresolved problems will be
          escalated to the appropriate Lucent Technologies Technical Assistance
          organization as necessary, including Bell Laboratories. When Customer
          has selected Lucent Technologies for Case Management of each problem,
          the NRC will retain ownership of the problem through resolution.

     o    Software Updates. Supplier plans to correct generic program software
          problems and provide feature enhancements in Customer's network system
          and maintain associated history logs.

     o    Emergency Recovery Procedures. If Customer's 5ESS(R)-2000 switch is
          unable to automatically recover from fault conditions or
          initializations, Supplier will deploy manual procedures to clear
          failures, restore operation, and minimize Service interruptions.

     o    Dispatch of On-Site Technical Personnel. Depending on Customer's
          selection of on-site support, Supplier can dispatch designated
          technical personnel to the affected site to resolve hardware problems.

     o    Alarm and Service Outage Analysis. The NRC will conduct root-cause
          analysis of system initializations, maintenance interrupts, major
          alarms, and software and hardware failures, utilizing chronological
          data of system activity to assist in avoiding similar recurrences of
          system failures. These root-cause analysis reports will be limited to
          Severity levels which result in a loss of call processing. Lucent

                               Exhibit G - 28 of 47

<PAGE>   171
EXHIBIT G

     Technologies will be responsible for determining the extent and frequency
     of the analysis.

o    Diagnostic Failures. Routine automatic and manual diagnostic procedures
     will be conducted to detect 5ESS(R)-2000 switching hardware faults.

o    Memory Administration. The NRC will monitor Customer's network to ensure
     that adequate memory capacity is available for system operation.

If the NRC identifies the need for an on-site dispatch and Customer has
arranged for third party on-site coverage, the NRC will direct the dispatch to
Customer's help desk or other mutually agreed-upon central source.

The current Escalation criteria documented below may be modified to meet
Customer's expectations. A detailed Customer internal escalation process will
be established to ensure that Customer personnel are properly notified in the
event of a Service-affecting activity.

6.2  NRC STANDARD ESCALATION GUIDELINES
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     The following items will be used as criteria for establishing what
     constitutes a Service-affecting incident. Incidents which fall into these
     categories shall be reported to Tier III (RTAC) immediately without regard
     to cause or resolution.

     o    DMERT init level two or higher.
     o    AM application software init level S5 or higher.
     o    AM application hardware init level H3 or higher.
     o    SM init level FG1, S1, and F1.
     o    AMA duplex failure for more than two (2) minutes.
     o    Duplex failure of any peripheral frame affecting call processing.

6.2.1     5ESS(R)-2000 PROBLEM ESCALATION AND NOTIFICATION GUIDELINES

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
     PROBLEM TYPE             SEVERITY                         NRC TIME     NRC TO RTAC
     ------------             --------                        ---------     ----------
    <S>                      <C>                           <C>           <C>
     Frame/item 1E           Notification and/or
     processor equipment     escalation to failure state   On-site NRC   TIER III, IV

     5ESS(R)-2000            Call processing               ASAP          ASAP

     AMA                     Total                         ASAP          ASAP

     ADMINISTRATIVE MODULE
     ---------------------

     CU                      Duplex                       ASAP           ASAP
                             Simplex                      1 hour         3 hours

     DFC                     Duplex                       ASAP           ASAP
                             Simplex                      1 hour         3 hours

     MHD                     Duplex                       ASAP           ASAP

</TABLE>

                              Exhibit G - 29 of 47
<PAGE>   172
EXHIBIT G

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PROBLEM TYPE           SEVERITY         NRC TIME        NRC TO RTAC
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                    <C>              <C>             <C>
                       Simplex          1 hour          3 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IOP                    Duplex           ASAP            ASAP
                       -------------------------------------------------------
                       Simplex          2 hours         5 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IOP sub-unit           Duplex           ASAP            ASAP
                       -------------------------------------------------------
                       Simplex          4 hours         12 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IOP sub-device         Duplex           ASAP            ASAP
                       -------------------------------------------------------
                       Simplex          4 hours         12 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COMMUNICATION MODULE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MSCU                   Duplex           ASAP            ASAP
                       -------------------------------------------------------
                       Simplex          1 hour          3 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MSPU                   Duplex           ASAP            ASAP
                       -------------------------------------------------------
(MMP, FCP, PPC)        Simplex          4 hours         18 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ONTC                   Duplex           ASAP            ASAP
                       -------------------------------------------------------
(MICU/TMS/DLI)         Simplex          1 hour          3 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SWITCHING MODULE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Controller             Duplex           ASAP            ASAP
                       -------------------------------------------------------
(MP,SP,TSI,ECT)        Simplex          4 hours         24 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Line Unit/ISLU         512 circuits     ASAP            1 hour
                       -------------------------------------------------------
     Grid              64 circuits      ASAP            3 hours
                       -------------------------------------------------------
     Channel Board     8 circuits       1 hour          4 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trunk Unit             64 circuits      6 hours         24 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Digital                240 circuits     2 hours         8 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Line/Trunk Unit
(DLTU) DFI             24 circuits      6 hours         24 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Digital CXR/Line Unit
(DCLU)                 576 ciruits      ASAP            1 hour
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Terminal (SLO)  96 circuits      ASAP            3 hours
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

6.2.2  NETWORK MONITORING AND SURVEILLANCE PRICING

          Seven-by-Twenty-Four-Hour (7 X 24) Monitoring & Surveillance Services
          pricing below includes those Services as stated above in Section 6.1,
          "Component Services." Component Services.

The recurring monthly charge for each host site (including the monthly circuit
charge) is:

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 30 of 47
<PAGE>   173
EXHIBIT G

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Santa Rosa        Salem         Tacoma         Host Total
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>             <C>               <C>           <C>            <C>
 5ESS switch            [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Jetstream              [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Cerent                 [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Cisco ATM              [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Total                  [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

 Assuming that operations commence on July 1, 1999 the total charge for the
 remainder of 1999 for each host (including the monthly circuit charge) is:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Santa Rosa        Olympia         Tacoma         Host Total
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>             <C>               <C>           <C>            <C>
 5ESS switch            [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Jetstream              [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Cerent                 [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Cisco ATM              [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Total                  [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

ATG will only be billed for these services from the date that operations
commence.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                              Exhibit G - 31 of 47
<PAGE>   174
EXHIBIT G

The recurring monthly charge for each co-locate site (including the monthly
circuit charge) is:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       Cerent      Diamond Lane    Fast Shelf    CoLo Total
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                    <C>         <C>             <C>           <C>
 Santa Rosa             [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
 (Third Street)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Rohnert Park           [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Cotati                 [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Petaluma               [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Tacoma 62nd Ave        [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Tacoma Fawcett         [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Tacoma J St.           [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Olympia                [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Puyallup               [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Salem                  [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Eugene                 [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Springfield            [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Total                  [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
==============================================================================
</TABLE>

 Assuming that operations commence on July 1, 1999 the total charge for the
 remainder of 1999 for each co-location site (including the monthly circuit
 charge) is:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       Cerent      Diamond Lane    Fast Shelf    CoLo Total
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                    <C>         <C>             <C>           <C>
 Santa Rosa            [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
 (Third Street)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Rohnert Park          [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Cotati                [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Petaluma              [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Tacoma 62nd Ave       [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Tacoma Fawcett        [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Tacoma J St.          [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Olympia               [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Puyallup              [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Salem                 [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Eugene                [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Springfield           [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Total                 [*]            [*]           [*]              [*]
==============================================================================
</TABLE>

 ATG will only be billed for these services from the date that operations
 commence.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                              Exhibit G - 32 of 47
<PAGE>   175
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

7    NETWORK PERFORMANCE SERVICES

     Network Performance Services will consist of six component Services
     essential to Customer's ability to manage the investment in their network
     and to maximize their service to end-users and/or resellers.

7.1  TRAFFIC DATA COLLECTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     This Service provides the collection of real time traffic data from network
     elements and related facilities within the network Collection of data will
     be on 5ESS(R)-2000 switch components, trunk groups, and 5ESS(R)-2000 switch
     performance.

     Traffic Data Collection includes:

     o    Connectivity and scheduling
     o    Establishing thresholds
     o    Time consistent and true busy hour reports
     o    Exception reports based on threshold items
     o    Exception report analysis
     o    Data retention - 45 days of raw data, 13 months of summarized data
          (on-line), 5 years of summarized data (off line)

7.2  CAPACITY MANAGEMENT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     The NRC will perform capacity management on Customer's networks. Using
     data collected, weekly and monthly reports will be generated as follows:

     o    Switch Performance
     o    Switch Components
     o    Trunk Groups
     o    Threshold Exception Trending
     o    Memory Administration

     Supplier will analyze note recommendations and items requiring attention on
     the monthly reports sent to Customer.

7.3  NETWORK MANAGEMENT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     The NRC will use real-time surveillance and monitoring of message traffic
     (5 minute data) to allow for network control capabilities and for the
     patterning of network call irregularities. The systems will use manual and
     automatic/dynamic control capabilities to maximize call-carrying capacity
     and to interact with the network to minimize the adverse effects of traffic
     overloads and disaster situations such as switch, signaling or facility
     failures.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                              Exhibit G - 33 of 47
<PAGE>   176
EXHIBIT G

7.4  SPECIAL STUDIES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     Special Studies deliverables fall into two categories - Customer and
     Equipment/Network

     Customer Special Studies includes data on a particular customer group such
     as Single Line, Series Complete, MLHG, SFG, or customer TGN. This data will
     be a one week study that will include graphical as well as summarized data
     by hour for a specific customer. The data includes peg count, overflow,
     usage and grade of service recommendations. This data includes both peak
     and time consistent busy hour. These studies can be used for internal
     administration as well as marketing data for Customer sales teams.

     The Equipment/Network Special Studies includes any study that is not part
     of the normal capacity monitoring package, such as studies on TR008/TR303
     Remote Terminals, specific type or group of switch peripherals, and special
     switch interactions.

7.5  D & F SERVICES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     Planning, designing and engineering the configuration of the network is a
     multifaceted discipline. Supplier will provide information on installed and
     working components of Supplier equipment to enable Customer to utilize the
     engineered capacity and plan for timely relief.

     The NRC's D & F (Demand and Facility) Service will provide the following
     information to enable Customer to properly administer and plan for timely
     relief:

     o    Develop Demand and Facility (Capacity) charts for port limited switch
          components. These components include:

          DNU-S
          IDCU
          DCS

     This Service complements the information provided on traffic sensitive
     components in the Capacity Management Services offering.

     This information will be provided on a monthly basis. Additional components
     will be provided as part of the network special study category of the SOW.

7.6  NETWORK RELIEF PLANNING
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     The NRC's goal in providing Relief Planning Services is to determine the
amount of equipment required to meet the increased end-user service demands in
a timely fashion while minimizing Customer's total network costs. This Service
is provided as an additional offering to those customers who have subscribed
to the D & F Services and Capacity Management Services.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 34 of 47

<PAGE>   177
EXHIBIT G

To accomplish this:

o    Supplier and customer will jointly develop the thresholds (75%, 85%, etc.)
     at which time a relief job will be triggered or recommended. The size of
     switch addition will be based either on historical trends and/or customer
     forecast as well as agreed upon relief interval.

o    Depending on the agreed upon process/procedure, customer can be provided
     with a recommendation of equipment to be ordered or even a TEO to be
     reviewed, approved and ordered by Customer:

Combined with Capacity Management Services and D & F Services, this Service will
allow Customer to effectively and efficiently manage its capital investments
while continuing to meet the demands of its end-users while offering a specific
grade of service to end-user customers.

7.7  NETWORK PERFORMANCE SERVICES PRICING
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The monthly recurring price for this service is [*] per switch per month
for 1999.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Host Location       Monthly Charge      Charge for six months
-------------       --------------      ---------------------
<S>                 <C>                 <C>
Santa Rosa          [*]                 [*]
Salem               [*]                 [*]
Tacoma              [*]                 [*]
                    ------              -------
Total               [*]                 [*]
                    ======              =======
</TABLE>

ATG will only be billed for these services from the date that operations
commence.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 35 of 47

<PAGE>   178
EXHIBIT G

8    SERVICE PROVISIONING AND INVENTORY

     Lucent Technologies' Network Reliability Center (NRC) will provide the
     Customer with Service Provisioning as described below. These Services will
     be directed from the NRC Service Order Processes will be jointly designed,
     documented as mutually agreed by Customer and Supplier. These processes
     will include the following Service order functions: review, acceptance
     confirmation, network element (NE) assignment, switch and transport
     translations, record inventory and order completion. The manner in which
     orders are received can be manual, mechanized or automated, based on
     Customer's data communication capabilities.

8.1  SERVICE ORDER DESCRIPTION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     A "Service Order" is any extension or order submitted by Customer and
     accepted by the NRC which is a new, change to new, or change to an
     existing order. Service Orders will be billed as described below.

8.2  SERVICE ORDER HOURS OF OPERATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     The NRC Service Order Provisioning center hours of operation are Monday
     through Friday, 6:00 a.m. MST to 10:00 p.m. MST (excluding any holidays
     recognized by Supplier). If received after 10:00 p.m. MST, orders will
     be processed after 6:00 a.m. MST on the next business day.

8.3  SERVICE ORDER VOLUMES PER HOURS OF OPERATION
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     The maximum number of orders (Standard and Special) Supplier will accept
     during the Service Order Provisioning Centers upon agreement between both
     parties in a Joint Service Level Agreement Hours of Operation listed
     above may not exceed a quantity; orders in excess of the daily agreement
     shall be carried over to the next business day.

8.4  NEW SERVICE ORDER INITIATIVES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Future market initiatives outside of the Standard and Special Service
     order descriptions listed above will be renegotiated for price, completion
     intervals, billing intervals and process, and must be pre-approved in
     writing by the Lucent Technologies NRC prior to implementing the
     initiative.

8.5  STANDARD SERVICE ORDERS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Standard Service Orders (also known as "Plain Old Telephone Service" or
     "POTS") will be no more than five (5) lines and will be billed at the
     rate of [*] per line. Any incorrect POTS orders will be billed at an
     additional [*] per line and processed with the correct information, a copy
     of the error and corrected information to be provided to Customer
     documenting the error and billing. Any orders received as an
     Escalated/Expedited order will be billed at an additional [*] per line.
     Customer will provide a pre-approval list of names designating personnel
     authorized to escalate an

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 36 of 47

<PAGE>   179
EXHIBIT G

order. All Escalated order requests must be accompanied by a signed approval
for the Escalation.

Incorrect orders are defined as: any order containing any invalid mismatch of
facility/equipment, or telephone number or channel, or Service Promised to a
customer by Customer.

Escalated/Expedited orders are defined as: any order with a request to complete
prior to the standard intervals.

8.6  SPECIAL SERVICE ORDERS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
o  Hunt Groups

o  Centrex

o  LDP (ANI Table updates & PIC changes)

o  LD

o  LNP

o  ISDN

o  Millennium Voice/Data Orders

Special Service Orders will be no more than fifteen (15) lines and billed at [*]
per line. Any orders received incorrectly will be billed at an additional [*]
per line. Incorrect orders will be processed with the correct information with a
copy of the error and corrected information provided to Customer documenting the
error and billing. Any orders received as an Escalated/ Expedited order will be
billed at an additional [*] per line. There will be a pre-approval list of names
provided by Customer of who can escalate an order. All Escalated order requests
must be accompanied by a signed approval for the Escalation.

Incorrect orders are defined as any order containing any invalid mismatch of
facility/equipment, telephone number or channel, or Service promised to an
end-user customer by Customer.

Escalated/Expedited orders are defined as any order or Customer requests to be
completed in less time than Supplier's standard intervals.

8.7  TRUNK SERVICE PROVISIONING AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The NRC will work with Customer to identify and track managed network
facilities. Customer must first provide accurate and timely inventories of
Customer's network equipment first. Customer must update and compare inventories
on a monthly basis to ensure accuracy. The NRC will also create and maintain the
inventory records used for assigning these network facilities. Record
requirements will be mutually defined by Customer and the NRC. The network
element data, which is managed by Customer, will be combined with the NRC

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 37 of 47

<PAGE>   180
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

     information to provision service orders. Services can include any or all of
     the following:

     o    Inventory Management - Create, organize, and maintain physical and
          administrative telecommunications records (unbundled loop, network
          facilities, telephone numbers, circuit identifiers and trunk group
          ids)

     o    Facility Management - Select from a customer provided list of
          transport facilities. This information will be used to establish
          service for a customer. Track all changes in the status and
          availability of these transport facilities.

     o    Translate trunk information into appropriate switch.

     o    Translate Electronic Cross Connects information for the specified
          network elements.

     o    Provide support for Trunk maintenance and turn-up.

     o    Provide service request completion information to customer when
          requested.

8.8  LINE SERVICE PROVISIONING

     Line Service Provisioning will include the establishment of network
     connectivity, for the purpose of originating or terminating calls. This
     service will provide activities in response to service order requests for
     adds, moves, and changes to customer services. Line service provisioning
     includes:

     o    Electronic receipt of service requests from customer or their
          representative.

     o    Acknowledgement of order receipt.

     o    Analysis of service request for accuracy.

     o    Telephone number/network resource management assignment, aging and
          database administration.

     o    Translation of Centrex feature groups and dialing plans.

     o    Assignment and tracking of multi-line hunt groups.

     o    Identification of service request jeopardous. And notification to
          Customer.

     o    Provide information for the creation and issuance of circuits design
          records. This record will be used by Customer, the NRC and the NRC
          trouble management teams.

     o    Assignment of network resources and/or telephone numbers to service
          requests.

     o    Distribution of service request to defined personnel if required.

     o    Input and validation of required standard switch translations.

     o    Dispatch management of vendors providing inside premise wiring for
          customers.

     o    Initial tests of unbundled loop to validate good facilities.

     o    Acknowledgment to customer of service request completion.

8.9  TEST AND TURN-UP

     Lucent Technologies' Network Reliability Center (NRC) will provide the
     Eagle Test & Turn Up support as described below. These Services will be
     directed from the NRC.

                              Exhibit G - 38 of 47
<PAGE>   181
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

          Test & Turn Up processes will be designed, documented and accepted by
          Customer and the NRC.

     8.9.1  TEST AND TURN UP DESCRIPTION

          These processes will include the following Test & Turn Up functions:
          review, acceptance confirmation, network element (NE) assignment,
          switch and transport translations, record inventory, complete service
          turn up with field technician and order completion.

     8.9.2  TEST AND TURN UP PREREQUISITES

          o  Completed LTR (Line Trunk Record), Provided by Eagle

          o  Completed DVA (Design Verity Assign), Completed by NRC
             Provisioning.

          o  Provisioning translations completed (Except LNP translations).

          o  Completed CLR (Circuit Layout Record), Completed by Eagle.

          o  CLR delivered to NRC Test and Turn Up and Eagle switch technician.

          o  Facility tested end to end.

          o  DCS cross-connects complete.

          o  Field technician dispatch list delivered to the NRC Test and Turn
             Up 24 hour prior to field technician dispatched. (Advanced
             notification of large projects for timely completion of work).

     8.9.3  TEST AND TURN UP HOURS OF OPERATION

     The NRC Test & Turn Up Order Center hours of operation are Monday through
     Friday, 6:00 a.m. MST to 7:00 p.m. MST (excepting any Supplier recognized
     Holidays). Turn Up orders received after 7:00 p.m. MST will be processed
     the following business day.

8.10  SERVICE ORDER PROVISIONING PRICING
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Standard Service Orders

     Special Service Orders

     Standard Orders (5 or less lines per order);

     [*] per line per order.

     Order is based on the entire order process: from the initial order receipt
     throughout the processing, activation, and testing time of the order.

     ANY ORDER RECEIVED WITH INCORRECT DATA:

     [*] additional per line per order.

     ANY ORDER WITH AN ESCALATION REQUEST:

     [*] additional per line per order.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 39 of 47

<PAGE>   182
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

     COMPLEX SERVICE ORDERS (15 OR LESS LINES PER ORDER)

     [*] per line per order.

     Order is based on the entire order process: from the initial order receipt
     throughout the processing, activation, and testing time of the order.

     ANY ORDER RECEIVED WITH INCORRECT DATA:

     [*] additional per line per order.

     ANY ORDER WITH AN ESCALATION REQUEST:

     [*] additional per line per order.

     TEST AND TURN UP PRICING FOR STANDARD AND COMPLEX ORDERS

     [*] per line additional for Standard or Complex orders

     [*] per line additional for incorrect or escalated orders
     Standard or Complex

9.   TRANSLATIONS AND SWITCH INVENTORY

     The NRC will perform on-going Switch Software Translations which will
     enable the switch to perform call processing. This assumes all initial data
     bases have been established, and the switch is switching calls. On-going
     provisioning must be done to reflect changes in switch equipment and
     changes in customer information.

     The NRC will maintain records inventory and changes to the switch data
     bases. The office specific data records capture the equipment in the
     central office.

     TRANSLATION ORDER DESCRIPTION

     A Translation Order is described as any order received by the NRC from ATG
     as a new, change to new, change to existing, and an extension to a new,
     existing, or changed order and will be billed as described below.

     TRANSLATION ORDER HOURS OF OPERATION

     The NRC Translations Order center hours of operation are; Monday through
     Friday, 6:00 a.m. MST to 7:00 p.m. MST (excluding any Lucent recognized
     Holidays).  No order will be processed, until 6:00 a.m. MST the following
     business day, if received after 10:00 p.m. MST.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

                              Exhibit G - 40 of 47

<PAGE>   183
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

     NEW TRANSLATIONS ORDER INITIATIVES.

     Any Future Market initiatives outside of the Translations order
     descriptions listed, will be renegotiated in the areas of: price,
     completion intervals, billing intervals and process, and must be
     pre-approved in writing by the Lucent Technologies NRC, prior to the start
     of the initiative.

     Complex Translations Orders (as defined below) will be negotiated for
     completion intervals and billed in 1 hour increments. Total time charged to
     a complex order is based on the entire order process from initial order
     receipt throughout the processing, activation, and testing time of the
     order. Any orders received incorrectly will be billed at no less than a 3
     hour increment. Incorrect orders will be processed with the correct
     information and a copy of the error and corrected information will be
     provided to ATG as backup documentation to the error and billing. Any
     orders for translations received as an Escalated/Expedited order will be
     billed at no less than a 4 hour increment. There will be a pre approval
     list of names provided by ATG of who can escalate an order. All
     Escalated/Expedited order requests must be accompanied by a signed approval
     for the Escalation.

     Complex Translations are defined below:

9.1  COMPLEX TRANSLATIONS

          The below translations efforts are efforts that will be negotiated for
          completion at the time of request.  They will not be billed or tracked
          as listed above and will require a negotiated time frame prior to the
          beginning of the project. The efforts listed below will retire hours
          from the Translations blocks of hours as per the negotiated time
          frames per incident.

          o    Building Rate Centers
          o    Rating
          o    LNP Implementation on New Switches
          o    LNP NOC
          o    LNP Routing
          o    LDP Routing
          o    LDP Additional Trunk Group Routing
          o    LERG Administration
          o    Line Class Codes
          o    SS7 Trunking, Point Code Additions and Routing
          o    NPA Splits in the same LATA
          o    NPA Splits in ATG Rate Centers
          o    NPA NXX Additions
          o    OPERATOR and 911 Additions, Changes and Testing
          o    Preparation of Large Terminal Growth - After preparation is
               complete the NRC passes off the Growth to the Software Evolution
               Group in Lisle, ILL.

                              Exhibit G - 41 of 47

<PAGE>   184
EXHIBIT G

     This group contacts the customer for scheduling of actual growth. This
     growth is an additional charge to the customer from the Software Evolution
     Group in Lisle, ILL.

o    Translations Consulting and Analyzation

9.2  TRANSLATIONS PRICING
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     Translations        500 hour block      [*] per block

     One-time set-up fee                     [*]
     Billable in 1 hour increments:

     Total time charged per Translation order is based on the entire order
     process: from the initial order receipt throughout the processing,
     activation, and testing time of the order.

          Any order received with incorrect data will be billed at no less than
          a 3 Hour minimum.

          Any order with an escalation request will be billed at not less than
          a 4 Hour minimum.

          A review will be held monthly with ATG to review usage of hours with
          the ability for ATG to add additional hours upon request.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 42 of 47
<PAGE>   185
EXHIBIT G

10   TROUBLE MANAGEMENT SUPPORT

All information in this section is contingent upon Customer obtaining and being
responsible for all interface agreements, negotiations and execution of the
definitive agreements with all other service providers with whom the NRC will
communicate on behalf of Customer. Customer is also responsible for providing
all necessary system interfaces between Customer's order management offices and
the NRC.

Total time charged to a trouble ticket is based on the entire process, from
initial trouble ticket receipt throughout the duration processing, testing, and
resolution time of the ticket. Any trouble tickets received as an Escalated
request will be billed at no less than a two (2) hour increment. There will be a
pre-approval list of names provided by Customer of who can escalate a trouble
ticket. All Escalated trouble tickets must be accompanied by a signed approval
for the Escalation. Supplier's NRC will, in every case, treat each trouble
ticket with the utmost importance. Each trouble ticket will be logged and
processed as soon as it is received by the NRC Trouble Management personnel.

ADSL Service Assurance (or Maintenance Testing) is process of performing tests
on a line when a customer calls in with a trouble, or if there is trouble noted
by the Monitoring & Surveillance group. The objective of such testing is to
isolate trouble so that the proper repair personnel can be dispatched to the
correct location with the appropriate equipment. The objective of ADSL service
assurance is to provide this level of detail automatically in a manner similar
to that done currently for POTS and ISDN services. Unlike special services
testing, the tester is not required to know the details of the test process or
the interconnections which makes it appropriate choice for automation and
flow-through processes.

The ADSL signature detection feature and the ADSL wideband access and test
features are also appropriate to the service assurance process. Together with
the digital testing capabilities (described next) and the enhanced narrowband
test capabilities (such as load coil detection), they provide a complete
solution for ADSL Service assurance.

10.1 CUSTOMER CARE SUPPORT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Supplier shall provide Around-the-Clock (also referred to as "7 x 24")
     Customer Care Support Service to Customer and Customer's end-user
     customers via a toll-free access line for problem and trouble reporting.

     o    At Customer's request, Supplier shall answer calls in the name of
          "Advanced TelCom Group, Inc."

     o    Caller data will be validated for purposes of entitlement.

     o    For ISP trouble calls, only Tier 1 support will be provided. Tier 1
          support is defined as receipt of trouble calls, screening of the
          trouble based on a script provided by ATG and transfer of the call to
          the ATG ISP technical services group if the trouble cannot be
          resolved using the script.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 43 of 47

<PAGE>   186
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

     o    For technical and/or network malfunction problems, resolution is
          either initiated directly by the NRC, or forwarded to Customer-
          designated source (including third party vendors) for resolution
          and/or disposition.

     o    If all Switching equipment functions are working properly, MLT tests
          can be initiated to further define the nature of the trouble.

     o    For administrative, billing, and procedural inquiries, the NRC will
          either respond directly to the end-user or forward the caller to
          Customer's organization (as contractually agreed).

     o    On-Site dispatch, when required, will be scheduled in accordance with
          customer's on-site coverage parameters.

     o    Trouble Ticket Database Management. NRC personnel will create, track,
          and retain all pertinent data associated with each trouble and/or
          inquiry. Such database is summarized monthly and a report is generated
          highlighting call volume, failure data, resolution times, and type of
          inquiry. Monthly activity reports will be made available to Customer.

     o    Customer Notification. For each technical trouble or network
          malfunction, current status, call completion, and trouble resolution
          information will be provided to Customer, either on a scheduled daily
          basis, or in accordance with documented and mutually agreed-upon
          escalation and notification plans and processes.

     o    End-User Notification. End-users will be notified upon resolution of
          each technical problem or network malfunction.

     o    Case Management. In accordance with documented and mutually
          agreed-upon escalation and notification plans and processes,
          resolution of technical and/or network malfunction problems is either
          initiated directly by the NRC, or forwarded to Customer-designated
          source (including third party vendors) for resolution and/or
          disposition. In line with this offering, the NRC will retain ownership
          of each problem through the resolution process. Current status, call
          completion, and trouble resolution information will be provided to
          Customer, either on a scheduled basis, or as documented in formal
          escalation and notification plans. Response and service level
          commitments will be in accordance with the parameters of each vendor's
          agreement.

10.2 TROUBLE MANAGEMENT PRICING
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

     The price for Trouble Management is [*] for a block of 1,500 hours to be
     used prior to December 31, 1999.

     There will also be a one-time setup charge of [*]. This includes the
     interface to the ATG ISP Remedy trouble system and the Remedy application
     image file.

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 44 of 47

<PAGE>   187
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

If Customer retires this 1,500 block of hours and requests additional Trouble
Management Services during 1999, Supplier shall provide Trouble Management
Services under a renewed block at the same price for the remainder of 1999.
Services provided beyond 1999 or for professional services not covered in this
Statement of Work shall be provided in increments of 1,500 blocks of hours at
Supplier's time and material rate in effect at the time such additional
services are rendered.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 45 of 47

<PAGE>   188
                                                                       EXHIBIT G

Lucent's Global Network Operations team recognizes the criticality of this
endeavor to ATG and stands ready to help ensure the overall success of this
project. Please indicate ATG's acceptance of this SOW by sending an e-mail
message to Neil Gembrin at ngembrin@lucent.com stating your acceptance or by
signing below and faxing this SOW to 925 468 3509.

Accepted and concurred by:

LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.                ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP

By: James P. Goodman                    By: Curt Wheeling
-------------------------------         ---------------------------------
PRINTED                                 PRINTED

/s/ JAMES P. GOODMAN                    /s/ CURT WHEELING
-------------------------------         ---------------------------------
SIGNED                                  SIGNED

Sales VP                                Sr. VP Marketing
-------------------------------         ---------------------------------
TITLE                                   TITLE

3/22/99                                 3/18/99
-------------------------------         ---------------------------------
DATE                                    DATE

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              Exhibit G - 46 of 47

<PAGE>   189

                                    EXHIBIT H
                                     TO THE
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT

                     STATEMENT OF WORK FOR ORDER MANAGEMENT

1. STATEMENT OF WORK

Lucent Network Reliability Center (NRC) will provide an Order Management
function for Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. (ATG) utilizing both the Digital
Counterpart Inc. (DCI) eC.Order product along with newly created or existing NRC
manual processes. This Order Management System is intended to be for an interim
period only; pending general availability of a completely mechanized order
management system, Lucent NRC will manage orders using a mixture of manual and
automated processes. Order Management will provide the capability to complete
and track a service order and perform the work necessary to put an ATG end-user
customer into voice and/or data service. Order Management will include order
management functionality described below:

        -   Ordering unbundled loops from the ILECs (e.g., Pacific Bell and US
            West);

        -   Local Number Portability (Interface to Illuminet and switch
            provisioning);

        -   5ESS-2000 switch provisioning (Lucent 5ESS-2000 and AnyMedia FAST);

        -   SONET electronics and digital cross connect provisioning (Cerent);

        -   Provisioning of Internet/xDSL services ( Nokia/Diamond Lane and
            various selected xDSL CPE suppliers);

        -   Interface with ATG INOC for ATM routing (Cisco), Modem Pooling (Port
            Master IV) and ATM-to-TR-303 Conversion (Jetstream);

        -   Interface for long distance provisioning (Qwest and other DBAs);

        -   Calling Card Fulfillment interface;

        -   Voice and Fax Messaging interface (Octel MCS);

        -   E911 interface (SCC Communications);

        -   LIDB interface (Illuminet);

        -   All physical and logical inventories, including network transport,
            to support provisioning and capacity planning functions above;

        -   Providing order status back to the Order Creation system (eC.Order);

        -   Notification of order completion to ATG to initiate billing (Arbor
            BP).

2. ORDER MANAGEMENT PROCESS FLOWS

See Attachment of written and graphical representations.

3. REPORTING PROCESS

ATG will receive daily and weekly performance reports for the first thirty (30)
business days from the Lucent NRC that will quantify actual time spent for each
task on a daily basis as required for the Order Management process for each
service performed. These performance reports will also include the specific work
performed and who performed the work. Further, summary reports will provide the
number of minimum billing increments (15 minutes) plus total cumulative hours
consumed for each type of work. Upon consuming the first thirty (30) business
days worth of hours, the NRC and ATG will continue tracking hours in this same
manner until such time as ATG and NRC can agree to convert, with sufficient data
collected during the first

<PAGE>   190

thirty (30) business days to develop metrics allowing such change, to a fixed
fee, transaction based pricing model.

4. SCHEDULE AND FEES

Lucent's NRC will start the Order Management process on July 1, 1999 and
continue using the above noted reporting process for thirty (30) business days
or until a fixed-fee, transaction based pricing model is agreed to or for no
more than ninety (90) business days. It is hoped that by no later than September
1999, the process will be reviewed and from data compiled, transition to a more
mechanized and transaction-based process and pricing model.

The price for this service starting July 1, 1999 is to be based on a [*] per
hour fee for each resource with a cap of five hundred (500) total hours [*]. ATG
will issue a purchase order for this amount, Lucent will immediately issue an
invoice upon receipt of purchase order (due via fax within two (2) business
days), and ATG will remit payment on net thirty (30) day terms. ATG agrees to
issue subsequent purchase orders for similar amounts (based on previous month's
history) for each following monthly period or until the transaction based
pricing model is implemented. Billing will be calculated in 15-minute increments
or multiples of 15-minute increments. The goal is to match daily, weekly,
monthly reporting detail with each invoice.

Please indicate ATG's acceptance of this SOW by sending an e-mail message to the
Lucent Offer Manager, Neil Gembrin, at ngembrin@lucent.com stating your
acceptance or by signing below and faxing this SOW to (925) 468-3509.

Accepted and concurred by:

LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.                 ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP, INC.

By: JAMES P. GOODMAN                     By: MICHAEL R. BLACK
-----------------------------------      ---------------------------------------
PRINTED                                  PRINTED

/s/ J. P. GOODMAN                        /s/ MICHAEL R. BLACK
-----------------------------------      ---------------------------------------
SIGNED                                   SIGNED

SALES VP                                 SENIOR VICE PRESIDENT
-----------------------------------      ---------------------------------------
TITLE                                    TITLE

7/22/99                                  7/12/99
-----------------------------------      ---------------------------------------
DATE                                     DATE

--------------------
[*] Information redacted pursuant to a confidential treatment request
    throughout this exhibit.

<PAGE>   191

                                   [DIAGRAM]

<PAGE>   192
       HIGH-LEVEL FACILITIES-BASED CUSTOMER SERVICE FULFILLMENT PROCESS

This narrative describes the steps outlined in the accompanying flowchart.

1.1  PRE-SALE CHECKLIST PROCESS

Sales will gather information for the customer as they do in resale. There
will be different sales package for facilities that will require additional
information based upon the services ordered. Telephone numbers will be assigned
from an available inventory at this stage. Requests for vanity numbers may be
addressed with the Telephone Number Inventory administrator. Requests by Sales
to override the standard equipment configuration for an order will be
negotiated with Engineering.

1.2  SALES PACKAGE

The completed sales package will be sent to the Customer Service organization
where it will be entered into eC.Order by the CSR.

1.3  PROVISIONING

The order will be sent from eC.Order to the Lucent NRC for fulfillment. The
NRC will update the status of the order in eC.Order so that it can be viewed by
the CSR. If there are errors on the order or insufficient information to
complete the order it will be referred back to the Customer Service organization
(with error reason) for correction/completion.

If the promised delivery timeframe cannot be met or the requested equipment is
not available, the order will be referred back with a jeopardy code.

Once the order is completed, eC.Order will pass data to Kenan to initiate (or
change or stop) customer billing.

1.4  EXTERNAL SYSTEMS INTERFACE

The NRC will handle all of the external interfaces necessary to provision an
order with the exception of Directory Listings that will be handled by the
Customer Service Organization in each Branch.

1.4.1     E911 -- For emergency location of customers (via SCC)

1.4.2     LNP -- Local Number Portability for transferring numbers from one
          carrier to another (via Illuminet)

1.4.3     LIDB -- For authorization of 3rd party calls etc. (via Illuminet)

                                                                               1

<PAGE>   193
1.4.4     Octel -- For VoiceMail

1.4.5     Qwest -- For Long Distance Service

1.4.6     Other IXC PIC Care -- For customers who select a different long
          distance carrier than ATG.

1.5  EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING

This covers the assignment of all the physical equipment necessary to provision
an order.

1.5.1     LOOP ASSIGNMENT

The NRC will order the unbundled loop from the ILEC (if necessary).

1.5.2     TRANSLATIONS

The NRC will perform the switch translations for this order.

1.5.3     TRANSPORT

The NRC will provision all of the transport equipment needed for the order
(Diamond Lane, Pairgain, etc.)

1.5.3     TEST & TURN-UP

The NRC will notify the Local Field Organization if they have to perform work
to turn-up the customer's service and will coordinate testing. The LFO will
perform the work at the customers location including the installation of any
required CPE.

1.6  SUPPLEMENTS FOR DD CHANGE, CANCEL, OTHER

Supplements may be issued against the order if there is a change in the due
date or the order is canceled.

                                                                               2

<PAGE>   194
                                   EXHIBIT J
                                     to the
                            General Supply Agreement

                          LUCENT CO-MARKETING PROGRAM
                         TERMS AND CONDITIONS (JP/MDF)

1.   Term

          This Agreement shall be effective for a term of <ONE YEAR> from the
date of Lucent's acceptance of Buyer's enrollment form (as used herein "Buyer"
shall refer to the company submitting the enrollment form regardless of how
such company may be referred to in other documents), unless terminated earlier
in accordance with these Terms and Conditions. This Agreement may be renewed
for successive <ONE YEAR> terms upon thirty days notice.

2.   Lucent's Obligations and Miscellaneous Program Items

     a.   Lucent shall provide copies of its "Co-Marketing Program Guidelines"
          and "Co-Marketing Program Brand & Logo Usage Guidelines" (these and
          all other documentation regarding the Program as they may now or in
          the future exist shall be called "Program Documentation").

     b.   Lucent shall provide copies of its Co-Marketing Brand and/or logo
          materials in electronic format or on printed logo sheets at no cost to
          Buyer.

     c.   Lucent will provide funding support by reimbursing Buyer for all
          qualified promotion activities according to the guidelines identified
          in the Program Documentation at the reimbursement percentage specified
          in the Enrollment Form up to the accrued and available allowance.  THE
          ACCRUAL PERCENTAGE REIMBURSEMENT PERCENTAGE AND IDENTIFICATION OF
          PRODUCTS OR CONTRACTS ELIGIBLE FOR ACCRUAL ARE MATERIAL ELEMENTS OF
          THIS AGREEMENT AND MUST BE IDENTIFIED ON THE ENROLLMENT FORM. IF ANY
          ONE OF THESE ITEMS IS NOT COMPLETED ON THE ENROLLMENT FORM, THEN THIS
          AGREEMENT IS VOID AND OF NO FORCE AND EFFECT UNTIL SUCH ITEMS ARE
          CONFIRMED IN A WRITING EXECUTED BY BOTH PARTIES.

     d.   Lucent shall have the right in its sole discretion to modify or
          replace the Co-Marketing Brand and/or logo materials at any time.

     e.   Lucent shall have the right in its sole discretion to modify or cancel
          the Program or modify or amend the Program Documentation upon sixty
          (60) days notice without further obligation to Buyer.

3.   Buyer's Obligations

          a.   Buyer shall abide by terms and conditions set forth in the
               Program Documentation as it exists or shall be modified from time
               to time as permitted by this Agreement,

                                  Page 1 of 8

<PAGE>   195
          including, but not limited to, the guidelines for accruals and
          reimbursements of qualifying promotional activities and the
          procedures and documentation necessary for such reimbursements.

     b.   Without limiting the foregoing or anything in this Agreement, Buyer
          expressly agrees to submit all proposed usage of Lucent's Indicia (as
          defined in Article 5) for approval by the Lucent Co-Marketing Program
          Office on such forms as may be developed by Lucent from time to time,
          and shall not use such Indicia unless and until the Lucent
          Co-Marketing Program Office grants such approval.

     c.   Without limiting the foregoing or anything in this Agreement, Buyer
          acknowledges it has no ownership or other interest in the Indicia and
          shall make no claim to such Indicia.

     d.   Without limiting the foregoing or anything in this Agreement, Buyer
          expressly agrees that accruals shall be only for qualifying
          purchasers of specific products for its own use and not for resale.

     e.   Without limiting the foregoing or anything in this Agreement, Buyer
          expressly agrees to submit requests for reimbursement for qualifying
          promotions within ninety days after deployment of the subject
          promotional activity and to utilize reimbursement funds within one
          year of the time the accruals is reported to Buyer.

4.   Relationship of the Parties

     a.   The relationship of the parties under this Agreement shall be and at
          all times remain one of independent contractors and shall not create
          the relationship of franchisor and franchisee, joint venturer or
          principal and agent. Buyer shall not have authority to assume or
          create obligations on Lucent's behalf with respect to the Products,
          Licensed Materials, or Services furnished by Lucent hereunder or
          otherwise, and Buyer shall not take any action which has the effect
          of creating the appearance of having such authority. Buyer has not
          paid Lucent any fee in consideration of this Agreement.
     b.   All persons furnished by Buyer shall be considered solely Buyer's
          employees or agents, and Buyer shall be responsible for payment of
          all unemployment, Social Security and other payroll taxes including
          contributions from them when required by law.

     c.   Buyer agrees that it has no exclusive right to use of Indicia as
          defined herein in any geographical area or for any product identified
          herein. Lucent expressly reserves the right to contract with others
          to promote, market, sell and/or install Products, to use the Indicia
          and to permit others to engage in such activities at any time and in
          any place.

5.   Use of Marks

     The use of Lucent's tradenames, trademarks, trade devices, logos, codes,
Co-Marketing Brand and logo or other symbols (collectively "Indicia") shall be
solely for the purpose of and in the manner permitted by the Program
Documentation. Lucent hereby grants Buyer permission to use Indicia in Buyer's
marketing and advertising of, and in Buyer's publicity relating to, the Products
and Agreements identified in Program Documentation, PROVIDED such use conforms
to Lucent standards and guidelines contained in the Program Documentation which
Lucent may furnish from time to time. Without limiting the terms of such Program
Documentation, the

                                  Page 2 of 8
<PAGE>   196
following shall also apply: (1) Buyer may not conduct business under Lucent's
name or logo; (2) Buyer may not use any of Lucent's Indicia or variations
thereof to identify Buyer or Buyer's products or services except as
specifically permitted by the Lucent's Co-Marketing Program Office identified
in the Program Documentation; and (3) Buyer may not use any of Lucent's Indicia
in a manner that is likely to confuse the public concerning the relationship of
the parties. Buyer's use of Indicia shall inure to the benefit of Lucent and
shall not invest in Buyer any rights in or to the Indicia. All users of Indicia
by Buyer shall be subject to prepublication or pre-use review and written
approval buy Lucent. If, in Lucent's judgment, any use of Indicia by Buyer is
deemed detrimental to the Indicia or Lucent's reputation, or is deemed
otherwise undesirable, Lucent may withdraw such permission without liability as
a result thereof.

6.   Confidentiality of Information

     Buyer and Lucent shall, except to allow Buyer to represent itself to the
public in accordance with the Program or as otherwise agreed in writing, keep
this Agreement and all Program Documentation confidential. Where mandated by
law, this Agreement may be disclosed to any court or legislative body or filed
with, or disclosed to, any governmental organization or agency, in which case
the party making the disclosure shall promptly inform the other of such
disclosure and the disclosing party shall, at the request of the other party,
take all reasonable steps to preserve the confidential nature of this Agreement
and its contents including, without limitation, seeking to obtain a protective
order or similar confidential treatment.

7.   Infringement

     a.   Lucent will defend all suits against Buyer alleging that any Indicia
          furnished hereunder infringes any United States patent, or United
          States trademark, and will pay direct damages and costs which, by
          final judgments, are awarded against Buyer on account of such
          infringement, provided that:

               i.)  Lucent has been given prompt written notice of all claims
                    of such infringement and suits by Buyer and the full
                    opportunity and authority in the name of the Buyer or
                    otherwise to assume the sole defense of and to settle or
                    compromise such suits;

              ii.)  Lucent has been furnished by Buyer, upon request, all
                    information and assistance available to the Buyer for such
                    defense, including abstention from making any admissions to
                    claimant regarding the claim; and

             iii.)  Lucent's responsibility hereunder shall not exceed the
                    purchase price of the allegedly infringed items.

     b.   If any item in such suit is held to constitute infringement and the
          use of said Indicia is enjoined, or in Lucent's opinion is likely to
          be enjoined, Lucent will, at its sole option, either:

               i.)  replace the Indicia with a non-infringing one;

              ii.)  procure for Buyer the right to continue using said Indicia;

             iii.)  modify the Indicia so that it becomes non-infringing; or,

                                  Page 3 of 8
<PAGE>   197
          iv.) remove the Indicia.

     c.   The obligation set forth in this Paragraph 7 shall not apply to the
extent that such infringement arises from:

          i.)  Lucent's adherence to specifications or drawings supplied by
               Buyer; or

          ii.) the sale or use of any item not supplied or specified by Lucent
               in combination with product supplied by Lucent

THE FOREGOING STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF LUCENT FOR PATENT OR TRADEMARK
INFRINGEMENT BY ANY INDICIA.

8.   Limitation Of Liability

LUCENT AND ITS AFFILIATES AND THEIR EMPLOYEES, AGENT AND SUPPLIERS SHALL IN NO
EVENT BE LIABLE TO BUYER, ITS AFFILIATES OR ITS END-USER CUSTOMERS FOR INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, RELIANCE, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF
THIS AGREEMENT OR FROM THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF ANY LUCENT INDICIA, PRODUCTS OR
SERVICES WHETHER IN AN ACTION FOR OR ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH
OF CONTRACT, DELAY, STRICT LIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE.

No action or proceeding against Lucent, its Affiliates, or its suppliers may be
commenced more than twenty-four (24) months after the claim arises.

This Paragraph 8, entitled "Limitation Of Liability" shall survive failure of
an exclusive remedy.

9.   Indemnity by Buyer

     Buyer agrees to indemnify and save harmless Lucent from and against any
losses, damages, claims, demands, suits and liabilities (including reasonable
attorneys' fees) that arise out of or result from injuries or death to persons
or damage to property caused by Buyer's acts or omissions, or those of persons
furnished by Buyer or in any way arising out of the Buyer's performance of this
Agreement; or assertions made by persons furnished by Buyer under Workers'
Compensation or similar acts; or claims, demands, suits, liabilities or costs
arising out of or in any way relating to the Buyer's performance or failure of
performance under this Agreement. Buyer agrees to defend Lucent at Lucent's
request against any such claims, demands or suits. Buyer's obligation to
indemnify and save Lucent harmless shall survive the expiration or earlier
termination of this Agreement. In the event Lucent permits Buyer to select
counsel, such selection shall be subject to Lucent's approval.

     Lucent agrees to notify Buyer within a reasonable time of any written
claims or demands against Lucent for which Buyer is responsible under this
clause.

10.  Termination Of Agreement

                                  Page 4 of 8
<PAGE>   198
     Either party may terminate this Agreement without cause or reason upon
thirty (30) days written notice to the other party given at any time.

     Either party may terminate this Agreement for material breach or default of
any term or condition of this Agreement if such breach or default is not cured
within thirty (30) days of written notice of such breach or default from the
non-breaching party.

     In the event of change in the controlling ownership of Buyer, if such
change is perceived as unacceptable to Lucent, or in the event of a sale of all
or substantially all of the assets of Buyer, Lucent shall have the right to
terminate this Agreement, immediately, on twenty-four (24) hour written notice.

     Either party may terminate this Agreement, on twenty-four (24) hour written
notice, if the other party files a petition in bankruptcy, or is adjudicated
bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or becomes
insolvent, or is otherwise unable to meet its business obligations for a period
of three (3) consecutive months.

     Upon the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement, Buyer shall
immediately:

     a)  discontinue any and all use of Indicia (as defined in Article 5)
including, but not limited to, such use in advertising or business material of
Buyer;

     b)   return to Lucent or destroy at Lucent's request, any and all
promotional material supplied without charge by Lucent;

     c)   cease engaging in any promotional activities involving Lucent's
Indicia;

     d)   notify and arrange for all publishers and others who may identify,
list or publish Buyer's name with Lucent's Indicia including, but not limited
to, publishers of telephone directories, yellow pages and other business
directories to discontinue such listings;

     e)   return, upon request, all Lucent's Information and cease using said
Information except that which Lucent agrees is necessary to operate and maintain
previously furnished Products; and

Upon expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement pursuant to this
Article 23, neither party shall be liable to the other, either for compensation
or for damages of any kind or character whatsoever, whether on account of the
loss by Lucent or Buyer of present or prospective profits on sales or
anticipated sales, or expenditures, investments or commitments made in
connection therewith or in connection with the establishment, development or
maintenance of Buyer's business, or on account of any other cause or thing
whatsoever, provided that termination shall not prejudice or otherwise affect
the rights or liabilities of the parties with respect to transactions hereunder
prior to such termination.

                                  Page 5 of 8
<PAGE>   199

     Expiration or termination of this Agreement shall not relieve the parties
of their obligations due at the time of such expiration or termination, nor
shall such expiration or termination prejudice any claim of either party
accrued, or to accrue, on account of any default or breach by the other.

11.  Survival of Obligations

     The respective obligations of Buyer and Lucent under this Agreement, which
by their nature would continue beyond the termination, cancellation or
expiration hereof, shall survive termination, cancellation or expiration
hereof, including by way of example and not by limitation, Use of Information,
Limitation of Liability, Use of Marks and Arbitration.

12.  Force Majeure

     Neither party shall be held responsible for any delay or failure in
performance to the extent that such delay or failure is caused by fires,
strikes, embargoes, explosion, earthquakes, floods, wars, water, the elements,
labor disputes, government requirements, civil or military authorities, acts of
God or by the public enemy, inability to secure raw materials or transportation
facilities, acts or omissions of carriers or suppliers or other causes beyond
its control whether or not similar to the foregoing. If any Force Majeure
condition occurs, the party delayed or unable to perform shall give immediate
notice to the other party, stating the nature of the Force Majeure condition
and any action being taken to avoid or minimize its effect.

13.  Assignment

     Except as provided in this clause, neither party shall assign this
Agreement or any right or interest under this Agreement, nor delegate any work
or obligation to be performed under this Agreement, (an "assignment") without
the other party's prior written consent (which consent shall not be
unreasonably withheld). Any attempted assignment in contravention of this shall
be void and ineffective. Nothing shall preclude a party from employing a
subcontractor in carrying out its obligations under this Agreement. A party's
use of such subcontractor shall not release the party from its obligations
under this Agreement.

     Lucent shall have the right to assign this Agreement and to assign its
rights and delegate its duties under this Agreement, in whole or in part, at
any time and without Buyer's consent, to any corporate parent or to any present
or future Affiliate of Lucent or to any combination of the foregoing. Lucent
shall give buyer prompt written notice of the assignment.

     For purposes of this clause, the term "Agreement" includes this Agreement,
any subordinate contract placed under this Agreement and any order placed
under such Agreement or subordinate contract.

14.  Severability.

                                  Page 6 of 8

<PAGE>   200
     If any of the provisions of the Agreement shall be invalid or unenforceable
such invalidity or unenforceability shall not invalidate or render
unenforceable the entire Agreement, but rather the entire Agreement shall be
construed as if not containing the particular invalid or unenforceable
provision or provisions, and the rights and obligations of each party shall be
construed and enforced accordingly. However, in the event such provisions is
considered an essential element of this Agreement, the parties shall promptly
negotiate a replacement thereof.

15.  Releases Void

     Neither party shall require releases or waivers of any personal rights
from representatives of the other in connection with visits to its premises and
both parties agree that no such releases or waivers shall be pleaded by them in
any action or proceeding.

16.  Non-Waiver

     No course of dealing, course of performance or failure of either party
strictly to enforce any term, right or condition of this Agreement shall be
construed as a waiver of any term, right or condition.

17.  Choice Of Law

     The construction, interpretation and performance of this Agreement shall
be governed by the law of New Jersey except for its choice of law rules.

18.  Notices

     All notices under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be given by
confirmed facsimile, by nationally recognized overnight courier or by certified
or registered mail, addressed to the addresses set forth immediately below or
to such other address as either party may designate by notice pursuant hereto.
Such notices shall be deemed to have been given when received.

To Lucent:                                   To Buyer:

Alan Aiken                                   TO THE NAME AND ADDRESS
Lucent Technologies Inc.                     SET FORTH ON THE
283 King George Road (Room A2C22)            ENROLLMENT FORM
Warren, NJ 07059
Telephone No.:  (908) 559-7208
Facsimile No.:  (908) 559-3994

                                  Page 7 of 8

<PAGE>   201
20.  Headings

     The headings contained in this Agreement are for convenience only and are
not intended to affect the meaning or interpretation of this Agreement.

21.  Entire Agreement

     The terms and conditions contained in this Agreement which consist of the
Enrollment Form and these Terms and Conditions supersede all prior oral or
written understandings between the parties and shall constitute the entire
Agreement between them concerning the subject matter of this Agreement and
shall not be contradicted, explained or supplemented by any course of dealing
between Lucent or any of its Affiliates and Buyer or any of its Affiliates.

     Lucent's employees' statements and its advertisements or description do
not constitute warranties or other contractual obligations and shall not be
relied upon by Buyer as such.  There are no understandings or representations,
express or implied, not expressly set forth in this Agreement. This Agreement
shall not be modified or amended except by a writing signed by the party to be
charged, and no changes or additions to this Agreement shall be binding upon
either party unless signed by an authorized representative of such party.

ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP INC.              LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.

By:                                     By:
   ----------------------                  ---------------------

Name:                                   Name:
     --------------------                    -------------------

Title:                                  Title:
      -------------------                     ------------------

Date:                                   Date:
     --------------------                    -------------------

                                  Page 8 of 8

<PAGE>   202
[LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES LOGO]                                  CO-MARKETING PROGRAM
                                                                 ENROLLMENT FORM
                                                               (JOINT PROMO/MDF)

-------------------
COMPANY INFORMATION
-------------------

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S>                                                   <C>
Company Name:                                         Primary Contact
             -----------------------------------

DBA:                                                  Name:
    --------------------------------------------           --------------------------------------------------

Business Address:                                     Title:
                 -------------------------------            -------------------------------------------------

                                                      Phone:             Fax:             E-mail:
------------------------------------------------            -------------    -------------       ------------

                                                      Address (if different from left):
------------------------------------------------                                       ----------------------

City:               State:     Zip:
     ---------------      -----    -------------      -------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

---------------------
LUCENT REPRESENTATIVE
---------------------

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S>                                           <C>
Name:                               Signature:                             Date:
     -------------------------------          -----------------------------     -----------------

Address:
        -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Phone:                        Fax:                      E-mail:
      ------------------------    ----------------------       ----------------------------------
</TABLE>

-------------------------
REIMBURSEMENT INFORMATION
-------------------------

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S>                                         <C>
Contract No.:                               Total Contract Amount:
             -------------------------------                      -------------------------------

Co-Marketing Program Model:                 Co-Marketing Accrual %:
                           -----------------                       ------------------------------

Reimbursement %:                            Payment Method:
                ----------------------------               --------------------------------------

Products or Contract No. for which reimbursement will accrue:

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Make reimbursements payable to (if different from above):
                                                         ----------------------------------------

Finance Department Contact

Name:                                       Title:
      --------------------------------------      -----------------------------------------------

Phone:                   Fax:                                   E-mail:
      -------------------    -----------------------------------       --------------------------

Address (if different from left):
                                 ----------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

================================================================================

In order to participate in the Lucent Technologies Co-Marketing Program, your
company must agree to the following:

Enrollment: To participate in this program, customer will complete and forward
this Co-Marketing Program Enrollment Form to Lucent's Co-Marketing Program
Office. Only when signed by Lucent and returned to customer from Lucent is
customer formally enrolled in the program. No use by customer of the Lucent
Technologies Co-Marketing logo and/or the Lucent Technologies brand name and/or
trademarked Lucent product names is authorized or will be reimbursed until:

1.   Customer is formally notified by Lucent by return of customer's approved
     enrollment form that they are accepted within the program, and

2.   Customer has received prior approval from the Lucent Co-Marketing Program
     Office for any planned creative and media placements

Creative Terms and Conditions: If the Lucent Technologies Co-Marketing logo
and/or the Lucent Technologies brand name and/or trademarked Lucent product
names are used in a customer promotion, customer agrees that the right to use
these trademarked properties of Lucent Technologies is limited exclusively to
this program. Customer agrees to adhere strictly to the creative guidelines
identified Lucent's Co-Marketing Brand and Logo Usage Guidelines document.
Violation of these creative guidelines can result in Lucent Technologies
suspending or removing customer from the Lucent Co-Marketing Program. Or, Lucent
can temporarily or permanently withdraw the rights of customer from using the
Lucent Technologies Co-Marketing logo and/or the Lucent Technologies name and/or
the name of trademarked Lucent products in customer's promotions. Customer
agrees that every usage of the Lucent Technologies Co-Marketing logo and/or the
Lucent Technologies brand name and/or trademarked Lucent product names will
require prior approval by Lucent. Customer will abide by the complete creative
approval process as identified within Lucent's Co-Marketing Brand and Logo Usage
guidelines document.

BY SIGNING BELOW, THE CUSTOMER AGREES TO ABIDE BY THE LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
CO-MARKETING PROGRAM GUIDELINES, CO-MARKETING BRAND AND LOGO USAGE GUIDELINES AS
THEY EXIST OR MAY BE AMENDED FROM TIME TO TIME. THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
SUPPLIED HEREWITH, AND FURTHER AGREES TO SUBMIT ANY NEW CREATIVE MATERIAL
BEARING THE LUCENT CO-MARKETING LOGO, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES NAME AND/OR TRADEMARKS
TO THE LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES CO-MARKETING PROGRAM OFFICE PRIOR TO PLACING THE
CREATIVE MATERIAL IN ANY MEDIA.

Customer Signature:                             PLEASE FAX OR MAIL THIS FORM TO:
                   ---------------------------  LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
Printed Name:                                   ATTN: ALAN AIKEN
             ---------------------------------  283 KING GEORGE RD., RM. A2C22
Title:                      Date:               WARREN, NJ  07059
      ----------------------     -------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------
Co-Marketing Program Office Appvl::
                                   ------------------------------

Co-Marketing Acct. No.:                     Date:
                       ---------------------     ----------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------

<PAGE>   203

[ATG LOGO]

                                    EXHIBIT K
                                     TO THE
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT

                           ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP, INC.

                           OPERATIONAL READINESS PLAN

                           BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS

                                  FINAL VERSION
                                 April 30, 1999

                          PREPARED IN COOPERATION WITH

                            LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.
                            Global Network Operations

<PAGE>   204

                                TABLE OF CONTENTS

<TABLE>
<S>                                                                                                 <C>
  1      EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .......................................................................   1

       1.1    OBJECTIVE OF THE OPERATIONAL READINESS PLAN ........................................   1
       1.2    OBJECTIVE OF THE BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS (BOA) PHASE ...........................   2
       1.3    BARRIERS TO SUCCESS ................................................................   2
       1.4    CONCLUSIONS ........................................................................   3

  2      VALUE CHAIN ANALYSIS ....................................................................   5

  3      BUSINESS FACTOR ANALYSIS ................................................................   7

       3.1    GOALS AND OBJECTIVES ...............................................................   7
         3.1.1    Goals ..........................................................................   8
         3.1.2    Objectives .....................................................................   9
       3.2    FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................   9
       3.3    CRITICAL SUCCESS FACTORS (CSFS) ....................................................  10
       3.4    PROBLEMS ...........................................................................  11

  4      COMPETITIVE ENVIRONMENT ANALYSIS ........................................................  13

       4.1    STRENGTHS, WEAKNESSES, OPPORTUNITIES, THREATS ......................................  13
       4.2    COMPETITIVE FORCES ANALYSIS ........................................................  15

  5      STRATEGY ANALYSIS .......................................................................  19

       5.1    KEY STRATEGIC DIRECTIONS ...........................................................  19
       5.2    SIGNIFICANT RELATIONSHIPS ..........................................................  20
         5.2.1    Corporate Strategies Important For Achievement Of Strategic Goals ..............  21
         5.2.2    Corporate Strategies Important For Achieving Critical Success Factors (CSFs)....  22
         5.2.3    Corporate Strategies Important For Addressing Problems .........................  23
         5.2.4    Functions Supporting Strategy Execution ........................................  24
       5.3    OBJECTIVES BY FUNCTION .............................................................  27

  APPENDIX A: HOW THE BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS REPORT WAS PRODUCED ............................  29
  APPENDIX B: SOURCES OF INFORMATION .............................................................  31
</TABLE>

<PAGE>   205

                                Table of Figures

<TABLE>
<S>                                                                            <C>
Figure 1.  Operational Readiness Planning Process ........................       2
Figure 2.  ATG Value Chain ...............................................       6
Figure 3.  Business Factors Model ........................................       7
Figure 4.  ATG Objectives ................................................       9
Figure 5.  SWOT Analysis 13
Figure 6.  Competitive Forces Model ......................................      15
Figure 7.  Strategies supporting Goals matrix ............................      21
Figure 8.  Strategies supporting CSFs Matrix .............................      22
Figure 9.  Strategies addressing Problems matrix .........................      23
Figure 10. Functions supporting Strategy execution matrix ................      24
Figure 11. Strategy Weights ..............................................      25
Figure 12. Impact of Strategies on Business Factors chart ................      25
Figure 13. Relationship of Functions to Strategies and Business Factors...      25
Figure 14. Impact of Functions on Stated Strategies matrix ...............      26
Figure 15. Impact of Functions on Stated Strategies chart ................      27
</TABLE>

<PAGE>   206

1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1.1 OBJECTIVE OF THE OPERATIONAL READINESS PLAN

Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. (ATG) has contracted with Lucent Technologies
Professional Services to provide a full range of Network Reliability Center
(NRC) services. These services include a team of professionals to work with ATG
management to develop an Operational Readiness Plan. The Operational Readiness
Plan collects valuable information, performs some analysis and serves as a
useful document to assist ATG management with the successful implementation of
their entry into offering communications services.

Initially, these service offerings will be provided by ATG in three markets. At
start-up in April of this year, ATG will resell Incumbent Local Exchange Carrier
(ILEC) services to its customers and dial-up internet service. Later in the
year, ATG will implement their own network and will be offering the following
services:

                  -        Local phone service
                  -        Long distance phone service
                  -        Voice mail
                  -        Packet-Switched services
                           -        XDSL
                           -        Dial-up
                           -        Web hosting
                           -        Etc.

ATG is also investigating other services that may be offered over their network
including video-on-demand.

The three phases that the Operational Readiness Plan encompasses are:

        -       Business Objective Analysis (BOA)

        -       Present Method of Operation (PMO): describes the resale and
                initial ISP phase of the business

        -       Future Method of Operations (FMO): describes the
                facilities-based ATG network

This document describes the BOA phase of the Operational Readiness Planning
project.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary       Page 1
<PAGE>   207

FIGURE 1. OPERATIONAL READINESS PLANNING PROCESS

                 [OPERATIONAL READINESS PLANNING PROCESS CHART]

        1.      A Business Objective Analysis (BOA). The BOA is the first step
                in the Operational Readiness Plan. The BOA provides an analysis
                of corporate objectives and strategic directions as they have
                been understood by ATG's management team. The BOA is part of the
                Operational Readiness Plan and as such is not an independent
                document that defines strategies, planning or specific actions.

        2.      A Present Method of Operation (PMO). As the second step in the
                Operational Readiness Plan, Lucent will develop process models
                that describe the way ATG will be doing business in the Resale
                phase of their business

        3.      A Future Method of Operations (FMO). As a third component of the
                Operational Readiness Plan, Lucent will deliver to ATG a
                document which: (1) will analyze the gaps between the Present
                Method of Operations and where ATG wishes to be after the
                implementation of the Lucent network; (2) documents ATG's
                business processes in the Facilities-based environment; and (3)
                may make recommendations to improve the efficiency and
                effectiveness of ATG's business operations.

1.2 OBJECTIVE OF THE BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS (BOA) PHASE

The intent of this phase is to understand and document ATG's day-to-day and
strategic directions. Both these long-term and short-term business perspectives
(i.e., goals, objectives, critical success factors and problems) will be used to
prioritize and guide the development of the Future Method of Operations model
that will support the implementation of the Facilities-based environment. The
information contained in this document was gathered in a series of interviews
conducted with

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary       Page 2
<PAGE>   208

ATG executives and managers. The information obtained in the interviews was then
analyzed and the models described below were produced. Dan Cruz guided the BOA
team in determining the list of interviewees and was responsible for reviewing
early drafts of this document.

1.3 BARRIERS TO SUCCESS

During the interview process and based upon the observations and analysis of the
BOA team, there are a number of critical issues that have not been addressed or
do not seem to be receiving the appropriate level of attention.

Revenue Assurance - ATG needs to be able to reconcile what it is paying for vs.
what it is billing for. This includes unbundled loops from the ILECs, LD usage,
etc. This will be almost impossible to do manually and will require a dedicated
resource with support from appropriate information systems.

Inventory - In discussions of inventory between ATG and the NRC, no request was
made to maintain a physical inventory of equipment (model numbers, serial
numbers, location, etc.) This will become an especially serious issue if ATG
starts providing CPE (e.g. xDSL modems).

Telemarketing - The stated strategy is that those customers with 1 -3 business
lines will be telemarketed. No one in the organization appears to have decided
whether this will be done internally or outsourced.

Quality and Service - ATG is pursuing a differentiation strategy based on
quality and service over price. Specific instances include short provisioning
intervals, accuracy (orders, bills) and superior customer service. However those
things that will provide quality and service such as information systems are not
in place. This compounded by the aggressive implementation schedule. This could
be overcome by hiring a large number of staff, but this is both difficult and
contrary to ATG's goal of minimizing the number of in-house staff.

ISP Marketing Strategy - There seems to be some confusion over the marketing
strategy for Packet-switched services. The initial roll-out is going to be
dial-up access at 56k. This would seem to attract the residential rather than
the business customer. Will ATG be selling to business-only or business and
residence customers? Also, there is uncertainty across the organization about
how service is being sold - will the same sales force be used as for telephony
or will there be a dedicated sales force?

ISP Support - Since ATG has made the decision to enter the dial-up ISP market,
it is possible that the company will attract a large customer base. In this case
there is the potential for a high volume of inquiry and trouble calls. Although
the Lucent NRC is providing Tier 1 support, many call swill still have to be
fielded by ATG. There is unlikely to be a sufficiently large staff in place to
handle these calls effectively. This could lead to significant customer service
issues.

Service Intervals - There do not deem to be any predefined intervals for how
long it will take to provide service to a customer. The sales force will need to
make a commitment to the customer as to when their ATG service will start,
especially for customers that do not currently have ILEC service.

No predefined metrics - Most managers felt that metrics would be developed later
from actual results. An initial set of measurements should be defined and
captured. These can be refined as

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary       Page 3
<PAGE>   209

the business matures. If no metrics are in place it is impossible to tell how
well a job is being performed or to measure improvement.

Absence of Key Executives - ATG is at a critical stage in developing its
business, organizational and operational business model. However, at least two
critical executive positions are not in place. A Chief Operating Officer should
be overseeing the development and implementation of operating practices and
procedures. A Chief Financial Officer should be taking the lead on revenue
assurance and other finance-related matters.

1.4 CONCLUSIONS

As described in more detail in the rest of this document, ATG has adopted a
combination of market niching and product and service differentiation strategies
to support the primary goal of becoming the number one CLEC in Tier 3 and Tier 4
markets. The company has a lot of strengths, especially in the experience and
contacts that the senior management team brings to the table. Thorough market
research and a local focus are other areas that can help ATG be a success.

This analysis identified a number of problems that could hinder ATG's success
that are not being addressed by ATG's current strategies. The most immediate of
these are:

(1) THE DIFFICULTY OF ATTRACTING AND RETAINING THE NUMBER AND QUALITY OF STAFF
needed to meet ATG's aggressive expansion plans. This is particularly true in
the areas of technical staff (e.g. 5ESS technicians), sales (people with both
local knowledge and technical expertise) and General Managers (assuming that the
Brooks pipeline of proven talent is tapped out). This problem can be attributed
to a number of factors including the smaller labor pool in smaller cities and a
general shortage of many of these kinds of resources. This problem is difficult
to overcome but could be ameliorated by an extensive and comprehensive internal
training program.

(2) THE ONGOING RELIANCE OF ATG ON THE INCUMBENT CARRIERS. The foundation of
ATG's business rests with ILEC facilities for the "final mile". ATG's ability to
offer quality service in a timely fashion is totally dependent upon the ILEC's
willingness to provide timely access to their facilities, co-location space and
speedy resolution of problems. This could be partially addressed by seeking new
technological solutions to providing access such as LMDS. In the short term it
is essential to keep comprehensive records of ILEC performance to ascertain
compliance to interconnect agreements and regulations.

(3) THE LACK OF BUSINESS AND OPERATIONS SUPPORT SYSTEMS. Quality customer
service, speed of provisioning and convergent billing are all part of ATG's
differentiation strategy. These are almost impossible to achieve without the
support of robust, flexible OSSs. This will become especially apparent if the
business grows as rapidly as predicted. This is being addressed to a high degree
by partnerships with AMS and Lucent.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary       Page 4
<PAGE>   210

2 VALUE CHAIN ANALYSIS

A company's value chain consists of the key activities or functions that it
performs that add value to the product and services the company brings to the
marketplace. An understanding of ATG's value chain can help determine which
functions of the organization give it a competitive edge in the marketplace. It
can also indicate how to maximize ATG's competitive ability by introducing new
technology to support the functions that make up ATG's value chain.

Function analysis is especially important given the entrepreneurial nature of
ATG. As an entrepreneurial company, the organizational structure is always in
flux and the company operates without a formal chain of command. Rather people
step into the breach and take on duties as the need arises. It is therefore more
helpful to analyze what is done (functions performed) rather than the
organizational structure of ATG.

The Value Chain Analysis highlighted eleven functions that are central to ATG
delivering its products and services to its customers. The value chain model
describes two major categories of functions or activities that a company
performs to provide value to its customers:

PRIMARY FUNCTIONS are the key functions that are directly related to the
production and delivery of products and services. For ATG, there are six primary
functions:

1.      SERVICE ACQUISITION - this includes acquiring components of ATG's
        service offerings from external sources, e.g. Qwest, Verio, US West.

2.      NETWORK DEVELOPMENT - puts in place the needed infrastructure upon which
        ATG will build its products and services. In the Value Chain model
        Network Development provides the basic physical network infrastructure
        from design and build through integration testing.

3.      SERVICE ASSURANCE - is the production engine that operates and maintains
        the network upon which services are built and provided to the company's
        subscribers.

4.      MARKETING - anticipates demand to determine the requirements and
        characteristic of products needed to serve the company's customers now
        and more importantly in the future. The product and service requirements
        developed by the marketing function drive the network infrastructure
        needed to meet these requirements.

5.      SALES - is responsible for bringing the products and services defined by
        Marketing to the end customer.

6.      CUSTOMER SERVICE - is the function that interfaces with the subscribers
        and users of telecommunications service and ensures that the products
        and services are sold, perform correctly and meet the needs of the
        customer.

SUPPORT FUNCTIONS are activities performed by the organization in support of the
primary functions. Support functions are not less important than primary
functions. In fact, they may be crucial to the successful operation of the
primary and support activities.

 If an organization is especially skillful at one or more of these activities,
it can give the primary activities a competitive advantage over competitors who
are less skilled. Such a company is considered to have a "core competency" that
its competitors do not have.

For example, an organization that is extremely good at attracting and retaining
key employees has an advantage over its competitors in marketplaces where key
skilled individuals are scarce. This

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary       Page 5
<PAGE>   211

"core competency" for attracting and
retaining skilled employees allow the company's primary functions to operate
more effectively than those of its competitors do.

The key support functions for ATG are:

1.      MARKET DEVELOPMENT - the identification and development of new markets
        in which to do business.

2.      OUTSOURCING - the procurement of relationships to perform portions of
        business operations.

3.      HUMAN RESOURCES - deals with hiring, training, developing and separation
        of employees.

4.      SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT - deals with establishing and maintaining the
        computer hardware and software that are needed by all functions within
        the ATG value chain. This includes acquisition and development of
        application programs and operational systems needed to support both the
        primary and support functions of ATG.

5.      FINANCIAL AND CORPORATE MANAGEMENT - deals with the basic financial and
        accounting functions needed by the firm. Also includes other Corporate
        functions such as securing funding and regulatory affairs.

FIGURE 2.                           ATG VALUE CHAIN

                            [ATG VALUE CHAIN CHART]

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary       Page 6
<PAGE>   212

3 BUSINESS FACTOR ANALYSIS

The business factors analyzed in this section are Goals and Objectives, Critical
Success Factors and Problems. Goals and Critical Success Factors indicate what a
company needs to achieve to be successful. In section 5, these business factors
will be related to ATG's Strategies. Strategies indicate what the company will
do to ensure that goals are achieved, Critical Success Factors are met and
problems are overcome. The following model illustrates the relationship between
these factors:

                         [BUSINESS FACTORS MODEL CHART]

FIGURE 3. BUSINESS FACTORS MODEL

3.1 GOALS AND OBJECTIVES

 "Goal" and "Objective" have very specific definitions as they are used in this
document:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
TERM                   DEFINITION
----                   ----------
<S>                    <C>
GOAL                   A summarized statement of a major business aim that
                       supports the overall purpose and mission of the
                       organization.

OBJECTIVE              A more detailed business aim that is measurable and/or
                       quantifiable and that directly supports the achievement
                       of a goal.
</TABLE>

                               COMPARISON OF TERMS

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary       Page 7
<PAGE>   213

3.1.1 GOALS

The following items describe the major ATG goals that were identified during the
data gathering process. These goals are supported by quantifiable Objectives,
which are described below:

BECOME THE NUMBER ONE CLEC IN TIER 3 AND TIER 4 MARKETS

ATG is targeting Tier 3 (100,000 - 249,000 population) and Tier 4 (20,000 -
99,999) markets. These markets are typically not targeted by current CLECs. ATG
will concentrate on serving these markets and wishes to become the largest CLEC
serving these markets.

BECOME THE NUMBER ONE CLEC IN EACH MARKET ENTERED

ATG will usually enter a market only if there is no competition from other
CLECs. ATG wishes to become so successful in these markets that it discourages
other CLECs from attempting to enter a city in which ATG is doing business.

QUICKLY EXPAND THE NUMBER OF MARKETS SERVED

ATG is entering three markets initially (Santa Rosa, CA, Tacoma, WA & Salem,
OR). It wants to expand the number of markets rapidly over the next five years.

PROVIDE A UNIQUE COMBINATION OF SERVICE OFFERINGS

ATG will provide a unique combination of services that cannot be obtained from
any other single vendor. These are local phone service, long distance, voice
mail and high-speed internet access.

PROVIDE TOP QUALITY PACKET-SWITCHED  SERVICES

ATG will offer leading edge packet-switched services to its customers including
ADSL, SDSL and derived voice in addition to more standard services such as
dial-up access and web hosting.

PROVIDE EXCELLENT CUSTOMER SERVICE

ATG will provide excellent customer service by having well-trained sales and
customer service staff who are knowledgeable about both ATG's product offerings
and the local community. The customer service staff will also need convenient
access to all of the systems and data they need to do their job.

PRODUCE AN ACCURATE CONVERGENT BILL (ONE BILL, MANY SERVICES

ATG wishes to produce a single bill per customer that will contain information
about all the services provided to the customer.

FOLLOW THE BUSINESS PLAN

Although most of the goals detailed above refer to elements of the Business Plan
"Follow the Business Plan" appears to be a universal sentiment. This includes
not only the things listed above but also making sure that investments are in
line with revenue (i.e. don't spend $20m on systems when there is only $1m in
revenue), verifying that the business plan assumptions are accurate as actual
data becomes available and meeting revenue, new market and subscriber goals.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary       Page 8
<PAGE>   214

3.1.2 OBJECTIVES

The following chart shows the objectives that support each of the goals
described above:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                   Goals                                                        Supporting objectives
                   -----                                                        ---------------------
<S>                                                          <C>
1. Become the number one CLEC in Tier 3 and Tier 4 markets   ->   Be in 50 markets by 2005
                                                             ->   Generate over $1 billion per year in revenue by 2005
                                                             ->   Break even on cash flow within 24-27 months

2. Become the number one CLEC in each market entered         ->   2 1/2% of residence lines in 5 years
                                                             ->   20% of business lines in 5 years

3. Quickly expand the number of markets served               ->   Enter 5 markets in 1999
                                                             ->   Add 2 new markets per quarter
                                                             ->   Be in 50 markets by 2005
                                                             ->   Have 20 markets in the pipeline at all times

4. Provide a unique combination of service offerings         ->   Provide local phone service, long distance service, voice mail
                                                                  and packet-switched services

5. Provide top quality packet-switched services              ->   Network available 99.97% of the time
                                                             ->   Begin providing service in April 1999
                                                             ->   Provide leading-edge technology

6. Provide excellent customer service                        ->   Provide customer service support 7 x 24
                                                             ->   Visit all targeted business customers within two months
                                                             ->   Resolve customer problems with one call resolution
                                                             ->   Install service on-time

7. Produce an accurate, multi-service bill                   ->   Produce bills on-time
                                                             ->   Minimize customer bill inquiry calls
                                                             ->   Present all ATG services on a single bill
                                                             ->   Provide internet access to billing information

8. Follow the business plan                                  ->   Be in 50 markets by 2005
                                                             ->   Generate over $1 billion per year in revenue by 2005
                                                             ->   Enter 5 markets in 1999
                                                             ->   Add 2 new markets per quarter
                                                             ->   Adjust business plan to market dynamics
</TABLE>

FIGURE 4. ATG OBJECTIVES

3.2 FUNCTIONS

Functions are different from organizational units, such as Departments or
Divisions. Functions are what a company does, while organizations are how the
company organizes itself to perform the functions. An organization chart
reflects the organizational structure of the company.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary       Page 9
<PAGE>   215

Functions are reflected in the numerous processes that are performed and linked
within the company to bring products and services to the marketplace.
"Marketing" is an example of a function.

ATG Functions are described in Section 2, Value Chain Analysis.

3.3 CRITICAL SUCCESS FACTORS (CSFS)

Critical Success Factors are key factors that the organization must achieve to
ensure success in meeting its goals or objectives. An example of a CSF might be
the completion of a management training program for all first level managers.

GET THE NETWORK FACILITIES UP AND RUNNING ON SCHEDULE

In order to meet the revenue and penetration goals for 1999 the network
facilities that are going to allow for the generation of significant revenue
must be in place and working in accordance with the schedule.

IMPLEMENT EFFICIENT AND ACCURATE OPERATIONAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS (OSS)

In order to provide a high-level of customer service, fast and accurate
provisioning and billing, the appropriate OSS must be in place to support the
business. Especially important are Inventory Management, Order Management and
Billing.

MAKE THE FIRST THREE MARKETS A SHOWCASE FOR THE COMPANY

ATG's performance in the first three markets is necessary for its future
success. If these are not a success then it will not be possible to raise
additional investment to expand the business.

DIFFERENTIATE ATG FROM THE ILEC AND OTHER CLECS IN MARKETS

In the eyes of the customer ATG must differentiate itself from other carriers by
means other than price. This will be achieved by having a focus on building
relationships within the community and providing the highest quality customer
service.

NEED ACCESS TO THE RIGHT CAPITAL

In order to meet the company's expansion plans, including acquisitions, ATG must
be able to get capital at a reasonable cost at the right time.

DEVELOP APPROPRIATE PARTNERSHIPS

ATG does not wish to develop a huge staff or operations infrastructure so it is
relying on partners such as Lucent, Qwest, Verio and AMS to provide products and
services.

INTEGRATION OF ACQUISITIONS

ATG is planning to expand by acquiring existing companies as well as building
its own network. It is essential that the customers served by the acquired
companies be integrated as seamlessly as possible into the ATG environment

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 10
<PAGE>   216

INTEGRATION OF THE PACKET-SWITCHING AND VOICE LINES OF BUSINESS

Traditionally, telephone companies and internet services companies have been run
in quite different manners. This is due to a number of factors including the
degree of regulation and the costs associated with developing a network and
providing service. In order to be successful, ATG needs to bring these two
cultures together to produce a seamless service offering to the end customer.

SPEED TO MARKET

ATG follows a very rigorous qualification process to determine if a market
should be developed. This includes the absence of CLEC competition. Once a
market has been selected it is critical that service be offered there as soon as
possible before another CLEC decides to target that market.

3.4 PROBLEMS

A problem is defined as a set of factors that hinder the ability of an
organization to achieve its objectives and critical success factors. An example
of a problem is poorly trained employees. The major problems identified at ATG
are listed below.

LACK OF QUALIFIED STAFF

With the growth of the CLEC and wireless telephony markets, it is becoming
increasingly difficult to find qualified telecom personnel at reasonable
salaries, especially outside of major metropolitan areas. Consequently, it will
be difficult to find the quality and quantity of people needed to run the
business in line with the aggressive expansion goals. A qualified staff is
needed if ATG is going to compete on the basis of quality. Additionally, a
current overall lack of staff is resulting in people being overworked and
possibly "spread too thinly" to do all the work that needs to be done
comprehensively.

COST AND PRICING OF SERVICES

The high cost of unbundled local loops, especially in California, makes it very
difficult to make money. Additionally, the ILECs have been pricing xDSL services
very aggressively, which makes it difficult to compete on price in this arena.

ILEC ROADBLOCKS

The ILECs obviously do not have any incentive to cooperate with ATG. Issues
concerning the availability of co-location space will most likely continue to be
an issue. It is unrealistic to expect that they will perform any better than the
worst case scenario dictated in interconnection agreements. This puts additional
emphasis on ATG to excel so that the ILEC has all the information they need
correctly the first time, so they will have no excuse for performing up to the
level of their agreements. Additionally, some ILECs have resisted swift and
robust implementation of interconnect agreements and new FCC requirements. There
have also been problems with the quality of their outside plant.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 11
<PAGE>   217

NO TRACK RECORD

ATG has no track record of offering services in any market. This makes it hard
to persuade customers, especially business customers, to put their business in
the hands of an unproven company. Since ATG is not employing a low-price
strategy, which might entice some customers, this may make breaking into the
markets even more difficult.

LACK OF OPERATIONS SUPPORT SYSTEMS (OSS) AND BUSINESS SUPPORT SYSTEMS (BSS)

ATG needs to build a portfolio of OSSs and BSSs to support both current
operations and future growth. Some systems are available but many others such as
an integrated order management system and a system to compare ILEC unbundled
loop charges to ATG customers will have to be developed.

INTEGRATION OF ACQUISITIONS BEFORE OPERATIONS ARE STABLE

ATG's expansion plans call for the acquisition of other CLECs and ISPs to
facilitate rapid growth. If these acquisitions are made before ATG has a stable
set of business processes and information systems the changes of a smooth
integration are severely jeopardized.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 12
<PAGE>   218

4 COMPETITIVE ENVIRONMENT ANALYSIS

The BOA Team collected information dealing with the competitive environment in
which ATG operates and the problems and opportunities posed by that environment.
The team analyzed the ability of ATG to compete in the telecommunications
environment.

As an aid to analyzing this information, the BOA team developed the following
models:

1.      Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, Threats ("SWOT") Analysis
2.      Competitive Forces Analysis

4.1 STRENGTHS, WEAKNESSES, OPPORTUNITIES, THREATS

From the information collected as part of the Business Objective Analysis, the
BOA team completed a SWOT analysis model again based on the Porter constructs.
SWOT stands for Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats. The diagram
depicts the SWOT analysis that the BOA team performed on the information gained
from interviews and documents supplied by ATG.

The BOA Team developed a high-level model of the SWOT for ATG. This model
provides the Team with an overall picture of ATG's planned business environment.
This analysis is only a starting point and is not an in-depth analysis. It will
help the ATG Executive Team capitalize on Strengths and Opportunities and
position itself to overcome Weaknesses and Threats. The following diagram
depicts the results of the SWOT analysis.

FIGURE 5. SWOT ANALYSIS

                             [SWOT ANALYSIS CHART]

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 13
<PAGE>   219

STRENGTHS - These are the strengths of the organization, which allow it to
effectively compete in the marketplace. Strength should be built upon,
especially if the competitors are weak in the area that the company is strong.
The key strengths of ATG are:

        1.      Start-up Funding: The company has acquired the funding it needs
                to begin business and is well on the way to securing additional
                funding.

        2.      Experienced Executive Team: The executive team and many of the
                employees have been with a start-up company before and
                understand what it takes to make this kind of business
                successful.

        3.      Unique Service Offering (Internet, Local and Long Distance
                Packages): - The combination of these services is currently not
                available from any single provider.

WEAKNESSES - The weaknesses of the organization can put it at a disadvantage,
especially if competitors are strong in the areas in which the company is weak.
Many of these weaknesses offset the strengths that ATG has and limit its
capabilities to capitalize on the opportunities presented to the Company. The
key weaknesses of ATG are:

        1.      ILEC Cooperation - The ILECs have little or no incentive to
                provide exceptional service to ATG. Since ATG will be reliant on
                the ILECs to provide service to their end-customers, this could
                become a serious problem.

        2.      Brand New Organization - It is always a challenge to build an
                organization from ground zero. Many new personnel have to be
                hired and integrated into the business quickly.

        3.      New Operations Systems and Processes - An entirely new set of
                operations systems and operational processes can be both a
                strength and a weakness. However, the goal of excellent customer
                service could initially be compromised if the implementation of
                new systems and processes does not go well.

OPPORTUNITIES - These are environmental and internal factors which present
opportunities for the firm to capitalize on and allow it to gain a competitive
advantage. The key opportunities for ATG are:

        1.      Develop Partnerships - ATG is entering into agreements with
                Lucent and AMS to outsource segments of their operations.
                Drawing on the experience of these companies provides an
                opportunity to benefit from their experience with other
                companies in the field.

        2.      Convergent billing - If ATG can produce a single bill for all of
                the services they provide in a timely fashion this will provide
                a significant competitive advantage.

        3.      State-of-the-art Technology - ATG is starting its internet
                business at the same time as xDSL technology is starting to
                mature. ATG has the opportunity to offer products and services
                in this arena that were not previously available.

        4.      Automation - Since ATG has no legacy systems or processes, it
                can take a "green-field" approach to developing them. This
                allows for the opportunity to automate as much of the operations
                as possible, reducing costs and headcount. An example of this is
                "flow-through" provisioning.

        5.      Industry Consolidation - The CLEC industry has spawned many new
                entrants over the past few years and more companies enter the
                fray every day. In these situations there tends to be a process
                of consolidation with a large number of companies eventually
                combining into a smaller number. This provides the opportunity
                for ATG to purchase other CLECs to rapidly increase its size or
                for ATG to be acquired and maximize investor return.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 14
<PAGE>   220

THREATS - These are environmental and internal factors that can present threats
to the competitive ability or profitability of the company. The key threats
faced by ATG are:

        1.      Rapidly changing technology - ATG is investing a lot of money to
                build a brand new network. Although ATG is using the most
                up-to-date technology available, the marketplace is changing so
                rapidly now that it is hard to judge how quickly the network may
                be outdated.

        2.      Broad range of competitors - Although no one company can provide
                all of the services that ATG can, there are many companies that
                can provide some of these services. However, new CLECs with
                these capabilities are entering the market all the time.

        3.      Funding uncertainty - Although ATG has proved to have extremely
                good contacts in the investment community, the current economic
                situation is subject to rapid change. This could easily effect
                both the availability and cost of funds for future investment.

4.2 COMPETITIVE FORCES ANALYSIS

This analysis looks at five of the forces that may affect ATG as it competes for
market share in the telecommunications marketplace. This analysis is only a
starting point to help identify processes and areas where ATG may place
additional emphasis, to strengthen its position in the markets that it has
chosen. The forces considered include Customers, Suppliers, Competitors and
Regulators. The following diagram summarizes the competitive forces model.

FIGURE 6. COMPETITIVE FORCES MODEL

                        [COMPETITIVE FORCES MODEL CHART]

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 15
<PAGE>   221

CUSTOMERS

Companies may have marketing segments in which the customer has strong
bargaining power. This is true if the customer has multiple companies from which
to obtain the needed products and services. Buyer power influences the prices
that firms can charge.

Potential customers for ATG's services will certainly have a choice of
providers. The ILEC, various IXCs and ISPs will all be vying for a piece of the
pie even if there are no other CLECs. This gives the customer a strong
bargaining position. It is crucial to ATG's success that they are able to
effectively differentiate themselves to the consumer from their competitors.

SUPPLIERS

This area of the model deals with the bargaining power of a company's suppliers
and is a key factor that dictates how a company can function in the marketplace.
This is especially true if the suppliers have great bargaining power and can
dictate prices or quantities supplied. Environments where only one or two
suppliers are the source of needed resources can be extremely constraining on
the competitive strategy of a company. Such suppliers can demand high prices for
their products or limit supply. For example, ATG is particularly reliant on the
ILECs as suppliers of the local loop and also co-location space.

Environments where there are many suppliers who compete heavily among themselves
are least restrictive. Forming strong alliances with key suppliers is an
effective strategy many U.S. companies are implementing to ensure a source of
supply at reasonable prices and with the quality needed. If ATG meets its growth
projections it will have significant bargaining power with other categories of
suppliers such as equipment manufacturers (e.g. Lucent, Diamond Lane) and Long
Distance carriers (e.g. Qwest).

COMPETITORS

These are the other companies that offer the same or similar products. The
effectiveness of these competitors and the strategies they employ (e.g., low
cost, product and service differentiation, targeting niches of customers)
dictate how the company must react to overcome the threats posed by these
competitors. The key competitors faced by ATG are:

~       Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs)
~       Other CLECs - As of 1/5/99 there are 90 facilities-based CLECs doing
        business in California, and 87 resellers. In Washington state there were
        52 facilities-based CLECs (12/23/98).
~       Inter Exchange Carriers (IXCs)
        ->      Sprint
        ->      AT&T
        ->      MCI-Worldcom
~       Wireless Companies
~       Internet Service Providers (ISPs) for xDSL services e.g. CNM Network,
        Pages3, DSLnetworks, ILECs.

Although none of these competitors can singly offer the same services and
billing arrangements as ATG, they can between them provide significant price
competition.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 16
<PAGE>   222

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 17
<PAGE>   223

REGULATORS

In many industries, regulatory agencies greatly influence the environment in
which competitors operate. The telecommunications industry in the U.S. is a
prime example of such an environment. Telecommunications companies who can
interact effectively with the regulatory bodies often position themselves
competitively in the industry. Regulatory decisions often affect the directions
of the entire industry.

There are many unresolved issues as a result of the 1996 Telecom Act and the
picture has been clouded further by Supreme Court ruling on the regulatory
control of the Telecom Act and the pricing of unbundled network elements (UNEs).
ATG is especially sensitive to these issues, as it will be relying on the ILEC
for the local loop, at least in the short to medium term. Changes in pricing and
access could have a significant effect on ATG's business plan.

SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS

It is important to analyze the development of substitute products as they can
change the whole nature of competition in an industry. Wireless technology can
be viewed as a substitute product that could radically change the environment in
which ATG operates. The advent of cheaper and more effective cellular and fixed
wireless technology could challenge the current network infrastructure that ATG
has put in place. Customers of the future may not be burdened with having to
have wires to communicate. More importantly, future customers of wireless may
not need to obtain service from a telephone company that is geographically
located close to the customer. Customers with such a capability will have a
great deal of bargaining power in obtaining their telecommunication services.

Internet telephony is another possible substitute for traditional telephone
service. This service is growing rapidly in popularity and currently operates in
an unregulated environment.

Cable Modems can provide the same high-speed internet access as the xDSL
technology being employed by ATG. AT&T's acquisition of TCI and alliances with
other cable companies such as Time Warner will probably speed the availability
of telephony services through cable plant. However, the small business segment
of the market that ATG is targeting is not currently well served by the cable
industry.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 18
<PAGE>   224

5 STRATEGY ANALYSIS

Strategies set by an organization indicate the broad directions that must be
undertaken in order to:

->      Achieve the organizational goals
->      Ensure that critical success factors are met
->      Capitalize on opportunities presented to the company
->      Leverage the company's strengths
->      Overcome problems and company weaknesses
->      Meet threats facing the company

Goals, Critical Success Factors and opportunities are indicators of what it is
important for a company to achieve. Strategies indicate how the company will go
about achieving what it considers important.

5.1 KEY STRATEGIC DIRECTIONS

The first thing a company must do is to determine whether it will complete
broadly in its marketplace or to concentrate or segments of its marketplace
(Niching). Once that decision is made then the company must decide if it will
compete by being the low cost producer of services or by differentiating its
product or service to the marketplace it competes in.

A differentiation strategy concentrates on valuing or differentiating the
product or service in the eyes of the buyer. If done successfully the service is
so prized that the buyer is willing to pay a premium for the product.

ATG has chosen a niche strategy by concentrating on providing service to small
business / high-end residential market segment within specific geographical
markets where there is minimal CLEC competition. To execute this strategy
requires that ATG choose suitable markets and provide an attractive combination
of services that the customer cannot receive elsewhere. Key supporting
strategies to accomplish this are:

        1.      CONCENTRATE ON TIER 3 AND TIER 4 MARKETS

                ~       Tier 3: 154 cities with a population of (epsilon)100,000
                        < 249,000
                ~       Tier 4: 1152 cities with a population of (epsilon)29,000
                        < 100,000
                ~       (epsilon) 50,000 business lines
                ~       (epsilon) 100,000 residence lines

        2.      PERFORM IN-DEPTH MARKETING ANALYSIS TO QUALIFY MARKETS

                ~       Minimal CLEC presence
                ~       Cooperative local government
                ~       Favorable regulatory climate
                ~       Favorable ILEC tariff structure

        3.      PROVIDE A UNIQUE MIX OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS PRODUCTS TO CUSTOMERS

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 19
<PAGE>   225

                ~       Local
                ~       Voice mail
                ~       Internet Services
                ~       Long Distance
                ~       Convergent bill

ATG is also pursuing a strategy of differentiation from its competitors based on
a local presence and excellent customer service. Key supporting strategies to
accomplish this are:

        1.      PUT THE "LOCAL" BACK IN LOCAL SERVICE

                ~       Having a downtown ATG office where customers can pay
                        their bill or talk to an ATG representative.
                ~       Having sales representatives personally visit all
                        customers with 4 or more lines
                ~       Hiring people with knowledge of the geographic area in
                        which they are working.

        2.      PROVIDE EXCELLENT CUSTOMER SERVICE

                ~       Hiring knowledgeable people.
                ~       Resolving as many issues as possible with only one call
                        to ATG.
                ~       Always having the phone answered by a human being (not
                        voice mail).

        3.      PROVIDE LEADING-EDGE PACKET-SWITCHED PRODUCTS

                ~       Currently ADSL and SDSL.
                ~       Become an early adopter of new technologies.

Additional key strategies that are required of ATG to achieve the desired goals,
meet Critical Success Factors and overcome the identified problems are
summarized as follows:

        1.      STRATEGIC OUTSOURCING OF OPERATIONS WHERE IT MAKES ECONOMIC AND
                BUSINESS SENSE

                ~       Outsourcing network operations to providers of
                        networking services such as Lucent who can provide more
                        sophisticated network provisioning and maintenance at
                        low cost due to economies of scale they have by
                        providing services to a broad range of telephone
                        companies. This will also allow ATG to minimize the size
                        of its internal organization.

                ~       Outsourcing billing and billing mediation operations to
                        AMS.

5.2 SIGNIFICANT RELATIONSHIPS

The following key relationships between strategies, goals, and functions have
been identified:

1.      Strategies key to attaining goals set by ATG
2.      Strategies key to ensuring critical success factors are met
3.      Strategies key to overcoming problem areas
4.      Functions most important to the successful execution of the strategies.

These relationships are described in detail below.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 20
<PAGE>   226

5.2.1 CORPORATE STRATEGIES IMPORTANT FOR ACHIEVEMENT OF STRATEGIC GOALS

There is a key relationship between corporate strategies and ATG's goals. The
strategies are essential to achieving the goals. Furthermore, the goals have an
impact on how the strategies themselves are devised and executed.

In the following matrix, strategies are listed horizontally and goals are listed
vertically. If the BOA team found that a goal is supported by a strategy, they
checked the appropriate row and column. The more checks in a row, the more
important a strategy is to meeting the goals of the organization.

FIGURE 7. STRATEGIES SUPPORTING GOALS MATRIX

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                GOALS
                                    --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                       Unique    Top quality  Excellent    Accurate      Follow
                                    #1 CLEC in  #1 CLEC in  Expand #   service     Internet   customer   Multi-service  Business
MAJOR STRATEGIES                    Tier 3 & 4    market    markets   offerings    service    service        bill         Plan
----------------                    ----------    ------    -------   ---------    -------    -------        ----         ----
<S>                                 <C>         <C>         <C>       <C>        <C>          <C>        <C>            <C>
Concentrate on Tier 3 & 4 Markets        X                     X                                                            X
Pre-qualify markets                      X           X         X                                                            X
Provide unique product mix               X           X                    X                                                 X
Emphasize local service                  X           X                                           X
Differentiate through excellent
 customer service                        X           X                                           X
Provide "leading edge" technology                    X                    X           X
Strategic outsourcing                    X                                                       X            X
</TABLE>

This matrix shows that most of the corporate strategies are directed at the
following Corporate goals:

1.       Become the #1 CLEC in Tier 3 & 4 Markets
2.       Become the #1 CLEC in each market entered

The following goals have the fewest supporting strategies:

1.       Provide top quality packet-switched service
2.       Produce an accurate, multi-service bill

The two strategies most key to achieving the strategic goals of the company are:

1.       Perform In-depth market analysis
2.       Provide a unique mix of telecommunications products to customers

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 21
<PAGE>   227

5.2.2 CORPORATE STRATEGIES IMPORTANT FOR ACHIEVING CRITICAL SUCCESS FACTORS
      (CSFS)

Corporate strategies have been derived from the interviews conducted with
various ATG executives. The relationship between corporate strategies and
critical success factors is important because specific strategies will be
instrumental in ensuring the Critical Success Factors are met. The relationships
have been established from interviews and various documents provided by ATG and
are documented in the following matrix

FIGURE 8. STRATEGIES SUPPORTING CSFS MATRIX

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                        CSFS
                        ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 1st 3                  Access to
                        Network on  Efficient   markets                  quality                  Integrate    Merge Voice  Speed to
MAJOR STRATEGIES         schedule     OSS      showcase  Differentiate   capital   Partnerships  Acquisitions  & Internet    Market
----------------         --------     ---      --------  -------------   -------   ------------  ------------  ----------    ------
<S>                     <C>         <C>        <C>       <C>            <C>        <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>
Concentrate on Tier
 3 & 4 Markets                                                              X
Pre-qualify markets                               X                         X                          X
Provide unique product
 mix                                              X            X
Emphasize local service                           X            X
Provide excellent
 customer service                                 X            X                                       X
Provide "leading edge"
 technology                                       X            X                                                    X
Strategic outsourcing        X         X          X                                      X                                      X
</TABLE>

In this matrix, strategies are listed horizontally and Critical Success Factors
are listed vertically. If the BOA team found that a strategy helps fulfill a
CSF, they checked the appropriate row and column. The more checks in a column,
the more important is a strategy to ensuring that Critical Success Factors are
met.

The matrix identifies that most strategies will play a key role in meeting the
following Critical Success Factors:

1.       Make the first three markets a showplace for the company
2.       Differentiate ATG from the ILEC and other CLECs in the market

The following Critical Success Factors have the least number of supporting
strategies

1.       Get network facilities up and running on schedule
2.       Implement efficient and accurate Operational Support Systems
3.       Develop appropriate partnerships
4.       Integration of the Internet and Voice lines of business
5.       Speed to market

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 22
<PAGE>   228

The strategies most key to meeting the critical success factors are:

1.       Strategic outsourcing
2.       Perform In-depth market analysis
3.       Provide excellent customer service
4.       Provide leading-edge packet-switched products

5.2.3 CORPORATE STRATEGIES IMPORTANT FOR ADDRESSING PROBLEMS

Mapping corporate strategies to problems highlights those strategies which are
key to addressing problems that will prevent the meeting of goals.

In the following matrix, strategies are listed horizontally and problems
affecting the attainment of goals are listed vertically. If the BOA team found
that a strategy could help overcome a problem, they checked the appropriate row
and column. The more checks in a column, the more important the strategy is to
overcoming problems.

FIGURE 9. STRATEGIES ADDRESSING PROBLEMS MATRIX

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                             PROBLEMS
                                           ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Lack of       Cost &                          No       Lack
                                           Qualified    Pricing of        ILEC          track       of        Premature
MAJOR STRATEGIES                             Staff       Services      Cooperation      record      OSS       Integration
----------------                             -----       --------      -----------      ------      ---       -----------
<S>                                        <C>          <C>            <C>              <C>         <C>       <C>
Concentrate on Tier 3 & 4 Markets
Pre-qualify markets
Provide unique product mix                                   X                             X
Emphasize local service                                      X                             X
Provide excellent customer service                           X                             X
Provide "leading edge" technology                            X                             X
Strategic outsourcing                          X                                           X         X
</TABLE>

This matrix identifies that the most strategies are directed at the following
problems:

1.       Cost and Pricing of services
2.       No track record

The following problems have the least number of supporting strategies:

1.       ILEC roadblocks
2.       Lack of qualified staff
3.       Lack of OSS

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 23
<PAGE>   229

The strategy most key to overcoming problems is:

1.       Strategic outsourcing

5.2.4 FUNCTIONS SUPPORTING STRATEGY EXECUTION

Strategies are what the company does to achieve its goals, ensure the Critical
Success Factors are met and address the major problems facing it. Functions are
groupings of major activities performed within the organizational structure of
the company. Organizations performing functions are how a company goes about
executing its strategies.

Mapping corporate strategies to functions performed by the enterprise highlights
those functions that are key to successful execution of the corporate
strategies. The matrix below indicates which of the ATG value chain functions
play a role in carrying out the major strategies of the company.

FIGURE 10. FUNCTIONS SUPPORTING STRATEGY EXECUTION MATRIX

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                  FUNCTIONS
                                      ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                         Service    Network       Service                     Customer
MAJOR STRATEGIES                      Acquisitions  Development  Assurance  Marketing  Sales  Service
----------------                      ------------  -----------  ---------  ---------  -----  -------
<S>                                   <C>           <C>          <C>        <C>        <C>    <C>
Concentrate on Tier 3 & 4 Markets                                               X
Pre-qualify markets
Provide unique product mix                 X             X                      X
Emphasize local service                                               X         X        X       X
Provide excellent customer service                                    X                  X       X
Provide "leading edge" technology          X             X            X
Strategic outsourcing                      X                          X
</TABLE>

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                              FUNCTIONS
                                      -------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Market                   Human      Systems    Corporate
MAJOR STRATEGIES                       Development  Outsourcing  Resources  Development  Management
----------------                       -----------  -----------  ---------  -----------  ----------
<S>                                    <C>          <C>          <C>        <C>          <C>
Concentrate on Tier 3 & 4 Markets            X
Pre-qualify markets                          X                                                X
Provide unique product mix                                                        X
Emphasize local service
Provide excellent customer service                       X           X            X
Provide "leading edge" technology                        X                        X
Strategic outsourcing                                    X                                    X
</TABLE>

The columns of this matrix list the ATG functions while the strategies are
listed in the rows of the matrix. If the BOA team found that a function supports
a strategy, they checked the appropriate row and column. The more checks in a
column, the more important a function is to the execution of the ATG strategic
directions.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 24
<PAGE>   230

To properly assess the importance of a function, we need to understand how
important a strategy is to achieving goals, meeting Critical Success Factors and
overcoming problems. The following table indicates how many goals, Critical
Success Factors and problems are addressed by each strategy. This table was
derived from the matrices developed earlier in this chapter. The numeric weight
column represents an overall importance of a strategy derived by adding the
number of goals, Critical Success Factors and problems addressed by that
strategy.

FIGURE 11. STRATEGY WEIGHTS

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       STRATEGIES                      GOALS   CSFS   PROBLEMS  WEIGHT
       ----------                      -----   ----   --------  ------
<S>                                    <C>     <C>    <C>       <C>
Concentrate on Tier 3 & 4 Markets        3       1       0        4
Pre-qualify markets                      4       3       0        7
Provide unique product mix               4       2       2        8
Emphasize local service                  3       2       2        7
Provide excellent customer service       3       3       2        8
Provide "leading edge" technology        3       3       2        8
Strategic outsourcing                    3       5       3       11
</TABLE>

The following chart pictorially depicts the importance of each strategy to
addressing the goals, CFSs and problems of ATG:

                [IMPACT OF STRATEGIES ON BUSINESS FACTORS CHART]

FIGURE 12. IMPACT OF STRATEGIES ON BUSINESS FACTORS CHART

As can be seen, the strategies contributing the most to addressing the major
goals, Critical Success Factors and problems of ATG are:

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 25
<PAGE>   231

1.       Strategic outsourcing
2.       Provide excellent customer service
3.       Provide unique product mix
4.       Provide leading-edge internet products

The following diagram illustrates the relationship between functions and
strategies:

      [RELATIONSHIP OF FUNCTIONS TO STRATEGIES AND BUSINESS FACTORS CHART]

FIGURE 13. RELATIONSHIP OF FUNCTIONS TO STRATEGIES AND BUSINESS FACTORS

Applying the weight of each strategy to the functions that play a role in
executing the strategy provides us with view of the relative importance of each
function to strategy execution:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>

                                      Service      Network     Service                     Customer
Strategies                          Acquisition  Development  Assurance  Marketing  Sales  Service
----------                          -----------  -----------  ---------  ---------  -----  --------
<S>                                 <C>         <C>          <C>        <C>        <C>    <C>
Concentrate on Tier 3 & 4 Markets                                          4
Pre-qualify markets
Provide unique product mix              8           8
Emphasize local service                                          7         7         7        7
Provide excellent customer service                               8         8         8        8
Provide "leading edge" technology       8           8            8
Strategic outsourcing                  11                       11

Total                                  27          16           34        19                 15
</TABLE>

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>

                                      Market                    Human      Systems    Corporate
Strategies                          Development  Outsourcing  Resources  Development  Management
----------                          -----------  -----------  ---------  -----------  ----------
<S>                                 <C>          <C>          <C>        <C>          <C>
Concentrate on Tier 3 & 4 Markets        4
Pre-qualify markets                      7                                                7
Provide unique product mix                                                     8
Emphasize local service
Provide excellent customer service                    8           8            8
Provide "leading edge" technology                     8                        8
Strategic outsourcing                                11                                  10

Total                                   11           27           8           24         17
</TABLE>

FIGURE 14. IMPACT OF FUNCTIONS ON STATED STRATEGIES MATRIX

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 26
<PAGE>   232

The following chart pictorially depicts the importance of functions to
addressing the currently stated strategies of ATG:

                [IMPACT OF FUNCTIONS ON STATED STRATEGIES CHART]

FIGURE 15. IMPACT OF FUNCTIONS ON STATED STRATEGIES CHART

The chart above shows us that the functions of Service Assurance, Service
Acquisition, Outsourcing and Systems Development are most key to the execution
of strategies that will ensure that ATG's key goals are attained, the critical
success factors are met and the major problems facing the company are overcome.

5.3 OBJECTIVES BY FUNCTION

The following are objectives that must be met by the specified functions in
order for ATG to be successful:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
FUNCTION                                     OBJECTIVES
--------                                     ----------
<S>                      <C>      <C>
SERVICE ACQUISITION      1.       Select and negotiate agreements with IXCs
                         2.       Negotiate agreement with Verio
NETWORK DEVELOPMENT      1.       Deliver initial 3 networks on time
                         2.       Provide dial-up internet services by 4/1/99
SERVICE ASSURANCE        1.       Provision service within 24 hours
                         2.       Network up 99.97% of the time
                         3.       7 X 24 hour operation for customer calls
                         4.       Always have phone answered by a person
</TABLE>

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 27
<PAGE>   233

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
FUNCTION                                     OBJECTIVES
--------                                     ----------
<S>                      <C>      <C>
MARKETING                1.       Develop product catalog
                         2.       Develop service metrics
SALES                    1.       $1-1/2 to 2-1/2 million in sales in 1999
                         2.       25% Business lines in 5 years
                         3.       2-1/2% Residence lines in 5 years
                         4.       Sign up 10% of community
                         5.       Telemarket all customers with 1-3 lines
                         6.       Sales Reps visit 12 accounts daily
                         7.       Visit all customers > 3 lines within the first two months of operations
CUSTOMER SERVICE         1.       M & P's in place at start-up
                         2.       Provide excellent customer service
                         3.       Order rejection errors 10% or less
                         4.       Produce accurate, timely bill
MARKET DEVELOPMENT       1.       20 markets in funnel
                         2.       Identify and qualify new markets
                         3.       Be in 50 markets in 5 years
OUTSOURCING              1.       Negotiate and monitor billing agreement with AMS
                         2.       Negotiate and monitor services agreement with Lucent
HUMAN RESOURCES          1.       Hire resources in timely fashion as needed
                         2.       Develop training plans
                         3.       Develop employee retention programs
SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT      1.       Provide accurate billing 5/1/99
                         2.       On-line billing service
                         3.       Produce multi-service bill
                         4.       Provide flow-through provisioning solution
FINANCIAL AND            1.       Raise required capital
CORPORATE MANAGEMENT     2.       Satisfy PUC and FCC requirements
                         3.       Control fixed assets
                         4.       Obtain certification in target states
                         5.       Ensure ILEC compliance to Interconnect agreements
                         6.       Ensure all ILEC-billed lines and LD billed usage is billed to ATG customers
</TABLE>

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 28
<PAGE>   234

APPENDIX A: HOW THE BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS REPORT WAS PRODUCED

The process of preparing this document was divided into four stages:

        ->      Gather data
        ->      Analyze the information
        ->      Summarize and consolidate the information
        ->      Develop this Business Objective Analysis to present the team's
                conclusions.

INFORMATION GATHERING BY INTERVIEWS

To gather key business information, the project team arranged interviews with
executives throughout ATG. Before the start of the interviews, questionnaires
were developed. The questions that were asked during the executive interviews
are listed in Appendix A.

The project team then met with the executives who were to be interviewed to
discuss and explain each question and document their answers. A total of 20
interviews were conducted with senior and operational executives. After each
interview, the interview team met to consolidate their notes into a single view
of the questionnaire.

INFORMATION GATHERING BY DOCUMENT REVIEW

Along with the interviews, there were key documents that were a valuable source
of information for the Business Operations Analysis. Please see Appendix A for a
list. The project team reviewed each of these documents to identify executive
strategies and key business perspectives. Similar to the interview
questionnaires, these documents were used as a reference for the documentation
and analysis of key relationships.

INFORMATION ANALYSIS BY TELECOMMUNICATIONS SUBJECT MATTER EXPERTS

The BOA team includes telecommunications subject matter experts. They have broad
experience in telephone company operations and are able to provide insights into
methods, information needs and customer service operations. They were able to
build models of processes that make up a modern phone company and apply their
knowledge of current trends to the development of this document.

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 29
<PAGE>   235

INFORMATION ANALYSIS, CONSOLIDATION AND DOCUMENTATION OF CONCLUSIONS

Information from interviews, documents and subject matter experts was collated.
It was then used to create ATG Strategy Models, which are representations of
business factors such as ATG goals, objectives, critical success factors etc.
These Strategy Models are known as "objects'.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        OBJECT                            DEFINITION
        ------                            ----------
<S>                               <C>
Problems                          Difficulties within the ATG business environment
Critical Success Factors          What is critical to the success of ATG
Functions                         What ATG does to deliver products and services
Opportunities                     Events that ATG should capitalize on
Objectives                        Measurements  to track the success of ATG business
Goals                             What ATG wants to achieve
</TABLE>

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 30
<PAGE>   236

APPENDIX B: SOURCES OF INFORMATION

The following sources of information were used for the analysis that leads to
the conclusions in the Business Objective Analysis.

INTERVIEW QUESTIONNAIRE

ATG OPERATIONAL EXECUTIVE INTERVIEW QUESTIONS

The following questions were used to guide the information gathering during the
interviews with operational executives:

1.      What is the primary business function that your organization supports?
2.      What are the major goals of your organization?
3.      For each goal, please list measurable and / or quantifiable objectives
        that are necessary to achieve each goal?
4.      What are the most important factors ("critical success factors") that
        are under your control and that are absolutely necessary to achieve your
        goals (i.e. what things absolutely must happen in order to achieve your
        goals)?
5.      What other groups within ATG does your organization interact with, and
        for what purpose?
6.      What are the major problems (internal or external) that are limiting
        your organization's ability to meet its goals?
7.      What do you think is the solution to each of these problems?
8.      What are your organization's priorities during the next 12 months?
9.      What are your organization's priorities over the next 5 years?

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 31
<PAGE>   237

DOCUMENTS

The following ATG documents were consulted in the course of gathering
information:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                          ATG DOCUMENTS
<S>     <C>
1.      Advanced TelCom Group - Building on Success ... Creating the #1 CLEC in
        Tier 3 & 4 Markets (Presentation)
2.      Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Market Selection Process, 12/14/98
        (Presentation)
3.      ATG Information Technology Plan, January 28, 1999 (Presentation)
4.      ATG High-Level OSS / BSS Project Scope, December 1998
5.      1999 New Market Development Goals
6.      An ATG CSR Perspective - Customer Management Systems and Procedures
7.      ATG Customer and Line Forecast
8.      ATG - Competitive Local Exchange Carrier Business Functions
9.      ATG Draft v.01 OSS/BSS IT Architecture - Resale Only
10.     ATG Draft v.03 OSS/BSS IT Architecture
11.     ATG's High Availability Server Architecture Santa Rosa, CA Dec. 1, 1998
12.     ATG Product Codes
13.     ATG Site Roll-out 12/10/98
14.     RESALE SERVICE QUESTIONS FOR ATG
15.     DATA EXCHANGE AGREEMENT FOR THE DISTRIBUTION OF INTRALATA MESSAGE DETAIL
        AND/OR THE SETTLEMENT OF INTRALATA MESSAGE REVENUE BETWEEN PACIFIC BELL
        AND .........
16.     Resale User Guide Basic Information and Order Preparation Pacific Bell
        Industry Operations October 12, 1998
17.     Colorado US West Interconnect Agreement
18.     Idaho US West Interconnect Agreement
19.     Nevada Bell Proposed Interconnect Agreement
20.     Oregon US West Interconnect Agreement
21.     Washington US West Interconnect Agreement
22.     Olympia, Washington Business Plan, 12/8/1998
23.     ATG's Packet Switched Services (Presentation)
</TABLE>

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 32
<PAGE>   238

INTERVIEWEES

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       PERSON               TITLE                                   COMPANY     FUNCTIONAL AREA                PHONE
       ------               -----                                   -------     ---------------                -----
<S>  <C>                <C>                                         <C>       <C>                          <C>
1    Bruce Peterson     VP Engineering                                DCI     Order Management             (206) 447-9620
                                                                                                           (425) 269-3426
2    Charlene Curry     Controller                                    ATG     Finance & Accounting         (707) 535-8998
3    Chris Ward         VP Internet Services                          ATG     Internet Network,            (707) 535-8915
                                                                              Products & Services
4    Chuck Seefloth     Exec. Dir. Field & Engineering Operations     ATG     Voice Network &              (707) 535-8943
                                                                              Field Operations
5    Curt Wheeling      Sr. VP Marketing & Business Development       ATG     Voice Product                (707) 535-8935
                                                                              Marketing
6    Dan Cruz           VP & Chief Systems Officer                    ATG     Enterprise network,          (707) 535-8902
                                                                              OSS, BSS, &
                                                                              Corporate Operations
7    Dan Fee            Regional VP (CA)                              ATG     Sales & Field Operations     (707) 568-3888
8    Dave Anderson      Principal                                     AMS     Billing, mediation, &        (703) 227-7546
                                                                              CABS                         (202) 253-5912
9    Dave Henderson     Sr. Principal                                 AMS     Information Technology &     (972) 569-9190
                                                                              external interfaces
10   Dean Handy         Dir. Switch Engineering                       ATG     Switching, mediation,        (707) 535-8969
                                                                              external interfaces
11   Gary Hunt          Manager Shared Tenant Services                ATG     Sales, voice products,       707-535-8945
                                                                              voice service
                                                                              offerings, training
12   John Harkin        Dir. Internet Technology                      ATG     Internet network &           (707) 535-8914
                                                                              service delivery
                                                                              technology
13   Kath Thomas        VP Regulatory & Public Policy                 ATG     Regulatory Affairs           (707) 535-8999
14   Lee Hsaio          Manager Internal Information Technology       ATG     Internal IT network          (707) 535-8980
                                                                              (LAN/WAN), servers
                                                                              & desktops
15   Luis Aguilar       Exec. Dir. Sales & Field Operations           ATG     Business development,        (707) 535-8940
                                                                              mergers, acquisitions,
                                                                              sales, & field
                                                                              operations
16   Mark Ritter        VP New Market Development                     ATG     Expansions &                 (703) 421-5249
                                                                              Acquisitions                 (707) 535-8975
17   Mike Black         Sr. VP Sales & Field Operations               ATG     Sales and Field              (520) 571-7185
                                                                              Operations                   (707) 535-8905
18   Mike Kimsey        Exec. Dir. Customer Service                   ATG     Corporate and Field          (916) 631-1731
                                                                              Customer Services            (707) 535-8955
19   Ron Wynes          Dir. Transmission Engineering                 ATG     Network co-location,         (707) 535-8911
                                                                              transmission, transport
                                                                              & access
</TABLE>

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 33
<PAGE>   239

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
       PERSON               TITLE                                   COMPANY     FUNCTIONAL AREA                PHONE
       ------               -----                                   -------     ---------------                -----
<S>  <C>                <C>                                         <C>       <C>                          <C>
20   Scott Shultis      Manager Internet Products & Services          ATG     Internet Products &          (707) 535-8916
                                                                              Services
21   Sheila Botein      Sr. Principal                                 AMS     Resale requirements,         (650) 508-5332
                                                                              methods & procedures
22   Steve Farmiloe     Sales Manager                                 ATG     Sales                        (707) 568-3888
23   Steve Roth         Regional VP (OR) & (WA)                       ATG     Sales & Field                (360) 570-1504
                                                                              Operations
24   Tony Rivera        Exec. Dir. Long Distance Services             ATG     Long distance                (707) 535-8950
                                                                              products & services
25   Traci Johnson      HR Manager                                    ATG     Human Resources              (707) 535-8906
</TABLE>

         Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary      Page 34
<PAGE>   240

[ATG LOGO[
                                    EXHIBIT L
                                     TO THE
                            GENERAL SUPPLY AGREEMENT

                           ADVANCED TELCOM GROUP, INC.

                            OPERATIONS READINESS PLAN

                          PRESENT METHOD OF OPERATIONS

                         Version 1.5 (Draft for Review)
                                  June 04, 1999

                          Prepared In Cooperation With

                            LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC.
                            Global Network Operations

           Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   241

                                Table of Contents
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                                  <C>
1   EXECUTIVE SUMMARY.................................................................3
  1.1   OBJECTIVE OF THE OPERATIONAL READINESS PLAN...................................3
  1.2   OBJECTIVE OF THE PRESENT METHOD OF OPERATIONS (PMO) PHASE.....................5
  1.3   SCOPE.........................................................................5
  1.4   APPROACH......................................................................5
  1.5   PROCESSES MODELED.............................................................7
2   INTRODUCTION......................................................................8
  2.1   REFERENCES....................................................................8
  2.2   DATA COLLECTION...............................................................9
  2.3   ACRONYMS.....................................................................11
3   EXISTING INFRASTRUCTURE..........................................................13
  3.1   INFORMATION SYSTEMS..........................................................13
  3.2   SERVICE PROVIDERS............................................................13
  3.3   NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE.......................................................14
  3.4   SERVICES OFFERED.............................................................15
4   ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE ANALYSIS................................................16
  4.1   CORPORATE ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE...........................................16
  4.2   CURRENT BRANCH ORGANIZATION..................................................19
    4.2.1   Specific Job Responsibilities............................................19
  4.3   OUTSOURCED OPERATIONS........................................................21
    4.3.1   Trouble Management.......................................................21
    4.3.2   Billing Operations.......................................................21
  4.4   ORGANIZATIONAL RECOMMENDATIONS...............................................22
5   PROCESS FLOWS....................................................................24
  5.1   PROSPECTING..................................................................25
  5.2   PRE-ORDER....................................................................27
  5.3   ORDER MANAGEMENT FOR MIGRATE AS IS ORDERS....................................30
  5.4   ORDER MANAGEMENT FOR MOVE/ADD/CHANGE ORDERS..................................32
  5.5   ISP ORDER MANAGEMENT.........................................................34
  5.6   TELEPHONY TROUBLE MANAGEMENT.................................................36
  5.7   ISP TROUBLE MANAGEMENT.......................................................39
</TABLE>

           Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   242

1       EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1.1 OBJECTIVE OF THE OPERATIONAL READINESS PLAN

Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. (ATG) has contracted with Lucent Technologies
Professional Services to provide a full range of Network Reliability Center
(NRC) services along with American Management Systems (AMS) providing billing
and other revenue assurance outsourcing services and Digital Counterpart Inc.
(DCI) providing an order entry and order tracking solution. These services
include a team of professionals to work with ATG management to develop an
Operational Readiness Plan. The Operational Readiness Plan collects valuable
information, performs analysis and serves as a useful document to assist ATG
management with the successful implementation of their entry into offering
integrated communications services. Initially, these service offerings will be
provided by ATG in three markets. At start-up in April of this year, ATG will
resell Incumbent Local Exchange Carrier (ILEC) and Internet Dial-up services to
its customers. As resale and Dial-up services are being delivered to business
customers, ATG will be building their own network and will be in the final
stages of offering the following Facilities-based services:

        -       Local phone service
        -       Long distance phone service
        -       Voice mail
        -       Internet services (Dial-up, xDSL, Web Hosting, Web Content,
                etc.)

The four phases that the Operational Readiness Plan encompasses are:

        -       Business Objective Analysis (BOA)
        -       Present Method of Operations (PMO): describes the ILEC resale
                and Internet dial-up phase of the ATG business
        -       Interim Method of Operations (IMO): describes the continued
                resale and initial facilities-based phase of the ATG business
        -       Future Method of Operations (FMO): describes the predominantly
                facilities-based phase of the ATG business. This phase will be
                covered as part of Project Cabernet which will produce a fully
                automated Order Management solution.

This document describes the PMO phase of the Operational Readiness Planning
project.

Page 3      Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   243

                                  [FLOW CHART]

1.      A BUSINESS OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS (BOA). Completion of the BOA on April 15,
        1999 was the first step in the Operational Readiness Plan. The BOA
        provides an analysis of corporate objectives and strategic directions as
        they have been understood by ATG's management team. The BOA is part of
        the Operational Readiness Plan and as such is not an independent
        document that defines strategies, planning or specific actions.

2.      A PRESENT METHOD OF OPERATION (PMO). As the second step in the
        Operational Readiness Plan, Lucent will develop process models that
        describe the way ATG will be doing business in the Resale and Internet
        Dial-up phase of their business.

3.      AN INTERIM METHOD OF OPERATIONS (IMO). As a third component of the
        Operational Readiness Plan, Lucent will deliver to ATG a document which:
        (1) will analyze the gaps between the Present Method of Operations and
        where ATG wishes to be after the implementation of the Lucent network;
        (2) documents ATG's business processes in the Facilities-based
        environment; and (3) may make recommendations to improve the efficiency
        and effectiveness of ATG's business operations.

        There may be additional iterations of the IMO as a result of
        opportunities for continuous process improvement during the early stages
        of the Facilities-based environment.

4.      A FUTURE METHOD OF OPERATIONS (FMO). In this phase, the Plan will be
        updated to reflect the changes that are introduced as a result of the
        mechanization of the Order Management function (Project Cabernet).

Page 4      Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   244

1.2 OBJECTIVE OF THE PRESENT METHOD OF OPERATIONS (PMO) PHASE
The intent of this phase is to understand and document ATG's business plans and
strategies for entering the telecommunications market by reselling ILEC voice
services and offering ATG Internet dial-up data services to its customers. This
information will be used in constructing the future state processes in the FMO
phase. The specific Process Flows include Prospecting, Pre-Order, Order
Management, Customer Service, Customer Care/Trouble Management, and Billing.
This valuable information will be used for gap analysis that must be addressed
in the FMO.

1.3   SCOPE
The PMO initiative and this document only pertains to those start-up services
offered for resale and Internet dial-up by ATG in the markets it is entering.
ATG plans to resell certain ILEC services and offer ATG branded Internet dial-up
data services in the three market areas identified for start-up, while the
Lucent switches are being installed and processes and procedures are developed
to begin offering integrated voice and data services in a Facilities-based
environment. The ILEC services that ATG plans to offer for resale during this
start-up phase include POTS lines, business trunks, Centrex services, ISDN
services, Voice Mail services, and Internet (standard dial-up and ISDN
connectivity). During facilities-based operations, ATG be required to continue
to offer voice services via ILEC Unbundled Network Elements (UNEs) often
referred to as Unbundled Loops.

1.4   APPROACH
The PMO was developed using the following approach:

1. IDENTIFY THE START-UP SERVICES AND PRODUCTS TO BE OFFERED

After several key meetings and working sessions with the appropriate ATG
managers it was determined that ATG's start-up offering would be as a reseller
of ILEC and ATG branded Internet Dial-up services to its customers.

2. EXAMINE EXISTING DOCUMENTS, PROCESSES AND DATA

Draft Requirements, Methods, and Procedures developed by AMS and DCI were
reviewed and updated, and ATG Business Plans and Market Selection processes were
reviewed to develop process work flows and analyze the present method of
operation. This analysis provides an assessment of how well the goals and
objectives of ATG, as identified in the BOA are likely to be met.

3.  MEET WITH KEY ATG MANAGERS

The Lucent Team conducted or participated in strategy sessions and meetings with
ATG managers and Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) to discuss plans for customer
service, processing information for Local, Internet and Long Distance services
and merging these procedures for operations usability. Most of the process data
was extracted from information provided by other partners who had previously
developed some ATG operations methods and procedures for use during the voice
resale and dial-up data phase.

Page 5      Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   245

4.  CONDUCT A STRATEGY SESSION WITH THE NRC

Using information collected from the previous steps, a meeting was held with NRC
Managers, to define the procedures and to discuss anticipated results of the NRC
handling the Trouble Management/Customer Care responsibilities.

5.  DEVELOP PROCESS WORK FLOWS

Flows were developed for each of the major processes.

Page 6      Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   246

1.5 PROCESSES MODELED

The following processes were modeled as part of this phase:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Process Name               Process Description
------------               -------------------
<S>                        <C>
Prospecting                Interest ILEC customers in transferring to ATG. and
                           signing up for ATG Internet Dial-up data services.

Pre-Ordering               Assemble ILEC-specific forms and gather credit
                           information about customer to complete customer order
                           package. This also holds true for potential Internet
                           Dial-up data.

Migrate As-is Telephony    Includes entering the order into the ILEC order system
Order                      or order form, working with the ILEC to change the
                           billing information of the customer from the ILEC to
                           ATG, and updating the internal ATG order management
                           and billing systems with the customer's information.

Move Add Change (MAC)      Making changes to a customer's telephony service
Telephony Order            after they  have been migrated to ATG.

ISP Order                  Take an order to establish a customer's ISP service.

Telephony Trouble          Includes referring a telephony trouble report to the
Management                 NRC, monitoring the problem until the customer's
                           problem is resolved, and confirming with the customer
                           that their service has been restored to their
                           satisfaction.

ISP                        Trouble Management Includes referring an ISP trouble
                           report to the NRC, transferring the call to the ATG
                           INOC if necessary and confirming with the customer
                           that their service has been restored to their
                           satisfaction.
</TABLE>

Page 7      Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   247

2    INTRODUCTION

The PMO phase of the Operational Readiness Plan models services and network
operations for the resale to its customers of ILEC services, as is planned for
start-up by ATG in May, 1999. The intent of this phase is to understand and
document ATG's business plans and strategies to perform gap analysis and
evaluate the probable success rate for this market entry. This detail permits:

        -       Review of essential day-to-day service activities to develop key
                performance indicators to be detailed in the FMO.

        -       Identify opportunities for development of additional processes
                and procedures that may be vital to a successful implementation.

        -       Review of the quantity and quality of the staff required, and in
                place, to meet the business needs and the needs of the customer.

        -       Identify the required interactions and information flows between
                ATG corporate, ATG market, NRC services, and AMS services
                affecting end-to-end service delivery.

To proceed with the analysis, the PMO Team used various documents and reference
material supplied by ATG and information collected from interviews with the ATG
executives and subject matter experts. The project team reviewed each of the
following documents to identify executive strategies and key business
perspectives relating to the planned PMO. Similar to the interview
questionnaires, these documents were used as a reference for the documentation
and analysis of key relationships.

2.1   REFERENCES

The following key ATG documents were utilized while gathering information for
the PMO:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                     ATG DOCUMENTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C>
1.  Advanced TelCom Group - Building on Success ... Creating the #1 CLEC in
    Tier 3 & 4 Markets (Presentation)

2.  Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Market Selection Process, 12/14/98
    (Presentation)

3.  ATG Information Technology Plan, January 28, 1999 (Presentation)

4.  ATG High-Level OSS / BSS Project Scope, December 1998

5.  1999 New Market Development Goals

6.  An ATG CSR Perspective -  Customer Management Systems and Procedures

7.  ATG Customer and Line Forecast

8.  ATG - Competitive Local Exchange Carrier Business Functions

9.  ATG Draft v.01 OSS/BSS IT Architecture - Resale Only

10. ATG Draft v.03 OSS/BSS IT Architecture

11. ATG's High Availability Server Architecture Santa Rosa, CA Dec. 1, 1998

12. ATG Product Codes

13. ATG Site Roll-out 12/10/98

14. RESALE SERVICE QUESTIONS FOR ATG

15. DATA EXCHANGE AGREEMENT FOR THE DISTRIBUTION OF INTRALATA MESSAGE DETAIL
    AND/OR THE SETTLEMENT OF INTRALATA MESSAGE REVENUE BETWEEN PACIFIC BELL
    AND .........
</TABLE>

Page 8      Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   248

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                     ATG DOCUMENTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C>
16. Resale User Guide Basic Information and Order Preparation Pacific Bell  Industry
    Operations October 12, 1998

17. Colorado US West Interconnect Agreement

18. Idaho US West Interconnect Agreement

19. Nevada Bell Proposed Interconnect Agreement

20. Oregon US West Interconnect Agreement

21. Washington US West Interconnect Agreement

22. Olympia, Washington Business Plan, 12/8/1998

23. ATG's Packet Switched Services (Presentation)

24. Methods and Procedures developed for ATG's Resale Business.
</TABLE>

2.2   DATA COLLECTION

As discussed in Section 1.4.3, the Lucent PMO Team met with key ATG managers
responsible for implementing the strategies and procedures for the start-up
resale service, to identify and verify existing processes and procedures. After
these processes and procedures were reviewed for completeness, workflow diagrams
were developed for to identify the work activities that must happen at each
step. In addition to this data collection and development, some information
collected by the Lucent BOA Team was also reviewed to complete the data
collection for the PMO. A list of the ATG executives and subject matter experts
interviewed by the BOA Team follows:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
           PERSON               TITLE            COMPANY       FUNCTIONAL AREA          PHONE
           ------               -----            -------       ---------------          -----
<S>    <C>              <C>                    <C>          <C>                    <C>
1      Bruce Peterson   VP Engineering         DCI          Order Management       (206) 447-9620
                                                                                   (425) 269-3426

2      Charlene Curry   Controller             ATG          Finance & Accounting   (707) 535-8998

3      Chris Ward       VP Internet Services   ATG          Internet Network,      (707) 535-8915
                                                            Products & Services

4      Chuck Seefloth   Exec. Dir. Field &     ATG          Voice Network &        (707) 535-8943
                        Engineering                         Field Operations
                        Operations

5      Curt Wheeling    Sr. VP Marketing &     ATG          Voice Product          (707) 535-8935
                        Business Development                Marketing

6      Dan Cruz         VP & Chief Systems     ATG          Enterprise network,    (707) 535-8902
                        Officer                             OSS, BSS, &
                                                            Corporate Operations

7      Dan Fee          Regional VP (CA)       ATG          Sales & Field          (707) 568-3888
                                                            Operations

8      Dave Anderson    Principal              AMS          Billing, mediation,    (703) 227-7546
                                                            & CABS                 (202) 253-5912

9      Dave Henderson   Sr. Principal          AMS          Information            (972) 569-9190
                                                            Technology &
                                                            external interfaces

10     Dean Handy       Dir. Switch            ATG          Switching,             (707) 535-8969
                        Engineering                         mediation, external
                                                            interfaces

11     Gary Hunt        Manager Shared         ATG          Sales, voice           707-535-8945
                        Tenant Services                     products, voice
                                                            service offerings,
                                                            training
</TABLE>

Page 9      Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   249

<TABLE>
<S>    <C>              <C>                    <C>          <C>                    <C>
12     John Harkin      Dir. Internet          ATG          Internet network &     (707) 535-8914
                        Technology                          service delivery
                                                            technology

13     Kath Thomas      VP Regulatory &        ATG          Regulatory Affairs     (707) 535-8999
                        Public Policy

14     Lee Hsaio        Manager Internal       ATG          Internal IT network    (707) 535-8980
                        Information                         (LAN/WAN), servers &
                        Technology                          desktops

15     Luis Aguilar     Exec. Dir. Sales &     ATG          Business               (707) 535-8940
                        Field Operations                    development,
                                                            mergers,
                                                            acquisitions, sales,
                                                            & field operations

16     Mark Ritter      VP New Market          ATG          Expansions &           (703) 421-5249
                        Development                         Acquisitions           (707) 535-8975

17     Mike Black       Sr. VP Sales & Field   ATG          Sales and Field        (520) 571-7185
                        Operations                          Operations             (707) 535-8905

18     Mike Kimsey      Exec. Dir. Customer    ATG          Corporate and Field    (916) 631-1731
                        Service                             Customer Services      (707) 535-8955

19     Ron Wynes        Dir. Transmission      ATG          Network co-location,   (707) 535-8911
                        Engineering                         transmission,
                                                            transport & access

20     Scott Shultis    Manager Internet       ATG          Internet Products &    (707) 535-8916
                        Products & Services                 Services

21     Sheila Botein    Sr. Principal          AMS          Resale requirements,   (650) 508-5332
                                                            methods & procedures

22     Steve Farmiloe   Sales Manager          ATG          Sales                  (707) 568-3888

23     Steve Roth       Regional VP (OR) &     ATG          Sales & Field          (360) 570-1504
                        (WA)                                Operations

24     Tony Rivera      Exec. Dir. Long        ATG          Long distance          (707) 535-8950
                        Distance Services                   products & services

25     Traci Johnson    HR Manager             ATG          Human Resources        (707) 535-8906
</TABLE>

Page 10    Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   250

2.3   ACRONYMS

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
      Acronym                                Description
      -------                                -----------
<S>                   <C>
        AMS           American Management Systems

      ARBOR/BP        Biller Software Product (from Kenan Systems)

        ARS           Action Request System (trouble management software from Remedy
                      Corporation)

        ATG           Advanced TelCom Group, Inc.

        BOA           Business Objective Analysis

        CLEC          Competitive Local Exchange Carrier

        CSC           Customer Service Coordinator

        CSR           Customer Service Representative / Customer Service Record

        DCI           Digital Counterpart Inc. (order entry and tracking system vendor)

        DS1           Transmission facility operating at 1.544 Mbps

        DS3           Transmission facility operating at 45 Mbps

        DSL           Digital Subscriber Line

      eC.Order        Order Entry System (DCI)

        FCC           Federal Communications Commission

        FMO           Future Method of Operations

  256K Frame Relay    A streamlined packet switching protocol
                      designed to provide high-speed frame or packet switching
                      with minimal delay and efficient bandwidth usage

        ILEC          Incumbent Local Exchange Carrier

        IMA           Interconnection Mediation Access (US West)

        INOC          Internet Network Operations Center

        ISDN          Integrated Services Digital Network

      ISDN BRI        ISDN Basic Rate Interface

      ISDN PRI        ISDN Primary Rate Interface

        ISP           Internet Service Provider

        IXC           Inter-eXchange Carrier

       KENAN          Kenan Systems Corporation (biller system vendor)

         LD           Long Distance

        LEX           LSR eXchange System

        LOA           Letter of Agreement / Agency

        LSR           Local Service Request

        MAC           Move, Add, Change

        MACD          Move, Add, Change, Delete

        MAI

        NRC           Network Reliability Center

        OCSR          Outside Customer Service Representative

         OE           Order Entry

        OMS           Order Management Specialist

         OT           Order Tracking

        PBSM          Pacific Bell Service Manager

        PBX           Private Branch Exchange

        PMO           Present Method of Operations

        POS           Point Of Service (Pacific Bell)
</TABLE>

Page 11     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   251

<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
        POTS          Plain Old Telephone Service

        PUC           Public Utility Commission

       Qwest          Branded ATG long distance service provider

       REMEDY         Remedy Corporation (trouble administration/management software)

        SME           Subject Matter Expert

         SR           Sales Representative

        TSA           Telecommunications Service Agreement

        UBL           Unbundled Loops

        UNE           Unbundled Network Element

      VERIGATE        (Pacific Bell)
</TABLE>

Page 12     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   252

3       EXISTING INFRASTRUCTURE

3.1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS

During the resale phase, the following systems have been identified for use by
ATG:

1.      Arbor/BP - a billing system. This system will be supplied by Kenan
        Systems and operated by AMS on a service bureau basis. Arbor/BP will be
        the repository for the ATG product catalog and all customer information
        as well as produce bills.

2.      IMA - This is US West's system for accepting Unbundled Network Element
        (UNE) orders from CLECs.

3.      LEX/Verigate and PBSM - These are Pacific Bell's system's for accepting
        UNE orders from CLECs.

4.      eC.Order - An order entry and order tracking system being developed by
        Digital Counterpart for ATG internally.

5.      ARS - Remedy Corporation software used by the Lucent NRC to assist in
        trouble management.

3.2   SERVICE PROVIDERS

LOCAL TELEPHONY SERVICE

During this phase, ATG will be reselling local telephone service from the ILECs.
For Santa Rosa, CA this will be Pacific Bell, and for Salem, OR and Olympia, WA
this will be US West.

LONG DISTANCE SERVICE

      ATG WILL BE RESELLING LONG-DISTANCE SERVICES FROM QWEST AND WILL BILL FOR
      THESE SERVICES ON AN ATG-BRANDED BILL. QWEST WILL ALSO BE PROVIDING
      ATG-BRANDED TELEPHONE CALLING CARDS.

Page 13     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   253

3.3   NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE

The following diagram represents the high-level infrastructure of the Business
Support Systems to support ATG's business in the Resale and Internet dial-up
phase.

                                  [FLOW CHART]

Page 14     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   254

3.4 SERVICES OFFERED

ATG plans to offer both the resale of ILEC telephony services and the direct
sale of dial-up ISP services in the time period between entry into a market and
the full availability of their own network facilities. Specifically, the
services offered will be:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
        Type                                       Services
        ----                                       --------
<S>                   <C>
Telephony
                      Business Analog Line
                      Digital DID Trunk
                      Centrex
                      Analog PBX Trunk
                      Analog DID Line
                      ISDN BRI
                      ISDN PRI
                      Centrex
                      Long Distance
                      Calling Cards
Internet
                      Personal Advantage Analog or ISDN (2 e-mail boxes)
                      Business Advantage Analog or ISDN (5 e-mail boxes, 5 aliases, 0 IP)
                      LAN-Advantage Analog or ISDN (10 e-mail boxes, 5 aliases, 6 IP)
</TABLE>

In addition the following telephony features will be available. Not all features
are available with all services:

    -   Hunting
    -   3-Way Calling
    -   Speed Calling 30
    -   Block Services
    -   Remote Call Forwarding
    -   Priority Ringing
    -   Call Waiting
    -   Speed Calling 8
    -   Auto Busy Redial
    -   Call Forwarding
    -   Call Block

Page 15     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   255

4       ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE ANALYSIS

4.1 CORPORATE ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE

With ATG offering Local, Long Distance, and Internet services at start-up, many
executives, departments and organizations (functional areas) have been
identified. Other major roles have been identified, although specific job
descriptions have not been developed, nor in some cases, knowledgeable staff
hired to fill these positions. The following organizations exist today in ATG:

-   Marketing and Sales
-   Customer Service
-   Human Resources
-   Financial and Corporate Management
-   Internet Services and Technology
-   Field Operations
-   Regulatory Affairs
-   Business Development
-   Expansions and Acquisitions
-   Collocation and Transport
-   Long Distance
-   Information Technology

ATG CORPORATE ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE

                                  [FLOW CHART]

Page 16     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   256

Marketing

This function analyzes customer's needs and anticipates the products and
services needed to serve customers and potential customers now and in the
future. The objectives of the business plan are to market services using a
city-centric approach, with skilled people to take customers orders and put them
through the system without error. The sales team will call on customers with 4
lines or more and will conduct telemarketing for customers with 1-3 lines.
Another group responsible for sales and marketing is the Shared Tenant
organization who will be targeting office parks and business complexes. This
team must know the products, be well trained and possess outstanding customer
skills.

Internet Services and Technology

This group will build the Internet backbone and server complex and provide all
Internet access services. The objective is to be a top quality, leading edge
Internet provider becoming an early adopter and provider of new technology
services.

Long Distance

This function manages the Long Distance Services, negotiating contracts,
negotiating with vendors, monitoring service levels and providing high quality
LD service.

Regulatory Affairs

These functions include all interaction required from a regulatory perspective
of the FCC and PUC, as well as contract agreements and escalation problems with
ILECs.

Financial and Corporate Management

This function is responsible for all the financial and accounting needs of the
business. These include:

        - Purchasing
        - Fixed asset management
        - Financial Reporting
        - Billing, credit and collections policies
        - Matching revenue to billing and to costs
        - Taxes

Customer Service

There will be a centralized organization that will ensure standardization of
procedures, sales forms, and policies for all Branches. Additionally, there will
be a customer service organization in each branch. This organization will
include customer service representatives and an order management group to ensure
intervals are met as well as customer expectations, monitor billing, collections
and interface with the NRC for trouble management.

Page 17     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   257

Field Operations

These functions include engineering and construction of the transport and
switched networks. This group is responsible for new installations, maintenance,
product selection & building lease agreements.

Expansions and Acquisitions

The function of this organization is to identify and evaluate all appropriate
Tier 3 markets and determine the appropriate ones for entry. This determination
is based on criteria including size of city, competition already in place, city
clustering capabilities, fiber in place, etc. A six-step process is in place for
deciding on a market before submitting the recommendation for Board approval.

Business Development

The function of this organization is to develop strategies to interconnect
cities, connect markets, develop concepts for moving from a resale CLEC to a
facilities CLEC, pursue revenue opportunities and generally grow all markets.

Systems

This organization is responsible for the selection and acquisition of strategic
partners to supply information systems to support ATG's business.

Page 18     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   258

4.2 CURRENT BRANCH ORGANIZATION

The current ATG organization places the responsibility for operational success
on these organizations within each region.

                                  [FLOW CHART]

4.2.1   SPECIFIC JOB RESPONSIBILITIES

The following specific job responsibilities have been identified within each
branch:

4.2.1.1  SALES ORGANIZATION

ACCOUNT REPRESENTATIVE

The Account Representative (AR) is the initial point of interaction between ATG
and the customer. The AR will be given a list of all businesses in their
territory and will visit all of them personally. The Sales Representative
reports to the Sales Manager in each Branch. Specific responsibilities include:

- Inform the customer about ATG's products and services

- Obtain the customer's signature on the LOA

- Obtain customer's signature on TSA

- Notify customer if deposit is required

Page 19     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   259

- Act as primary customer interface

SALES ADMINISTRATOR

The Sales Administrator reports to the Sales Manager in each Branch. Their
primary responsibility is to support the sales process. Specific
responsibilities include:

- Validates that ATG can provide same services as ILEC

- Prepares TSA

- Performs Credit Check

- Determines if Deposit is required

- Assembles Order Package

SALES ENGINEER

The Sales Engineer reports to the Sales Manager in each Branch. Their primary
responsibility is to provide technical support to the sales process. Specific
responsibilities include:

-   Validate that the order is technically feasible and complete
-   Validate with Operations Manager that the services being offered within the
    order are being delivered via the most appropriate and cost effective
    solution
-   Answer technical questions for a customer

4.2.1.2  OPERATIONS ORGANIZATION

The Operations Organization does not play a role in the resale environment.

4.2.1.3  CUSTOMER SERVICE ORGANIZATION

CUSTOMER SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE (CSR)

The CSR reports to the Customer Service Manager in each Branch. One of their
responsibilities is the receipt & review of the Order package from the Sales
Group. The CSR then needs to insure that the cover sheet containing the
authorization signatures is present from the Sales Manager and from the Customer
Service Manager.

One major function will be to answer incoming phone calls from the outside
world, primarily from the Customers. These calls may require the Soft handoff to
the NRC for trouble resolution. Other responsibilities include:

-   Verify that the order packages contains the required forms for the
    appropriate order type and service ordered.
-   Verify all information is correct & that all required fields on the forms
    are completed.
-   Note missing, incomplete or incorrect information.
-   Return the package to the Sales Group if there are any discrepancies that
    can not be easily resolved by simple means. (phone call, etc)
-   Forward-approved order packages to the Order Management Specialist.
-   Interact with the Sales Group & the CSC.

Page 20     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   260

CUSTOMER SERVICE COORDINATOR (CSC)

The CSC reports to the Customer Service Manager in each Branch. The CSC' primary
task is to create the inputs for the Order Entry System (OE) after receiving the
order package from the CSR. Other responsibilities include:

-   After the entry of the appropriate forms, the CSC would start the tracking
    process of the orders utilizing the Order Tracking System (OT).

-   The CSC may be required at times to manually prepare the forms & fax to the
    ILEC, the ISP, or to Qwest.

-   The CSC will make the original entry (MAI) into the Arbor BP system and any
    updates to that system required due to additional orders. (MAC)

-   The CSC would be the recipient of any rejected order due to errors after the
    order was submitted to the ILEC.

-   Inform the Outside CSR that the order has been completed by the ILEC so that
    notification can be given to the Customer.

4.3   OUTSOURCED OPERATIONS

The following operations are outsourced in the Resale timeframe:

        -  Trouble Management
        -  Billing Operations

4.3.1   TROUBLE MANAGEMENT

Lucent Technologies Network Reliability Center (NRC) will be performing trouble
management functions for ATG on an outsourced basis. This will include the
following activities:

        -  Taking customer trouble calls for telephony and ISP service
        -  Provide 1st level support only for ISP calls (2nd level calls
           transferred to Internet Network Operations Center (INOC) for
           resolution)
        - Case management for all telephony calls (Interface with ILECs and LD
          carriers to resolve problem)
        - Enter all trouble calls into Remedy ARS system

4.3.2   BILLING OPERATIONS

American Management Systems (AMS) is performing billing operations for ATG on an
outsourced basis. This will include the following activities:

      - Collection of call detail records from the ILECs and Qwest
      - Maintenance of the product catalog in Arbor BP
      - Processing of customer payments through the lock box
      - Running bill production
      - Bill verification
      - Sending bills to the customer

Page 21     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   261

4.4 ORGANIZATIONAL RECOMMENDATIONS

ROLES OF CENTRALIZED AND LOCAL ORGANIZATIONS

In the current organization, both the customer service and field support
organizations in each region report up through the general manager. If this
structure is to be maintained then the corporate customer service and field
support organizations must still play a significant role in the management of
these groups (dotted line responsibility). It is recommended that the corporate
organizations play a policy making and quality assurance role with respect to
the local organizations. Specifically:

-  Establishing policies and procedures
-  Training
-  Establishing job descriptions and levels
-  Determining metrics and measurement criteria
-  Evaluation of effectiveness of current processes
-  Establishing escalation scenarios

If ATG is to successfully expand into a large number of markets, there must be a
high degree of standardization. This will make entry into these markets much
smoother. This, of course, must be balanced against the need to make adjustments
for local conditions.

CUSTOMER ADVOCATE / OPERATIONS MANAGER

The day-to-day operations of ATG are spread out over a number of organizations
and executive responsibilities. It is important to have a single individual
responsible for operations as opposed to policy-making and business development.
This person's primary responsibility would be to ensure customer satisfaction
from the initial sales visit through establishment of service and including
ongoing contact such as receiving bills, trouble calls and customer service
activity.

VENDOR MANAGEMENT

Since ATG has chosen to outsource major portions of their operations, Vendor
Management becomes even more important than usual. A manager should be appointed
to manage the ongoing relationship with major vendors, especially Lucent, AMS
and DCI.

ATG PROJECT MANAGERS

ATG has outsourced the project management role to its vendors for both the
Resale and Facilities phases of the project. These endeavors are so important to
ATG that the person in charge should be a key ATG executive. Progress in these
areas may have suffered because close ATG oversight was not available.

LACK OF RESOURCES

It is part of ATG's business philosophy not to build a vast internal
organization, hence the outsourcing of large portions of the business to Lucent
and ATG. Also, since there is no revenue currently flowing into the company it
is understandable that ATG would want to keep costs down. However, in almost all
areas of the organization there appears to be insufficient staff to

Page 22     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   262

perform the work at hand, or to handle the potential level of business that is
anticipated. This has been a contributing factor to missing deadlines and
delaying the start of business.

If the Internet business is successful, the Internet Network Operations Center
(INOC) will be severely understaffed. If either the Internet or Resale
businesses are successful, then the local branches will find themselves severely
pressed to meet customer commitments. If the business is successful additional
resources will need to be hired anyway. Hiring sooner rather than later will
enhance ATG's chances of providing excellent customer service. Given the
difficulty of hiring qualified staff, it is better to be out in front of this
issue.

Building a telephone and an Internet company from scratch is a complex
operation. It will be difficult to achieve successfully without the right type
and number of resources.

Page 23     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   263

5       PROCESS FLOWS

This following section documents the PMO process flows for those services and
processes that have been identified as being needed to provide the resale of
ILEC services. The process flows modeled are:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Process Name               Process Description
------------               -------------------
<S>                        <C>
Prospecting                Interest ILEC customers in transferring to ATG.

Pre-Ordering               Assemble ILEC-specific forms and gather credit
                           information about customer to complete customer order
                           package.

Migrate As-is Telephony    Includes entering the order into the ILEC order system or
Order                      order form, working with the ILEC to change the billing
                           information of the customer from the ILEC to ATG, and
                           updating the internal ATG order management and
                           billing systems with the customer's information.

Move Add Change Delete     Making changes to a customer's telephony service after they
(MACD) Telephony Order     have been migrated to ATG.

ISP Order                  Take an order to establish a customer's ISP service.

Telephony Trouble          Includes referring a telephony trouble report to the NRC,
Management                 monitoring the problem until the customer's problem is
                           resolved, and confirming with the customer that their
                           service has been restored to their satisfaction.

ISP Trouble Management     Includes referring an ISP trouble report to the NRC,
                           transferring the call to the ATG INOC if necessary
                           and confirming with the customer that their service
                           has been restored to their satisfaction.
</TABLE>

These process flows are not a comprehensive list of all business processes
performed by ATG. The information contained in these flows will be updated in
the Future Method of Operations (FMO) phase to reflect the changes necessary to
operate during the conversion to the facilities phase.

NOTE: WHEN THESE FLOWS WERE DESIGNED IT WAS ASSUMED THAT EC.ORDER WOULD BE IN
PLACE. IT WAS DETERMINED AT LAUNCH DATE THAT eC.ORDER WOULD NOT BE DEPLOYED FOR
THE TIME BEING. CONSEQUENTLY, ANY OPERATIONS DESCRIBED AS BEING PERFORMED BY
EC.ORDER IN THESE FLOWS IS BEING DONE MANUALLY TODAY.

Page 24     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   264

5.1     PROSPECTING

1.      OBTAINS SIGNATURE

The Sales Representative obtains Prospect's signature on Part 1 of the LOA to
request a copy of the Customer Service Record from ILEC.

2.      OBTAIN ILEC INVOICE

The Sales Representative requests a copy of the Prospect's ILEC invoice to
determine what services the Prospect is being billed for by the ILEC.

3.      CUSTOMER ACCEPTS OFFER

The Sales Representative compares the Prospect's invoice with the ATG list of
services available for resale.

4.      OBTAIN BILLING INFORMATION

The Sales Representative asks the Prospect for his/her billing information and
enters on the ATG Subscriber Information form.

5.      PROVIDE LOA & FORMS

The Sales Representative provides Part I and Part II, of the Letter of Agency
(LOA), the Prospect's invoice, and the ATG Subscriber Form to the Sales
Administrator.

6.      RETRIEVE CSR

The Sales Administrator retrieves the Customer Service Record (CSR) from the
ILEC system.

7.      VERIFIES INVOICE AGAINST CSR

The Sales Administrator reviews the Prospect's invoice to the ILEC CSR to
determine if the USOCs and FIDs on the CSR match those on the Prospect's
invoice.

8.      PREPARES & SENDS MIGRATE ORDER PACKAGE

The Sales Administrator prepares the Migrate Order Package & Sends to the Sales
Representative for obtaining the Customers Signature.

9.      OBTAIN CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

The Sales Representative obtains the Prospect's signature on the Order Package,
which concludes the Prospecting process.

Page 25     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   265

                                  [FLOW CHART]

Page 26     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   266

5.2     PRE-ORDER

1.  OBTAIN AND PRINT CUSTOMER'S CREDIT REPORT

The Sales Administrator obtains and prints the Dun and Bradstreet Credit Report
and checks the credit score. If there is no D&B, the Sales Administrator obtains
a Credit Score from other information provided by the customer.

2.  APPLY RISK MITIGATION

The Sales Administrator (SA) applies the risk mitigation strategy to calculate
the necessary deposit required by the customer. The SA compares the credit score
to the ATG Deposit Matrix and determines the amount of the deposit. If the SA
has no credit score information, he/she uses the worst case scenario from the
deposit matrix.

3.  DETERMINE DEPOSIT REQUIRED

The SA reviews the credit information and determines the deposit required from
the customer.

4.  NOTIFY ACCOUNT REP. TO CONTACT CUSTOMER

The SA notifies the Account Representative that a deposit is required and the
amount of the deposit.

5.  NOTIFIES CUSTOMER OF DEPOSIT REQUIRED

The Account Representative notifies the Customer of the amount of deposit.

6.  COLLECT DEPOSIT

The Account Representative collects the deposit from the Customer.

7.  ASSEMBLE ORDER PACKAGE

After receipt of the deposit from the Customer, the SA assembles the order
package. The order package includes:

-  Telecommunications Service Agreement (TSA) signed properly
-  Completed Letter of Agreement (LOA) with appropriate sections initialed
-  Printed copy of Dun & Bradstreet Report
-  Printed copy of the CSR
-  Credit Bureau Score reflecting the deposit amount required (if applicable)
-  Deposit payment from Customer
-  Sales Package with applicable product-specific information and billing forms.

8.  OBTAINS APPROVAL

The Sales Administrator contacts the Sales Manager and obtains his/her approval
and signature on the sales package.

Page 27     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   267

9.  APPROVES AND FORWARDS

The Sales Manager approves the Order Package and forwards to Order Management.

10. FORWARD ORDER PACKAGE TO ORDER MANAGEMENT

The Sales Administrator passes the complete order package to Order Management.
This completes the Pre-Order process.

Page 28     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   268

                                  [FLOW CHART]

Page 29     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary

<PAGE>   269

5.3     ORDER MANAGEMENT FOR MIGRATE AS IS ORDERS

1.      RECEIVE MIGRATE ORDER PACKAGE

The Customer Service Representative (CSR) receives and reviews the completed
order package from the Sales Group and sends to the Order Management Specialist
(CSC).

2.      OCSR ASSIGNED

Assign Outside Customer Service Representative.

3.      INPUTS TO eC.ORDER SYSTEM

The CSC completes and submits the service order forms into the eC.Order System.

4.      RETRIEVES eC.ORDER INFORMATION

The CSC retrieves the completed order forms and prepares the necessary forms for
submittal to the ILEC.

5.      SUBMITS FORMS TO ILEC

The CSC submits the forms to the ILEC using the appropriate ILEC OSS.

6.      TRACK AND POST STATUS IN eC.ORDER

The ILEC issues the Firm Order Completion (FOC) with the order Due Date and
other related pertinent information. The CSC updates and posts order status and
other pertinent information in the eC.Order System.

7.      ADD CUSTOMER TO ARBOR BP

The CSC receives completion notification and posts the updated information in
the eC.Order system. The CSC enters the customer record information the Arbor BP
system. The customer billing is activated.

8.      NOTIFY OUTSIDE CUSTOMER SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE (OCSR)

The CSC notifies the OCSR of the order completion.

9.      OCSR NOTIFIES CUSTOMER

The OCSR notifies the customer the order activity is completed.

10.     OCSR DELIVERS FIRST BILL

The OCSR hand delivers the first bill to the customer.

Page 30     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   270

                                  [FLOW CHART]

Page 31     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   271

5.4 ORDER MANAGEMENT FOR MOVE/ADD/CHANGE ORDERS

1.  RECEIVE MAC ORDER PACKAGE

The Customer Service Representative (CSR) receives and reviews the completed
order package from the Sales Group and sends to the Order Management Specialist
(CSC).

2.  INPUTS TO eC.ORDER SYSTEM

The CSC completes and submits the service order forms into the eC.Order System.
The eC.Order System reformats the information into ILEC format.

3.  RETRIEVES eC.ORDER INFORMATION

The CSC retrieves the completed order forms and prepares the necessary forms for
submittal to the ILEC.

4.  SUBMITS FORMS TO ILEC

The CSC submits the forms to the ILEC using the appropriate ILEC OSS. The ILEC
receives and reviews the submitted orders for correctness and makes any
appropriate corrections. The ILEC issues the Firm Order Completion (FOC) with
the order Due Date and other related pertinent information.

5.  TRACK AND POST STATUS IN eC.ORDER

The CSC updates and posts order status and other pertinent information in the
eC.Order System.

6.  UPDATE RECORD IN ARBOR BP

The CSC receives completion notification and posts the updated information in
the eC.Order system. The CSC enters the customer record information in the Arbor
BP system. The customer is billed for the move/add/change activity on their
bill.

7.  NOTIFY OUTSIDE CUSTOMER SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE (OCSR)

The CSC notifies the OCSR of the order completion.

8.  OCSR NOTIFIES CUSTOMER

The OCSR notifies the customer the order activity is completed.

Page 32     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   272

                                  [FLOW CHART]

Page 33     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary

<PAGE>   273

5.5 ISP ORDER MANAGEMENT

1.      COMPLETES TSA & ATTACHMENT

If the customer is ordering internet service with telephony the required sales
forms should be filled out at the customer's site and submitted via the normal
process.

2.      FORWARDS TO OM / CSR

The sales organization submits the completed package to Customer Service.

3.      COMPLETES TSA, OBTAINS EMAIL INFO

If the customer is ordering internet service alone a customer signature and D&B
credit score are not required. A TSA and Internet Sales Form are required.

4.      COMPLETES & CONFIRMS AVAILABILITY

The Order Management Specialist determines if the customer's requested email
address is available. If not, they contact the customer to get a new email
address.

5.      ENTERS ORDER

The order is entered into eC.Order system.

6.      ENTERS ORDER FOR BILLING

The CSC prints the Arbor data entry forms from the eC.Order system and enters
the information into Arbor/BP.

7.      FORWARDS CD AND LETTER

An installation CD and welcome letter is sent to the customer

Page 34     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   274

                                  [FLOW CHART]

Page 35     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary

<PAGE>   275

5.6 TELEPHONY TROUBLE MANAGEMENT

1.      RECEIVES REPAIR REPORT

Receive trouble call from subscriber. Determine nature of problem. Verify
subscriber's records to confirm ATG subscriber

2.      ONLINE TRANSFER TO THE NRC

After confirming ATG subscriber, On-line transfer to NRC stating subscriber's
name, telephone number and describing problem. Note subscriber's account of call
and referral date and time

3.      RECEIVES REPAIR REPORT

Receive call as on-line transfer from Customer Service Representative or from
ATG subscriber. Access subscriber's records. Verify subscriber is an ATG
customer.

4.      CREATES TICKET IN REMEDY

Create Remedy ticket

5.      REFERS TICKET TO ILEC/LD CARRIER

Refer repair problem to ILEC/LD Carrier. Follow up to assure repaired within
approved intervals. The ILEC will confirm receipt of repair report with NRC &
perform testing and diagnostics. The ILEC will dispatch or exercise resolution
methods, as appropriate & notify the NRC of resolution.

6.      RECEIVE DAILY LOG

The NRC will send a log listing calls received, customer name, and repair
problem to CSR each morning.

7.      RECEIVES NOTIFICATION

The NRC will receive notification from ILEC of resolution.

8.      CALLS END USER TO CONFIRM RESOLUTION

Call subscriber and confirm problem is resolved.

9.      NOTIFIES CSR OF RESOLUTION

The NRC will notify Customer Service Representative with resolution information.
Note daily report with resolution and date and time ticket closed. Note
resolution on Remedy ticket and close ticket.

10.     NOTES CUSTOMER RECORDS

Page 36     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   276

Receive daily log from NRC listing calls received, customer name, and repair
problem each morning. Receive notification from NRC that problem is resolved.
Note subscriber's records of resolution.

Page 37     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   277

                                  [FLOW CHART]

Page 38     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   278

5.7 ISP TROUBLE MANAGEMENT

1.      RECEIVES REPORT AND VALIDATES CUSTOMER

Receives ISP trouble repair call from customer. Validates that customer calling,
is ATG's ISP customer. Uses an ATG supplied ISP script and qualifies that there
is a legitimate ISP problem.

2.      WARM TRANSFERS TO ISP TECHNICAL GROUP

Warm transfers the customer to the ISP Technical Group providing the customer
record information (customer's name, telephone number, address) and nature of
the ISP problem.

3.      RECEIVES REPORT, QUANTIFIES AND VALIDATES

Receives out of hours or overflow ISP trouble repair calls from ISP customer.
Validates that customer calling is ATG's ISP customer. Uses an ATG supplied ISP
script and qualifies that there is a legitimate ISP problem.

4.      CREATES REMEDY TICKET

Creates Remedy ticket

5.      RESOLVES OR FORWARDS TO ISP GROUP

Resolves problem if able, or forwards it to ATG ISP Technical Group. For calls
received out of hours, sends an activity list to the ISP Technical Group in the
morning.

6.      RECEIVES OR CREATES TROUBLE TICKET

Receives trouble ticket from NRC or creates one in ATG's Remedy for customers
transferred by the CSR.

7.      UPDATES REMEDY

Updates and closes ticket in Remedy when trouble is resolved.

8.      RESOLVES AND UPDATES REMEDY

Resolves ISP problem, updates and closes ticket in Remedy when fixed.

9.      RECEIVES NOTIFICATION

Receives notification from NRC and/or ISP Technical group that the trouble has
been resolved and closed.

Page 39     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   279

10.     CALLS CUSTOMER TO CONFIRM AND INFORM

Calls ISP customer to inform them that the trouble is fixed and to confirm that
they agree, and are satisfied.

Page 40     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   280

                                  [FLOW CHART]

Page 41     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary
<PAGE>   281

Page 42     Advanced TelCom Group, Inc. - Confidential and Proprietary

Source: [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00009-of-00352.parquet"}, [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00009-of-00352.parquet"}]]